Home

Chapter 1 EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Startup Guide

1. Key Change m f Description common window Saare aee e eee to change the source Activate after button is released of common window 9 Change full screen window G Change common window For exam ple Display popup window change the common window from window 4 to window 20 Window no 20 Window 020 In manu Function Properties Option Function Properties select Display Object ID whether or not to Display Common Display Common Window objects on Base Windows Window objects on Base Windows when editing project Using function key to make shape library abject This can avoid Automatic save and compile when download and simulate overlapping objects on base window with objects on common window 79 Lib WE NTEK Window Operations 6 1 4 System Message Window Windows No 5 6 7 8 are the default System Message Windows Window No 5 PLC Response When the communication between PLC and HMI is disconnected this message window will pop up automatically right on the base window opened previously m PLC no response window can be set not to pop up using system reserved Nore J registers Please refer to Chapter 22 System Reserved Words amp Bits Window No 6 HMI Connection When failing to connect HMI with remote HMI this message window will pop up automa
2. System Parameter Settings Eg Font m Extended Memory ll Printen Backup Server Device Model Gensal SystemsSetting Security Device list Mo Mame Location Device type Interace KF Proto Local HMI Local HMI Local MT60561 320 x Disable Nia al Local Server MODBUS RTU Device 11 acal Free Protocol COMI 1 9200 E 8 15 Device Properties Name MODBUS RTU Device CHMI SPLE Location Local s Settings Pic tyne Free Protocol gt Y 1 00 FREE_PROTOCOL so PLE IJF RS 232 s COM COM1 19200 E 8 1 Settings The device is named MODBUS RTU Device The port attribute depends on the setting of this device the current setting is 19200 E 8 1 Below is an example of executing an action of writing single coil SET ON to a MODBUS device macro_command main char command 32 short address checksum FILL command 0 0 32 command initialization command 0 Ox1 station no command 1 Ox5 function code Write Single Coil 424 Ly WE NTEK Description L O WEINTEK ee e eeseSMarcrco Reference address 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 command 4 Oxff force bit on command 5 CRC command 0 checksum 6 LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7 send out a Write Single Coil command OUTPORT command 0 MODBU
3. System Parameter Settings x Device Model General System Setting Secwity Font Extended Memory PrinteBackup Server e Mail Recipes Enable e Mail function Use existing contact settings on HMI SM TP settings Server smtp u mail com ty Port 95 S User name eM T3000 weintek com Password eke Confim Fasword RAA Log on vang Secure Password Authentication PEA Use the following type of encrypted connection 1 sender information Name Use HMI name eM T3000 Maal address eMT3000 weintek com Open contact settings 72 Ly WE NTEK System Parameter Settings Contacts list Contact Name Mail Addres alice alice Gyemtek com patrick patick wemtek com eM T3000 eM T3000 yemtek com sattmge Deserpton SMTP settings Sender Information Open Contact Settings Mo of groups 1 Group information Contact Name Mail Address alice alice Owemtek com patrick patick wemtek com el T3000 eM T3000 yemtek com Server Set SMTP Server Port Set communication port User name Set e mail address Password Set e mail password Confirm Password Confirm e mail password Log on using Secure Password Authentication SPA Decide whether SPA is needed when login e mail Use the following type of encrypted connection Decide whether the encrypted connections TLS SSL are needed when sending e mail Name
4. Address f System tag Sddress format DODDO range A 11999 Index register OK Cancel Attribute Set style Set the operation mode The available modes for selection are listed as follows 157 Wa WE NTEK Objects E Write constant value Set constant function When the operation is activated the Set value will be written into the word device The constants format 16 bit BCD 32 bit BCD depends on the format of Write address Attabute Set Style Write constant value set value Oo E Increment value JOG Increase value function When the operation is activated the Inc value will be added to the value of the word device and the result won t exceed the value Upper limit Attribute Set Style Increment value JOG a Inc value 0 Upper limit 10 I E Decrement Value JOG Decrease value function When the operation is activated the Dec value will be subtracted from the value of the word device and the result won t go less than the value Bottom limit Attribute Set Style Decrement value JOG v Dec value 1 Bottom limit gt 10 E Press and hold increment JOG Press and hold increment function When the touch and hold gets longer than the time set in JOG delay the value of the word device will be added by the value set in Inc value at the speed set in JOG speed and the result won t exceed the
5. Bar width ratio 3 Bar colorstvle Frame Bar Target mdicator Target value dlam indicators Low lirat Low color Targetalamnzerolspan dynamic address Enable PLL name o l I Setting Address Fi 16 bit Unsigned Attribute Type There are Normal and Offset for selection When select Offset there must be a original value for reference Please refer the illustration below Athibute Type P Direction Up Zero U span 10 Origin 5 Bar width ratio 3 100 _ Direction To select the bar graph direction and there are Up Down Right and Left for selection 222 Zero Span The filled bar percentage can be calculated with the following formula The filled bar percentage Register value Zero Span Zero 100 When select Offset if Register value Zero gt 0 the bar will fill up from origin setting if Register value Zero lt 0 the bar will fill up but down side from origin setting For example Origin 5 Span 10 Zero O and use different value in read address it will display as illustration below When read address value is 4 high limit 10 When read address value is 8 high limit 10 8
6. A Omermnber Import Export Reload l sawe Exit Help In Name of New Data Type input Module Defined Name 698 Lb WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names Click Paste in dialogue box press Ctrl V to paste Name and Data Type fe RSLogix 5000 L32E 1769 L32E 18 11 Data Type AB 1769_DI16 1 0 EH File Edit View Search Losec Communcatons Tools Window Help acu 4 C ana RR aa e Offline 5 E RUN mmm G Par eror a No Forces r a f BAT No Edits a E io ali Controller Organizer Unscheduled Programs Motion Groups Name AB 1759_DI16 1 0 3 Ungrouped Axes Add On Instore tions Description G E Data Types a User Detined La Strings Ca Add Cn Detined a Predefined SS Module Defined 4B1769_D1161 0 AB1769_D1321 0 Members Data Type Size amp b 4B1769_D016 C 0 Ta She Ea AB 1769_D0161 0 age fo P z y 4B1769_D016 0 0 z nay AB 1769_D032 C0 AB 1769_D0321 0 AB 1769_D032 0 0 AB 1769_IF16 C0 AB 1769_IF161 0 E AB 1769_IF16 0 0 Trends 5 8 rO Configuration E zii Backplane CompactLosix System Ai 1769 L32E L32E Sioctire Editor H Data Types a User Defined Name AB 1769_DI16 1 0 i Strings Predefined Description i Module Defined AB 1769 D610 ABT 769 DIs2 1 0 ABT 769 DO1L6 0 0 AB 1769 Dose 1030 AB 1769 _IFI amp NO AB Embedded IG16F c 0 AB Embedded IQ16F 1 0 AB Embedded OB16 c 0 AB Embedded OB16 1 0 AB Embed
7. Local IP address Server IP address Subnetwork mask Default route IP address PLC time out constant sec 3 0 vy PLC block pack 3 v fe PLC Address iew Baic __ M Eng l IT J WontMi 1 Word PLC I7 Pam Word Lc EF Jid e L a i w 0 CC DWord PLC PCV2 F Wod LC SD W WonlMn RW se OEM PRET PEE Gw BHM RB adh SCS eh i o RW ddd a fo ma B a E S ier i LB ee ee Ee eg Won Me RW add 641 Lb WE NTEK Multi HMI Intercommunication Master Slave Mode 3 Connect COM ports RS232 of each HMI the communication is then enabled m There will always be a PLC selected in EB500 system parameter settings in this case even to read write EB Pro HMI Local Data only the ID of the selected PLC in EB500 system parameters must also be filled in EBPro parameter 1 m When using S 200 S7 300 drivers since in EB500 the high and low bytes are sent in reverse order this will cause MT500 to misread EBPro Local data Device address Bit Word EB500 Range RW_Bit dddd 0 4095 h 0 f B B MsLB LB dddd 0 9999 _ 642 p WE NTEK Pass Through Function Chapter 29 Pass Through Function The pass through function allows the PC application to control PLC via HMI In this case the HMI acts as a converter The pass through function provides two mod
8. Extended Memory is numbered from EMO to EM9 Method to use extended memory is similar to that of other device type i e LW or RW address Users can simply select from Device type list while adding a new object Size of each extended memory is up to 2G word Device type 69 Ly WE NTEK System Parameter Settings Data in extended memory is stored in SD card USB disk in a form of a file The files in extended memory EMO EM9 are entitled as em0 emi em9 emi Users can use RecipeEditor exe to open the file and edit the data in the extended memory Data in extended memory will not be erased when power is cut which means next time when user start HMI again data in extended memory remains just the same before power off This is similar to Recipe data EW RW_A What is different is that users can select where they want to save the data SD card USB disk To read data in extended memory from a removed device the content of data will be viewed as 0 if users would like to write data to a removed device the PLC no response message will appear in HMI EasyBuilder Pro supports hot swapping function for SD card and USB devices Users can insert or remove the device for extended memory without cutting the power With this function users can update or take data in extended memory 70 WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 8 Printer Backup Server Parameters in Printer Backup Server tab are for
9. Address Sette on individual day tart E Cahn Mon Tue Wen Thu Fr End Enable termination action L OK Cancel Constant Address Select the method to set the start time and end time e Constant Specifies a fixed time and day e Address The start end time is retrieved from the device address at on line operation 324 Ly WE NTEK Objects Setting on individual day e Enable Start time and end time can be set in different day of week There is only one start time and one end time during the week You have to set both start time and end time with this mode Start action Termination action 09 00 17 00 Tuesday NOTE 1 You must enter settings for the Start Time and End Time 2 You cannot set the Start Time and End Time to the exact same day and time e Disable A schedule that is 1 day Start and End times are within 24 hours can be entered Multiple Start and End days can be selected You can perform actions at the same time on multiple days To specify an End Time you must select Enable termination Start action Termination action 09 00 17 00 i Monday Tuesday action NOTE e You cannot set the Start Time and End Time to the exact same day and time e The time scheduler is for one day only so if the End Time is earlier than the Start Time the operation of End Time will be perform
10. connected to HMI B Address x Be J Write after button is released Attribute _ Set style Set ON 547 Ligh WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits Chapter 22 System Reserved Words Bits some Local Words and Local Bits are reserved for system usage These registers are all with different functions described below Address Tag Library Customized System No Address tag name LE initialized as OM Local HMI Addyess type Addres LB 3000 LE 9001 LE 3011 LE 9021 E a 3 55 initialized as ON LB 9002 LB 9003 LB 9004 LB 9005 LB 9006 LB 9007 LB 9008 LB 9009 LB 9010 data upload indicator LB 9012 LB 9013 LB 901 4 LB 9015 LB 9016 LEB 9017 LB 9018 LB 9019 LB 9020 initialized as ON initialized as ON initialized as OH initialized as ON initialized as ON initialized as OH initialized as ON initialized as ON data download indicator data downloadupload indicator FS window control hide OM shawl OFFI FS button contral hide ON show OFF FS windowbutton contral hide ON i showfQFF status i on when a client connecte to this HMI disable write back in PLC control s change window disable mouse cursor set ON disable enable buzzer show set ON hide set OFF system setting bar reset curent event log set OM Users can import MT500 tag to represent the address Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HM
11. 13 Delete is available when at least one task is selected 625 Lib WE NTEK EasyPrinter 14 On Download Progress Window users can select the mode to show download progress by clicking the header of the progress column Please see the following illustration Progr Percentage Display Data Length Display 15 EasyPrinter can reserve up to 10 000 messages on Message Window If a new message comes in the oldest message will be deleted Menu gt Options To show or hide toolbars Status Bar To show or hide the status bar Settings Configuration for EasyPrinter Please refer to the following illustrations General eM T3xxx Remote Printer Server Settings x Server Port number of the server socket User name Max length 12 characters Password Max length 12 characters Nammge Convention for HMI Folder when writing files Use IF addres Use HMI name assign HMI name by L W9032 L 90395 Frefix Ex IP_192 168 1 25 Properties 626 Lib WE NTEK EasyPrinter e Server gt Port number of the server socket Set the Ethernet socket number for HMI to connect to The range goes from 1 to 65535 and 8005 is the default value e Server gt User name amp Password Set the user name and password to restrict that only authorized HMI can send requests to EasyPrinter e Naming Convention for HMI Folder EasyPrinter creates different folders to store files e g hardcopy bitmap files backu
12. Auto repeat When finish playing a video file the system will automatically play next video Attribute e ne video 1 gt video 2 gt gt video n gt video Background ee the background color of the object Normally the format of the above registers is 16 unsigned integer If a 32 bit word device is chosen as the control address only 0 15 bits are effective Users should zero the 16 31 bits Control command a Play index file Command 1 Parameter 1 file index Parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 The files are sorted with file name in ascending order the file index 0 is for to the first file and son on 2 If itis unable to scan file it will set status bit 8 to ON 3 If check Auto repeat it will automatically play the next file after finish b Play previous file Command Parameter 1 ignore set 0 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 If the file index is previously O it will re play the same video from the start 2 If it is unable to search the right file it will set status bit 8 to ON 3 If check Auto repeat it will automatically play the next file after finish c Play next file Command 3 Parameter 1 ignore set 0 parameter 2 ignore set 0 301 L WE NTEK Objects 1 If there is no next video file it will play the first index 0 file 2 If it is unable to search the right file it will set status bit 8 to ON 3 If check Auto repeat i
13. Location Device type Interface iF Protocol Local eMT3105 800 x Disable N A Local PLC 1 Mitsubishi FXOs Mitsubishi FX0s COM 1 9600 E 7 1 RS4854W Y Cancel 27 E WE NTEK Create an EasyBuilder Pro Project Now let s add a new object 1 Click on the object icon Toggle Switch Object 2 Set correct parameters E New Toggle Switch Object General Security Shape Label Read address PLO name Mitsubishi FXOs FXOn Fxis FxiniFR2 wt Setting Invert signal write address PLC name Mitsubishi Fx0s FXOn FXis FeiniFx2 w Setting write when button is released Attribute Switch style Set OFF w EasyBuilder Pro MTP2 10 WINDOW 010 Windows Object list Y HMI Connection Password Restriction Storage Space Insufficient woo Int amp 10 WINDOW 010 11 RAAAWAABSe Ss OS amp amp See PMORE Ake SHE te Rif Nex c OFO ea A oe i 0 EB Fie Edit View Option Dew Objects Liwy Tools Window Help X 4 10 Wimpow o10 x k 3 Fast Selection A Common Window PLC Response Place the object wherever you like on window A project with one object is now created DER L di Qo SBN A BE dill o a 28 aMT3105 200 x 600 me WE NTEK Create an EasyBuilder Pro Project 3 2 Save and Compile the Project Window Help
14. Address type 5x is mapping to Hold Reg The communication protocol of 5x is almost same as 4x except 5x makes double word swap If 4x contains following information Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 Data in word 0x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 0x6 Data 0x20001 0x40003 0x60005 For 5x it becomes Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 Data in word 0x2 0x1 0x4 0x3 0x6 0x5 Data 0x10002 0x30004 0x50006 Address type 6x is limited to data of one word only The communication protocol of 3x_bit and 4x bit are the same as 3x and 4x The difference is that 3x_bit and 4x_bit read single bit of the whole data 539 Li WE NTEK How to Connect a Barcode Device Chapter 20 How to Connect a Barcode Device Barcode interfaces Neintek HMI See VID BINNIE ME PID ANUN MUMAN t COM PORT 20 1 How to Connect a Barcode Device Weintek HMI support connecting barcode USB COM device Please add a new barcode device in Edit System Parameter Settings Device list first as shown below Extended Memory Printer Backun Server eMail Recimes Click Settings and Device Model Gensal SystemSeting Security Font Device Properties finish Barcode Mame Device Settings Location The settings are detailed respectively below PLE type Barcode USBCOM w 1 30 BARCODE so Barcode Device Set
15. When processing simulation on PC right click and select Run EasyDiagnoser in the pop up menu Exit simulation Afterwards EasyDiagnoser will be started Logger window displays whether EasyDiagnoser is able to connect with the HMI to be watched or not Output window 511 L pt WE NTEK Macro Reference displays the output of the TRACE function The illustration below shows that EasyDiagnoser succeeds in connecting with HMI i File View Options Help Command Read Write Device Al on Address Type All Range No Cm PID Device St 4 TT 4 t Devices Lage a a E 11 27 33 Looking for the target HMI Index 0 11 27 33 Connection established with the tart Type Name MT8000 Series HMI Location Local Block Interval 5 words Max Read Length 256 words Max Write Length 256 words When EasyDiagnoser is not able to connect with HMI Logger window displays content as shown below 512 Ly gt WE NTEK Macro Reference Logger q 11 26 32 Connection established with the target HV 11 26 32 Looking for the target HMI The possible reason of not being able to get connection with HMI can be failure in executing simulation on PC Another reason is that the Port No used in project for simulation on PC is incorrect or occupied by system Please change Port No as shown compile project then do simulation again System Parameter Sethngrs Exte
16. origin 5 SS _ 4 low limit 5 a 8 Bar width ratio To display the ratio between bar and object width Below illustration displays two ratio 50 and 100 223 Ly WE NTEK Objects Bar color style To set the bar s Frame Background color Bar style and Bar color See the picture below Background Bar style WN Target Indicator When the register value meets the following condition the color of filled area will change to the Target color Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of dynamic address Users can also set address in Outline tab while adding a dynamic address Target Value Tolerance lt Register value lt Target Value Tolerance See the picture below in here Target Value 5 Tolerance 1 if the register value is equal to or larger than 5 1 4 and equal to or less than 5 1 6 the filled area s color of the bar will change to the Target color Target value 5 Tolerance 1 Alarm Indicator When register s value is larger than High limit the color of filled area will change to High color when register s value is smaller than Low limit the color of filled area will change to Low color Target Alarm Dynamic Address When select Enable the Low limit and High limit of Alarm indicator and the Target Value of Target indicator all come from design
17. E oS a fee Pe ee een l This window lists all incoming tasks i e screen Job List hardcopy and backup requests This window shows the information about the Property Window l task selected from Job List This window shows the preview image of the 3 Preview Window screen hardcopy task selected from Job List 4 Download Progress This window shows the download progress of Window incoming requests D This window shows the time and message of 9 Message Window events such as incoming request incorrect password etc 624 WE NTEK EasyPrinter 26 3 2 Operation Guide The following tables describe the meaning and usage of all EasyPrinter menu items Enable Output e Selected EasyPrinter processes the tasks one by one e Unselected EasyPrinter arranges the incoming tasks in memory 10 EasyPrinter can only reserve up to 128 MB of task data in memory If the memory is full any request coming in afterwards will be rejected and users must either operate Enable Output or delete some tasks to make room for new tasks Edit To edit a screen hardcopy task Edit Print Jab Ornentation Scaling Original Fit To Margin Users can freely change the properties of Orientation Scaling and Margins here To delete the selected tasks permanently Select All To select all tasks from Job List 11 The backup task is not editable 12 Edit is available only when a task is selected
18. If address_offset uses the format N AAAAA N indicates that PLC s station number is N AAAAA represents the address offset This format is used while multiple PLCs or controllers are connected to a single serial port For example GetData read_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 2 5 1 represents that the PLC s station number is 2 If GetData uses the default station number defined in the device list as follows it is not necessary to define station number in address_ offset 428 Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference PLC type FATEK FB Series W110 FATEK_FB S0 PLC I F RS 232 m PLC default station no COM COM1 9600 E 7 1 Settings Use broadcast command The number of registers actually read from depends on both the type of the read_data variable and the value of the number of data_count type of actual number of read_data 16 bit register read char 8 bit char 8 bit bool 8 bit bool 8 bit short 16 bit antes 2 a mezei o a ooo 2 mgin 2 CE float sani 2 A When a GetData is executed using a 32 bit data type int or float the function will automatically convert the data For example macro_command main float f GetData f MODBUS 6x 2 1 f will contain a floating point value end macro_command macro_command main bool a 429 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference bool b 30 short c short d 50 int e int f 10 double g 10 get the state of LB
19. Mode Yale Offset 0 Read addres i PLC name Local HMI Setting Address Ly Emi jidi 16 bit Unsigned Write address FLE name Local HMI at Setting Address LW 10 16 bit Unsigned Write when button is released Attribute Switch style JOG4 T No of states 1 Cyclical Digable User defined mapping Mode Offset There are Value and LSB display mode Refer to the Word Lamp Object section of this chapter for related information Read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the word device that controls the display of multi state switch Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 176 Ly WE NTEK Objects Write address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the word device that system set value to The write address can be the same as or different from the read address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Write when button is released If this function is selected the operation is activated at touch up If the function is not selected the operation is activated at touch down Attribute Select the object s operation mode Switch style There are JOG and JOG for sele
20. Options etartop window no 10 WINDOW _O10 A ahoa hase endow alll ee Keyboard cart color D RW A enabled Event Use LW94509455 as time tage of event loge Extra no of events o Eeyboard 50 Keypad 1 Inteser a Keypad 2 Integer 52 Keypad 3 Integer 53 Keypad 4 Integer mi Delete 54 Eeypad 5 Integer 22 Eeypad 6 Integer 56 Keypad 7 HEX 1 ee Project protection H senesonky li Enable Project key 111111 range i 0 4294967295 Tf this key is different from HMI key the project won t be executed normally Tse LW9046 9047 to change HMI key LE9046 indicates check result hey eror when statis is on 57 Lid WE NTEK System Parameter Settings Setting Description Fast Setting all the attributes for fast selection button that is designated as selection window number 3 button a Attribute Enable Enable or disable fast selection window Select Enable and click Settings to set the attributes including color and text b Position Select the position on the screen of HMI where this button appears If Left is chosen the button will show up on screen bottom left if Right is chosen the button will show up on screen bottom right Screen a Back light saver saver If the screen is left untouched and reaches the time limit set here back light will be
21. and then IP Address Settings dialogue appears Users need to correctly set IP address and Port no of the PLC 46 i WE NTEK PLC default station no Default station no use station no variable System Parameter Settings IF Address Settings IP address 182 168 1 34 Timeout sec Turn around delay rns Local TSAP HEX 4d57 Remote TSAP HEX boo o If the interface is USB no further settings need to be done Please check if all the settings in Device Properties are correct The default station no of PLC address EasyBuilder Pro will use this value as PLC station no In addition station no can be set in the read address of PLC directly Take address 1 20 as an example Riail aldre PLC mame MITSUBISHI Fini Fx Address EE Address PLC mane Device type 1 means PLC station no and has to be named from 0 to 255 20 means PLC address the sign is used to separate station no and address When setting PLC properties station no variables can be selected and used as PLC default station no LW10000 LW10015 can be used to set station no variables When using this function if the station no is not specified for PLC address it will be decided by the station no variable of default station no In this example vars is set for default station no The following demonstrates how the PLC address station no is set 47 W WE NTEK Use broadcast command
22. b For writing The system writes this value to Monitor address when user selects an item Item data Users can assign data for each item The option list object displays the data of all items in the list for users to review and select Error state a For example item 8 is the error state when specifying 8 in Item no Similarly if you set Item no to 11 then state 11 would be the error state and so on b On error state the listbox style option list removes the highlight to represent no item is selected and the drop down list displays the data of error state c The item of error state is only applied to the drop down list style The listbox style list has nothing to do with this item Set default Set default values for all states i e set O for item O 1 for item 1 and so on Error Notification The system will set ON OFF to the specified bit register when error is detected The signal of the bit register could be used to trigger a procedure for correcting the error 338 L WE NTEK Objects 13 30 Timer Overview Use timer variables to enable timer instructions Timer variables consist of the following six special variables Timer Variable Variables Type Input bit IN Bit type The master switch of timer Measurement bit Bit type Turn ON when the timer begin TI counting Output bit Q Bit type Activate when the timer finish counting Preset time PT Word type Set the timer value El
23. 106 Ly WE NTEK Object General Properties 2 Green States a ramie The illustration above provides information of one of the Shapes in the Shape Library as follows 2 Green The number and the name of the shape in the library States 3 The number of the states of the shape In this case it shows the e aa O Frame Indicates that the Shape is set with frame only The illustration below shows that the Shape is set with inner and frame D States 2 Inner Frame Note About all the settings in Shape Library please refer to the illustrations in Chapter 14 Shape Library and Picture Library for details Click OK and preview the design of the shape after the setting is completed sa Picture e lt lt m Racker 107 iw WE NTEK 9 2 2 Settings of Picture Library Picture Library Object General Properties Users can click Use picture to enable selecting a picture from the library How to set Picture Library Click Picture Library button and Picture library dialog appears The currently selected picture is marked by a red frame Picture Library Library ns 2 buttone buttons button button_typel1 button_typel2 button types button typei4 oo Oo On Be to ho O FB Red States 2 30054 bytes LPR Green States 2 30054 byte 5 BMP 100 100 State O St
24. 11 Sometimes the outlining might be incorrect since that the keywords are misjudged For example WorkSpace 1 2 macro command main 3 4 if 1 then SGl if 1 then gi end ig end macro command To solve this problem gt right click to select Update All Outlining to retrieve correct outlining Works pace macro command main i if 1 then ff if 1 then L end if end macro cormand 1 2 5 12 The statements enclosed in the following keywords are called a block of the macro code a Function block sub end sub b Reiterative statements I for next ii while wend c Logical statements I if end if d Selective statements select case end select 388 Ly gt WE NTEK Macro Reference 13 When checking Periodical execution this Macro will be triggered periodically Work Space 14 Select Security gt Use execution condition gt Settings to enter Security Settings a Disable when Bit is ON When Bit is ON this Macro is disabled b Disable when Bit is OFF When Bit is OFF this Macro is disabled Security e Use execution condition Settings Disable when Bit is OFF PL name Setting Address 6 15 Select Execute one time when HMI starts this Macro will be executed once when HMI starts up Security _ Use execution condition 389 E WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 2 Macro Construction A Macro
25. 20 10 Data 3 Data 3 10 Data 4 Data 4 Data 5 Data 5 Data 6 Data 6 Data 7 Data 7 Limitation 1 The maximum number of channels is 12 2 The system can draw up to 32 trend curves 3 The system can draw up to 1024 points for each channel 261 1 2 3 4 Objects Watch address 32 bit Li WE NTEK Objects 13 20 XY Plot Overview XY Plot object displays two dimension data Each data contains X and Y values and each curve is composed of a stream of XY data The maximum number of trend curves in a XY plot is 16 channels Configuration New object Click the XY plot icon and XY Plot Object dialog box appears oes New EY Plot Object ene Display Area Shape Description i Direction Right Control Addes a PLC name Local HMI Address LM No of data address 1O Channel a Read address PLC name Local HMI w meparated address for and Y data H data PLE mame ees HMI Setting address w li bit Unsigned Y data PLC name ocal Hh Setting Address s 200 Hit Upsianed High sab 262 L WE NTEK Objects General a Direction There are four selections right left up or down Right Left rel direction Left direction 4 i origin i K origin Up Down Wp direction origin X fl Y
26. 7 BSLogix 5000 AB 1769 L23E QB1 18 11 Controller Tags ABicontoller File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tool Window Help agli 8 a lE Rem Run A Run Mode ER Path AB_ETH 14192 168 1 130 Backplane 0 El a Eases P Controller OK Battery OK No Edits ap a 4 SE a er Ae A Controller Tags a fe fase O S zal Value a eee Mask els Style Data Type ontroller Fault Handler ease Decimal DINT J Fower Up Handler o Aray2D ieee f 4 Decimal DINT 25 5 Sl Tasks e ArrayBool ere Decimal BOOL 256 E pol aes ArayDINT ie f Decimal DINT 130 j Tieram H E Motion Groups 0 Decimal BOOL J Ungrouped Axes si NT Capen eat f Decimal INT 360 Add On Instructions Local t C TE T AB Embedded I a Local fo T AB Embedded I0 2 oo Locak2c T AB Embedded_0 G Add On Defined Local 21 TE a AB Embedded_0 fell Predefined Locak2 0 TE e AB Embedded_0 ie Oy Module Defined VarBool o Decimal BODL z a e VarDint 21862 Decimal DINT ontiguration EE ree T System 7 zam aa oon 1769 L23E QB1 AB alee ue EP 1769 L23E QB1 Ethemet FortLocalEN _ Varsin 128 Decimal SINT Step 2 Export Tags data to CSV file f RSLogix 5000 AB 1769 L23E QB1 19 11 Controller Tags ABicontoller File Edit View Search Logic Commumecatons Memel Window Help zu Options Te Bak amp sbhons Sa E Becu
27. Interval of block pack words Max read command size words Max write command size words System Parameter Settings PLO default station no Ly 10003 16biti wara Default station no use station no variable The station number of PLC is 5 PLC name MODBUS RTU kd The PLC station no is decided by var7 LW 10007 PLC address is set to 111 since PLC station no is not specified and the default station no is using var3 the PLC station no is decided by var3 LW 10003 PLC name MODBUS RTU v This is for setting the station no of broadcast command Command for the users of this set station no will be seen as broadcast command For example if the broadcast station number is set to 255 HMI with an address such as 255 200 will send this command to all the PLC connected to it but will ignore the replies of PLC after receiving this command This only works on Modbus Broadcast station no 255 If the interval between read addresses of different commands is less than this value these commands can be combined to one But combining function is disabled if this value is 0 For example the interval value is set to 5 and users would like to read out 1 word from LW3 and 2 words from LW6 respectively Means to read from LW6 to LW7 Since the interval of addresses between LW3 and LW6 is less than 5 these two commands can be combined to one The contents of combin
28. LB 9460 EMO s oN device SD card does not exist er enc ESERIES LB 9461 EM1 s wi device SD card does not exist ere mon pe fede LB 9462 EM2 s oN device SD card does not exist er lene EVE ES LB 9463 EM3 s device SD card does not exist er enc pe fede LB 9464 EM4 s Hi device SD card does not exist eee emnon ESEJES LB 9465 EM5 s oN device SD card does not exist er enc ESEIEy LB 9466 EM6 s Mi device SD card does not exist ee amon ESEJES LB 9467 EM 7 s oN device SD card does not exist ere lene EJEIE LB 9468 EM8 s Mii device SD card does not exist aa mon ESESES LB 9469 EM9 s oN device SD card does not exist ee lene pe fete LB 9470 EMO s aes device USB disk does not exist ee amon pe fede LB 9471 EM1 s a device USB disk does not exist eer len ESESES LB 9472 EM2 s aa device USB disk does not exist em lene pe fete LB 9473 EM3 s ica device USB disk does not exist ee on EVER LB 9474 EM4 s storage device USB disk does not exist aaa Fen pete el LB LB 9475 EM5 s storage device USB disk does not exist PR R R 558 Ly WE INTEK System Reserved Words Bits when ON LB 9476 EM6 s storage device USB disk does not exist when ON LB 9477 EM 7 s storage device USB disk does not exist a when ON LB 9478 EM8 s storage device USB disk does not exist ia when ON LB 9479 EM9 s storage device USB disk does not exist when ON 559 LB 9035 HMI free space insufficiency alarm when ON P
29. Lig WE NTEK User Password and Object Security 10 1 2 Enhanced Security Mode 11 users can be set in EasyBuilder Pro plus a default Administrator User passwords can be in alphanumeric format and each user can operate objects classified into 13 classes A to L and none Once password is entered the objects that the user can operate are classified In addition Enhanced Security Mode provides a control address for users to manage the accounts directly on HMI System Parameter Settings _ Extended Memory Printer Backup Server emal Recipes Device Model General System Setting Securty Font General mode Enhanced security mode Select operatable classes For each user F Use existing user accounts on HMI Ho Enable Secretuser Username Password Class 4 Class B Mus F user F 2 FE user 2 4 E uerg 4 fe 4 user 4 M a F IE user5 a i m L i uerb m F f E E user ft E A F uerg E M 4 F F useri 4 F 10 C E uzerli 10 F 2 4 Class Description fees Class A Class B Class C Class D _ Das E I Administrator C Secret user User name cl Password 111111 Control address PLC names Local HMI Setting ddress 4 oO li Ln aal I 1 ILa i het i 121 Ly WE NTEK User Password and Object Security 10 2 Enhanced Security Mode and Control Address The Control Address is sourced from Local HMI LW register
30. New Lib New Lib Unattach Lib Lib 0 Untitled 1 Untitled Delete All States States 3 States 3 oe 3 at 5 Frame Frame Frame Frame Delete Cur State Rename Place M 4 Untitled 5 Untitled 6 Untitled 7 Untitled States 3 States 3 States 1S States 3 fea Frame Frame Frame Frame State O State 11 Display Inner Frame Setting Description Library Shape Libraries which have been added into the current project Select the library source of a Shape from the list Select the state to be displayed by current Shape If the selected Shape isn t displayed it means that the Shape does not exist or the state of the Shape isn t defined Select Lib Click Select Lib and the following dialog appears for users to select the file path of the Shape Library to be added By previewing the content of the library right side of the window users can select suitable library 354 Tbe gnc tibrary and Picture Library WE NTEK L wenes Shape Library and Picture Library _ e Library and Picture Librar Look re CI Risty L New Folder SS arro pd SS wrod gb a TA attoniti pd Ta button p TE btton ob T buttons pb Tdni od ww TB trame pb Zi meoo Demo 3201274 _0 p EA MTEN0_Demo_640490_0 pb TA MTE000_Deen_800x600_0 9b poel ob a File Home anon ob Files ot bee whace I fob rb New Lib Rew Library Library name Test Unattach Lib Click the button to delete the Shape Libra
31. Point 4 When the IN turns ON the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases Point 5 Turn the IN to OFF before the ET reaches the PT the Tl be turned OFF and the ET reset to 0 the Q remains OFF Point 1 When the IN turns ON the TI remains OFF and the Q be turned ON Point 2 When the IN turns OFF the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases the Q remains ON Point 3 When the ET equals the PT the Q and Tl are turned OFF Point 4 When the IN turns ON the Q be turned ON and the ET reset to 0 Point 5 When the IN turns OFF the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases the Q remains ON Point 6 Turn the IN to ON before the ET reaches the PT the Tl be turned OFF and the ET reset to 0 the Q remains ON Point 1 When the IN turns ON the TI and Q are turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases Point 2 When the ET equals PT the Tl and Q are turned OFF Point 3 When the IN turns ON the TI and Q are turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases Point 4 When the ET equals the PT the Tl and Q are 341 Lv WE NTEK Objects turned OF F Accumulated On delay Accumulated Off delay Point 1 When the IN turns ON the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases the Q remains OFF Point 2 When the IN turns OFF and if the ET is less than the PT the Tl be turned OFF The ET is in the retentive state Point 3 When the IN turns ON the TI be turn
32. Specify a name or use HMI name Mail Address Setting e mail address Contact List Add or remove contacts from the list Group Information Group up contacts No of groups Set no of contact groups according to the number the groups are named form A P and up to 16 groups can be set 73 L tes WE NTEK System Parameter Settings Current group Current group Description Description of the group For further information please refer to Chapter 7 Event Log Use existing contact settings on HMI System Parameter Sethings Device Model General 0 SystemSetime Security Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server eMail Recipes Enable e Mail function When checking this the system will use the contact settings on HMI 74 Lyh WE NTEK 5 10 Recipes System Parameter Settings Parameters in Recipes tab are for setting up recipe relevant data oy stem Parameter Settings Device Model General eyvetem pettine pecunity Font Extended Mermory Printer Backup server e haul Recipes Recipes List Recipes E X Ttemname Datatype Size Display wi Decimal Pt Alignm Recipes List Seinas Dea O Newltem 16 bit EB 1 5 0 Alien left b Newlteml 16 btB 1 5 0 Align lef Sas Dae New Insert Add a new recipe item Delete Delete an existing recipe item Item name Enter recipe item name Data type Setting item data
33. Write constant value met value 12 Write address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the word device that system set value to Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 156 Lh WE NTEK Objects Address PLC mame Local HMI Device type i LW Address a System tag Sddress format DODDO range 0 10500 Index register 16 bit Unsigned cancel Write after button is released If this function is selected the operation is activated after button is touched and released otherwise if not selected operation will be activated once the button is touched Notification When this function is selected in the manual operation mode the state of the designated bit device will be set to ON or OFF after before the operation is completed Before writing After writing Set the state of the designated bit device before or after writing to word device Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the Notification bit that system set value to Users can also set the address in the Notification area Address PLO name Local HMI Device type LB
34. low limit Based on your settings the memory allocation for limit and XY data will be as follows The following setting is for 16 bit signed data format and dynamic limits Fead address PLC name Local HMI x Separated address for E and Y data sue powers Setting Address L Flo 16 bit Signed X low limit reads value from reading address LW0O n 0 X high limit reads value from reading address LW1 n 1 Y low limit reads value from reading address LW2 n 2 Y high limit reads value from reading address LW3 n 3 X data 0 reads value from reading address LW4 n 4 Y data 0 reads value from reading address LW5 n 5 266 L WE NTEK Objects The following setting is for 32 bit float data format and dynamic limits Read address PLC name Local HMI E w Separated address for E and Y data Saree Setting Address Lw sl 100 32 bit Float X low limit reads value from reading address LW100 n 0 X high limit reads value from reading address LW102 n 2 Y low limit reads value from reading address LW104 n 4 Y high limit reads value from reading address LW106 n 6 X data 0 reads value from reading address LW108 n 8 Y data 0 reads value from reading address LW110 n 10 NOTE There are four different type of selection to designate memory location for high low limits and XY data Please refer to the following settings 267 Lid et WE NTEK Objects Data 0 Data U Min Klin Data
35. or New Numeric Display Object dialog box will appear fill in each item click OK button and The difference between the New Numeric Display Object and New Numeric Input Object dialog boxes is that the latter has the settings for Notification and keypad input while the former doesn t have The picture below shows the General tab in New Numeric Input Object 183 E WE NTEK Objects Hew Homeric Input Object General Data Entry Numeric Format Security Shane Font Description Read Write use different addresses Read address FLE name Local HMI Setting Address Ly r ge z Write addres FLE name Local HMI Setting Address La 10 Notification Enable C Set ON Set OFF Before writing After writing FLE name Local HMI al Setting Address e we i Notification on invalid input Enable e Set ON O Set OFF PLC name Local HMI Address LE z aye 20 Read Write use different address Numeric Input object is provided with Read Write use different addresses selection users can set different addresses for Read and for Write data Read address Select the PLC name Device type Address of the word device that system display its value and write new data to it Write address Select the PL
36. Display information of Local HMI and PLC It depends on the setting of command as following e f command is set Read Write the Read and Write information of Local HMI and PLC will be displayed in activity area e f command is set Read the Read information of Local HMI and PLC will be displayed in activity area e f command is set Write the Write information of Local HMI and PLC will be displayed in activity area b Local HMI Display information of Local HMI it depends on the setting of command as following e f command is set Read Write the Read and Write information of Local HMI will be displayed in activity area e f command is set Read the Read information of Local HMI will be displayed in activity area e f command is set Write the Write information of Local HMI will be displayed in activity area c PLC Display information of PLC it depends on the setting of command as following e f command is set Read Write the Read and Write information of PLC will be displayed in activity area e f command is set Read the Read information of PLC will be displayed in activity area e f command is set Write the Write information of PLC will be displayed in activity area Select specific Station for display on the screen This function will be disabled when selecting All in Device Address Users can select all or a part of address types to be displayed on the Type screen This function will be disable
37. EEDD Peter ete ees ASABE SFr eee eee oe eee d Selecting Clear All Bookmarks will close all bookmarks 9 Macro editor provides macro code outlining function for easier viewing This function is to hide macro codes that belong to same block and display them with an l icon There will be a tree diagram on the left side of edit area Users can click to hide the block or to open as shown below 386 L ge WE NTEK Macro Reference Works pace WorkSpace Works pace Ae Ae 26 2 GetData OK O Local HMI LB 27 27 GetData OK 0 Lo 2a Press to outline for next for J 0 to 3 SJE dor J 0 to 3 f gt gt gt 333553 gt gt get gnCurrentM a0 i gt set gnt S gnacurrentMCount 1 31 qnCurrentMCount 1 g7 Tibbin asg SetDatalgqnCurrentMCount Loch 32 SecDatalgqnCurrentMcou 4g Getdata qnmacrol 3a TEDD set gnt 45 gumacroID gn Turr Press to outline if then hlack 34 50 SetData gqnmacrol if OK K i then asja e 51 GetData gnCount E E 1 413 f f 3 gt 535353053 gt set gnt 52i qnCount gqnCurren l SetData K Local HMI 42 gnCurrentMCount 2 53 SetData gncount else 43 SecbatalqnCurrentMCou 54 qntestV al gqntCurr 2 44 Tibb gt Set gnt 55 SetData qntestVal end if 45 next J 56 gqneorrectVYal amp fe2 gt 222 gt 22 gt gt set gnCurrentM 57 SetData gneorrecty qnCurrentMCount 2 47 TEDD DDD assert 58 fASYNC TRIG MAcRo SetDatalgqnCurrentMCount Loch 45 fi Getbhataigumacro
38. Hew Library Library name TEST 363 L v4 WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Librar A new Picture Library TEST will be added to the Picture Library dialogue At this moment there is no Picture in the library Pactore Library Library State 0 jc a a 2 3 4 5 1 button 2 button2 3 buttona 4 button 5 button typei1 6 button typel2 17 button _typeis 8 button typei4 a it g o E 0 Oo Step 2 Prepare the pictures to be added suppose the two graphs below are used to represent state 0 and state 1 respectively Click Import Picture and a dialogue appears as below Set Picture no and Picture name for it and then click Next Import Pactore Picture Picture no O w Picture name F YELLOW cree Step 3 When the dialogue below is shown select the source of picture for state 0 and select the correct transparent color In the example below the blue color RGB 0 0 255 is a transparent color After the settings of the state 0 are completed click Next button to continue the settings of the other state 364 Lyh WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Librar Get Piche Picture file State O is Documents and Settings 00 bmp state 0 Width 100 Height 100 S ZE S0054Bytes Transparent Before choosing transparent color check Transparent box first and then left click on location to be of the gra
39. L WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names 34 4 Miscellaneous e Revising member data Directly double click on the data member to be revised in the main window or click on the data member then press Edit e Deleting data member Select the data to be deleted then click Delete For deleting all data members press and hold Delete button on the keyboard then click the Delete button in the main editing window e Adjusting the order of data members After selecting a single data member use the move up and move down buttons in main window to adjust the order This makes selecting items in EasyBuilder Pro easier Shoctire Editor i Data Types i E User Defined Marie TestType Test TypeA TestTypeB Description TestT ype TestTypeD TestTypecE TestTyper TestStruct Mame Data Type Description Strings Datel INT Predefined VarBool Bool Module Defined BoolarrayBook 32 VarReal REAL Realarray REALS WarInt DinkArrayDINT Smember OK add Paste edit Delete fA Import Export Reload save Exit Help 693 Lig WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names e Deleting data type Select from the list on the left side of the main window then select the data type to be deleted on the right side then press Delete on the keyboard The data type can then be deleted Stochire Editor Data Types a gt User Defined Name T
40. LW 0 5 end macro_command The ASCII display object shows qber 442 Li WE NTEK Macro Reference lf data_ count is an even number that is greater than or equal to the length of the string the content of string can be completely shown macro_command main char src1 10 abcde StringSet src1 0 Local HMI LW 0 6 end macro command macro_command main char str1 10 abcde Send 3 words to LWO LW2 Data are being sent until the end of string is reached Even though the value of data_count is larger than the length of string the function will automatically stop StringSet str1 0 Local HMI LW O 10 end macro command Name StringSetEx Description StringSetEx send_data start device_name device_type address_offset data_count send data to the PLC and continue executing next command even if no response from this device Descriptions of send_data device_name device_type address _ offset and data_count are the same as StringSet macro_command main char str1 20 abcde short test 0 macro will continue executing test 1 even if the MODBUS device is not responding StringSetEx str1 0 MODBUS RTU 4x 0 20 test 1 macro will not continue executing test 2 until MODBUS device 443 Lg WE NTEK Description Macro Reference responds StringSet str1 0 MODBUS RTU 4x 0 20 test 2 end macro_command StringCopy success
41. LW 10511 16bit PLC 3 turn around delay unit ms LW 10512 16bit PLC 3 send ACK delay unit ms W W W W W W W W WW W W W W LW 10513 16bit PLC 3 parameter 1 LW 10517 16bit PLC 4 send ACK delay unit ms _ SIEMENS 7 400 Link type LW 10518 16bit PLC 4 parameter 1 SIEMENS 7 400 rack 16bit PLC 4 parameter 2 SIEMENS S 7 400 CPU slot 5 5 l R LW 10522 16bit PLC 5 send ACK delay unit ms SIEMENS S7 400 Link type LW 10514 16bit PLC 3 parameter 2 LW 10515 16bit PLC 4 timeout unit 100ms LW 10523 16bit PLC 5 parameter 1 SIEMENS S7 400 B rack LW 10524 16bit PLC 5 parameter 2 SIEMENS S7 400 CPU slot LW 10525 16bit PLC 6 timeout unit 100ms 569 R r Ly WE NTEK LW 10526 LW 10527 LW 10528 LW 10529 LW 10530 LW 10531 LW 10532 LW 10533 LW 10534 LW 10535 LW 10536 LW 10537 LW 10538 LW 10539 16bit PLC 6 turn around delay unit ms R Y 16bit PLC 6 send ACK delay unit ms R W R Y SIEMENS S7 400 Link type 16bit PLC 6 parameter 1 SIEMENS S7 400 R W R Y rack 16bit PLC 6 parameter 2 SIEMENS S7 400 R W R Y CPU slot 16bit PLC 7 timeout unit 100ms RIY 16bit PLC 7 turn around delay unit ms R Y 16bit PLC 7 send ACK delay unit ms R W R Y SIEMENS S7 400 Link type 16bit PLC 7 parameter 1 SIEMENS S7 400 R W R Y rack 16b
42. PLL name Setting Trigger mode OFF gt 0N Activate the Trigger address the system will execute the Macro You may configure three different ways to activate the Trigger address 1 State change from OFF to ON OFF gt ON 2 State change from ON to OFF ON gt OFF 3 State change either from ON gt OFF or OFF gt ON 4 Always active when ON h Screen hardcopy Activate the Trigger address the system will have designated window printed out You may configure three different ways to activate the Trigger address 1 State change from OFF to ON OFF gt ON 312 Ly WE NTEK Objects 2 State change from ON to OFF ON gt OFF 3 State change either from ON gt OFF or OFF gt ON The designated window can be one of following three different types Source window for print Current base window Window no from register Designate window no Window no 4 Common Window Y Printer 5D card Current base window Print the current base window when the operation is activated Window no from register Print the window designated by a PLC device when the operation is activated if LWO 14 the window no 14 will be printed out Designate window no Select a base window to be printed out when the operation is activated 1 The system performs a background printing process when the printed window is not the current base window 2 For a window designed to be printed at backgro
43. Settings ae Label Tag Content 3 S et u the Label Content Settings p di Label name Pump Alarm State no 0 JEHA pgggognHn corresponding EE language contents we 5 Language 7 Change No of States 368 Lig WE NTEK Label Library and Multi Language Usage 15 3 Setting Label Font Label Tag Library Font see the languages the current Label contains and set the font Different languages can use different font Label Tag Library Label Font Font Language 1 f Language 2 Arial Language 3 Arial Language 4 i Language 5 Language 6 Language 7 Ari Language 8 Language 9 Language 10 i Language 11 Language 132 OK Cancel Font When using a Label to show Comment different languages different fonts The memo for each font can be selected for each language 369 Lyh WE NTEK 15 4 Using Label Library Label Library and Multi Language Usage When there are already some defined labels in Label Library users can find those Labels in Label tag by selecting Use label library in the object s Label tab Hew Bit Lamp Object General Security Shape Label Use label se label library Use bitmap font pomp Alann Languag
44. char str2 10 that is char dest 40 to be or not to be bool success success Stringlnsert 18 str1 3 13 dest 0 success true dest to be or not to be the question success Stringlnsert 18 str2 0 dest 0 success true dest to be or not to be that is the question success Stringlnsert O Hamlet dest 0 success false dest remains the same end macro command 464 Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 6 7 Recipe Query Function Name RecipeGetData RecipeGetData destination recipe address record_ID Description Description Get Recipe Data The gained data will be stored in destination and must be a variable Recipe address consists of recipe name and item name recipe _name item_ name record ID specifies the ID number of the record in recipe being gained macro_command main int data 0 char str 20 int recordID bool result recordID 0 result RecipeGetData data TypeA item_weight record D From recipe TypeA get the data of the item item_weight in record 0 recordlD 1 result RecipeGetData str 0 TypeB item_name recordlD From recipe TypeB get the data of the item item _name in record 1 end macro command RecipeQuery RecipeQuery SQL command destination Use SQL statement to query recipe data The number of records of query result will be stored in the destination This must be a variable SQL command can be static
45. eee eee ne a T EOE E nee EE E 95 8 1 Data Sampling Management dcveses icssceceoseadadenapaccsaudeoevencmasenduastedadainpnsadendugetosiwasenonaddsdndaimenaas 95 amp 2 Create a New Data Sai UN asec cece oS ence treinen an rN a ON A EE RN 96 8 3 System Registers Relevant to Data Sampling sssssssssessseessserssrrrsserrssrersseesssrreserreseereserse 100 Chapter 9 Object General PropertieS s ssssessssesssrssserssreesesrssesrsussrssrersarsssasrssssrserersasossarresesrssseres 101 SE E e E n E OENE EEE E A AA N A OA E E 101 9 1 1 Setting the Reading and Writing ACIress ccccccsssccccssececessecceseeeeeeecesseecessenees 101 9 2 Using Shape Library and Picture LIDrary cece cesccccesscccessecceesececseeceeeeneeeeesecesseecesseneeees 104 9 2 1 Settings OF Shape LIDrary comanatesancvsacsaanesacaz corakna nE EKIN n iT EAN TENENTE ER ENEE 105 9 2 2 Settings OF Picture LIDIALY sesasine a aoa 108 9 3 SCEUNE TEXC COMTCIE ecien iE EAEE S EE E EE 110 4AAdUStNE POU SIZE erine E EE eased rteneauavnecunet oursaormmernnmeunee 115 9 5 Variables OF Station NUMDET tarscncacsceerasscehevccarsnntassaenoncansueninasdedscaarsnavanaeetosdacseertaarardneasesaieat 116 9 6 Broadcast Station NUMD CF sic cncreschcccasaceraesadeonededeoamandsahineatdeaoaeanadeoundeeedanetadabceewtdsanavanadasunns 118 Chapter 10 User Password and Object Security ccccccsseccceseccceesececesececeeeceseeneeeeeaecesseecesseeeees 119 10 1 User Passwor
46. gt Objects select Backup and the following dialog appears 622 iJ et WE NTEK EasyPrinter Hew Hackup Object Ed General Security Shape Label Description PONCE O EW EW Historical event log liztorical d i samplire Backup position O SD card O USE disk Note Use L W 9032 9039 to change the backup folder name Note Use Remote printes backup server to store data to a remote PC Enable the server in System Parameter Printer Backup Server settings Range Start Today Yesterday Within Al a Trigger Mode Touch trieger ne 8 In Source select Historical event log 9 In Backup position select Remote printer backup server 10 In Range select Today and AIl 11 In Trigger select Touch trigger 12 Place the Backup object on the common window window no 4 and users will be able to make backups anytime needed 13 Compile and download project to HMI Press the Backup object set in step 12 to make a backup of the Event Log history data The Backup object can be triggered via a bit signal Users can arrange a Scheduler object which turns a bit ON at the end of week to trigger a Backup object to automatically back up all history data 623 me WE NTEK EasyPrinter 26 3 EasyPrinter Operation Guide 26 3 1 Appearance WWiaer iit UT Raton Pontes Garver syp tet
47. it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main char src1 5 0x3c int result bool success1 success1 StringHexAsc2Bin src1 0 result success1 true result1 is 3c short result2 bool success2 success2 StringDecAsc2Bin 1a2b3c4d result2 success2 true result2 3c4d The result exceeds the data range of result2 char src3 2 4g9 char result3 bool success3 success3 StringDecAsc2Bin src3 0 result3 I success3 false because src3 contains characters other than 0 to 9 a to f or A to F end macro command 449 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference Name StringBin2HexAsc success StringBin2HexAsc source destination start Description This function converts binary data to a hexadecimal string It converts the binary data in source parameter into a hexadecimal string and stores it in the destination buffer Source can be either a constant or a variable Destination must be an one dimensional char array to store the result of conversion This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of hexadecimal string after conversion exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main int src1 20 char dest1 20 bool success success1 StringBin2HexAsc src1 d
48. result 5 end macro command Name S SIN source result Description Calculate the sine of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result SIN 90 result result is 1 source 30 SIN source result result is 0 5 end macro command COS source result Description Calculate the cosine of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result 407 LWP WENT E ee ooo Macro Reference COS 90 result result is O source 60 GetData source Local HMI LW O 1 COS source result result is 0 5 end macro_command TAN source result Description Calculate the tangent of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result TAN 45 result result is 1 source 60 TAN source result result is 1 732 end macro command COT source result Description Calculate the cotangent of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result COT 45 result result is 1 source 60 COT source result result is 0 5774 end macro_command 408 E WE NTEK Macro Reference Name sce o S O oO SEC source result Description Calculate the secant of source into
49. ret2 StringCompareNoCase a2 0 b2 0 ret2 true char a3 20 abcde char b3 20 abcdefg bool ret3 ret3 StringCompareNoCase a3 0 b3 0 ret3 false end macro_command StringFind position StringFind source start target start position StringFind source target start position StringFind source start target position StringFind source target Description Return the position of the first occurrence of target string in the source string The two string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns the zero based index of the first character of substring in the source string that matches the target string Notice that the entire sequence of characters to find must be matched If there is no matched substring it returns 1 macro_command main char src1 20 abcde char target1 20 cd bool pos pos1 StringFind src1 0 target1 0 pos1 2 char target2 20 ce bool pos2 455 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference pos2 StringFind abcde target2 0 pos2 1 char src3 20 abcde bool pos3 pos3 StringFind src3 3 cd pos3 1 end macro command Name StringReverseFind Description position StringReverseFind source start target start position StringReverseFind source target start position StringReverseFind source start t
50. select Use IP address and assign IP_ as the Prefix 3 In Properties select Minimize to system tray 616 re WE NTEK EasyPrinter Click Hardcopy tab on the left side in the dialog box as follows eM 3 ocr Remote Printer Server Settings eneral Output Faicom Print ontio Backup _ HP LaserJet Professional P1606dn w 4 In Output select Print out to and choose a printer as the output device for screen hardcopies Note Users can only choose from the printers available in their system so it is possible that hp LaserJet 3380 PCL 5 can t be found in the list as the example 5 Click OK to apply the settings 6 In Menu gt File select Enable Output to allow EasyPrinter to output any incoming print request i e screen hardcopy 26 1 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder Pro In EasyBuilder Pro Menu gt Edit gt System Parameters click Printer Server tab and select Use MT Remote Printer Backup Server the following dialogue appears 617 EasyPrinter System Parameter Settings Ed Model Device General System Setting _ security Font Extended Memory Printen Backup Server e hail __ sRecines Use MT Remote Printer Hackup Server Note Use EasyPinter to configure PC for printing screen hardcopy and storing backup data Output ttings Orientation Horizontal O
51. 0 3980 22 02 16 09 07 0 0 3979 22 02 16 09 07 0 0 3978 22 02 16 09 07 O 0 3977 22 02 16 09 07 O 0 3976 22 02 16 09 07 O 0 3975 22 02 16 09 07 0 0 244 Wa WE NTEK Objects Color Set color of grid Column interval Set space of column 3667 21 57 16 09 07 1 0 3666 21 57 16 09 07 1 0 3665 21 57 16 09 07 1 0 3664 21 57 16 09 07 1 0 3663 21 57 16 09 07 1 0 3662 21 57 16 09 07 1 0 3661 21 57 16 09 07 1 0 3661 3660 21 56 16 09 07 0 0 3659 21 56 16 09 07 0 0 TA a n i IAAP 74 AAR 4h NOInN z ha Profile color Set color of frame and background If it is set as transparent the frame and background will be ignored Time and Date Enable or disable the time and date of data sampling and format Time ascending Time ascending means to put the earlier data in the top and the latest data in the bottom Ue 3 00 24 29 16 09 07 7 6 4 00 24 30 16 09 07 9 8 5 00 24 31 16 09 07 6 4 8 00 24 34 16 09 07 3 6 e ee eee ee ARNOT a qe Time descending Time descending means to put the latest data in the top and the earlier data in the bottom E 4AT80 22 23 54 16 09 07 3 2 ee he e o ATTS ee EF RIJ iseia F qo gt 245 WE NTEK Objects History Control The history files are named with date code The his
52. 125 Ligh WE NTEK User Password and Object Security 10 3 2 USB Security Key Usage Instead of entering account and password manually for login a key can be used to do so In EasyBuilder Pro installation directory launch Administrator Tools check USB Security Key set the relevant login information the USB Security Key can be used to directly login as shown E Administrator Tools Save to USB Contents of the USB data J User Accounts USB Security Key ooo C e Mail SMTP Sever Settings e Mail Contacts USB Security Key User name Admin Password eseese Confirm eoucce Effective Time Restrict the using terms A Save to USB Jan 13 2012 16 11 Jan 21 2012 16 11 Help Topics Please note that the user accounts set for USB Security Key must already exist on HMI About Administrator Tools please refer to the relevant chapters in this manual The set USB Security Key can be stored in USB and SD card and create a Function Key for using USB Security Key to log in as shown below 126 Lib WE NTEK User Password and Object Security New Function Key Object x General Security Shape Label Description i Activate after button is released O Change full screen window Change common window Function mode Import User accounts lmport e mail settings and contacts Use USB Security Key
53. 16 bit format Address 1 32 bit format Address 2 c X amp Y axis The object is allowed to move along the X axis and Y axis The moving range in XY direction is defined by Min X Max X and Min Y Max Y respectively 212 Ly WE NTEK Objects Attribute Mode No of states lg 00 Data format Address to Address to Address to control object control Moving control Moving state Distance on the distance on the X axis Y axis d X axis w scaling The object is for X axis movement with scale Supposed that the value of the designated register is DATA the system uses the following formula to calculate the moving distance on the X axis X axis move distance DATA Input low Scaling high Scaling low Input high input low No of states Scainglo 300 Seelig hien 000 For example the object is only allowed to move within 0 600 but the range of the registers value is 300 1000 set Input low to 300 and Input high to 1000 and set Scaling low to O and Scaling high to 600 and the object will move within the range Data format Address to Address to control object control Moving state Distance on the X axis 16 bit format Address 1 32 bit format Address 2 213 L WE NTEK Objects e Y axis w scaling The object is for Y axis movement with scale and the formula to calculate the moving distance on the Y axis is the same as the one
54. 2 32 bit format Address 2 Address 4 For example if the object s read address is LW100 and the data format is 16 bit Unsigned LW100 is to control the object s state LVW 101 is to control the object s moving distance on the X axis and LW102 is to control the object s moving distance on the Y axis The picture below shows that the object s read address is LW100 and initial position is 100 50 Supposed you want the object moved to the position 160 180 and be displayed in the shape of State 2 the value of LW100 must be set to 2 LW101 160 100 60 LW102 180 50 130 100 50 LW100 L W101 L W102 State X Offset Y Offset 100 50 LW100 L W101 L W102 o st re 60 130 160 180 _next position State X Offset Y Offset 211 Ly WE NTEK Objects Attribute To select the object s movement mode and range a X axis only The object is only allowed to move along the X axis The moving range is defined by Min X and Max X Attaibute Data format Address to Address to control object control Moving state Distance on the X axis 16 bit format Address 1 32 bit format Address 2 b Y axis only The object is only allowed to move along the Y axis The moving range is defined by Min Y and Max Y Attribute Mode Data format Address to Address to control object control Moving state Distance on the Y axis
55. 381 Lb WE NTEK Macro Reference 2 Open the macro editor you ll see the line numbers displayed on the left hand side of the edit area am xE fo E a aje ENN a a EA i E AE B al A Ae te he macro Command maini if end macro command edit area a Click the right mouse button to display edit menu ol cersetew commie J FI compie e ladr Otley IULI k LLIT r IUT 1 Fa I l ii LUT Wi elect All Cili Togele Bookmark CtlF2 Next Bookmark Fe Previous Bookmark ShfHF2 Clear All Bookmarks Togele Al Outlining Update Al Outlining 382 g WE NTEK Macro Reference The disabled items are colored grey which indicates that it is not possible to use that function in the current status of the editor For example you should mark a selected area to enable the copy function otherwise it will be disabled Accelerators are supported as described in the menu 4 Above the edit area locates the toolbar It provides Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Toggle Bookmark Next Bookmark Previous Bookmark and Clear All Bookmarks buttons for instant use 5 Modifications made to the editor will enable the undo function Redo function will be enabled after the undo action is taken To perform the undo redo action right click to select the item or use the accelerator Undo Ctrl Z Redo Ctrl Y WorkSpace s Ae a ma
56. After the system complete step a it will reset the Command to 0 During the period between step a and b don t change the content of Command Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 it may cause unpredictable result 298 WE NTEK Objects Media player setting guide General tab Hew Media Player Object General Preview Description 7 _ Control address Enable PLC name Local HMI id Device bpe LW ag Addres es System tag E Address format DDDDD range 0 10500 _ Index register Command ge 3 statis U3 OOo 3 Parameter 1 0 1 0 File mdex U Parameter 2 0 6 2 OOOO etat time U gt End time T Update video playing time Ext device OSD USB1 USB2 Folder name example z Attribute Auto repeat Backeround Setting Description Enable control Enable address a You can use Control address to control the operation of media player Register a device address for Control address Control address l Disable There is no manual control of video play operation The system will start to play the first video at designated folder when the window is popup 299 L WE NTEK Objects Command Users set this address to control the operation of media player gt Command co
57. COM 2 mode 0 RS232 1 RS485 R W R Y R Y 2W 2 RS485 4W LW 9556 16bit COM 2 baud rate 7 1200 8 2400 0 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 R Y R Y 38400 4 57600 LW 9557 16bit COM 2 databits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits R Y R Y LW 9558 16bit COM 2 parity O none 1 even 2 odd R W R Y R Y 3 mark 4 space LW 9559 16bit COM 2 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits LW 9560 16bit COM 3 mode 0 RS232 1 RS485 2W LW 9561 16bit COM 3 baud rate 7 1200 8 2400 0 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 R W R Y R Y 38400 4 57600 Lw 9562 16bit COM 3 databits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits LW 9563 16bit COM 3 parity O none 1 even 2 0dd 568 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits arans SSSCS SCS 16bit COM 3 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits 16bit COM 1 broadcast station no 16bit COM 2 broadcast station no 16bit COM 3 broadcast station no R R LW 9564 IW IW IW IW LW 10500 16bit PLC 1 timeout unit 100ms LW 10501 16bit PLC 1 turn around delay unit ms LW 10502 16bit PLC 1 send ACK delay unit ms LW 10503 16bit PLC 1 parameter 1 LW 10504 16bit PLC 1 parameter 2 LW 10505 16bit PLC 2 timeout unit 100ms LW 10506 16bit PLC 2 turn around delay unit ms LW 10507 16bit PLC 2 send ACK delay unit ms LW 10508 16bit PLC 2 parameter 1 LW 10509 16bit PLC 2 parameter 2 LW 10510 16bit PLC 3 timeout unit 100ms
58. Data sampling is used to display Historical Trend Display or Data Display Date Set the date format Data Sampling object Users have to select which Data sampling object is triggered when selecting Data sampling as Type Users should select the same data sampling object with the one selected in Historical Trend Display or Data Display 335 Ly WE NTEK Objects LA ote 1 The system will automatically disable Mapping table when History Index mode is selected 2 When users select Drop Down List in Attribute and enable History Index mode the Option List displays in Error State Item address mode When selecting Item address users have to correctly set the content of Control address and Item address Control address Address set 1 to the data of the designated register of this address for updating items displayed in Option List using the content of designated register of Item address After updating the data in this register will restore to 0 Address 1 The next address of the designated Control address data in this address is for setting the number of items Item address This address is for storing the contents of the items ASCII Use ASCII as item contents UNICODE Use UNICODE as item contents such as Chinese characters The UNICODE to be used must also be used in other objects EasyBuilder Pro will then compile these font files in advance and save t
59. Language 1 Language 2 Language 3 Language 4 Language 5 Language 6 Language 7 Language 6 Lang maximum of 256 states state no O 255 The State no is determined by Language no selected If using 1 3 languages the maximum state no is 256 If z Settings y __Delee _Delee all Save Label File using more than 4 CERNEA a re languages divide Do ee 768 by language number to get the Modify the Save all Load existing max state number Add anew content of current Ibl file to EX number of languages Label selected Labels in Ibl Label Library is 24 768 24 32 states Label format Export the Import a current Label Label Library SS Library in csv in csv or or xls formats xls formats Ne UNICODE is not supported when to specified to the current importing and exporting EXCEL file location project mtp 367 Le wii Label Library and Multi Language Usage 15 2 Building Label Library 1 Open Label Tag Library gt New Label name User can specify the name of the Label Label name Pump Alarm No of states The number of states can No of states be shown by this Label C i j 2 Click OK a new Label Tag Library 13 Label Pump Language no 24 Sal Al ith 2 t t en 0 Aaaa arm Wi STATES mo ireen No of sams Language 1 Language 2 Lang will be added to the E i a ai a ae eS ee E Label Library select it and click
60. Syntax Description StringGetEx read_data start device_name device_type address_ offset data_count Receives data from the PLC and continue executing next command even if no response from this device Descriptions of read_ data device_name device_type address offset and data_count are the same as GetData macro_command main char str1 20 short test 0 macro will continue executing test 1 even if the MODBUS device is not responding StringGetEx str1 0 MODBUS RTU 4x 0 20 test 1 macro will not continue executing test 2 until MODBUS device responds StringGet str1 0 MODBUS RTU 4x 0 20 test 2 end macro_command Description StringSet send_data start device_name device_type address _ offset data_count Send data to the PLC Data is defined in send_data start send_data start data_count 1 send_data must be a one dimensional char array data_count is the number of sent characters it can be either a constant or a variable device_name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks and this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters device_type is the device type and encoding method binary or BCD of the PLC data For example if device _type is LW_BIN it means the register is LW and the encoding method is binary If use BIN encoding method _BIN can be ignored 441 Li WE NTEK Macro Reference If device_type is LW_BCD i
61. The picture above shows a reading address or writing address contains 101 Ligh WE NTEK Object General Properties PLC name This is for selecting device type Different PLC are with different selections of Device type PLO name Local HMI Device type LB Address Le Address format Index Tag Library OK Cancel Address Set the reading and writing address System tag Address tag includes system tag and user defined tag Click Setting beside PLC name and tick system tag This allows users to use the preserved addresses by system for particular purpose These address tags are divided into bit or word LB or LW After selecting System tag not only will the Device type displays the content of the chosen tag Address will also display the register chosen as shown below PLO name Local HMI Device type LB 9000 initialized as ON Address Address Format DOODDE range O 12095 Index register Tag Library OK Cancel The illustration below shows a part of system tags For further information please refer Chapter 16 Address Tag Library and Chapter 22 System Reserved Words and Bits 102 Lib WE NTEK Object General Properties Address PLE name Local HMI ka Device type gt LB 9000 initialized as ON w LB 9000 initialized as ON LB 9001 init
62. m When using Window Copy function if the source file is protected by MTP password please input correct password for EasyBuilder Pro to execute window copy 660 Ly WE NTEK Memory Map Communication Chapter 31 Memory Map Communication MemoryMap communication protocol is similar to IBM 3764R it is used when memory data is with low variation High variation may cause MemoryMap overloading MemoryMap is used for communication between two devices When setting the MemoryMap with two devices one has to be set as Master and another is Slave In normal condition Master and Slave do not communicate except when the assigned memory data in one of them has changed Once data is identical the communication will stop So this is used for keeping the consistency of assigned part of data between two devices Master and Slave via corresponding registers The corresponding memory has the same property as HMI register MW MB from Master and Slave The 1000 words MW MB are reserved for MemoryMap in HMI for communication The feature of memory MB is correspondence with MW according to the following list MBO MBf and MWO MB10 MB1f and MW1 they all indicate the same register Device name Format Range dddd h dddd 0 4095 h 0 f hex dddd dddd 0 9999 When using MemoryMap communication protocol the master and slave have to use the same communication setting The wiring diagram as follow RS485 4W Ly WE NTEK Mem
63. of data to be displayed will be formed by LWO and LW1 while value in LWO represents the first history data to start with Example As illustrated below for showing it clearer the history data is numbered according to the date they are established No 0 No 1 No 2 If the value in LWO is 3 the first data to be displayed will be data No 3 EEL 20100604 No 4 LEE EVT ETEL 20100605 o 6KB EVT dS EL 20100608 To ITKE EVT FS EL 20100609 No 1 AEE EVIR EEL 20100610 No 0 1I2EB EVT 4 As for LW1 2 modes can be selected a Number of days History control PLC name Local HMI s Address LW w 16 bit Unsigned Enable reading multiple histories The range of History Data to be displayed will start from number in LWO The value in LW1 represents how many days to be included from the start to days before Example As illustrated below if value of LWO is 1 LW1 is 3 then the range of data will start form 20100609 and include data of 2 days before while 20100609 itself is counted We can see that in this example since data of 20100607 does not exist the data displayed will only include 20100609 and 20100608 EEL 20100604 No 4 IEE EVT EYEL 20100605 No 3 HEB EVITER EL_ 20100608 No 2 17EKB EVIR 4EB EVT 3 EEL 20100610 No 0 12EB EVT 3 281 W WE NTEK Objects b Index of the last history History control PLC name Local HMI wf Range of data to be displayed will take
64. result ATAN 1 result result is 45 source 1 32 ATAN source result result is 60 end macro command 410 E WE NTEK Macro Reference Name oes oS O Oo LOG source result Description Calculates the natural logarithm of a number Source can be either a variable or a constant Result must be a variable macro _ command main float source 100 result LOG source result result is approximately 4 6052 end macro_command LOG10 LOG10 source result Description Calculates the base 10 logarithm of a number Source can be either a variable or a constant Result must be a variable macro_command main float source 100 result LOG10 source result result is 2 end macro command RAND RAND result Description Calculates a random integer saved into result Result must be a variable macro_command main short result RAND result result is not a fixed value when executes macro every time end macro_command 411 E WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 6 2 Data Transformation BIN2BCD source result Description Transforms a binary type value source into a BCD type value result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main short source result BIN2BCD 1234 result result is 0x1234 source 5678 BIN2BCD source result result is 0x5678 end macro_command Name BCD2BIN BCD2BIN source result Description Tran
65. s IP1 IP address LW 9922 16bit remote HMI 24 s IP2 IP address LW 9923 16bit remote HMI 24 s IP3 IP address mea fe IPO 1P1 IP2 IP3 ace e ae LW 9924 16bit remote HMI 24 s port no LW 9925 16bit remote HMI 25 s IPO IP address m IPO 1P1 IP2 IP3 roe LW 9926 16bit remote HMI 25 s IP1 IP address me IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 w Rw LW 9927 16bit remote HMI 25 s IP2 IP address er i IPO0 IP1 IP2 IP3 EAE LW 9928 16bit remote HMI 25 s IP3 IP address en a LW LW 9929 16bit remote HMI 25 s port no LW 9930 16bit remote HMI 26 s IPO IP address m i IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9931 16bit remote HMI 26 s IP1 IP address m IPO0 IP1 IP2 IP3 582 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits LW 9932 16bit remote HMI 26 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9933 16bit remote HMI 26 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9934 16bit remote HMI 26 s port no R Y R Y LW 9935 16bit remote HMI 27 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO0 IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9936 16bit remote HMI 27 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9937 16bit remote HMI 27 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9938 16bit remote HMI 27 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9939 16bit remote HMI 27 s port no R Y R Y LW 9940 16bit remote HMI 28 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1
66. statement in Event Log chapter Alann Eyen Log Event Display Object s Properties rc eau General Event Display Shape Font Include categories 0 tho 2 Color Frame EE Acknowledge Jy x select box es Format Acknowledge style You may select Click or Double click to acknowledge a new event When a new event comes up the operator can Click or Double click to acknowledge the new event the system will change the text color of that event and export the write value registered with the event to the designated register Take use of this feature the user can register a popup window and put the warning message in the window then configure an indirect window object when the event is acknowledged the write value is written into the read address of the indirect window and call up the popup window Max event no The maximum number of events to be displayed in the event display object When the number of events is larger than the maximum the oldest event will be removed from the event display object Color Set the color of events in different states a Acknowledge b Return to normal c Select box The system draw a highlight box around the latest acknowledged event 284 Lib WE NTEK Objects Acknowledge Y SRP Td ru 4 gt ORE 4 Even ne BA pede 10 J eel cad 2 13 12 1 Ev i ant 2 P L 34C j p v I a l Ti f s aa gt
67. to Login Data position USB 1 disk OUSB 2 disk OSD card Cancel Import user data Use USB Security Key Settings Upon completion of the settings insert the external device to HMI and use Function Key to login using USB Security Key The effective time limit for login with the key can only be specified in Administrator Tools the system will logout automatically when passing the time limit 127 Lig WE NTEK User Password and Object Security 10 4 Enhanced Security Mode with Option List Object Enhanced Security Mode use control address LW n 2 as account index With Option List Object account name and privileges can be displayed If set control address to LW O the monitor address will be LW 2 Users can select whether or not to display the account privileges and secret users on Option List Secret Users means in System Parameter Settings Security Enhanced Security Mode this user account name is set to be hidden so that other users won t be able to see the relevant data via Option List New Option List Object ee oe Gption list Mapping Security Shape Label Description Attribute Mode Drop down List ka Background M Selection Direction Down ka Source of item data User account Ww Sort Display Ascending Descending Privilege Secret user Monitor address sell Sett
68. unsigned octal integer u unsigned decimal integer X or X unsigned hexadecimal integer Eore Signed value having the form d dddd e sign ddd where d is a single decimal digit dddd is one or more decimal digits ddd is exactly three decimal digits and sign is or f Signed value having the form dddd dddd where dddd is one or more decimal digits 469 Macro Reference The length of output string is limited to 256 characters The extra characters will be ignored The argument part is optional One format specification converts exactly one argument macro_command main char c1 a short s1 32767 float f1 1 234567 TRACE The results are output The results are TRACE c1 c s1 d f1 f c1 s1 f1 output c1 a s1 32767 f1 1 234567 end macro command FindDataSamplingDate return_value FindDataSamplingDate data_log number index year month day or FindDataSamplingDate data_log_ number index year month day Description A query function for finding the date of specified data sampling file according to the data sampling no and the file index The date is stored into year month and day respectively in the format of YYYY MM and DD Data Sampling Object mu Read address Sample mode Trigger address Clear address Hold address Auto stop il Local HMI LWO Periodical Local HMI LWO Feriodical Disable Disable Disab
69. user may define the needed function and save it for future use Next time when the same function is required the saved functions can be called from Macro Function Library for easier editing Additionally Macro Function Library greatly enhances the portability of user defined functions Before building a function please check the built in functions or online function library to see if it exists Macro To Macro name Macro 2D 0 Hamo rane C Rerodical execution Penodkcal execution C gt ot eS Lm a AAA cro Command mair i p macro command main 4 int x1 yu 5 int al p 5 Lae Ai z int ii sue K 5 Sun nth end MACO rohfampd and mace Conana 480 We WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 8 1 Import Function Library File Open a project in HMI programming software the default Function Library File will be read automatically and the function information will be loaded in At this moment if a user defined function is called the relevant mlb file must be imported first 1 Default Function Library File Name MacroLibrary without filename extension 2 Function Library Directory HMI programming software installation directory library folder 3 library folder contains two types of function library files Without filename extension MacroLibrary the Default Function Library for HMI programming software to read at the beginning With filename extension mlb Such as math mlb The files to be read
70. v Description Soft Team Contact Mail Address Harrison Harrison yemtek corn Jordan Jordan hotmail com e Upon completion of the settings click Save to USB select the location of USB and then click Create The Generated successfully massage is shown click OK Save to USE Save to USH Select your USE device Administrator Tools EA 729 a 7 Ua WE NTEK Administrator Tools 36 5 3 Use EasyBuilder Pro to Import e Mail Settings and Contacts Create Function Key Object using EasyBuilder Pro when touching the object on HMI screen the import will be executed The following describes how to create Function Key a When creating Function Key Object in EasyBuilder Pro select Import user data Use USB Security Key then click Settings Import v r data U SB Security Key b gt In Function mode select Import e mail settings and contacts Select the position where the data is stored in Data position then click OK to finish setting Function moge Import user accounts O Use USE Security Key to Login Data position OSD card CI USB disk cancel _ Wish to know how to import e mail settings and contacts via Function Key Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 730
71. ws v 50 504 LW 9049 16bit local hour 12 hour format 1 Value range 2000 2049 i 551 System Reserved Words Bits g lt R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W R W IW R Ze lt A Z 2 lt 2 Value range 1 7 stand for Monday Sunday Lib WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 3 User Name and Password a LB 9050 user logout i w oyo W901 Rw 922 Rw LW 9222 16bit classes can be operated for current user bit 0 A bit 1 B bit 2 C Y R R lt ale LW 9500 LW 9502 LW 9504 LW 9506 LW 9508 LW 9510 LW 9512 LW 9514 LW 9516 LW 9518 32bit user 10 s password LW 9520 32bit user 11 s password R LW 9522 32bit user 12 s password R Y LW 10754 8 words current user name Note 1 R R Y D 5 R Y R Y R Y R 32bit user 1 s password D 5 32bit user 2 s password D 5 32bit user 3 s password P Z P lt 32bit user 4 s password lt 32bit user 5 s password Pa 5 Pa 32bit user 6 s password D 5 Py 5 D 32bit user 7 s password 32bit user 8 s password lt R Z P z 32bit user 9 s password lt lt D 32bit user 1 s password RW 82i user 2 s password RW 32bit user 3 s password RW 32bit user 4 s password RW R 32bit user 6 s password RW 32bit user 7 s password RW 32bit user 8 s
72. 0x3 then read_data 0 response 4 response 3 lt lt 8 4x_1 read_data 1 response 6 response 5 lt lt 8 4x 2 SetData read_data 0 Local HMI LW 100 2 end if end macro command The following example explains how to design a request to set the status of Ox_1 The request uses Write Single Coil 0x5 command Request Functioncode 1Byte 0x05 Response Function code 1Byte 0x05 Output Address 0x0000 to OxFFFF 0x0000 or OxFFOO Error 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 The complete macro is as follows Write Single Coil ON macro_command main char command 32 response 32 short address checksum short i return_ value FILL command 0 0 32 initialize command 0 command 31 to 0 FILL response 0O 0 32 496 L WE NTEK Macro Reference command 0 0x1 station number command 1 0x5 function code write single coil address 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 command 4 Oxff force Ox_1 on command 5 0 CRC command 0 checksum 6 LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7 OUTPORT command 0O MODBUS RTU Device 8 send request INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 return_value read response end macro command 497 L WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 11 Compiler Error Message 1 Error Message Format error c error description is the error message number Example error C37 undeclar
73. 1 d Downloads Aning 2011 10 12 I Recent Places SK l 0922 mib EIN lt lengthmlo EVEN 1 4 ow Libraries 1 math 0025 mlb 2007 8 5 E 03 Documents 2007 6 5 0133 a Music t Pictures amp Videos W Computer 4 When importing a function with a name amp Loca Dick C WF CD Drive D STEP 7 LA FAE vboxsry E File name Text Documents Coed Encoding macro Libane mlb open fe Macro Function Library L which already exists in the Library a message will popup OK Overwrite the existing A Function Name function with the imported an onsey int MUL int int oe short tet short NO Cancel the importing of ner iii the function with the same Duplicated function name ADD Overwrite with new one name pare aban aaa No Yestoal No toa Yes to all Overwrite using all the imported functions with the same name Noto all Cancel the 3 t Fonction Name importing of all the functions int DD int nt int SUBS int int int MUL int int with the same name asin 5 The imported functions will be New Function Successfully Added saved in Default Function Library so if math mlb file is deleted test1 will still exist in the Library even when restart software News Delete Edit Export import _ 489 Lb WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 8 3 5 Export a Function 1 Export th
74. 1 Data 1 Wax Max Data 2 Data 2 Data 0 Datat Data 3 Data 3 Data 1 Data 1 LDiata A a A ki x Data 0 x Min Y Data 0 A Max x Data 1 Y Min Y Data 1 Y Max Data Datao Y Data 2 Yatai Data 3 Data 1 Y Data 3 Yata 1 A Data Y Data If dynamic limit is checked you may change the high and low limits to realize zoom in and zoom out function Please refer trend display object s dynamic limit In the following example the dynamic limit is selected where XL X low limit XH X high limit YL Y low limit YH Y high limit and XY XY1 XY2 are three XY data Now we change the high limit of X and Y respectively and you may observe the effect of zoom in and zoom out LVV100 control LVV101 display number 268 iz WE NTEK Objects 1 Change Y high limit to 25 for zoom in effect 2 Change Y high limit to 100 for zoom out effect saat fa 45 anal 269 Li WE NTEK Objects Display Area tab Hew ZY Plot Object FAs EIE ETN c General Display Area Shape Profile color Transparent Curve Channel lo Fen property Color Width lt E Point width 5 Line Point E axis projection Y axis projection Reference line ia Limit from FLE Low imit o Reference line 1 Reference line 2 Reference line 3 Reference line 4 Cancel Profile color Enable Transparent It
75. 1 Overview and Configuration Overview EasyDiagnoser is a tool for detecting the error occurs while HMI is communicating with PLC Configuration Step 1 Open Utility Manager and click EasyDiagnoser Utility Manager BE Settings Reboot HMI Connection Ethernet O USB cable i series only HMI IP DatafEvent Log File Information i i m EasyBuilder Pro EasyConverter EasyAddressviewer F SyDlagnoser EasyPrinter EasyDiagnoser 7 Recipe Extended Memory Editor Build Download Data for CF SO USB Disk Download Upload On line Simulation Off line Simulation Pass through Step 2 Set the IP address of the HMI to communicate with Users can input IP address manually or simply click Search All Please input Project Port as well 673 vb WE NTEK Fasyl iagnoser select HHMI Input HMI IP address IF 192 168 1 103 Project Port select HHI Al A PB Name Search HMI in HM Mame Tina h7387 O01 OOOH Katte fe TEET Demo Joeyi 192 1686 1 237 Demo 87_1200 192 166 1 39 fest Search All 192 168 1 44 Default HMI 192 166 1 47 Tina h47e1 on os 20091002 or later supports Project Port 8000 Ww 674 E WE NTEK Fasyl iagnoser It is also available to right click and select Run EasyDiagnoser for entering the setting window when executing On Line Simulation in EasyBuilder Pro Siemens S7 300 ET
76. 10 data Histor Data Display display all history data on acode History Data Display Keep on sampling new Stops sampling after Data Sampling data reaching 10 data records Cata Format a A Data Sampling may include more than one type of records Data Sampling in EasyBuilder Pro is able to retrieve different types of records at the same time Users can define the content of Data Sampling Data Format e a lO index ss bit Unsiened 1 Presume 1 16 bit tined 2 Temperature 32 bit Float Data Format As shown user defines three types of data with data length 4 words in total In this way EasyBuilder Pro retrieves a 4 words lengthed data each time from the assigned address to be the content in one Data Sampling Description Read Address Save to default 32 bit Signed OK Cancel a2 hit Float 97 Ly WE NTEK Data Sampling Y jy f you have run the simulation and the sampling data is saved in the record then you want to change the format of sampling date be sure to delete previous data record in EasyBuilder Pro installation directory to avoid the system misinterpret the old data record Clear address ee ee If the status of the 7 Enable assigned address is set See P aadressis OO e by Trend Display real time mode will be cleared and the number of data sampling returns zero This won t affect the sampled data that is already saved in file Hold address If
77. 11902 PLC 12 status ethernet set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LB 11903 PLC 13 status ethernet set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LB 11904 PLC 14 status ethernet set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LB 11905 PLC 15 status ethernet set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LB 11906 PLC 16 status ethernet set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LW 9600 16bit PLC 4 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1IP2 IP3 LW 9601 16bit PLC 4 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9602 16bit PLC 4 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9603 16bit PLC 4 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 Lw 9604 16bit PLC 4 s port no RIY RIY LW 9605 16bit PLC 5 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9606 16bit PLC 5 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9607 16bit PLC 5 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1IP2 IP3 574 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits LW 9608 16bit PLC 5 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1IP2 IP3 Lw 9609 16bit PLC 5 s port no RIY R Y LW 9610 16bit PLC 6 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9611 16bit PLC 6 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9612 16bit PLC 6 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1IP2 IP3 LW 9613 16bit PLC 6 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 Lw 9614 16bit PLC 6 s port no RIY RIY
78. 1IP2 IP3 LW 9941 16bit remote HMI 28 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9942 16bit remote HMI 28 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1IP2 IP3 LW 9943 16bit remote HMI 28 s IP3 IP address ean IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 aca ae pe a LW 9945 16bit remote HMI 29 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9946 16bit remote HMI 29 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1IP2 IP3 LW 9947 16bit remote HMI 29 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9948 16bit remote HMI 29 s IP3 IP address en a anced LW LW 9949 16bit remote HMI 29 s port no RW O a LW 9950 16bit remote HMI 30 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9951 16bit remote HMI 30 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9952 16bit remote HMI 30 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 583 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits LW 9953 16bit remote HMI 30 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 Lw 9954 16bit remote HMI 30 s port no RIY R Y LW 9955 16bit remote HMI 31 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9956 16bit remote HMI 31 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9957 16bit remote HMI 31 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9958 16bit remote HMI 31 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 Lw 9959 16bit r
79. 2 SETBITOFF source result bit_pos result is 0 end macro_command INVBIT INVBIT source result bit_pos Description Inverts the state of designated bit position of a data source and put changed data into result Source and bit_pos can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main int source result short bit_pos INVBIT 4 result 1 result 6 source 6 bit_pos 1 INVBIT source result bit_pos result 4 end macro_command 421 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 6 5 Communication DELAY time Description Suspends the execution of the current macro for at least the specified interval time The unit of time is millisecond Time can be a constant or a variable macro_command main int time 500 DELAY 100 delay 100 ms DELAY time delay 500 ms end macro command ADDSUM ADDSUWM source start result data_count Description Adds up the elements of an array source from source start to source start data_count 1 to generate a checksum Puts in the checksum into result Result must be a variable Data_count is the amount of the accumulated elements and can be a constant or a variable macro_command main char data 5 short checksum data 0 0x1 data 1 0x2 data 2 0x3 data 3 0x4 data 4 0x5 ADDSUM data 0 checksum 5 checksum is Oxf end macro command 422 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference XORSUM s
80. 20 a bc char set1 20 char dest1 20 bool success success1 String TrimRight src1 0 set1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 a bc char set2 20 char dest2 20 success2 String TrimRight a bc set2 0 dest2 0 success2 true dest2 a bc char src3 20 ab c char dest3 4 bool success3 success3 String TrimRight src3 0 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro_command Name Stringlnsert 463 success Stringlnsert pos insert start destination start success Stringlnsert pos insert destination start success Stringlnsert pos insert start length destination start success Stringlnsert pos insert length destination start Insert a string in a specific location within the destination string content The insert location is specified by the pos parameter Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference The insert string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start The number of characters to insert can be specified by the length parameter This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of string after insertion exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro command main char str1 20 but the question is
81. 2005 Ethernet Bdk Fun Easy Diaenor After setting completed click OK EasyDiagnoser operation window appears as below U Weintek MT Diagnostic Tool EasyDiagznosr Seles T i rE vi Device Stein 0 ee Address Type Benge f0 ea ho Crd PID Device Bt Index Address Length Time Error PM Devices Chtpiit Folling Packages s l S At x Lagrei Package ID Device Station Index Address Length 15 15 22 Looking for the target HMI E 4c Coral TIM F ILB 00562 1 15 15 22 Connection established with the target Hil a 04 Local Hil Ee nn LB 00574 1 it BF tse SIEMENS Sffs00 M 0000n 4 i 68 14h SIEMENS S7300 a6 OB 10 00000714 675 LS WE NTEK 33 2 EasyDiagnoser Settings Description Save As The captured information of Easy Diagnoser can be saved as xls which can be read in Excel U Weintek MT Diagnostic Ele Vew Opbons Help pave As 4 rite Exit Awa SS Tyler Exit Exit current file Chit Aled Click Device Bar to display Device window Chit AlHP Click Package Bar to display Package window Coit AHL Click Logger Bar to display Logger window Saat Click Output Bar to display Output window Options Toolbars Options Help Display toolbar icons of Device Bar Package Bar Logger Bar Output Bar lv Status Bax W Weintek MT Diarnostic Tool EasyDiagnoser Update Package List
82. 8 C Language 9 C Language 10 C Language 14 CILanguage 12 C Language 13 _J Language 14 language 15 C Language 16 Jlanguage 17 _J Language 18 language 19 Language 20 language 21 Language 22 C Language 23 Language 24 Double click error messages to modify the attributes of relative objects Build font files The simulation is shown below if we change the value of LW 9134 the content of the Text object will be changed English LW 9134 language mode 0 inl tEh SC SIMPLE LW 9134 language mode fa gaH Y KOREAN LW9134 language mode li 372 Lyd WE NTEK Label Library and Multi Language Usage cl A Maximum of 8 languages can be downloaded to HMI at the same time Please confirm your internet connection before downloading the demo project 373 WE NTEK Address Tag Library Chapter 16 Address Tag Library 16 1 Creating Address Tag Library Users are generally recommended to define LEO on commonly used addresses in the address tag Alarm o library when start to build a project It not only LBI avoids inputting addresses repeatedly but also T LB2 expresses the function of an address more Lamp clearly LB Display Display User defined System reserved address tags address tags Addters Tag Library Y Customized System Address tpe Address Fead Write Description Read write To create a new address tag please see next page S
83. Control Time setting address 0 327 L WE NTEK Objects The layout of the Control word is shown below Users set the time acquisition request bit ON 031 to make the system reads the Action mode Start time and End time and uses them as the new scheduled time 15 O Bit Reserved 0 fixed 0 Bit 00 time acquisition request bit 0 no action 1 perform time read NOTE The system would not read start and end time data unless the time acquisition request bit is set ON b Status Time setting address 1 The layout of the Status word is shown below When the system competes the read operation it will turn the time acquisition complete bit ON 031 Also if the read time data is incorrect the error notification bit will be turned ON 071 15 02 01 00 Bit Reserved 0 fixed ofo Bit 00 time acquisition complete bit 0 null 1 read operation complete Bit 01 error notification bit 0 no error 1 start or end time format is incorrect After system reads the time data and turns the time acquisition complete bit ON be sure to turn Control time acquisition request bit OFF Once this bit is turned OFF the system will set both the Status time acquisition complete bit and error notification bit to OFF 328 Ly WE NTEK Objects me Ee oo 4 v I I J I I I I I I I HMI turn ON time acquisti I l i I I ON completion bit 5 8 i Time acquisition
84. E F35 WINDOW 035 E 36 WINDOW 026 202 Lid ge WE NTEK Objects Use the set word object SVW_0O to set the value of LW100 as 35 and the location of indirect window will display window 35 WINDOW 35 Set constant 35 to LA I00 Set constant 36 to LAAIO0 Set constant O to LICO Use the set word object SW_1 to set the value of LW100 as 36 and the location of indirect window will display window 36 Set constant 35 to LM I00 Set constant 36 to LAAIOC Set constant O to LICO No matter window 35 or 36 is displayed on the indirect window location press SW_2 to set the value of LW100 to O will close the popup window The other way to close the popup window from indirect window object is to configure a function key with close window Once you press the function key the popup window will be closed 203 L WE NTEK Objects NOTE Only 16 windows maximum can be displayed simultaneously at run time and do not use this function to open the window when the same window has been opened by function key or direct window 204 LJ WE NTEK Objects 13 12 Direct Window Overview Direct window object is to define a popup window location position size a bit device and a predefined valid window number When the content of the bit device is set ON OFF the window will be popup in the predefined location The popup window will be closed when the content of the bit device is reset The system w
85. Edit View Cption Draw downloading C EB8000434 firmware gui i downloading C EB8000434 firmware driver i downloading C Documents and ee eee ae xob downloading C EB8000434 font MTP1 0 t downloading C EB8000434 font MTP1 1 a scan font finished reboot HMI finished finished Ethernet O USB cable i series only Password Set 3 Save project a 4 Click Download 5 On dialog box tick Automatically using current settings to download after Io com pi I i ng Necessary if update firmware or execute download first time Use user defined startup screen 6 Click Download File location D JanexFF EB fle 016 testpic bmp Browse _ Afte r fi n i sh setti n g y n ext ti me Reset recipe Reset event log Reset data sampling when click Download Reboot HMI after download Automatically using current settings to download after compiling EasyBuilder Pro will automatically compile and download project to the latest target HMI 32 rb WE NTEK Create an EasyBuilder Pro Project m Way 2 Ethernet HMI Name 1 On HMI set HMI name first System 5 ettings Netw ark Time D ate Securit HMI name sett ng gi HMI mame 2 On PC select the set HMI name and start downloading Download Input the HMI name to search the designated HMI A p Hare ee Ethernet O USB cable i series
86. FS Show Object ID HM lear Activity List Show Status Bar At the bottom of EasyDiagnoser window display information of CAP NUM and SCRL Update Package List When users change window on HMI update the Polling Package information of current window with this list Show Object ID HMI Show the ID of objects in HMI as shown below 676 vb WE NTEK Fasyl iagnoser Activity area Clear Activity List Clear all information in activity area About EasyDiarnoser EasyDiagnoser Version 1 1 ey Copyright tC 2008 In the activity area users can observe the communication between HMI and PLC Command Read rite Device Address Type QV A A A AA A A A A Device SIEMENS S7300 Local Hhil Local HM SIEMENS S7300 Local Hh Local Hh SIEMENS 57 300 Local Hh Local Hh SIEMENS S7300 Local H il Index Address Length L610 00000 14 LB 00562 I 14 LB 00574 1 Mi 00000 s 1 LB 00562 I 1 LB 00574 1 C610 00000 14 LB 00562 S14 LB 00574 1 Mi 00000 s 1 LB 00562 I 14 mm wi Time 50 20 10 40 20 70 30 20 20 40 20 Error ma Om A A A A A oo ef Piy Item Description Command a Read Write Display Read and Write commands in activity area b Read Display only Read commands in activity area 677 T Z r m A c Write Display only Write commands in activity area Device a All
87. IP3 LW 9836 16bit remote HMI 8 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9837 16bit remote HMI 8 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1IP2 IP3 LW 9838 16bit remote HMI 8 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9839 16bit remote HMI 8 s port no LW 9905 16bit remote HMI 21 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9906 16bit remote HMI 21 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9907 16bit remote HMI 21 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9908 16bit remote HMI 21 s IP3 IP address oe ae aan LW LW 9909 16bit remote HMI 21 s port no RW O a LW 9910 16bit remote HMI 22 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 581 WE INTEK System Reserved Words Bits 16bit remote HMI 22 s IP1 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 16bit remote HMI 22 s IP2 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9913 16bit remote HMI 22 s IP3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 Lw 9914 16bit remote HMI 22 s port no 16bit remote HMI 23 s IPO IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 16bit remote HMI 23 s IP14 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 16bit remote HMI 23 s IP2 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 16bit remote HMI 23 s IP3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9919 16bit remote HMI 23 s port no ae 16bit remote HMI 24 s IPO IP address BHH IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9921 16bit remote HMI 24
88. Information LW 9116 32bit project size in bytes LW 9118 32bit project size in K bytes LW 9122 16bit project compiled date year LW 9123 16bit project compiled date month LW 9124 16bit project compiled date day LW 9100 16bit project name 16 words R RR RT LW 9120 32bit compiler version R R R R R R 565 Li WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 14 MODBUS Server Communication LB 9055 MODBUS server COM 1 receives a request ee aeron EENES LB 9056 MODBUS server COM 2 receives a request oe no ESEJE LB 9057 MODBUS server COM 3 receives a request amor ESEJES LB 9058 MODBUS server ethernet receives a request oe enon ESESES LW 9270 nee request s function code MODBUS me we ESESES LW 9271 ee request s starting address MODBUS ne eeu ESESES LW 9272 request s quantity of registers m MODBUS server COM 1 pe RIR LW 9275 seen request s function code MODBUS ee enc peter LW 9276 se request s starting address MODBUS me cs ESESES LW 9277 es request s quantity of registers Basa MODBUS server COM 2 RT RIR LW 9280 request s function code MODBUS mes cg ESEJES LW 9281 ee request s starting address MODBUS men r eous ESEJES LW 9282 request s quantity of registers ae MODBUS server COM 3 pe RR LW 9285 Ea request s function code MODBUS ee e ESESED LW 9286 ie request s starting address MODBUS ee ocr peter LW 9287 A req
89. LW 9615 16bit PLC 7 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1IP2 IP3 LW 9616 16bit PLC 7 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9617 16bit PLC 7 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9618 16bit PLC 7 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1IP2 IP3 Lw 9619 16bit PLC 7 s port no RIY R Y LW 9620 16bit PLC 8 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9621 16bit PLC 8 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9622 16bit PLC 8 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9623 16bit PLC 8 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1IP2 IP3 Lw 9624 16bit PLC 8 s port no RIY RIY LW 9625 16bit PLC 9 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9626 16bit PLC 9 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9627 16bit PLC 9 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9628 16bit PLC 9 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1IP2 IP3 575 Ly WE INTEK System Reserved Words Bits 576 Lyh WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 18 Communication Status with PLC USB LB 9190 auto connection for PLC USB when ON R Y LB 9191 PLC status USB set on to retry connection R Y 577 Lie WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 19 Communication Status with PLC CAN Bus LB 12080 Auto connection for PLC CAN Bus when R W R Y R Y ON LB 12081 PLC status CAN Bus set on to retry
90. Label Library isk bel ibis rs 2 Create a _ Use bitmap font _ Lahel Library Numeric Input and use T System Tag LW 9134 New Homeric Input Object Attribute General Data Entry Numeric Format Security Shane Font Font Ar a Description Color i size 16 Alien Left i Blink None C Read Write use different addresses E Italic F Tnderline Read address Duplicate these attributes to PLC name Local HMI etting Every language Address Lw 9134 16bit language mode a Movement Direction No movement ka PLC name Local HMI Device type LW 9134 16bit language mode Address LA J ry z System tag Address Format DODDO range 0 10799 Content T 7 Cinder register Tag Library 371 L teh WE NTEK Label Library and Multi Language Usage When compiling tick the defined and needed languages Project name C Documents and Settings Tinal604 Am MTP 1 mtp xE file name C Documents and Settings Tinal604 MTP 1 xob ZOIB password Setting fused in decompiler Decompilation is prohibited Select the languages used on the HMI Startup language after redownloading the project Language 1 we Language 1 Language 2 Language 3 Language 4 Language 5 Language 7 Language
91. Libraries which have been added into the current project Select the library source of a Picture from the list Select the state that current graph represents If the selected Picture isn t displayed it means that the Picture does not exist or the state of the Picture isn t defined Select Lib Click Select Lib and the following dialog appears for users to select the file path of the Picture Library to be added By previewing the content of the library right side of the window users can select suitable library 360 Ly WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Librar New Lib Hew Library 2f ooo Benen T a9 becaround t TH Aag AMERICA J i Ef fag ASIA fb zi butoni 32 8 o EROE TB buttont_64 fb Big OCEANIA SB butto fb Sioni fb TS atten 3216 be mapi fb ES button _64 Z moleyer fb Ta butong b TA MTOO00 Dors p9 BE buttona 2b T M18000 Dere Bi butoni 4fb TAMTO Dem Ti burteei fb TE M10009 Dem SS bettors _ Fb TA MIGO Dem OO p TS butroi d TA MT000_Ders ae Ti computer fb Ti Tor fb on gt wo gt Ma Fie pame background Fates of type pictae ib fb bb Co Unattach Lib Click the button to delete the Picture Library in Library from the current project Warning oJ j Ficture 4 This picture is used in 1 Window 8 BLO 2 Window 8 BL 3 Window 6 BL_2 4 Window 6 BLS Do you really want bo Unatkach this library cancel Delete All States Delete all states of the selected Picture Del
92. Management Interface ccccccccssecccessceceeseceeeseeeeeeecesseeeeseees 484 18 9 Some Notes about Using the Macro s ssesesssssssesresssrsurensasessasrssssrssroesasessasrssnersareesarreses 491 18 10 Use the Free Protocol to Control a Device osssessssserssserrssserrssserrssserresserresserresseeess 492 18 11 Compiler Error Message eae ceissscnanuradszacucnt anne vannncesdarendenssetsparaesancrsoartsendncscanaunedbaraeesiaacsaoat 498 152 Sampe Mairo OG mereinen snares penn sectesctoesceeeatoaseraeenserenmneaeaaonaseundeeen EN 504 18 15 Macro TRACE FUNCUON sacarenncesunasaca niie nen E ANE ENEE EE EE N ER 509 18 14 The Usage of String Operation FUNCTIONS ceccccsecccsecccencceensceeuecceeceeeceeenceteneeeness 518 18 15 Macro Password POLE CHOM sicccascsavssaecsscssnacarsaizaranasunaniesavanapassesaracsteesnbeceranswansnenessancoused 529 Chapter 19 Set HMI as a MODBUS Server cccceeccccssececesececeesceceeneceeeeceeeeecesseneeeseaecessuecesseneeees 531 19 1 Setting HMI as MODBUS Device ccccccssccesccescceeccnsccsscesccesccesccaeessecssecesecesecaseeaeeeaes 531 19 2 Changing the Station Number of a MODBUS Server in RUNTIME ccccceeseceeeeeeeeeeees 538 19 3 About MODBUS Address Type cccsssccccssececesececeeseccceseceeenececausceseuseeeeeaeceseueceseuscesagaess 539 Chapter 20 How to Connect a Barcode DeVICEC cccccccsssecccsensceccceeccesaeeceessueeeesseueeeesaaeeseesas
93. O Backspace O Clear Or use PLC Control O ASCII UNICODE Screen hardcopy to start printing by predefined bit Window title bar registers Hard copy screen ta USB disk SD card or printer SP M D E F MaE grayscale Screen hard copy Printer Rotate image 90 degrees Mode Description i PL name Local HMI Import user data Use USB Security Key Attribute Notification Type of control Screen hardcopy Enable Active only when designated window opened F Rotate image 90 degrees Trigger address PLE name Setting Trigger mode oFF Or vw Source Window For print O Current base window O Designate window na PLC name Setting Printer SP M D E F v Mode black and white Cancel rant 603 WE NTEK Recipe Editor Chapter 24 Recipe Editor 24 1 Introduction Recipe Editor is used to create view edit Recipe rcp and EMI emi files HMI Open Utility Manager and click Recipe Extended Memory Editor EasyBuilder Pro also provides another for editing recipe Recipe Records this can be found in EasyBuilder Pro System Paramter Settings Recipe tab and can used with Recipe View Object The a and i ak 3 for f F hy ra tool 245 tool l 7 j Recipe Editor
94. Object size 92076 bytes Font size 314444 bytes Picture size 3353858 bytes Shape size 108 bytes Sound size 36474 bytes Total size 3796960 bytes 3 62M succeeded Double click error messages to modify the attribute of relative objects euid font fles When attempting to decompile a XOB file that is already set to Decompilation is prohibited an error message This xob ts set to not decompile will be shown Decompile XOB file name CA Documents and Settings nicolas wu testdema xob Project file name C Documents and Settings nicolas wu Am testdemo mtp KOB password Decompiling This xob is set to not decompile L tgs WE NTEK 30 3 Disable HMI Upload Function LB 9033 Project Protection EasyBuilder Pro provides system reserved address LB 9033 When this address is set to ON HMI will disable upload function of XOB file HMI needs to be rebooted to activate LB 9033 Addres Tag Library Customized C System Address tag name LB 9022 LE 5023 LE 9024 LE 9025 LE 5026 LE 5027 LE 9028 LE 5029 LE 5030 LE 9031 LE 5032 LE 9033 LE 9034 LE 9035 LE 5036 LE 5037 LE 9038 LE 5039 LE 5040 LE 904 LE 5042 LE 5043 O a a T a a delete the earliest event log file on HM memory set OM delete all event log files on HMI memory set ON refresh event log information on HMI memory set ON delete the earliest data sampling file on HM mem
95. Project password MTP file Please refer to 5 5 1 66 Lyh WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 6 Font Parameters in Font tab determine the font of non ASCII which is used in EasyBuilder Pro System Parameter Sethinrs r Extended Memory Device Model Fonte for non ascit shines 1 Alberts Bold Albertis Extra Bold Albertus Medium Antique Olive Artal Arial Black Arial Bold Arial Narrow Artal Narrow Bold Batang Book Antiqua Book Antiqua Bold Bookman Old Ste Bookshelf Symbol 7 Calibri Calibri Bold Cambria Cambria Bold Century Gothic Century Gothic Bold Comit Sans MS Comic sans Me Bold Consolas Consolas Bold Constantia Constantia Bold Corbel Corbel Bold Counter Hew Courier New Bold Franklin Gothic Medium Caranvond Georgia Georgia Bold Gulim HMI 500 lop LAMTI SON an Add Al Non ascu Fonts 67 Printer Backup Server General System tetting Security e Mail 3 Recipes Font Delete All Line spacing O Ly WE NTEK System Parameter Settings Fonts for non strings Fonts for non ASCII strings are listed above When users use non ASCII character set or double byte character set including simplified or traditional Chinese character Japanese or Korean which is not listed in Fonts for non ASCII strings table E
96. R EE E E ER 630 26 4 1 The Default Convert Batch File sesssssseseseeseseessrrrssrerssresssereseereseersseeessereseereseeree 630 20A Pece TEE e E A E A 631 26 4 3 The Format of a Convert Batch File sesssssssssessseessserssrerssrerssrerssersssereserreseerseeree 632 26 4 4 The Order of Examining Criteria osseseseeseseesssrrssrrrssrerssressrrreserreseerssereseereseerse 632 Chapter 27 Ea y SIA O eane eE EE AOA OE 633 DTA Pr opare Necdet FCS erriaren E E EE 633 27 2 Modify the Content of XOD pos def cece cceecccessecccesececeesceeceeceeeeeceseeseeeseaeceseuecesseaees 634 Chapter 28 Multi HMI Intercommunication Master Slave Mod e ccccccccsssseseesseseseneseseeeeeees 635 28 1 How to Create a Project Of Master HMI cccccssecccesececeseceeesececeeceeeeseeeseaeceseeecessenees 636 28 2 How to Create a Project Of Slave HMI ccecccccssecccesececeesceeeeseceeeeeceseeseeeseaecesenecesaenees 637 28 3 How to Connect with MT500 Project of Slave HM1 csccccsssecccesececeseeeeeseceseeecesseaees 640 Chapter 29 Pass Through FUNCTtION ccccccssecccesscccesecccesececausceceeneceseaeceseuscessueeeseecessuecessgeeeees 643 ZO A EREE IV OCC earne A awe eacosemusdabanciegoeareeeacs sug taccsumnuactasanedeeererenos ences 644 29 1 1 How to Change the Virtual Serial POrt cc cc ceccccsssececesececeececeeeeeeseeceseneceseuaes 645 29 12 HOW TO Use Ethemet Mode ceense a ia 647 FOZ
97. Reference if k 0 O then SetData k 1 Device 1 4x 0 1 else SetData k 2 Device 1 4x 0 1 end if if k 0 O then SetData k 1 Device 1 4x 1 1 else if k 2 1 then SetData k 3 Device 1 4x 2 1 end If if k 0 O then SetData k 1 Device 1 4x 3 1 else if k 2 2 then SetData k 3 Device 1 4x 4 1 else SetData k 4 Device 1 4x 5 1 end If end macro command 5 while and wend statements macro_command main chari 0 int a 13 b 14 c 4848 b 0 13 while b 0 ali 20 i 10 if ali 120 then c 200 break end if i i 1 506 L WE NTEK Macro Reference wend SetData c Device 1 4x 2 1 end macro command 6 break and continue statements macro_command main chari 0 int a 13 b 14 c 4848 b 0 13 while b 0 ali 20 i 10 if ali 120 then c 200 i i 1 continue end if i i 1 if c 200 then SetData c Device 1 4x 2 1 break end if wend end macro command 7 Array macro_command main int a 25 b 25 i b 0 13 507 L WE NTEK for 0 to b O step 1 ali 20 1 10 next i SetData a 0 Device 1 4x 0 13 end macro command 508 Macro Reference L WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 13 Macro TRACE Function 1 TRACE function is added to MACRO and can be used with EasyDiagnoser for viewing current content of the var
98. SERWER S0 PLC IJF T COM COM1 9600 E 5 1 O Settings If PLC I F is set to Ethernet the IP address is set as shown PLO type MODBUS server COM Ethemet Y 1 00 MODBUS_ SERVER S0 PLC I F Ethernet IP Local Port 8000 HMI Fort Settings _ Use UDP User Datagram Protocol Please refer to HMI Port no to set MODBUS Server Port no Go to Model tab of System Parameter Settings the HMI Port no is shown there System Parameter Sethings Extended Memory Frimnten Backup Server e M ail Recipes Device Model General ayten tettiin SeCUrty Font HMI model eM T2105 00 x 600 4 HMI station no Fort no wd as MODBUS server s port no After finishing the setting MODBUS Server will be listed in Device tab 533 Lb WE NTEK Set HMI as a MODBUS Server You can send MODBUS command to read or write the data from MODBUS Server after downloading the XOB file to HMI oy stem Parameter Settings Extended Memory Printer Backup Server iii el EE System Setting Font Location Device type Interface fF Protoc Local eM T3105 00x Disable Wis MODBUS server COM 1 9600 E 5 1 534 Lb WE NTEK Set HMI as a MODBUS Server 19 1 2 Read from Write to MODBUS Server HMI the client can
99. Shane Font General Security Shape Label eie e iH Baien eea eaaa a Mode Touch pi Description Write addres PLC name Local HMI Address LB o Input order Write after button is released Enable Attribute 2 M Set style Zet ON w Step 4 TERT Create a Set Bit object D g spop keypi LB 0 Set ON and overlay it on the Numeric Input object Step 5 Add Set Bit objects on Enter and ESC function keys respectively LB 0 Set OFF in this way when users press either Enter or ESC will close the keyboard 140 Ly WE NTEK Keyboard Design and Usage 12 3 Steps to Design a Fixed Keyboard on Screen Users can also place a fixed keyboard on the window instead of popup keyboard or direct window The keyboard can t be moved or canceled this way Step 1 Create a Numeric Input object in Data Entry Keyboard don t tick Use a popup keypad Eeyboard Use a popup keypad Step 2 Use 2r Function Keys to design the keyboard and place them on screen Step 3 Press Numeric Input object users can input value with function keys directly 141 Ly WE NTEK Keyboard Design and Usage 12 4 Steps to Design a UNICODE Keyboard Hew ASCIL Input Object er ae ae Backspace A nr ac ace General Data Entry Security Shape Font U N C O D J ASCII UNICODE Em Description FK_0 C
100. Today or E 111949 5 Yesterday 0111 19 52 Word Within Select the range of time period for example Select Yesterday in Start and select 2 day s It means to save the files yesterday and the day before yesterday Select All to save all the files available in the system Range atat Today Yesterday Attribute There are two ways to activate Backup function a Touch trigger Touch the object to activate backup operation b External trigger bit Register a bit device to trigger the backup operation ON OFF Bit device change from ON to OFF to activate backup operation OFF ON Bit device change from OFF to ON to activate backup operation ON OFF Bit device change state to activate backup operation 291 Ly b WE NTEK Objects Trigger address When use External trigger assign an appropriate bit device as shown below Trigger Mode Extemal tigger bit v Condition OFF gt ON v Trigger address PLC name Local HMI Setting Address LB Jlo 292 c External trigger word When selecting External trigger word users can specify the number of days to backup data using Trigger address Trigger Mode External trigger word Syntax Trigger address PLC name Local HMI E Setting Address Ly ry 0 Trigger address usage suppose the current Trigger Address is set to LW O LW 0 When the value of this add
101. War 39 E ajm Tid p s MT oot het ate i eis aia VEDIE ST F TEA t ATY 4 13 92 14 RY Event 0 v jhen LWO 00 Seguence no Return to normal Select box Format trigger date trigger time notification time return to normal time Sort Set the order to display alarm message Time ascending Put the latest trigger alarm message in the bottom Time descending Put the latest trigger alarm message in the top Order amp Characters Users can decide the display item and how the item display order Date Event trigger date Display the date tag with alarm message There are four formats of date tag 1 MM DD YY 2 DD MM YY 3 DD MM YY 4 YY MM DD Time Event trigger time Display the time tag with alarm message There are three formats of time tag 1 HH MM SS 2 HH MM 3 DD HH MM 4 HH The font tab sets the font size and italic attribute The font of event message is set with the event log object 285 Lg WE NTEK Objects 13 23 Data Transfer Trigger based Overview Data Transfer Trigger based object can transfer values from the source registers to the destination registers The data transfer operation can be activated by pressing the object or setting a trigger bit Configuration Click Data Transfer Trigger based object icon on the toolbar Data Nex Transfer Trigger based object dialog box will show up set each item in the General tab press OK button anew Trigger Da
102. a more efficient communication with PLC 636 ye WE NTEK Multi HMI Intercommunication Master Slave Mode 28 2 How to Create a Project of Slave HMI The project content of HMI 2 in System Parameter Settings Device Device list Mame Location Interface Local HMI Local Disable FATEE FB sernes COM 1 master slave mode FA TEE FB Senes COM 1 11 5200 E Device type Local HMI Due to the PLC that HMI 2 reads from is connected with HMI 1 thus HMI 2 views PLC as a remote device Therefore it is necessary to add a Remote PLC 1 into the device list and in this case is FATEK FB Series The way to create Remote PLC 1 is described below 1 Create a new device FATEK FB Series PLC default station no must be the same as the connected PLC PLC type FATEK FB Series je V 1 70 FATEK_FB s0 PLC TF RS 232 ve com COMI Settings PLC default station mo 1 Default station no use station no variable 2 Correctly set the parameters COM 1 of HMI 2 connects with COM 570 ERT 3 of HMI 1 so they both must have HAEA the same communication parameters and interfaces ignoring the PLC parameters As below use RS232 PLC type FATEK FE Series parameters 115200 E 8 1 PLC defa Baud rate 115200 C Defa Data bits Bits Parity Even i ii Stop bits Let 637 Lb WE NTEK Multi HMI Intercommunication Master Slave Mode
103. aBcDe char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 String ToUpper src1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 ABCDE char dest2 4 bool success2 success2 String oUpper aBcDe dest2 0 I success2 false dest2 remains the same end macro_command Name String ToLower success String ToLower source start destination start success StringToLower source destination start Description Convert all the characters in the source string to lowercase characters and store the result in the destination buffer The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of result string after conversion exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false Example macro command main SSS 460 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference char src1 20 aBcDe char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 String ToUpper src1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 abcde char dest2 4 bool success2 success2 String oUpper aBcDe dest2 0 I success2 false dest2 remains the same end macro command Name String ToReverse Description success StringToReverse source start destination start success StringToReverse source destination start Reverse the characters i
104. address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of designated address or users can also set address in Attribute Low High limit Constant C Addes PLE name Local HMI w Setting Address Liw 7 Slo 16 bit Unsigned Coarse increment Increment 10 Control address High Limit 16 bit format Address 0 Address 1 32 bit format Address 0 Address 2 Coarse increment If this option is selected the word value will increase decrease one increment value for every touch activation If not the word value will be set the value in accord with the touch activated point Slider button type There are four slider button types for selection You also can adjust the width of moving piece Color This is used to select slide object frame background and slot s color Slider button type Slot Frame Background 182 L WE NTEK Objects 13 9 Numeric Input and Numeric Display Overview Both of the Numeric Input object and the Numeric Display object can be used to display the value of the word devices The difference is the numeric input object can be used to input data from the keypad the input value is written to the designated word devices Configuration a new Numeric Input Object or Numeric Display Object will be created Click the Numeric Input or Numeric Display icon on the toolbar and the New Numeric Input Object
105. and DD respectively Data Sampling Object Ole Read address Sample mode le Clear address Hold address Auto stop Local HMI LWO Periodical Local HMI LWO Periodical Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference The directory of saved data Storage location filename yyyymmdd dtl The data sampling files under the same directory are sorted according to the file name and are indexed starting from 0 The most recently saved file has the smallest file index number For example if there are four data sampling files as follows 20101210 dtl 20101230 dtl 20110110 dtl 20110111 dtl The file index are 20101210 dtl gt index is 3 20101230 dtl gt index is 2 20110110 dtl gt index is 1 20110111 dtl gt index is 0 return_value equals to 1 if referred data sampling file is successfully found otherwise it equals to 0 data_log number year month and day can be constant or variable Index and return_value must be variable The return_ value field is optional macro_command main short data_log_ number 1 year 2010 month 12 day 10 index short success if there exists a data sampling file named 20101210 dtl with data sampling number 1 and file index 2 the result after execution success 1 and index Description A query function for finding the date of specified event log file according to file index The date is stored into year mont
106. be following introduces the usage of these two editing tools 24 2 Recipe Extended Memory Editor Setting How to add new rcp emi files Set Address Range gt Select Data Format Set Data Format Address range Address range unit word Fill in address range eo the unit is word Data format size Description recipe no product Delete 32 bit Unsigned price barcode 1 WORD 10 WORDS 2 WORDS 10 WORDS 16 bit Unsigned String ASCI Data format String ASCII Edit new data format in this field 604 Select your data format Save the specified data format for next time loading The saved file name dataEX fmt under EasyBuilder Pro installation directory EJ Select your data format Data 0 Save Format Delete Format Add jesse Clear All Modity gt Cancel Lyh WE NTEK Recipe Editor a Example 1 Click Add Data Type Description Description price 0 Input the name of the data type C 16 bit BCO C 32 bit BCO 16 bit HE C 32 bit HEX 16 bit Unsigned C 16 bit Signed z E Data format Select data 32 bit Unsigned 32 bit Signed format If select String please input the length Float words and ASCII Unicode string WORLDS fo ASC C Unicode Cancel Set Data Format Address range unit word Select your data format Data 0 From ji To 2300 Save Format Delete Format Data format 16 bit U
107. data blocks in trend curve for example it can display two data blocks LW12 LW15 and RW12 RW15 in trend curve simultaneously It is very useful to observe and compare the difference of trend curves Display Control 30 20 10 ail LW12 LW13 LW14 LW15 LW10 LW11 LW LW13 LW14 LW15 Snapshot of Data Block Display 250 WE NTEK Objects Configuration New object Click the Data Block Display icon Data Block Display s properties dialog ESI as box appears as follows Hew Data Block Display Object General Display Area Shape _ Description No of channel 1 Cursor line Enable e wy PLC mame Local HMI se Setting Address it i Channel 0 Control addres m i 7 o f PLZ name Local HMI WF Setting L 2 SSS Address LW No of data address ins Offset to start address Data storage start address ical HMI Setting Address Ly ellis 16 bit Unsigned PLE name L Limit Cancel No of channel Set the no of channel for this object Each channel represents one data block The max no of channel is 12 Cursor Line Using the Cursor line function when user touches the Data Block display object it will display a cursor line on the data block display object and transfer the position of cursor and the data at the cursor positio
108. device change from OFF to ON to activate data transfer operation ON OFF Bit device change state to activate data transfer operation Attribute No of word Trigger address 288 Li WE NTEK Objects 13 24 Backup Overview The backup function can store the recipe data RW RW_A event log and sampling data to USB device or Remote backup server The LB 9039 represents the backup status when backup operation is in progress the status of LB 9039 is ON Configuration Click Backup Object icon on the toolbar the Backup Object dialog box will show up Ei Description POVIE OREW gt RW A Historical event log Historical dats semphne Backup position 8D card USB disk Reniote proven backup server Note Use L W 9032 00239 to change the backup folder name Note Use Remote printen backup server to stove data to a remote PC Enable the server in Syvetem Parameter Printer Backup server sethngs eave fornat Format eM T3000 SERIES Event Log File tevt Rangt atat Today Yesterday Within Al 4 Trigger Mode External tigger bit Condition OFFO Trigeer address PLC name Local HME setting Address LB mr 289 L WE NTEK Objects Source RW RW_A Historical event log Historical data sampling Select one from the above for the source There may be several data sampling objects registered in the project If you select Hi
109. event log information on HMI memory set ON LB 9034 save event data sampling to HMI USB disk SD card set ON LB 9042 acknowledge all alarm events set ON LB 9043 unacknowledged events exist when ON LB 11940 delete the earliest event log file on SD card set ON LB 11942 refresh event log information on SD card set ON LB 11943 delete the earliest event log file on USB set ON ws 906 9450 LW 9451 16bit time tag of event log minute Note LW 9452 16bit time tag of event log hour Note LW 9453 16bit time tag of event log day Note1 LW 9454 16bit time tag of event log month Note1 LW 9455 16bit LW 10480 LW 10481 32bit LW 10483 16bit LW 10484 32bit time tag of event log year Note 1 16bit no of event log files on SD card VIIDI size of event log files on SD card x No no of event log files on USB size of event log files on USB N 554 System Reserved Words Bits Read R Write W Control Y Remote Local MACRO HMI HMI R Y W W W W W W R R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y Lig WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 1 If LW 9450 LW 9455 are used as tags of Event Log time source please set system parameters General correctly 555 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 6 HMI Hardware Operation Address LB 9018 LB 9019 LB 9020 LB 9033 LB 9040 LB 9041 LB 904
110. float e 1024 2 Amaximum of 255 macros are allowed in an EasyBuilder Pro project 3 Amacro may cause the HMI to lock up Possible causes are A macro contains an infinite loop with no PLC communication The size of an array exceeds the storage space in a macro 4 PLC communication time may cause the macro to execute slower than expected Also too many macro instructions may slow down the PLC communication 491 L pt WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 10 Use the Free Protocol to Control a Device When EasyBuilder Pro does not provide an essential driver for communication with a device Users also can make use of OUTPORT and INPORT to control the device The data sent with OUTPORT and INPORT must follow the device s communication protocol The following example explains how to use these two functions to control a MODBUS RTU device First create a new device in the device table The device type of the new device is set to Free Protocol and named with MODBUS RTU device as follows Device list No Local HME gcal HM Local MT8121T 800 x 600 Disable Local PLC 1 MODBUS RTU Device Lo zal Free Protocol ale Uplate st 1 Name Location Device type interface Device Properties PLC I F COM COM1 19200 E 8 1 The interface of the device PLC I F uses RS 232 now If connecting a MODBUS TCP IP device the interface must select Ethernet In addition it is necessary to
111. grl i Y x ne Down direction b No of channel Set the no of channels of the XY plot Each channel may conduct the draw operation alone Control address PLC name Select the PLC where the control address coming from Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of Control address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Device type select the device type where the control address coming from Control address Control address is used to control the display of XY curve for each channel 1 Plot XY curve Write 1 to control address the system will plot the XY curve the previous XY curve if exists would not be clear The system will reset the control address after operation complete 263 L WE NTEK Objects 2 Clear XY trend curve Write 2 to control address the system will clear all the previous XY curves and reset the control address after operation complete 3 Refresh XY trend curve Write 3 to control address the system will clear the previous XY curve and plot the new XY curve and reset the control address after operation complete No of data address This address store the number of XY data Each channel can have up to 1023 XY data Channel Setting the channels detail for graph display Read Address PLC name Select the PLC where the control address coming from Click Setting t
112. high byte and low byte data then display Channel 1 tine 5 wordia character no 4 UNICODE Display Center Revers hishlow byte a 247 Lb WE NTEK Objects Hew History Data Display Object General Data Format Title Shape Use title Title background Transparent Label library Label tag Use title To enable or disable title No Time Date ChO 5272 PZ ASUS TOUT 4 5271 22 43 08 16 09 07 Title background Transparent To enable or disable transparent Background color Set the background color of title 248 W WE NTEK Objects Setting This dialog window defines the title 5272 22 43 0 noor A 5271 22 43 08 16 09 07 You can use label tag library for title with multi language Go to setting and select one from label library Title Setting Title Label tag no label Note If you have run the off line simulation and the sampling data is saved in the record then you want to change the format of sampling data be sure to delete previous data record in C EasyBuilder Pro HMI_memory datalog to avoid the system misinterpret the old data record 249 E WE NTEK Objects 13 19 Data Block Display Overview Data Block is a combination of several word devices with continuous address for example LW12 LW13 LW14 LW15 and so on Use Data Block Display object to display multiple
113. i B i 1 6 i ae ON l Time acquisition l l l request bit OFF o o a SE PLCI trig i i i i i 4 oi 4 4 HMI confirmi time acquisition HMI confirmi time acquisition request bit is ON request bit is OFF Data reac HMI read l i completion bit OFF poi i i HMI set oOo 4 When an error occurs Y f 1 HMI turn ON error i f ia ae 5 8 Error notification bit notification bit HMI set OFF lt P communication time lag HMI turn OFF the bit user turn OFF the bit c Action mode Time setting address 2 Enable and disable the Termination time action and Setting on individual day 15 02 01 00 Reserved 0 fixed ofo Bit 00 Termination time setting 0 disable 1 enable Bit 01 Setting on individual day 0 disable 1 enable NOTE 1 If setting on individual day is OFF the system still reads all 11 word devices but ignores the end time data 2 If setting on individual day is ON be sure to enter all start and end time information If 2 or more of the start end day bits are turned ON simultaneously an error occurs 329 L WE NTEK Objects d Start End Day Start Day Time setting address 3 End Day Time setting address 7 Designates the day used as a trigger for the start termination action 15 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Reserved 0 fixed Bit 00 Sunday 0 none 1 select Bit Bit 01 Monday 0 none 1 select Bit 02 Tuesday 0 none 1 s
114. if not please refer to installation steps to manually install 34 Create an EasyBuilder Pro Project m Way 4 USB Disk SD Card Project Manager 1 In Utility Manager click Build Download Select the folder to save download data Data for CF SD USB n OLPCes Disk to build the data to be Preiect downloaded first Generally ee l Recipe RW divided into 2 directories if set as the way shown MlRecipe A RWA PLEASE INPUT RECIPE_A FILE NAME Data log PLEASE INPUT DATA LOG FILE NAME The download data storing structure Dewnload Upload This directory is F Download eMT 3000 generated when history downloading history data 2 Insert external devices to HMI 3 Select Download and input correct password 4 Password confirmed show directories in external RRS Hier EW OaB AB pau device pccard SD CF Card usbdisk USB Disk 5 Select a directory for storing project then click OK to start downloading Downlo _ lt ttings x a Directory usbdisk disk_a_1 Download Password l ES pecard EA usbdisk e disk al HE PP Pe vy Attachments _2012 01 2 t Download HF eMT3000 PA history HF GIMP a mts8000 Please select the top layer directory of the target file when downloading For the structure above select download not eMT3000 or history 35 Ly WE NTEK Hardware Settings Chapter 4 Hardware Settings 4 1 I O Ports of HM
115. in X axis w scaling Data format Address to Address to control object control Moving state Distance on the Y axis 16 bit format Address 1 32 bit format Address 2 f X axis w reverse scaling This function is the same as X axis w scaling but the moving direction is in reverse g Y axis w reverse scaling This function is the same as Y axis w scaling but the moving direction is in reverse Display ratio The size of shape in different states can be set individually as shown in the picture below Ratio 1 Ratio Ratio 14 Ratio 16 Limit address The object s moving range can be set not only by Min X Max X and Min Y Max Y but also by the designated registers Supposed that the object s moving range is set by the value of the designated register Address then the address of Min X Max X and Min Y Max Y are listed in the following table Data format Min X Max X Min Y Max Y address address address coor 16 bit format Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 3 32 bit format Address 2 Address 4 Address 6 214 Wa WE NTEK Objects 13 14 Animation Overview The Animation object is used to place an object on the screen at a specified location determined by a predefined path and data in the PLC The state and the absolute location of the shape on the screen depend on current reading value of two continuous PLC registers Typically th
116. interval 0 5 second si Automatic JOG Periodically decrement function A set word object can use the interval set in Time interval and the value set in Dec value to automatically decrease the value of the word device and the result won t go less than the value in Bottom limit Attribute Set Style Automatic JOG down to low limit w Dec value 1 0 Bottom limit 0 m Time interval 1 0 second s 159 L WE NTEK Objects E Periodical bounce Periodically bouncing function A Set word object will add the value set in Inc value to the value of the word device with the regulated interval set in Time interval until the result value reaches the value in Upper limit and then subtract the value set in Inc value from the value of the word device with the regulated interval set until the result value reaches the value in the Bottom limit For example the value in the word device will change periodically from 0 10 then from 10 0 Attabute set Style Periodic step up dow to high p Low limit 0 High limit 10 Inc value 1 Time interval 0 5 second s E Periodical step up Stepping up function A Set word object will add the value set in Inc value to the value of the word device with the regulated interval set in Time interval until the result value reaches the value in the High limit and the value of the word device will return to the value
117. is made up of statements The statements contain constants variables and operations The statements are put in a specific order to create the desired output A Macro is constructed in the following fashion Global Variable Declaration Optional Sub Function Block Declarations Optional Local Variable Declarations End Sub macro_command main Required Local Variable Declarations Statements end macro_command Required Macro must have one and only one main function which is the execution start point of macro The format is macro_command Function_Name end macro_command Local variables are used within the main macro function or in a defined function block Its value remains valid only within the specific block Global variables are declared before any function blocks and are valid for all functions in the macro When local variables and global variables have the same declaration of name only the local variables are valid The example below is a simple Macro which includes a variable declaration and a function call macro_command main short pressure 10 local variable declaration setData pressure Allen Bradley DF1 N7 0 1 function calling end macro_command 390 E WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 3 Syntax 18 3 1 Constants and Variables 18 3 1 1Constants Constants are fixed values and can be written directly into statements The format is as below Must begin with 0x 0x3b Oxffff 0x237 ASCII String mus
118. object dialog select PLC click Controller Tags and select a controller tag Mew Hit Lamp Object General Security Shane Denim Read address PLO name Allen Bradley EtherNet IP Tag CompactLogix w Tag 0 _ P Meme Datla Type Description fee Controller Tass E ArcayBool BOOL 256 bl BOOL VarBool BOOL Blinking Mode Joo cereal 687 Lib WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names 34 2 Adding New Data Type Step 1 Right click on the assigned data type usually labeled as User Defined then click New Data Type to start editing Sinoctore Editor Data Types i i E Strings HA Dati Types E Predefined E Module Defined Mame Description Data Type Description o en Paste Edit Celera Omember Step 2 Input the Name of the data type Description can be skipped For adding data member click Add sioctire Editor As Ky F New Data Type Data Types User Defined E Strings Predefined Module Defined Name TestStruct Description Data Type Description ba i a eee ee Ornerniber add Paste Edit Delete OK Import Export Reload save Exe Help Step 3 Input in Name and Data Type then click OK to leave 688 Lib WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names Hucre Editor Manne Patar Description Data Type E User Def
119. objects with the same Input Order Group b The system picks the input object with smaller Input Order to enter input state before another one with bigger Input Order c If two input objects have the same Input Order Group and Input Order the system picks the one at bottom layer to enter input state first e When selecting Touch as Mode Refer to the following illustration when users complete inputting data on AE 2 the system transfers input state to AE_0 The reason why not transferring to NE_0 is because the Input Order Group of NE_0 is different from that of AE2 188 Lv WE NTEK Objects Stop sequential input function after input If the objects in one group are not set with this function the input order would be Order 1 gt Order 2 gt Order 3 gt Order 4 gt Order 1 gt Order 2 gt And the loop goes on until the ESC button is pressed If one of the objects in the group is set to Stop sequential input function after input Take Order 4 Object as shown below the input order would be Order 1 gt Order 2 gt Order 3 gt Order 4 gt fin Upon the completion of input of Order 4 Object press ENTER the input will stop at this point Stop sequential input function after input e When selecting Bit control as Mode a Users have to specify an Input Order for the object b No need to set Input Order Group because all the input objects with Bit contr
120. of these objects are shown as below Function Key object is used to execute macro 1 l ELogin_ Object settings Object 1 Function Keyinel Oc mat Macro Object 2 ASCII npu LA 524 Lb WE NTEK Macro Reference Read address PLC name Local HMI w Setting Address LW we i Addres PLE name Local HMI Device type Liw Address oO System tag User defined tag Address format DODDD range 0 10799 Index register Mo of word 10 Tag Library jw ee a Cancel Object 3 ASCII Input ASCI Lnpiai Objects Prapesiies General Data Entry Security Shane Font Profile Use UNICODE Reverse highlow byte Read address PLE name Address Li ag 50 a Address PLE name Local HMI Device Type i Livy Address 50 Systern tag User defined tag Address Format DODD range 0 10799 Index register Mo of word 10 525 L e WE NTEK Macro Reference Object 4 ASCII Display Read address PLE name Local HMI v Setting i adess w et Address PLC name Local HMI Address 100 System bag User defined tag ddress format DDDOD range 0 10799 _ Index register Ho of word 20 y simulation Follow the steps below to operate the executing project Lastly compile the completed project and execute Off line
121. operation object in expression can cause a compile error For example macro_command main int a b for a 0 to 2 b 4 xyz illegal xyz is undefined next a end macro command C28 must be macro_command There must be macro_command C29 must be key word sub The format of function declaration is sub data type function _name end sub For example sub int pow int exp end sub Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C30 number of parameters is incorrect Mismatch of the number of parameters C31 parameter type is incorrect Mismatch of data type of parameter When a function is called the data type and the number of parameters should match the declaration of function otherwise it will cause a compile error 501 E WE NTEK Macro Reference C32 variable is incorrect The parameters of a function must be equivalent to the arguments passing to a function to avoid compile error C33 function name undeclared function C34 expected constant expression Illegal array index format C35 invalid array declaration C36 array index error C37 undeclared identifier i identifier Any variable or function should be declared before use C38 un supported PLC data address The parameter of GetData SetData should be legal PLC address If the address is illegal this error message will be shown C39 idenifier must be integer ch
122. password RW 32bit user 9 s password RW Rw Rw R W R W R W pg 1 Only for Security Enhanced security mode A Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 552 p WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 4 Data Sampling delete the earliest data sampling file on HMI memory set ON delete all data sampling files on HMI memory set ON refresh data sampling information on HMI memory set ON save event data sampling to HMI USB disk SD card set ON delete the earliest data sampling file on SD card set ON delete all data sampling files on SD card set ON refresh data sampling information on SD card set ON delete the earliest data sampling file on USB set ON OR R PR OR LB 11953 delete all data sampling files on USB set ON refresh data sampling information on USB set ON LW 9063 16bit no of data sampling files on HMI ME ES LW 9064 32bit size of data sampling files on HMI pe im ES ow0489 08 no of aata samaina fies on SD card R L10400 208 size of data samping fies on SD oard R L10402 08 no of data samping fisson use R L10403 28 size of data samping flesan USB R 553 Ly WE NTEK 22 5 Event Log Address Description LB 9021 reset current event log set ON LB 9022 delete the earliest event log file on HMI memory set ON LB 9023 delete all event log files on HMI memory set ON LB 9024 refresh
123. popup window when change full screen window Window no This is used to select the window no when performing change base window change common window and pop up the window Return to previous window This is used to return to the previous base window Fox example when changing window 10 to window 20 users can use this function to return to window 10 This function is only available for base window change Close window Close the pop up windows on the top of the base window Items in ASCII UNICODE mode ASCII UNICODE mode is used as elements to configure a keypad the keypad is used where numbers or texts are needed to be input to the numeric input object or ASCII input object Refer to the Designing and Using Keypad chapter for detailed information ASCIMINICODE mode Enter Backspace Clear Es O ASCL UNICODE Enter Same as the keyboard s enter function Backspace Same as the keyboard s backspace function Clear To clear the temperate input alphanumeric strings stored in the buffer 166 Wa WE NTEK Objects Esc Same as the Close window function it is used to close the keyboard window ASCII UNICODE To set the characters that are input in the numeric input object and the ASCII input object Digital characters such as 0 1 2 or ASCII characters like a b c etc are available selection Execute Macro Macro commands are executed with
124. remote HMI to trigger a MACRO when LB 9199 ON R W R Y R Y 598 k Ly WE NTEK HMI Supported Printers Chapter 23 HMI Supported Printers 23 1 The Supported Printer Types HMI supported printer drivers include the following types EPSON compatible serial printers please configure communication parameters to match the printer The EPSON ESC P2 printer protocol is used Impact Printer LQ 300 LQ 300 LQ 300K RS232 LQ 300 II RS232 Inkjet Printer Stylus Photo 750 Laser Printer EPL 5800 599 E ga HP compatible USB printers that support HP PCL5 level 3 protocol PCL 5 was released on HP LaserJet III in March 1990 added Intellifont font scaling developed by Compugraphic now part of Agfa outline fonts and HP GL 2 vector graphics e PCL 5e PCL 5 enhanced was released on HP LaserJet 4 in October 1992 and added bi directional communication between printer and PC and Windows fonts Please check if HP printer supports PCL5 before connecting with HMI otherwise HMI black screen may occur Lib WE NTEK Serial printers please configure communication parameters to match the printer The Pixels of Width must be correctly set and can t exceed printer default setting 100 pixels for 1610 220 pixels for 2407 4004 EPSON ESC Protocol Serial Micro Printer SIUPO Beijing http www siupo com SP M D E F Series SP E1610SK paper width 45mm SP E400 4S paper wi
125. return_value if return_ value gt 0 then read_data 0O response 4 response 3 lt lt 8 data in 4x_1 read_ data 1 response 6 response 5 lt lt 8 data in 4x_2 setData read_data 0 Local HMI LW 100 2 end if end macro_command INPORT2 INPORT2 response start device_name receive_len wait_time Read data from a communication port COM Port or Ethernet Port The 426 Ly WE NTEK Description Macro Reference data read will be saved in response The description of device name is the same as OUTPORT receive _len stores the length of the data recived this must be a variable receive_len total length can t exceed the size of response wait_time in millisecond can be a constant or variable After the data is read if there s no upcoming data during the designated time interval the function returns macro_command main short wResponse 6 receive_len wait_time 20 INPORT2 wResponse 0 Free Protocol receive_len wait_time wait_time unit millisecond if receive_len gt 0 then SsetData wResponse 0 Local HMI LW 0 6 set responses to LWO end if end macro_command GetData read_data start device_name device_type address_offset data_count or GetData read_ data device_name device_type address _ offset 1 Receives data from the PLC Data is stored into read _data start read_data start data_count 1 Data_count is the amount of received data I
126. set to COM Port or Ethernet 707 Ligh WE NTEK Easy Watch 10 11 3 2 Tick Ethernet click I F Setting to set IP Address DP cetimg BP AnARA ras Set PLC address Address 4ddress Format DODDD range 0 10799 Address Type can set to Numeric or String 5 1 Numeric select data format of the address to read Address Type l6 btBCD 32 bit BCD 16 bit HEX 32 bit HEX a ee 16 bit Binar Numeric Y outed 32 bit Binary mia 16 bit Unsigned OL f i L String No of Word e 16 bit Signed 5 2 String select data format from ANSI UNICODE and High Reversed Set No of Word to read Address Type UAT CODE High Low Reversed C Numeric String Ho of Word H Set Update Cycle Update Cycle 2500 ms we S00 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms 000 ms z500 ms 708 ma WE NTEK Easy Watch 35 4 Macro Settings 35 4 1 Add Macro There are two ways to add a Macro object a Select from basic toolbar Objects gt Add Object gt Add Macro File Edit Objects Help er fl i Fr ot Sat i aa 7 T Ei b Select from quick selection tools Add Macro E Em E 35 4 2 Macro Settings Hacro Settings i Marne Mew Macro i Object Name HMI Local Host 8000 v Macro Type Active Type T Macro Active Type e a Macro io Up Zl t Macro 7 Macro I0 0 Edit Macro Macro ID o List O Sl
127. size identically to HMI resolution Underlay window Refer to the description below Popup window Base window can also be used as pop up window Use X and Y to set the coordinates indicate where on the screen will this base window pop up The origin of the coordinates is the upper left corner of the screen Window Operations Window Settings Name Window 013 Window no 13 Size Width 300 Height 450 Frame Width 4 Color Background Color Pattern RSS e Filled Pattern color Underlay window Bottom 10 WINDOW 010 Middle 11 Window 011 Top 12 Window 012 Popup window Start pos _ Monopoly Cancel Monopoly If the option is checked when a base window used as a pop up window appears users are not allowed to operate other windows before this base window is closed If a base window is used as a keyboard window Monopoly is automatically enabled Underlay window The often used object can be placed on different windows but not all windows Underlay Window can be seen as an extra Common Window The objects are placed on the Base Window where they are built Up to three Underlay Windows can be defined by users Underlay Window is a base window which can be displayed simultaneously with the base window which calls it up Up to three base windows can be specified as underlay windows for each base window from Bottom to Top The objects but not the b
128. sound will be played when an event is triggered Continuous beep can be set which will only stop when the event is acknowledged or recovered ns When using continuous beep m for Event Log a delay period Event can be set between triggering User defined the alarm and the start of e An illustration of how the beep is related to the event Example B The data of LW address of the triggered event can be included in the content Format d initial sign address d end sign When an event is triggered if LW 20 13 Setting High Temperature 20d gt Display High Temperature 13 Example E When an event is triggered data in certain device type can also be shown in the content This device type should be the same as that of the Read address of Event Log take MW address as example Format d initial sign address d end sign When an event is triggered if MW 15 42 Setting High Temperature 15d Display High Temperature 42 Syntax of Watch Function Add ress of Watch Use the below syntax to embed PLC data in the content of an event log sage Click Syntax to edit and CoC WATCHS id Display signed decimal integer display the value in watch Yo WATCH IE Display floating point i awn A TCH Is Display string address when the event IS ol WA TCH Ix Display unsigned hexadecimal integer using SBCDEF tri g g ered l U p to four watch un
129. style Set ON pa N m The number of HMI that a PC can control is not limited gHMI can control data on PC by considering PC another HMI Add PC as anew Remote HMI device to the HMI MTP project and set the IP address of the Remote HMI pointing to the PC 546 Lib WE NTEK Ethernet Communication and Multi HMI Connection 21 3 Operate the PLC Connected with Other HMI Ethermet 8 IH UM PO PLC Device Through Ethernet network PC or HMI can operate PLC that is connected to other HMI as shown above a Mitsubishi PLC connected to COM 1of HMI B When using PC or HMI A to read PLC data the procedure for setting PC or HMI A project 1 Set HMI B IP for example 192 168 1 2 2 PC or HMI A project es System Parameter Name Device list add a Ommi PLC remote PLC and set Location IP 192 168 1 2 Port 8000 correct parameters PLC type Mitsubishi FROs FEOnPE lvPX LF Since this PLC is Y 1 20 MITSUBISHI FXON so connected to remote PLOY rsaes4wo HMI B set IP the same com COMI as HMI B 192 168 1 2 PLC default station no ot SY Default station no use station no variable 3 set Biv PLC New Set Bit Object name select PLC on eee Security Shape Lebel Aes HMI B remote PLC to 2h o e Oo ZO Write address control the PLC m Phe MOMe PLC om
130. style Athibute Macro Execute macro Macro ID AD 1 w Trigger mode When Set style is selected as Toggle there are three different modes to trigger macro command i e OFF gt ON ON gt OFF or ON lt gt OFF 154 L WE NTEK Objects 13 4 Set Word Overview The Set Word object provides two operation modes the manual operation mode and the automatic operation mode The manual operation mode defines a touch area and users can activate the area to set the value of the word device When users select the automatic operation mode the operation will be automatically activated in pre configured conditions the touch area has no action in any circumstance Configuration dialog box will appear fill in each items and press OK button a new Set 3 Click the Set Word icon in the toolbar and the New Set Word Object Word object will be created See the pictures below 155 Ly ge WE NTEK Objects Hew Set Word Object aes Security Shape Label De ripton Write address PLE name i lt s setting Address ello t bit Unsigned Write after button is released Notification Enable Set ON O Set OFF Before writing After writing PLC name i Local HMI we Setting n Address LE p k o o Be d Attribute Set Style
131. the example use LB10 to call up the window 35 206 iz WE NTEK Objects Read address PL name kacal HMI we Setting Toggle Switeh Read address LB10 Write address L B10 Mode Toggle Attribute Ste Window No 35 WINDOW 035 When the state of LB10 is set to ON the window 35 will be popup when the state of LB10 is OFF the window 35 will be closed See the picture below WINOOIY 5 Toggle Switch Toggle Switch Read address LB10 Write address LB10 Read address LB10 Write address L B16 Mode Toggle Mode Toggle WINDOW 5 Toggle Switch Read address LB10 Write address LB1C Mode Toggle Toggle Switch Read address LB10 Write address LB10 Mode Toggle 207 Lg WE NTEK Objects NOTE Only 16 windows maximum can be displayed simultaneously at run time and do not use this function to open the window when the same window has been opened by function key or direct window 208 L WE NTEK Objects 13 13 Moving Shape Overview Moving Shape object is used to define the object s state and moving distance The Moving Shape object is used to place an object in a window at a location specified by the PLC The state and the absolute location of the shape in the window depend on the current values of three continuous PLC registers Typically the first register controls the state of the object the second register controls the horizontal position X and
132. the object style one of Listbox and Drop down list Item no Objects Set the number of items for the object Each item represents a state displayed in the list and a value to be written to the Monitor address Background Select background color for the object Selection Select background color for the selected highlighted item Source of item data There are Predefine Dates of historical data and Item address for selection 334 Objects Predefine mode Monitor address Select the PLC name Device type Address of the word register device that controls the display of the object and the system writes the value of the item to the word register Write when button is released If this function is selected the operation is activated at touch up If the function is not selected the operation is activated at touch down NOTE NOTE This option is only available in listbox style Dates of historical data mode Item data from dates of historical data History index mode Option List object can be used with Historical Event Display Trend Display and Data Display for displaying the History File on the Historical Display objects as below illustration H bd HV ry WAY 06 10 09 n A AN HP TRA 06 09 09 RAY ay YAN TAN 06 08 09 e BS Wye ase 1322418 13 14 38 13 14 58 13 15 18 13 15 38 13 15 58 13216718 Hja b gt Type Alarm Event log is used to display Historical Event Display
133. the third register controls the vertical position Y Configuration Click the Moving Shape icon on the toolbar and New Moving Shape Object dialog box will appear fill in each items press OK button and a new Moving Shape Object will be created 209 Lig WE NTEK Objects Hew Moving Shape Object General Shape Label Description PLC name Local HMI Read address PLL name a Ale Setting Address Ly ir ll 16 bit Unsigned Lee _ UE EF Athibute Mode No of states Min X Display ratio State Lanut address PLE name acal Setting Address 16 bit Unsigned OK _Caneel_ Read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the word devices that control the display of object s state and moving distance Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object The table below shows the address to control object s state and moving distance in each different data format 210 Objects Data format Address to Address to Address to control object control Moving control Moving state Distance on the distance on the X axis Y axis 16 bit format Address 1 Address
134. this selection Macro commands have to be built before users choose this function Please refer to related chapter on how to edit Macros QE naiis Mesem maemo 1 1 Window title bar A function Key which is defined as Window Title Bar can move the popup window position on the screen Firstly users can select the popup window that has the title bar and then click another position to move the window Note this function is only available on indirect direct window when no title bar is selected Select the window title bar firstly Touching the screen for the new position the popup window will be moved Screen hard copy Hardcopy current display screen to the printer connected with HMI Before using this function please choose printer model in System Parameter Model printer If printer does not support color print user can select grayscale to have a better printout effect Black and white is for improving text printing quality 167 Lid b WE NTEK Objects Screen hand copy Printer HF PCL Series SB w Notification Enable Import user data Use USB Security Key Users can import contact information by external device please refer to Chapter 36 Administrator Tools for more information Settings Ci Import e mail settings and contacts Function mode Import e mail settings and contacts pata pasion Data Position Available for SD card or USB disk Account import mode Accou
135. use station no variable Use broadcast command Interval of block pack words Max reacd command size words Max write command size words Cancel Setting Description HMI or PLC This is to confirm whether this device is a HMI or PLC It is PLC in this case 50 lb WE NTEK System Parameter Settings Location Users can select Local or Remote Select Remote in this case and set the IP address of the remote HMI which is connected to SIEMENS S7 200 PLC Click Settings of Location to set this IP address IF Address Settings ee ere Eee Ethernet IP address Er 168 10 Port no S000 CO PLC Type Type of PLC Select SIEMENS S 7 200 in this case PLC I F This setting defines which interface the remote PLC uses If the remote PLC uses a COM port interface used should be selected from RS 232 RS 485 2W and RS485 4W PLC default This setting defines which default station no is used by remote PLC mama fn nner senna COM This setting defines which COM port the remote PLC uses to connect After all settings are completed a new device named Remote PLC is added to the Device list Device list Name Location Device type Local HMI eh T3105 800 x Device Local Mitsubishi FEU ort 8000 COM 1 Siemens 87 200 Local HMI Local PLC 1 51 Lib WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 1 3 How to Control a
136. v COM COM 9600 E 8 13 PLC default station no Default station no use station no variable Cluse broadcast command Interval of block pack Gwords3 Max read command size words Max write command size words After the project is downloaded to HMI open the same project and change the PLC I F and COM port to COM 1 RS232 PC uses COM 1 to connect HMI as follows Device Properties Location PLC type Siemens 57 200 w40 SIEMENS 5 200 50 PLO LF COM COM 9600 E 8 1 Settings PLC default station no Default station no use station no variable Cluse broadcast command Interval of block pack words Max read command size words Max write command size words 652 Lh WE NTEK Pass Through Function After that press Pass through to assign HMI IP address for example 192 168 1 37 Finally press Get HMI Communication Parameters as follows Ethemet COM port HMIIP 192 168 1 37 v Get HMI Communication Parameters HMI work mode Normal Source COM Part PC gt HMD COM 1 Baud rate 9600 Data bits Parity Even Stop bits Destination COM Port HMI gt PLC COM 3 v RS485 2W Baud rate 9600 v Data bits Bits Parity Even v Stop bits 1 Bit Stop Pass through Exit Press Start Pass through and HMI work mode is switched into Pass through Users can execute on line simulation Now PC application can cont
137. when the return type is defined in the beginning of the definition of function the return command is needed endsub Must be used to end a function block 405 E WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 6 Build In Function Block EasyBuilder Pro has some build in functions for retrieving and transferring data to the PLC data management and mathematical functions 18 6 1 Mathematical Functions Name SQRT SQRT source result Description Calculate the square root of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Source must be a nonnegative value macro_command main float source result SQRT 15 result source 9 0 SQRT source result result is 3 0 end macro command CUBERT CUBERT source result Description Calculate the cube root of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Source must be a nonnegative value macro_command main float source result CUBERT 27 result result is 3 0 source 27 0 CUBERT source result result is 3 0 end macro command 406 E WE NTEK Macro Reference Name POW POW source1 source2 result Description Calculate source1 raised to the power of source2 Source1 and source2 can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Source1 and source2 must be a nonnegative value macro _ command main float y result y 0 5 POW 25 y result
138. with legal value Click OK to confirm and save the records Recipe Edit pase pats a Recipe 0 NewIteml gt Dotis Muti Data type 16 bit Unsigned gt Decimal PE 0 Cancel item format when click on the item 608 Lib WE NTEK Recipe Editor m lf there are multiple recipes each recipe can hold a maximum of 10000 records Noe m The recipe records will be stored in the xob file after compilation and will be downloaded to the HMI These recipes are not allowed to be shared with other project files If users need to modify the recipe content using Recipe Records and to download it to the HMI make sure to check Reset recipe database check box If not the recipe database in the HMI will not be updated Download Ethernet COUSB cable Password Setting p HMI name eMT3i05_btony w 19 192 168 1 154 Default HMI Search all 192 165 1 211 katte MTS0 0iH Firmware Font files Necessary if update firmware or execute download first time Juse user defined startup screen Reset recipe Reset recipe database Reset event log _ Reset data sampling _ Reboot HMI after download Automatically using current settings to download after compiling 609 Lyh WE NTEK EasyConverter Chapter 25 EasyConverter This application program is utilized when converting the history record of data sampling DTL or event log
139. written when users import export These files are portable and can be called from the folder when needed 4 When opening HMI programming software only the functions in Default Function Library will be loaded in to use functions in mlb files please import them first OW C EBPro library Organize New folder WT Favorites BE Desktop picture 11710 1 amp Downloads shape 11 10 12 gt Recent Places sound L1 i Libraries z Documents w Pictures menuOl tio z Videos Computer am Local Disk C WA CD Drive D STEP 7 481 Lb WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 8 2 How to Use Macro Function Library 1 Select the function directly from Macro Fonction Library Macro Function Library 2 In WorkSpace click GET SETFN F m Cluse execution condition to open API dialog box Flows seein Aap lt Cick the night mouse button to display edit menu 3 Atleast check one from Library or Build in and select the function to be used lawn Furcton name ACOS Acos 0l 4 The description displayed in API dialog is the same as written in Function Editor aeren ag 482 L ge WE NTEK Macro Reference 5 Select the function to be used fill in the corresponding variables according to the data type Barth of Ln T E ee mnro cond maine UES Gard LEE fie EPL Pee TS in tee EESE me Wasigeee abort b
140. 0 Il get one word from LW2 to the variable c GetDataEx c Local HMI LW 2 1 _ get 50 words from LWO LW49 to the variables d 0 d 49 GetDataEx d 0 Local HMI LW 0 50 get 2 words from LW6 LW to the variable e note that he type of e is int GetDataEx e Local HMI LW 6 1 Il get 20 words 10 integer values from LWO LW19 to f 0 f 9 since each integer value occupies 2 words GetDataEx f 0 Local HMI LW 0 10 get 2 words from LW2 LW3 to the variable f GetDataEx f Local HMI LW 2 1 end macro_command 431 Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference Syntax Description setData send_data start device name device_type address_ offset data_count or setData send_ data device_name device type address offset 1 Send data to the PLC Data is defined in send_data start send_data start data_count 1 data_count is the amount of sent data In general send_data is an array but if data_count is 1 send_data can be an array or an ordinary variable Below are two methods to send one word data macro_command main short send_data_ 1 2 5 6 send data 2 5 setData send_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 SetData send data 2 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 end macro command device_name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks and this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters device_type is the de
141. 0 15 TAG Locali4 0 AB 69 DOS2 0 0 16 TAG Localia c AB 769 DGL6 0 0 17 TAG Local 5 B 1769_DO16 1 9 la TAG ee qa AB 69 DO1L6 0 0 19 TAG Local 6 C ABW 769_ IFL6 C0 0 20 TAG Loeal 6 ABW Y 69 FlL6 1 0 2l TAG Loeal 6 0 AB Y 69 IFl6 G 0 In Controller Organizer Data Types Module Defined of RSLogix5000 double click Data Type of the module Data members of that type of the module will be listed in a window pops up Copy the Name and Data Type of the Members 697 Ly WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names Controller Organizer Unecheduled Programs 6 Motion Groupe Ungrouped Axes Add On Inetoctions SS Data Types Ca User Defined ED Strings Ca Add On Defined E O Predefined S A Module Detined AB1769_D1161 0 AB1769_D1321 0 AB L769 _DO16 C 0 A AB1769_DO161 0 AB1769_DO16 0 0 H AB1769_DO32 0 0 A AB1769_DO321 0 H AB1769_DO32 0 0 H AB 1769_IF16 C 0 M AB 1769_IF16 1 0 i 4B 1769_IF16 0 0 25 332523 ESES ES E363 Q In EasyBuilder Pro Structure Editor exe right click on Module Defined and then click New Data Type s Hucture Editor i Data Types User Defined Nannie Strings D F Description 4 Predefined Module Definf Way Data Type AB 1709 ed B 1769_DI2 N0 AB 1769_DO16 0 0 nmp AB 1769_D032 00 Data Type Description AB 1769 IFle r o AB Embedded IO16F c 0 AB Embedded IO16F 1 0 ABs Embedded OB16 0 0 AB Embedded O816 1 0 AB Embedded OBLE 0 0
142. 0 WINDOW_010 EB File Edit view Option Draw Objects Library Coc el ot GS cc S amp P NP X E ESMA HEA AL f HEE Aag fea eo GP toe WC pa E El be l g 4d 10 WINDOW_010 x Chick the Save to Shape Library button in toolbar and the following dialogue appears save to Shape Library Hi ele Shape library TEST Description Untitled Shape no 0 v V Frame C Inner Width 77 Height 73 Frame undefined Inner undefined Cancel Setting Description Shape library Select the Shape Library for the graph to be added to In this example TEST library is selected The name of the Shape The number in Shape Library current graph will be added in Select the state of the Shape which this graph represents In this case the state is set 0 EasyBuilder Pro provides 256 states for 357 Lb WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Librar If Frame is selected the graph will become a frame of the Shape lf Inner is selected the graph will become an inner part of the Shape This part shows the current status of the shape at this moment shape no 0 in state 0 in library Test is with undefined frame and inner Width T7 Height 73 Frame undefined Inner undefined After clicking OK the graph will be added to Shape Library Illustration below shows that Shape No 0 in library Test has only one state state0 and is defined as a frame 0 Untitled S
143. 10 15 0 x 50 10 20 0 40 and the result 40 will be displayed on the numeric input object scaling option Do conversion Engineering low Engineering high Limits Direct O Dynamit limits Dynamic scales Set the Bottom limit and Upper limit of the input data to be derived from the designated register Dynamic Address LW 100 LW 100 Bottom limit LW 100 LW 100 Upper limit LW 101 LW 102 Limits To set the source of the range for the input data and to set the warning color effect Direct The low limit and high limit of the input data can be set in Input low and Input high respectively If the input data is out of the defined range the input value will be ignored Dynamic limits Limit O Direct Dmnamie limits PLC name Local HMI w Setting Address Liw wllo jj 192 L WE NTEK Objects Set the low limit and high limit of the input data to be derived from the designated register The data length of the designated register is the same as the input object itself In the above example the low limit and high limit are derived from LW100 and the following explains the usage of the low limit and high limit from designated address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register for designated register Users can also set address in Numeric Format tab Designated address Input Low Limit In
144. 123 100 PLC 1 is connected with the remote HMI so it can not work 503 L WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 12 Sample Macro Code 1 for statement and other expressions arithmetic bitwise shift logic and comparison macro_command main int a 10 b 10 i b 0 400 400 lt lt 2 401 b 1 22 2 30 7 b 2 111 gt gt 2 b 3 403 gt 9 3 gt 9 3 lt 4 3 lt 8 8 b 4 not8 1and2 1or0 1xor2 b 5 405 and 3 and not 0 bf6J 8 amp 44 48 amp 4 8 44 8 4 b 7 6 4 b 8 0x11 b 9 409 for i 0 to 4 step 1 if a 0 400 then GetData a 0 Device 1 4x 0 9 GetData b 0 Device 1 4x 11 10 end If next i end macro command 2 while if and break statements macro_command main int b 10 i 5 while i 5 20 3 GetData b 1 Device 1 4x 11 1 if b 1 100 then break end if 504 L WE NTEK Macro Reference wend end macro command 3 Global variables and function call char g sub int fun int j int k int y SetData j Local HMI LB 14 1 GetData y Local HMI LB 15 1 g y return y end Sub macro_command main int a b i a 2 b 3 i fun a b SetData i Local HMI LB 16 1 end macro command 4 if statement macro_command main int k 10 J forj 0 to 10 kj J next if k 0 O then setData k 1 Device 1 4x 0 1 end if 505 L WE NTEK Macro
145. 12345678 result result is 0x1234 source 0x12345 HIWORD source result result is 0x0001 end macro_command 419 E WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 6 4 Bit Transformation GETBIT source result bit_pos Description Gets the state of designated bit position of a data source into result Result s value will be O or 1 Source and bit_pos can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main int source result short bit_pos GETBIT 9 result 3 result is 1 source 4 bit_ pos 2 GETBIT source result bit_pos result is 1 end macro command SETBITON SETBITON source result bit_pos Description Changes the state of designated bit position of a data source to 1 and put changed data into result Source and bit_pos can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro _ command main int source result short bit_pos SETBITON 1 result 3 result is 9 source 0 bit_ pos 2 SETBITON source result bit_pos result is 4 end macro command 420 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference SETBITOFF source result bit_ pos Description Changes the state of designated bit position of a data Source to 0 and put in changed data into result Source and bit_pos can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main int source result short bit_pos SETBITOFF Y result 3 result is 1 source 4 bit_ pos
146. 2 to the variable a GetData a Local HMI LB 2 1 get 30 states of LBO LB29 to the variables b 0 b 29 GetData b 0 Local HMI LB 0 30 get one word from LW2 to the variable c GetData c Local HMI LW 2 1 get 50 words from LWO LW49 to the variables d 0 d 49 GetData d 0 Local HMI LW 0 50 get 2 words from LW6 LW to the variable e note that the type of e is int GetData e Local HMI LW 6 1 get 20 words 10 integer values from LWO LW19 to variables f 0 f 9 since each integer value occupies 2 words GetData f 0 Local HMI LW O 10 get 2 words from LW2 LW3 to the variable f GetData f Local HMI LW 2 1 end macro_command GetDataEx read_data start device name device_type address_ offset data_count or GetDataEx read_data device_name device_type address _ offset 1 430 L WE NTEK Macro Reference Description Receives data from the PLC and continue executing next command even if no response from this device Descriptions of read_ data device_name device type address offset and data_count are the same as GetData macro_command main bool a bool b 30 short c short d 50 inte int f 10 double g 10 get the state of LB2 to the variable a GetDataEx a Local HMI LB 2 1 get 30 states of LBO LB29 to the variables b 0 b 29 GetDataEx b 0 Local HMI LB 0 3
147. 3 Since HMI 2 views PLC a remote device here we change Location to Remote and select COM port to connect remote HMI HMI 1 COM 1 master slave mode oenen co PLC type FA TEK FB Seres 1 70 FATEK_FB so PLC I F COM Device list Interface Disable Device type Location Local Remote FLE 1 RATEE FE sernes COM 1 master slave mode FA TEE FE Series LOM 1 115200 8 4 Upon completion of the settings users can find a new device named Remote PLC 1 in the Device List This device has a symbol which means even if it contains Remote in the name it actually gives commands and gets replies through a local COM port and therefore the connection with PLC can be viewed form a local system reserved register that is Remote PLC 1 Remote PLC 2 Remote PLC 3 and Local PLC 1 Local PLC 2 Local PLC 3 use the same system reserved register from the listed below 638 ie WE NTEK Multi HMI Intercommunication Master Slave Mode When ON auto connection with PLC COM 1 when disconnected When OFF ignore disconnection with PLC When ON auto connection with PLC COM 2 when disconnected When OFF ignore disconnection with PLC When ON auto connection with PLC COM 3 when disconnected When OFF ignore disconnection with PLC These local registers indicate the connection states with PLC through COM LB 9150 LB9200 indicates the connec
148. 50 and high limit is 100 for one sampling line then Zero and Span must be set as 50 and 100 so all the sampling data can be displayed in the trend display object 240 Objects Limit check Dynamic limits When Dynamic Limits is selected the low limit and high limit are derived from the designated word device The data length of the word device for limits is related to the data format of object In the example below Data Format 16 bit format Address 1 32 bit format Address 2 An extended function is Zoom in and zoom out function Example of zoom in out function For zoom in out the trend graph user has to check the Limit Dynamic limits as picture below PL name Lacal HMI wt Setting For example the LWO and LW1 are to control low limit and high limit you may change the value of LW1 to zoom in out This following picture is in original size The range of trend is between 0 30 The arrow on the right side are set word LW1 increment JOG and LW1 decrement JOG for control the zoom in and zoom out function DAM value a Decrease LW1 s value to exhibit Zoom in function as shown below The value of LW1 decreased to 11 241 Lib WE NTEK Objects Increase LW1 s value to exhibit Zoom out function as shown below The value of LW1 increased to 41 242 Li WE NTEK Objects 13 18 History Data Display Overview History Data Display object displays
149. 540 20 1 HOW to Connect a Barcode DOV ICO cise tcs cssstvsssvcusinatessvanacenandeaesancwseesceaianeasvavaceeanteausancetees 540 Chapter 21 Ethernet Communication and Multi HMI Connection ccccccsssseeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeens 544 21 1 HMI to HMI COMMU CATION sasansvpaasenscescnssansganenseeusdansepucmonaeeienssaen ea N OEE E RRE ASE 545 21 2 PC t HMI COMMUNICATION sadcsosicscnesanccrsdecsaessansedwadeaasion avenmdounsdaduceisanendwadeaiedaneweniunddedadeesens 546 21 3 Operate the PLC Connected with Other HMI cccsscccccssscccceesseceseeeceeseeeeeeeseeeeeees 547 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder Pro User Manual Chapter 22 System Reserved Words Bits sssssssssssssssssssssssesssesssssessssesessseseseeseesesesseseeeeeees 548 22 1 The Address Ranges of Local HMI M MOry ccccccsssccccssecccesececeeceeeesceeeeeceeenecessneeees 549 DD Ne BI eins despot tsracio aie eras cits tes E ee nea ava a sees T A A EE seme 549 22 Med VOUS oe E EEEE E E A 550 22 L AMETI eee E O E EE EEEN 551 223 User Nameand PassWord ee eee nee E eee 552 PAB PINE ea E E E E EEA 553 Zo EN CUNEO masoara ere E E OE E E E e E E ATE E 554 226 AMI Hardware Operation scssssnssesinacseanvesesonnnssadiosnsnsennanaeaoensdanamadioasneenanaeinmansinnnts 556 22 7 Local HMI Network Information ssssesssseseseessseesssrrsssrrssrersseesssrreseersseessseeeseereseeesseerssees 557 22 8 Recipe and Extended Memory oases i E a E as 558 22 9 Storage Space Manage
150. 57 auto connection for PLC 8 ethernet when R W R Y R Y ON LB 9158 auto connection for PLC 9 ethernet when R W R Y R Y ON LB 10070 forced to reconnect PLC 4 ethernet when IP or system parameters changed on line set R W R Y R Y ON LB 10071 forced to reconnect PLC 5 ethernet when IP or system parameters changed on line set R W R Y R Y ON LB 10072 forced to reconnect PLC 6 ethernet when IP or system parameters changed on line set R W R Y R Y ON LB 10073 forced to reconnect PLC 7 ethernet when IP or system parameters changed on line set R W R Y R Y ON LB 10074 forced to reconnect PLC 8 ethernet when IP or system parameters changed on line set R W R Y R Y ON LB 10075 forced to reconnect PLC 9 ethernet when IP or system parameters changed on line set R W R Y R Y ON LB 10100 PLC 4 status ethernet set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LB 10400 PLC 5 status ethernet set on to retry R Y R Y 573 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits LB 10700 PLC 6 status ethernet set on to retry N connection R Y R Y LB 11000 PLC 7 status ethernet set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LB 11300 PLC 8 status ethernet set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LB 11600 PLC 9 status ethernet set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LB 11900 PLC 10 status ethernet set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LB 11901 PLC 11 status ethernet set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LB
151. 6 bit Binary Set Bit object LB 9050 user logout LE9050 5B 0 Class A Button 5B 1 Class B Button SB_2 P Class C Button Three Set Bit objects each set to different classes but all select Made invisible while protected After designing and setting the objects please save compile the project and do off line simulation Below shows how it works when simulating 130 Lid WE NTEK User Password and Object Security 3 When no password is entered yet it displays 00000000000000 meaning user operable object class none SB_0 SB_ 2 objects are classified A C and selected Made invisible while protected therefore they are hidden at this moment 4 Input User 1 password 111 Since User 1 is only allowed to Password M esc operate class A objects SB_0 object ro will appear for operating LW 9222 bit Current status 0000000000000000 Lw9222 0 turns 1 meaning user operable class A Username 1 ez Password ig LW9220 bit 15 bit0 Current status 0000000000000001 omz Class A Button 5 Input User 3 password 333 Since User 3 is allowed to operate class A B C objects LW 9222 bit 0 bit 2 turns 1 meaning user operable class A C User name 3 LW9219 Password 333 LW9220 bit 15 bit Current status 0000000000000111 42222 Class A Button 6 Click LB9050 user logo
152. 6bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 32bit 32bit 32bit 32bit 32bit 32bit address index 21 32bit address index 22 32bit address index 23 32bit address index 24 32bit address index 25 32bit address index 26 32bit address index 27 32bit 32bit 32bit 32bit address index 0 address index 1 address index 2 address index 3 Am O address index 4 address index 5 address index 6 address index 7 address index 8 x xo No address index 9 address index 10 address index 11 a address index 12 address index 13 address index 14 address index 15 address index 16 address index 17 address index 18 address index 19 address index 20 ee N N r u u r N N S NAN em OOO A Nr Nr ur ur ur S A address index 28 A TZ Ner address index 29 address index 30 Nr address index 31 563 System Reserved Words Bits Read R Write W Control Y Local MACRO Remote HMI A g lt RIY HMI R Y R Y T Z R Y Ligh WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 564 4 b WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 13 MTP File
153. 7 LB 9048 LB 9062 LB 9063 LW 9008 LW 9025 LW 9026 LW 9027 LW 9028 LW 9040 LW 9080 LW 9081 Read R Write W Control Y Description Local MACRO HMI disable mouse cursor set ON disable enable buzzer show set ON hide set OFF system setting bar disable when on enable when off HMI upload function Note backlight up set ON Note2 backlight down set ON Note2 reboot HMI set ON when LB9048 is on A z5 VID lt reboot HMI protection open hardware setting dialog set ON disable set ON enable set OFF popuping information dialog while finding an USB disk 32bit float battery voltage Note3 16bit CPU loading x 100 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit m A A OS version year OS version month OS version day backlight index Note2 es he ZY r r Se lO backlight saver time unit minute 16bit screen saver time unit minute aeee a zeke a ae K 1 After changing the settings please reboot HMI for updating 2 LW 9040 used together with LB 9040 LB 9041 can adjust the backlight brightness with level 0 31 3 For LW 9008 when the battery voltage level goes below 2 89V it is i recommended to replace the battery 556 p WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 1 Local HMI Network Information l a r es Ooo L LW 9125 16bit HMI ethernet gateway 0 machin
154. 9351 16bit pending command no in PLC 1 COM e ESESES LW 9352 16bit pending command no in PLC 2 COM D n ete e LW 9353 16bit pending command no in PLC 3 COM a n E e LW 9354 16bit pending command no in PLC 4 Lil ea E LW 9355_ 16bit pending command no in PLC 5 ee owt Lk LW 9356 16bit pending command no in PLC 6 ee owt LL LW 9357 16bit pending command no in PLC 7 ee oot Lk Lw 9390 16bit pending command no in PLC USB R R R LW 9392 16bit pending command no in PLC CAN Bus wao en overcoseerrici R R CR iwon ene onercoseerric2 rR R OR wsao2 osoierorceodorees R R rR iwsaos een onercoseirric rR rR R wsos osoiororcodorres R R rR twsaos een onercoseerrice rR rR OR twsaoe enn onercoseorric7 R R rR wsaor osoiororcodorres rR R rR wao aeon erorcode russe R R O 588 p WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 23 Miscellaneous Functions i LB 9000 initialized as ON LB 9009 LB 9010 LB 9011 LB 9012 LB 9016 LB 9017 R Y R Y data download indicator data upload indicator data download upload indicator status is on when a client connects to this HMI disable write back in PLC control s change R Y R Y AJ Av AJ AJ AJ AJ A AJ AJ window LB 9039 status of file backup activity backup in process if ON LB 9045 memory map communication fails when ON LB 9049 enable set ON d
155. A and Group B will exist and so on 727 Lib WE NTEK 36 5 2 e Mail Contacts Settings Administrator Tools a Click Add to add in all the contacts b Add the contacts to Group A the added contacts will be displayed in red font E Admmisiolor Tools Donini of he USE das Mier Account OSH Sect Key Mal SMTP Sever aae Corimtg Conseg Hame Mal Adimi Haman Harmon erinikk com lerhi herraa comi bizdan foedan iho breed ecom Duncan Diora dave ce layra Tanas Bio ETA AAR Ho of goms 2 Tp miman Curent pau i Ground Desiptoni Soft Tean Conii Mad dirs Harrison Hanvon wemtek com krian bnaE hoire gt Sate io DEB c In No of groups press to add a new group Group B can be found at this moment Repeat step a and b to add contacts into groups Contacts ContactName Mail Address Harmison Harmison weintek com Iverson lversont yahoo com Jordan Jordan hotneadl com Duncan Duncen med 1 himet net Jarnes Tomes Qemome com No of groups Pa TA Group information y Current group Group B w Description Croup A Group E Contact Mail Address Iverson Iverson yahoo com TET Duncan Duran matl hinet net James James emome com Ligh WE NTEK Administrator Tools d After adding all the e mail contacts click Export to back up the data For re build and modification click Import to import the backup data Mo of groups 2 a Group information Current group
156. A is 64K words Users can update Recipe Data with SD Card USB disk USB cable or Ethernet and use this data to update data in PLC Recipe Data can also be uploaded to the designated address furthermore PLC data can be saved in recipe memory The following explains the ways of operating Recipe Data USB STORAGE Pb ETHERNET Sigal SD CARD USB CABLE sO 377 iv WE NTEK Transferring Recipe Data 17 1 Updating Recipe Data with Ethernet or USB cable 1 Open Utility Manager and click Download 2 Select RW and RW_A and designate the directory of the source file 3 After downloading restart HMI RW and RW_A will be updated Download Select the source C Firmware d Project file directory Dav Recipe database Data log Tick Reboot HMI Startup Screen after download CAEBSBUOD recipelrecipe rcp scan font finished instead of rebooting reset Hil finished Connection HMI manually T Ethernet USB cable d IF HMI Name ehiTs3105_ tony w 192 168 1 131 tehT3105_ tony 192 168 1 135 Default HM 192 1669 1 154 Detault HM Search All 192 168 1 211 tkatte MT8070iH Binnie 192 168 1 219 Default HMI Reboot HM after download Reset recipe Reset event log Reset data log When Reset recipe is selected before start downloading EasyBuilder Pro will set all the data of RW and RW_A to 0 first 378 Lb WE NTEK Transferring Recipe Data 17 2 Updatin
157. ABM Dus grave Pe Be hep 108 163 1 Y VNC Viewer Free Edtinn 41 Copii CO WLW Res Nel m One HMI allows only one user to log in VNC server at one time When leaving VNC server unused for one hour HMI system will log out automatically Lid WE NTEK System Parameter Settings Chapter 5 System Parameter Settings Enter EasyBuilder Pro select menu Edit System Parameters and the System Parameter Settings dialog appears oystem Parameter Sethones x ___ Frinter Backup Server e Mail Recipes General System Setting Security Font No Location Device type Interface UF Protocol Station no Local HMI Local HMI Local jeMT3105 G00 se Disable N A Project description System Parameter Settings are divided into several parts Device Model General System Setting Security Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server e Mail and Recipes These will be introduced respectively in this chapter 43 L tes WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 1 Device Parameters in Device tab determine all of the attributes of each device controlled by the HMI they are connected with The device can be a PLC a remote HMI or a PC After opening a new mtp file in EasyBuilder Pro a default device Local HMI is shown in the Device List This Local HMI is used to identify current HMI which means every mtp file must at least contains one Lo
158. ATCH ix Display unsigned hexadecimal integer using abcdef where watch no range 1 4 addresses can be set the number of digits after the decimal point If is pD Y can be ignored Examples 1 Pressure o VWATCHI id 1 2 emperaturel is ofw ATCHI 2 Temperature is lWATCH2I 2 3 Alarm IP WATCHLIZ Sor W ATCHZYS Sol WATCHIN Sol WATCH 1X 4 Counter is Yot A TCHS id 5 Message WATCH1Is Index Yol 48TCHS id 92 L tes WE NTEK Event Log 7 2 3 Event Alarm Log e Mail Settings Alarm Event Log e Mail tab Event Alarm Log General Message e Mail psa Enable Condition Recipients b Send while event triggered Group Send while event cleared Group A Recipients Group A _ Slbpect Use event content as subject subject E ayel Aa ENE AATEC de E Message Dear Sir This is a automatic generated e mail don t reply the ws lt gt Opening fe oe a lagel Wana D ALE Endimg from eMT3105 e mail demo Label Library Language 1 Contains a screenshot of window 12 Window 012 Attach Recipients Select the To Cc and Bcc recipients Subject Enter the subject line of the e mail Message Enter the content of Opening and Ending of the e mail Attach
159. Access server LB 9052 status of connecting to EasyAccess server LB 9196 local HMI supports monitor function only when Few we ow LB 9197 support monitor function only for remote HMls R W R Y R Y when ON For further information on EasyAccess please visit http www ihmi net 592 Lib WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 26 Pass Through Settings LW 9900 16bit HMI run mode 0 normal mode 1 3 R W R Y R Y test mode COM 1 COM 3 LW 9901 16bit pass through source COM port 1 3 R W R Y R Y COM 1 COM 3 LW 9902 16bit pass through destination COM port R W R Y R Y 1 3 COM 1 COM 3 593 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 27 Disable PLC No Response Dialog Box LB 9192 disable USB PLC s PLC No Response dialog when ON LB 11960 disable PLC 1 s PLC No Response dialog when ON LB 11961 disable PLC 2 s PLC No Response dialog when ON LB 11962 disable PLC 3 s PLC No Response dialog when ON R Y R Y LB 11963 disable PLC 4 s PLC No Response dialog when ON LB 11964 disable PLC 5 s PLC No Response dialog Sn when ON LB 11965 disable PLC 6 s PLC No Response dialog R W R Y R Y when ON LB 11966 disable PLC 7 s PLC No Response dialog R W R Y R Y when ON LB 11967 disable PLC 8 s PLC No Response dialog R W R Y R Y when ON LB 12082 Disable CAN Bus device s PLC No Response R W R Y R Y dialog when ON 594 Lib WE N
160. Application Step 2 Enter HMI IP ftp 192 168 1 117 example login user name uploadhis and the HMI history upload password if not changed the default is 111111 Or to directly enter ftp uploadhis 111111 192 168 1 117 T My Computer E a Ed File Edit View Favorites Tools Help iF pa Search gt Folders s Frp uploadhis 1111 3 A System Tasks est Additions D4 E g drive on Wboxsyr 233 aha Yla CO Shared Documents information EJ Add oF remove COjuser s Documents programis ge Change a setting Step 3 After entering IP ftp 192 168 1 117 is shown and the datalog eventlog and recipe folders can be seen File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q sack E pi J2 Search na Folders Bat Address Ie tp i192 168 1 117 v Go Bw Bp datalog eventlag recipe Other Places a Internet Explorer User uploadhis Internet 670 Lib WE NTEK FTP Server Application 32 2 Backup History Data and Update Recipe Data To backup Data Sampling records 1 Click datalog folder to check the file names set by EasyBuilder Pro 2 Click on file names to check content 3 Copy and paste to save files on PC To backup Event Alarm Log records 1 Click eventlog folder to check the files 2 Copy and paste to save files on PC To backup and update Recipe records 1 Click recipe folder to check the files 2 To u
161. C name Device type Address of the word device that system writes to 184 L WE NTEK Objects Notification When this function is selected the state of the designated bit device will be set to ON or OFF after before the value of the register is changed successfully Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the Notification bit that system set value to Users can also set the address in the Notification area Before writing After writing Set the state of the designated bit device before or after update the word device Notification on valid input When inputting invalid values it can now automatically set the status of designated address 185 WE NTEK Objects Hew Homeric Input Object m General Data Entry Numeric Format Security Shape Font mm ee Mode Touch 5 Input order Enable Inputorder 1 v Group pg stop sequental input function after input Keyboard Use a popup keypad Hide title bar Window no 50 Keypad 1 Integer 00 Popup position E peek O O 0O relative to HMI screen 0O O O i a Oo Oo 0 Hint If the keyboard is an USH keyboard on imdirectdirect window or on the same window please don tcheck Use a popup keypad Restart the keypad if input value is out of range Mode Touch Th
162. COM POr MOG ororen E R EE EE E E 649 29 2 1 Settings of COM Port ModE srrssirssreiveriseiinieian iee n a 649 20 OP AAP RMAN Ok MOGE erenn E E eet 651 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder Pro User Manual 29 3 Using System Reserved Addresses to Enable Pass Through FUN ction cc seeceeeeees 654 Chapter 30 Project POCO CHOON jas ccceeacendessiatacrcandaaceapdeseccasseanesaanctacccandunteandeteccaminne aauetecreantiacietaee 655 Dn OO P SSW ONO saa actcststen cee O sein ated E ts ews ancien vie coe apenas ETE NE 656 30 2 Decompilation is Prohibited sccccsarccesadadenacnsesivwcedsannadsannaceeniaddsansnernrarenmemadsamaecvanteoienennerest 657 30 3 Disable HMI Upload Function LB 9033 c cccccesecccsecccsseeceneceeeceeeceeenceteueeseneceeeuss 658 WAPE y r E E A E E O A 659 30 5 Project Password MTP TING caiccasratescaoscasswanteasnengeimoneponationameecaancamasiwensesiawdsnhalsimsacspaneneneeies 660 Chapter 31 Memory Map COMMUNICAtION cccccsssecccsececeneccceeseceeeececeueceseunceesueceseuecesseneetes 661 Chapter 32 FTP Server Application esesccatesecsesstosasereacysacecacasanaraoessuaideestesnnnssnceedonsceuesearauaracesteaesossses 669 321 LOIN Wr ON V Cl E E E EET EOE 669 32 2 Backup History Data and Update Recipe Data s soseneosensssensssereseerssresssrreseereseersseersseee 671 Chapter o gt aS VIA CIOS CL cocci senna sates creams octaustouaepeumanencanarsaauaaasemuneeeendueavaqsneatmovekesemeomnsaneneceumeect 673 33 1 Ove
163. D and that of channel 2 is 32 bit unsigned The cursor is positioned in data index 3 which is corresponding to the fourth data in data block The system writes data index and the content of watched data to the watch address as shown in the following picture 40 30 20 Channel 1 16 bit BCD Watch indicator Oa Control Channel 2 32 bit unsigned Watch address 16 bit BCD 32 bit unsigned NOTE 1 Data Index is a 16 bit unsigned integer when the designated register of cursor line is 32 bit device it will be stored in the bit 0 15 40 30 10 2 The watch function can only inspect current value in the data block If there are multiple trend curves of the same channel on the screen the data of previous trend curves is not exist only the latest value is available for watch 3 If the trend curve is cleared when position the cursor line the 0 will be displayed as shown below Channel 1 16 bit BCD Watch indicator Control No of Data Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 Channel 2 32 bit unsigned 1 2 3 Watch address 16 bit BCD 32 bit unsigned 4 If there are only three data in Channel 1 when position the cursor in Data 260 We WE NTEK 4 the 0 will be displayed as shown below Channel 1 Channel 16 bit BCD 32 bit unsigned ee Watch indicator EEI Control E Control m No of Data No of Data 20 Data 2 5 Data
164. DataEx SetData SetDataEx SetRTS GetCTS Beep SYNC_TRIG_MACRO ASYNC_TRIG_MACRO TRACE FindDataSamplingDate FindDataSamplingIndex FindEventLogDate FindEventLoglndex StringGet StringGetEx StringSet StringSetEx StringCopy StringMid StringDecAsc2Bin StringBin2DecAsc StringDecAsc2Float StringFloat2DecAsc StringHexAsc2Bin StringBin2HexAsc StringLength StringCat StringCompare StringCompareNoCase StringFind StringReverseFind StringFindOneOf Stringlncluding StringExcluding String ToUpper String ToLower StringToReverse StringTrimLeft StringTrimRight Stringlnsert 395 L WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 4 Statement 18 4 1 Definition Statement This covers the declaration of variables and arrays The formal construction is as follows type name where define the type of name Example int A define a variable A as an integer type name constant where define the type of array name Example int B 10 where define a variable B as a one dimensional array of size 10 18 4 2 Assignment Statement Assignment statements use the assignment operator to move data from the expression on the right side of the operator to the variable on the left side An expression is the combination of variables constants and operators to yield a value Variable Expression Example A 2 where a variable A is assigned to 2 18 4 3 Logical Statements Logical statements perform actions depending on the condition of a Boolean expression The syntax is a
165. Display and will save the History Data Display sampled data to objects can be used to user assigned view the content of location such as data sampling HMI SD USB records 8 1 Data Sampling Management Please define how the data is sampled before using Trend Display or History Data Display to review the content of Data Sampling 1 Click on the Data Sampling Object object icon Fead address Sample mode Trigger address Clear address Hold address Auto stop E l Data Sampling 2 Click New to specify relevant settings 95 WA WE NTEK Data Sampling 8 2 Create a New Data Sampling The functions of this object are introduced in the following Data Sampling Object Description PLO name Lacal HMI ki Sampling mode Clear address Time based O Trigger based Enable Sampling time interval 1 second s we PLC name Setting Read address Hold address PL name Local HMI w Setting Address LW h o PLE name Setting Data Record Max data records ClAuto stop History Files Data Format Data length O word s Save to HMI memory L Save to 5D card C Save to USB disk Preservation limit Days of preservation day s Sampling mode Time based mode samples data in a fixed frequency The Sampling time interval can be defined from every 0 1 second s to every 120 mins Sampling mode Time based O Taigzevbesed Sang ie nr Tri
166. E 1 n is the address of ASCII Read byte limit Display object barcode Address BARCODE O C Use a start code BYTES BARCODE Address BARCODE len Terminator cR LE OSTXfETx O Other None 542 W WE NTEK How to Connect a Barcode Device In the example the data stored by barcode device corresponding address are listed below Barcode corresponding address 13 bytes decimal The data saved in this address is 14 bytes 7 words If BARCODE 0 the number of byte is odd system will add a byte 0x00 to make it even BARCODE 1 3439HEX m USB barcode interface does not support on line simulation gill Ny m HMI now only supports barcode device to connect with one USB interface When Device Table of project includes this kind of device keyboard will be detected as barcode device and LB 9064 will be set to ON automatically when power on For restoring keyboard to normal function and to pause using barcode device set LB 9064 to OFF For restoring barcode device simply set LB 9064 to ON Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 543 Lib WE NTEK Ethernet Communication and Multi HMI Connection Chapter 21 Ethernet Communication and Multi HMI Connection There are two ways of Ethernet communication 1 Use RJ45 straight through cable hub a Control center 9 8 T Ethernet i Switch Hub WH 2 Use RJ45 cr
167. E General tab Scheduler General Time Set Prohibit Desrription Scheduler 1 K Power ON startend action Acton mode O Bit ON O Bit OFF Word write Acton addres PLO name Local HMI Setting apt Address LW 3 16 bit Unsigned Word write value sethings Constant Addres mtart value 30 Cancel 321 L WE NTEK Objects Action Mode Select the type of operation performed at designated time Bit ON At start time turn ON the specific bit At end time turn OFF the bit Example Start time 09 00 00 End time 17 00 00 Start time End time ON i i i OFF 09 00 00 12 00 00 17 00 00 Bit OFF At start time turn OFF the specific bit At end time turn ON the bit Example Start time 09 00 00 End time 17 00 00 Start time End time gi 09 00 00 12 00 00 17 00 00 Word write At start time the specific Write start value is written to the action address At end time Write end value is written to the action address Example Device address LW100 Start time 09 00 00 End time 12 00 00 Write start value 10 Write end value 0 LW100 LW 100 ee ee ee 09 00 00 12 00 00 322 Ly WE NTEK Objects Action address Specify the address where the scheduler performs actions on Power ON start end action Select the action to perform when power is turned on Enable If the HMI power is turned ON within the scheduler range th
168. EVT stored in HMI to Excel How to launch Easy Converter E From Utility Manager click EasyConverter E From EasyBuilder Pro menu click Tool Data Event Log Converter 25 1 How to Export DTL or EVT file to Excel 1 EasyConverter Open OK 2 Click Export to Microsoft Excel sampling Data Information EP CADocuments and Settingsinicolas wul A m led Select number of digits after decimal paint File Edt View Help ii Lat ea ale Date Time Millisecond O12 fOTF13 713 19 2 17 107 0 20127 017137 13 19 2 1 700 0 20127 01713 113 19 2 21 730 T2 20127 01713 13 19 247 700 63 20127 01713 7152192247 700 65 20127 01713 13 19 2 57 700 67 20127 01713 13 19 26 730 169 20127 01713 13 1 J 730712 2012701713 13 1 parai Li aiiai E aa 20127017137 13 1 7307 716 20127 01713 13 1950 730 18 B A d i 5 14 ey RA a B D EJE Date I Time dilliseconi Data 201271713 15 19 21 0 2012 1713 13 19 21 700 0 y Include millisecond information E 201271713 15 19 23 700 63 6 201243 13 19 24 700 BS FF 2012AA3 13 19 25 700 67 8 2012AA3 13 19 26 730 69 9 2012A A3 13 19 27 730 12 140 20124413 13 19 28 700 14 MG Moa ok bw POLPOLIS IE gt gt 610 Wa WE NTEK EasyConverter When opening event log an Event field can be found in EasyConverter as below 0 gt Event tri
169. End time Action Bit Set ON ee Starttime 08 00 00 iw amp w End time 08 20 00 OFF 0007 07 50 00 08 00 00 18 10 00 18 20 00 e Once the system execute start action it will read Write start address and Write end address altogether after then even you change the value of Write end address the system would not use the new value e When the operator changes RTC data for those schedule object with both start time and end time setting the system will check if the time update changes the status from out of schedule range to within schedule range if it is the start action will be performed e f there are several schedule objects registered the same start time or end time when time up the system will perform the operation from the first to the last in ascending order e When Time Set are specified as Address mode the system will read control word periodically e When Time Set are specified as Address and start time and end time is over valid range the system may not execute operation properly e When Time Set are specified as Address the action will not start up until time data update is success 332 W WE NTEK Objects 13 29 Option List Overview An Option List displays a list of items that the user can view and select Once the user selects an item the value corresponding to the item will be written to a word register There are two forms for this object Listbox and Drop down lis
170. For example set to WINDOW 200 Step 2 Adjust the height and width of a Clase WINDOW 200 and create a variety Bei of Function Key objects in fp Me ASCII UNICODE mode For example FK_11 is used as the Esc key ASCIDUNICODE mode Ont Backspace Cleat O ASCII UNICODE FK_14 is used as the Enter key ASCIVUNICODE mode O Backspace OC Os O ASCII UNICODE The rest are mostly used to input number or text For example FK_O is used for inputting number A A ASC CIVUNICODE mode O Enter O Backspace Clear Ex ASCII UNICODE Step 3 Select a suitable picture for each Function Key object GP_0O is a picture object which is placed at the bottom layer as the background Step 4 Select System Parameter Settings General Keyboard Add Window 200 Up to 32 keyboard windows cab be added 138 Lis weinvrex Keyboard Design and Usage Step 5 After the keyboard window is added when creating Numerical Input and ASCII Input objects 200 Keyboard can be found in Data Entry Keyboard Window no The Popup position is used to decide the display position of the keyboard on screen The system divides the screen into 9 areas Step 6 Select 200 Keyboara When users press Numerical Input o
171. HMI and PLC Tool for saving hardcopy or backup data is individually EasyPrinter appe downloadable even without full application Upon completion of project programming you can execute Online EasySimulator Simulation on PC by directly connect with PLC or Offline Simulation on PC without connecting PLC EasyWatch Via HMI to monitor or set HMI and PLC address value Tool for setting format of Recipe data Users can open Recipe data Recipe Editor or data in External Memory here Release Note Notes for EasyBuilder Pro version and latest information Seaichire Edo Support AB TAG mechanism and improve the flexibility of an object in read write Utility Manager EasyBuilder Pro project management m HMI eMT Series support downloading uploading project via USB cable After installing EasyBuilder Pro Please go to Computer Management Device Manager to check if USB driver is also installed if not please refer to installation steps to manually install 16 WS WE NTEK Utility Manager Chapter 2 Utility Manager After installing EasyBuilder Pro software double click on Utility Manager shortcut The Utlity Manager is a software shell for launching several utilities Some functions are duplicated in the EasyBuilder Pro project editing program Utlity Manager can operate as a stand alone program amp Utility Manager Alkid HMI IP Password After rebooting everything returns to When operating HMI designate Pas
172. HMI during the specified time period the Effective Time imported data is effective permanently If not specifying Effective Time data can be imported at any time Save to USB Save data to USB 716 Wa WE NTEK lt Note 1 gt Can be composed of alphabets numbers lt Note 2 gt A maximum of 127 user accounts can be added 717 Administrator Tools Case sensitive a 7 US WE NTEK Administrator Tools 36 2 2 Setting User Accounts a Click on Add to create a new account Click Remove to delete the selected account Click Secret to define the account as a secret user Type in User name and Password and tick the privilege classes Class A Class L User Account Settings mooooomooRos Ci ooosseeaew Ci ooooocoomAons Cl DO0OCACORAR Ca Danomonnnrnnr ri DADAOAADCARA 7 Ci DOCOCCOCADA z l 2 3 4 5 6 T a J l l i e b After building the account click Export to back up the data For re build and modification click Import to import the backup data Save As Save ir gt secruty F E eu E soft eua My Recent El tesk ena Documents UA File eua Desktop eT My Documents aL hy amputer File name UA File eua Ei Mu Network Save as type EasvBuilder User Accounts Cancel C Use Password 718 Ligh WE NTEK Administrator Tools c lf Effective Time gt Restrict t
173. I The I O ports are different form one HMI type to another Download Upload project via SD Card including Recipe transfer Event Log Data Log etc and to backup or record History data Connects PLC or other peripheral devices RS 232 RS 485 2W 4W CAN Bus RS 422 RS 485 4W ETHERNET ff mm Connects Ethernet devices such as PLC laptop for exchanging data via Network USB STORAGE fe Supports USB devices such as mouse keyboard USB disk printer lt Download Upload project including Recipe transfer Event Log Data Log etc In addition Weintek provides FLZ232000 Multi Connector Cable and FLZ485000 Multi Connector Cable to expand one COM port to multiple independent COM ports so that the convenience and efficiency of operation can be improved 36 wh WE NTEK Hardware Settings 4 2 HMI System Settings For the first time operating HMI users have to complete the HMI system settings After this users can develop their own operation interface through EasyBuilder Pro editing software 4 2 1 System Reset Each HMI is equipped with a set of reset button and DIP switch When using DIP switch to change modes the corresponding functions will be triggered If system password is lost or forgotten please set DIP Switch 1 to ON and the rest remain OFF then reboot HMI HMI will switch to touch screen calibration mode 1 A sign appear
174. I Local HMI Local HMI Local Hh Local Hil Local HMI Local HMI Local Heil Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Export EXCEL Import EXCEL 548 Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit m Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 1 The Address Ranges of Local HMI Memory 22 1 1 Bits Local Memory Bo 12095 DDDDD Bits Local Word Bits BIT 1079915 DDDDDdd DDDDD address dd bit no 00 15 Retentive 0 65535f DDDDDh Memory Bit DDDDD address Index h bit no 0 f Use LW 9000 as Index Register and correspond to RW_ Bit Example When LW 9000 1 RBI 01 RW_Bit 11 Retentive RW_ Bit 0 524287f DDDDDh Memory Word DDDDD address Bits h bit no 0 f Retentive RW_A Bit 0 65535f DDDDh Memory A Word DDDDD address Bits h bit no 0 f 549 Ly WE INTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 1 2 Words Local Memory LW O 10799 DDDDD oe OO a Retentive RW 0 524287 DDDDDD timo S Retentive RWI 0 65535 DDDDD Memory Word Use LW 9000 as Index Index Register and correspond to RW Example When LW 9000 10 RWI 5 RW 15 Retentive RW_A 0 65535 DDDDD MonoysWod A 0S Extended EMO EM9 0 DDDDDDDDDD Memory Words PAER aroas Limited by device max 2G 550 Lyh WE NTEK 22 2 HMI Time v 50 W908 nso v 80 waona W501 v 50 wo owore v 50 ws v 90 v 50
175. I only Please go to System Parameters Settings General Project protection Project protection Enable Project key 111111 range 0 4294967295 Jf this key i different from HMI key the project won t be executed normally Use LM9040 9047 to change HMI kew LE9046 indicates check result hey error when stabs it on LW 9046 LW 9047 32 bit can be used to set the HMI key The value can t be read or written into these two registers by remote HMI While using this function set the password Project key password range 0 4294967295 and the XOB file can only be executed on specific HMI when HMI key and Project key are identical If they are different the system will turn LB 9046 ON HMI needs to be rebooted every time when revising HMI key m When HMI key and Project key are different HMI and PLC won t be able to communicate Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 659 Ly WE NTEK Project Protection 30 5 Project Password MTP file Password can be set to protect the MTP file in System parameter Security tab Enabling this password will be required if attempting to edit MTP file MTP password range 1 4294967295 Address o Project pasword MTP file Enable MIP fil Pee After setting when opening this project a pop up window requires Pee I5 a epee Be to input password will be shown Cancel Note J
176. ID L 59 HError assert qm fibt get gnCurrentM 49 qninacrolD gqnturrentMI 60 PEDDI age 2 next J 50 SetDatat gnmacrolID L ei 51 i Getbhataigntount Log 62 47 ff33 gt 33332332 gt Agger 3 gt 3 gt gt gt gt gt 5z qntount gnCurrenthCou 53 end macro cormand 45 fi GetDataignmacroID Local HM 53 f SetDatalgnCount Loc 45 gnturrcentMID D 54 qnmacrolD qntrestvYal QnlurrentMec 10 Right click to select Toggle All Outlining to open all macro code blocks WorkSpace Works pace GetDatal OK O Local HMI LB D GetData OK O0 Local HMI LB O 38 for J O to 3 ff gt gt gt gt gt DPD set gnCurrentMCount gt gt gt gt 47 BESS oe oe ee qnourrentMCount i 45 Get HMI I SetDatalqneurrentMCount Local HMI 45 guma PE set gnCurrentMCount gt 50 3eu HMI I 51 fi Get SS Ss JI LW if OF E 1 then 52 gnCou Select All Chita K E 1 53 f Se I LW SetData K Local HMI LU k 54 qntes Toggle Bookmark Ctl F2 Y qncour else 55 SetDa NextBookmark FE MI LY K E 1 56 gneor PreviousBookmerk ShtttFe end if ET Sette Clear Al Bookmarks lL HMI ff gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt get gnCurrentMCount gt gt gt gt 58 Tozele All Outlining gnCurrentNCount 2 Be Der Onn noount setDatal gnCurrentMCount Local HHI ED ff Po b gt DDD ff gt gt 355 gt gt gt gt gt gt set gnCurrentMCount gt gt gt gt 61 next J 387 iJ gt WE NTEK Macro Reference
177. INE nianna E E EE 724 36 4 1 Introduction of e Mail SMTP Server Settings ccccccssececesseceeseeeeesecesseeeeseeaees 724 36 4 2 e Mail SMTP Server Settings cccccsssecccssececesscecsesececeecessuseeeseseceeeaecessuncessenses 725 Bs SIV al CONTIS scence cise arse sence EE E E E EENE 726 36 5 1 Introduction OT e Mail CONTACTS ssiri a 726 5029 2 Mail CONMACES Settings cerota N 728 36 5 3 Use EasyBuilder Pro to Import e Mail Settings and Contacts ccccceeeeeeeeeeeee 730 E WE NTEK EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Startup Guide Chapter 1 EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Startup Guide 1 1 EasyBuilder Pro Installation Software Download EasyBuilder Pro configuration software from EasyBuilder Pro CD or visiting Weintek Labs Inc s website at http www weintek com to obtain all software versions available including Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese English Italian Korean Spanish Russian and French version and latest upgraded files Hardware Requirements Recommended CPU INTEL Pentium II or higher Memory 256MB or higher Hard Disk 2 5GB or higher Disc space available at least 500MB CD ROM 4X or higher Display 256 color SVGA with 1024 x 768 resolution or greater Keyboard and Mouse Ethernet for project downloading uploading USB Port 2 0 for project downloading uploading RS 232 COM At least one available RS 232 serial port required for on line simulation Printer Operating System Wi
178. If checked the selected window will be sent as an attachment 93 Ly WE NTEK 7 3 Event Log Relevant Registers Event Log EasyBuilder Pro provides the following system tags to manage the Event Log Address Description LB 9021 LB 9022 LB 9023 LB 9024 LB 9034 LB 9042 LB 9043 LB 11940 LB 11941 LB 11942 LB 11943 LB 11944 LB 11945 reset current event log set ON delete the earliest event log file on HMI memory set ON delete all event log files on HMI memory set ON refresh event log information on HMI memory set ON save event data sampling to HMI USB disk SD card set ON acknowledge all alarm events set ON unacknowledged events exist when ON delete the earliest event log file on SD card set ON delete all event log files on SD card set ON refresh event log information on SD card set ON delete the earliest event log file on USB set ON delete all event log files on USB set ON refresh event log information on USB set ON LW 9060 LW 9061 LW 9450 LW 9451 LW 9452 LW 9453 LW 9454 LW 9455 LW 10480 LW 10481 LW 10483 LW 10484 32bit size of event log files on SD card 16bit no of event log files on USB 32bit size of event log files on USB 94 Lid WE NTEK Data Sampling Chapter 8 Data Sampling o 4 f 00110101 Data Sampling defines how the data is sampled sampling date address and data length EasyBuilder Pro Trend
179. Interval S words Wax Read Length 20 words hax Write Length 20 words Output Macro debug With Trace function offered by Macro the executing status of Macro can be seen Please refer to EasyBuilder Pro User s Manual Chapter 18 MACRO for more information In illustration below for ID 2 Ln 7 and ID 2 Ln 8 ID 2 represents Macro name Ln 7 and Ln 8 represent that they are in 7 and 8 lines of Macro W Weintek MT Diagnostic Tool EasyDiagnoser File View ptions Help Cheteatt s si HE 2 Ln 7 The results are DO 4 Line cl a sl 34767 fl 1 234567 Iti 2 Lea 7 The results are O 4 Lina cl a sl 347b fl 1 234567 ME 2 La 7 The results are MO 2 LaS c1 a 81 534767 fl 1 234567 ME 2 La 7 The results are E DO 2 LaS c1 a sI 34rb fl 1 234567 HEO 2 La 7 The results are DO 2 LaS e1 a s1 342767 fl 1 234567 ME 2 La 7 The results are bas 681 33 3 Error Code In activity area users can find the reason of error through error codes listed below 0 Normal 1 Time out 2 Fail Error 12 Ignore When error occurs error message will be shaded red as shown below The error code is 1 since PLC is disconnected with HMI The error code is 12 since PLC No Response message window is shown YW Weintek MT Diagnostic Tool EasyDiagnoser Ele View Gphons Help He Command Device Address Type al jo 39999 Oo _ Capture cmd PID Devi
180. K Ethernet Communication and Multi HMI Connection 21 2 PC to HMI Communication Ethemet o2 5 m ee Crossover cable With On line Simulation Function PC can collect data of HMI through Ethernet network and save the data files on PC WH PC can control HMI by operating system reserved register HMI can control PC for example commanding PC to save data from HMI or PLC Suppose PC is going to communicate with two HMI HMI A and HMI B the setting procedure of the project file on PC 1 Set the IP address of the two HMI example HMI A 192 168 1 1 HMI B 192 168 1 2 System Parameter Sethngs 2 PC project TEI Device Model General System Setting Security Font Device list Printer Backup Server e Mail Recipes System Parameter Device List add remote HMI A amp HMI B Name Location Device type Interface IF Local HMI Local HMI Local eMT3070 00x Disable Mia Remote HHI 1 HMI A Remote 1P 192 168 1 1 Port 8000 MT8son Ethemet TCE 3 Set Bit Hew Set Bit Object General Security Shane Label PLC name select the i Description device to be controlled if Write address it s HMI A LB select sigvaneslawia Bl stra HMI A Address lig wo z Write after button is released A thibute i Set
181. LB 00000 s 1 5 2 LB 00562 2 11024 J LB 00000 1 H 1201 a aa LE 00563 7 1 Smart Docking Note EasyDiagnoser doesn t support Siemens S7 1200 Ethernet and Allen Bradley Ethernet IP CompactLogix ControlLogix Free Tag Names since both of the PLC use tag 684 L WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names Chapter 34 Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names When using the driver of Rockwell EtherNet IP Tag CompactLogix ControlLogix in EasyBuilder Pro users can import User Defined Tag from CSV file of RSLogix5000 However data type of User Defined Predefined and Module Defined Structure won t be imported NH AME Local liC Local 1 1 Localmil Locali Locali Arrayv2D Array Bool Array DIMT Array Real BOO bOOS b1 DESCRIPT DATATYPE AB Embedded_IO16F C 0 AB Embedded_IQ16F 1 0 AB Embedded_GBI16 C 0 AB Embedded_OGB16 1 0 AB Embedded_OB16 0 0 DINT 25 5 BOOL 256 DINT 130 REAL 1Z5 INT 15 INT 255 Giant RADIX RADIX RADIX RADIX RADIX RADIX oA TAT ePECIFIER ATTRIBUTES Decimal Cons Decimal Cons Decimal Cons Float Constant Decimal FLCH Decimal PLC Therefore Structure Editor in EasyBuilder Pro is for users to import and edit User Defined Predefined and Module Defined Structure 685 L WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names 34 1 Import User Defined Tag CSV File to EasyBuilder Pro Step 1 Create Tags from RSLogix5000
182. LC is connected oe Loca min n Disable i follow the original COM ai 1752006 E 1R settings l i 2 Select RS 232 ATA click Settings Name MARE Location PLE type Master Slave Server w W 1 00 MASTER_SLAVE so FPLC IF RS 232 wv com COMI 115200 E 8 1 3 Fill in M1500 COM Port Settings PLC ID No in Parameter 1 COM Timeout seci 1 0 w Refer to MT500 Baud rate Turn around delay tms Doo settings Data bits i Send ACK delay fms io o oo Parity Parameter 1 Stop bits i Parameter 2 ios Parameter3 0 640 Lib WE NTEK m EB500 Settings 1 In EB500 System Parameter Settings set Multiple HMI Slave HMI HMI link speed 115200 m Baud rate 7 must be identical in EB500 and EBPro 2 Double click on PLC Address View exe to check PLC ID No and fill in Parameter 1 of EBPro Multi HMI Intercommunication Master Slave Mode System Parameter Setting Ed PLC General Indicator Security Editor Hardware Aux PLC type MITSUBISHI FXOn FX2 v HMI model MT510T MT508T 640 x 480 v PLC I F port A5 485 aw Baud rate SECO Data bits 7 Eit Parity Even Stop bits Parameter 1 C Turn around delay Parameter 3 L Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 HMI station no o v PLC station no HMI HMI link speed 11 Connect I F Serial v
183. Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder Pro User Manual Chapter 1 EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Startup Guide ccccccecccssesccsseeeeseeteeceeeeceeeeceteeetens 10 11 EASY BUNGEE Pro ASE AI AON icesids asaeuncraadencensdataracensundessarapewauadenerencctaravenaenteneusmaceenndonavenceenente 10 1 2 Steps t Install EASY BUNGEE PrO iccesdescnaisescncwivissnavtcauatecasdeseoudsnavanwiedeanavicabsteeasdiswoudsearagwicdeest 11 Chapter 2 UUI MINIE Er oenina EE O EEEE EE E E 17 DANI PASSWORT E E eaeenennsuessenanatn bonedtctewascaunke 18 22 E AE TOO anre E E E E ted quan ce pamasttars tenses 19 2 2 1 Build Download Data for Saving in SD Card or USB Disk ccesecceeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeees 19 2 2 2 Steps to Download Project to HMI via USB or SD Card eeccccsssecceeseeeeeeeetaeeees 20 Do LAS ON E OA E E ns ET A A E ences suse A E 21 Pes WO OW O O ai E E E E E E E N 21 DZ IO a E E E ae E E E aceenes teoeaeenaeeaeae 23 PA MON e E E E EOE E EEE EE 24 2 4 1 Off line Simulation On line SIMULATION ee cece ceeecccceeeccceeececeeececneecceceeeceeeaeeens 24 De PASS MINOW e A E 26 Chapter 3 Create an EasyBuilder Pro Project ccccssccccssececesecceesecceesececeneceseuseeeeeecesegecesseneeesens 27 3 1 Create a New PF PO SCU ic ccactmesisacesenaaaswnnteacaudohaasaaiennsceietoncaastenntes sre Crane ESEN S r EEEN EE EEEE 27 3 2 Save and Compile the PlOlC CU sencscicccsracersssnadssendesedannaddabcussetenossaracd sung adeotmnddebabaindebavennasaace
184. Macro Reference r F Tae el Nee a i i ae al fs d J a ig j4 iisi p _ Eile View Options Help ID 1 Ln 114 LWo 2 7 ID 1 Ln 11 LWo 3 1D 1 Ln 14 Lwo 4 ID 1 Ln 14 LWo 5 D 4 Ln 14 LWo 6 n macro command main f Bhoret A GetData a a Local HMI L A A 1 SetData a i 1 il ry 517 1 4 LL WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 14 The Usage of String Operation Functions String operation functions are added to macro which provides users a more convenient way to operate strings The term string means a sequence of ASCII characters each of which occupies 1 byte The sequence of characters can be stored into 16 bit registers with least significant byte first For example create an ASCII input object and setup as follows General Data Entry Security Shape Font _ Description Mask Use UNICODE Reverse highlow byte Read address Address Li k We lo Address PLC name Local HMI Device kype i Liv Address lp System kag User defined tag Address Format DDDDD range 0 10799 Index register Mo of word 3 L Run simulation and input abcdef The string abcdef is stored in LWO LW2 as follows LB represents low byte and HB represents high byte HE LE The ASCII input object reads 1 word 2 bytes at a time as described in the previous cha
185. Mask JU UNICODE C Reverse high low byte ct a UNE OLE madi O Enter Backspace FK_1 Read addres fz ASCII UNICODE E PLC name Local HMI FK 2 Address Lii o at y ASCILUNICODE mode Enter Backspace Address ASCII UNICODE PLC name A stow FK_4 ASCIMINICODE mode nter O Enter Backspace Address 0 System tag Address format DOODO range 0 10799 ASCII UNICODE a Index regisher No of word 8 Tag Library aF i 3 Place an ASCII Input object Create Function Keys a R on screen tick Use UNICODE y 5 as shown and an Enter key a simple UNICODE keyboard is built Users can Group the self defined keyboard and Save to Group Library for future use cm 142 W WE NTEK Objects Chapter 13 Objects This chapter is to illustrate the ways of using and setting all kinds of objects For those settings general for all the objects such as index register label shape and so on please refer to Chapter 9 Object s General Properties 13 1 Bit Lamp Overview Bit Lamp object displays the ON and OFF state of a bit address If the bit state is OFF the State 0 shape will be displayed If the bit state is ON the State 1 shape will be displayed OFF State ON State state 0 State 1 Configuration Click the Bit Lamp icon in the toolbar and the Bit Lamp Object s Properties dialo
186. Memory PrintewBackup Serwer eMail o Recipes m Device Model norte Setting Security Font Fonts for non asci strings a O U Laat Toe Delete ig oe E fel IF Se He Delete All they ee Step2 Design non ascii input keypad Create window11 for non ascii input keypad keypad design is shown below H L0 WINDOW 010 11 SimpleChinese_Keyboard BACK CLEAR ENTER Those objects on the window are function keys with input code in accord with the label For example to input fa function key create a function key object General ASCII UNICODE mode type in fj in the column as below illustration fai x 169 Ly WE NTEK Objects D T aw Function Key Objects Properties Cy ale AL a e a o C EA ini 4 General Security Shane Label Profile Description Activate after button is released O Change full screen window O Change common window O Display popup window Retum to previous window O Clos window ASCTLUNICODE mode Enter Backspace OC O Es ASCII UNICODE Go to Function key Label and then select Use label type 3j in the content and in the Attribute Font select AR MingtiM GB it must be the same as setp1 s setting as illustrated below The label o
187. Monitor H Read Cory HMI Nasas Defaut HMI ee imi Fi awh 192 165 1131 tony HMI DELAERE PAR ame ey Seach A 192 168 1 14 Defauk HMI 192 168 1 18 Defauk HM 192 166 1 201 kette MTBOTOH aps 20091 000 ov late supports 197 168 1 22 Lary aHa ail Use Local HMI HMI Port No a000 2 er 1 3 Select HMI and click OK to finish adding Add BMI 2 Hoi Name Defat OG Y 192 168 1 102 Def aut HMT 192 163 1 118 rcoles 8100 E 192 163 1131 tory HMI ch al 192 168 1 14 Defaut HMI s 192 168 1 18 Oef aut HMI i 192 168 1 201 hatte MT8070H OS 20051002 cr Aster sggoorts 192 168 122 Lorry M13120 thee Local HMI nd Port No sooo v k jii Camel 706 Lib WE NTEK Easy Watch 1 4 HMI under off line simulation can also be added by checking Use Local HMI Add DMI re H Te Local Mi HMI Port Nod ai Ok Cancel 7 In PLC settings select PLC type or target HMI 2 1 Select Weintek HMI to operate local HMI PLZ Wwieintek HMI SIEMENS S7 200 VO any address SIEMENS S7 200 PPI SIEMENS S7 300 SIEMENS 57 300 MPI SIEMENS S7 00 E T2005 CEthernat SIEMENS 7 400 Ebner ret SIMaTiC TIKOS SIMATIC TEES C400 TAIAN TFOZ Series IT Talat TPOS Series TEC Irnverker TELEMECANIQUE Uni Telra Top ert Teshiba T Series Toshiba YF 511 Trio MOEBIUS BTL TOPIPI VIGOR JIPA 200 VIPA 200 VD amy address VIPA 300 VIPS S00 MPI 8 To monitor PLC I F Setting can
188. Name Location PLC type PLC IF COM Memory Map OHMI Local W 1 00 MEMORY _MAP so RS 232 COM1 115200 E 8 1 PLC default station no 9 COM Port Settings COM Baud rate Data bits Parity Stop bits Note The number of resending commands oO v Timeout sec Turn around delay rms Send ACK delay ms Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 m1 1 eMT3000 is unlike MT500 which is divided into Memory Map_Master MemoryMap Slaver therefore simply selecting Memory Map is allowed 2 Data bit has to be 8 bits 3 The rest of the settings should be identical between two HMI Adding two objects on window10 a toggle switch setting is as illustration below 666 Lib WE NTEK Memory Map Communication New Toggle Switch Object x General Security Shape Label Description Read address PLE name Memory Map we Setting aidessiime E Invert signal Write address PLE name Memory Map 000 Map ivi Setting Setting Address ME ajo o Write when button is released Attribute Switch style Toggle B A multi state switch object setting is as following New Multi State Switch Object General Security Shape Label Description Mode Value vi Offset O Read address PL
189. O E EE ENE 607 CTPA COR 2a Sy COICO arin E AET E eomeea 610 25 1 How to Export DTL or EVT file to Excel sicireseisniineierirnnnnn eiei 610 ZZ SCANS FUNCT oee eE Er EE E NE EE TO oniauceduanavenitocsses 612 25 3 How to Use Multi File Conversion sssssssseseessseesssersseerssrerssersssrreseereseesssreeseereseersseerseees 614 Chonta gerd og Ea 4 a1 Gene ee ene E E E E E E A EEE O EAT 615 26 1 Using EasyPrinter as a Printer S rVer ccccccccssccsecceeccsecesccesccseecsecseesseceeeeeeceeseseeeseeenaes 616 26 1 1 Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter s sosseseseeseseessrrrsserrssreessrroserreseresseeessrreseereseeree 616 26 1 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder Pro eesessssssesesseseessserssreresrrrssrersseesssrreseereseersreree 617 26 2 Using EasyPrinter as a BaCkUp Servet cccccsssccccssecccessceceesceeeeeceeeueceseueeeseaecessuecessenees 620 26 2 1 Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter ccccsecccsssecccesececeseceeeececeescesseneeesegecessuecessees 620 26 2 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder Pro ccccsccccsssccceeseceeesececeeeceseeeceeseseceseecensuees 621 26 5 EasyPrinter Operation GUIGE sinccs ccnnessiececassedousabacesamendebanamegoecnwsusedousabacesamsuddhavamedenenesesenensds 624 V6 eo ead Wey 2 9 0 lt 1 g 8 ol eee ee E ene eee Teen er oe nent eer ener tr eee een ee ree 624 DGB ON ALON GUE e es ce ces ce acini eis scese ee E a ass tuts ene perenne emavanaearavacniee 625 ZO A COMECE a A FEC eor Enee E
190. O IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10304 16bit remote PLC 1 s port no R Y R Y LW 10305 16bit remote PLC 2 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10306 16bit remote PLC 2 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10307 16bit remote PLC 2 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10308 16bit remote PLC 2 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1IP2 IP3 LW 10309 16bit remote PLC 2 s port no R Y R Y LW 10310 16bit remote PLC 3 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10311 16bit remote PLC 3 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10312 16bit remote PLC 3 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10313 16bit remote PLC 3 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10314 16bit remote PLC 3 s port no R Y R Y LW 10315 16bit remote PLC 4 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1IP2 IP3 LW 10316 16bit remote PLC 4 s IP1 IP address RIY RIY 586 Ly WE INTEK System Reserved Words Bits ee re LW 10317 16bit remote PLC 4 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10318 16bit remote PLC 4 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10319 16bit remote PLC 4 s port no R Y R Y 587 p WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 22 Communication Error Messages amp No of Pending Cmd LW 9350 16bit pending command no inlocal HMI R R R LW
191. O name Memory Map w Setting Address Imw o l T 16 bit Unsigned write address PLE name Memory Map 0 Map w Settings Setting ddress MW alo 0 i 16 bit Unsigned Write when button is released ttribute Switch style 106 v Mo of states 3 v Cyclical Enable _ User defined mapping 667 WS WE NTEK Memory Map Communication Save Compile Download Change parameter in System Parameter Setting PLC and download to another HMI The HMI display is as following Fast Sel Users may try to touch the screen the other HMI will act the same as current HMI The communicating way is the same as above mentioned The point is to keep the same data in the same register 668 Lib WE NTEK FTP Server Application Chapter 32 FTP Server Application In addition to backup history data from HMI to PC by SD card USB memory stick or EasyPrinter FTP Server can also be applied to do this After downloading project to HMI FTP Server can be used to backup history data and recipe data and also to update recipe data The files in FTP Server can t be deleted _ DataLog EventLog Recipe 32 1 Login FTP Server Step 1 Before login FTP Server please check HMI IP address System information nina emtsal20 IP Address 192 168 1 118 Net Mask 255 255 255 0 Route Address 192 168 1 254 Mac Address O0 00 26 05 19 4A 669 Lib WE NTEK FTP Server
192. On EasyBuilder Pro Tool Bar Edit View Option Dew O 3 Compile LI New CH TE On line Sirmlation Chit la Oren Sade Offline Sivmlation Chlt T cas Download F7 le Save SATS CF Build Data fox USB Disk or CF Caud Download Reboot HMI 1 Click to Save MTP file 2 Click to Compile to XOB file for downloading to HMI this also checks if the project can run correctly Users are allowed Project name C Documents and Settings rd MTP 1 mtp to select the languages needed ZOB file name C Documents and Settings rd MTP 1 xob for the project and download to HMI XOB password used in decompiler C Decompilation is prohibited Select the languages used on the HMI u p to 8 languages Startup language after redownloading the project can be selected ieee Grinnieee diene Language 8 Language 9 Language 10 Language 11 Language 12 Mote maximum of 8 languages can be selected simultaneously Picture size o 33538658 bytes 108 bytes 36474 bytes 14 bytes 10 bytes Label tag size 25 bytes Total size o S809771 bytes 3 63M Double click error messages to modify the attributes of relative objects Compile Build font files A successfully compiled file will get this dialog box 29 Wa WE NTEK Create an EasyBuilder Pro Project 3 3 Off line and On line Simulation OK without HMI amp PLC and save more time Off line simulation Simulate proj
193. R R R LB 9036 SD card free space insufficiency alarm when ON Lib WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 9 Storage Space Management LB 9037 USB free space insufficiency alarm when ON OR R R LW 9070 16bit free space insufficiency warning Mega bytes LW 9071 16bit reserved free space size Mega bytes OR R R LW 9072_ 32bit HMI current free space K bytes R R R LW 9074 32bit SD current free space K bytes R R R LW 9076 32bit USB current free space K bytes OR R R Want to know how to use LW 9072 LW 9078 together with Backup object Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 560 Lb WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 10 Touch Position LW 9041 16bit touch status word bit O on user is touching the screen Lw 9043 16bit touch y position oR R Rk Lw 9044 16bit leave x position oR R Rk LW 9045 16bit leave y position PR R R Want to know how to trigger relevant registers to change window with finger slide waos rent souenxposton R R i om0 om0 ow 5045 Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 561 Lig WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 11 Station Number Variables LW 10000 16bit varO station no variable usage varO address LW 10001 16bit var1 station no variable usage var1 address LW 10002 16bit var2
194. R W R Y R Y conneciton 578 Ly WE INTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 20 Communication Status with Remote HMI Address Description Local LB 9068 auto connection for remote HMI 1 when ON LB 9069 auto connection for remote HMI 2 when ON LB 9070 auto connection for remote HMI 3 when ON LB 9071 LB 9072 LB 9073 LB 9074 LB 9075 auto connection for remote HMI 8 when ON LB 9100 remote HMI 1 status set on to retry auto connection for remote HMI 4 when ON auto connection for remote HMI 5 when ON when ON when ON w Nr NAN auto connection for remote HMI 6 auto connection for remote HMI 7 ee Nr connection LB 9101 remote HMI 2 status set on to retry connection LB 9102 remote HMI 3 status set on to retry connection LB 9103 remote HMI 4 status set on to retry connection LB 9104 remote HMI 5 status set on to retry connection LB 9105 remote HMI 6 status set on to retry connection LB 9106 remote HMI 7 status set on to retry connection LB 9107 remote HMI 8 status set on to retry connection LB 9149 forced to reconnect remote HMI when IP changed on line set ON LW 9800 16bit remote HMI 1 s IPO IP address IPO IP1 1IP2 IP3 LW 9801 16bit remote HMI 1 s IP1 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9802 16bit remote HMI 1 s IP2 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 vy z5 my AU A A AJ vy A A my AU my VIIDI AIA A A A _o LW 9803 16bit re
195. Recipe Records complete the settings in EasyBuildr Pro System Parameter Settings Recipe For further information please refer to Chapter 5 System Parameter Settings System Parameter Settings Device Model General evetem wettig Extended Memory FrintenBackop Server e Mail Recipes List Recipes x OK J Cancel After setting system parameters Recipe Records can be opened by clicking HM icon in EasyBuilder Pro main menu In the example shown below Recipe1 and Recipe2 are contained three items are shown on the right side The name of recipes are gained from system parameter settings the following introduces how to insert records into recipe according to the item format 607 Ligh WE NTEK Recipe Editor Add Delete Click Add to insert records into the recipe according to the item format oo Click Delete to delect the edited content Recipe list This shows the recipes Recipe Records i Recipes created in the Recipe 0 Fecipez 0 Newltem Newlteml Newltem2 System Parameter Settings The number enclosed in brackets shows the total number of records in the corresponding Click the up and down arrows to select the record to be edited Example BD Click Add button above the record list to insert a new record and start editing each item When click on the item the item format will be shown under the record list This helps users to fill in each item
196. Remote HMI gt ih 4 Ethernet a HMI Desktop hi Ethernet bi HMl HMI The so called remote HMI means through network this HMI is controlled by a local HMI or a PC running on line simulation To control a remote HMI users need to add this type of device Click New under Device list and the Device Properties dialog appears Users need to set all the required properties correctly Device Properties Name Remote HMI HMI Ore Location Remote v ff Seitnes 4 IP 192 168 1 11 Port 8000 Interval of block pack words ig a te Setting Description HMI or PLC This is to confirm whether this device is a HMI or PLC It is HMI in this case 52 Lib WE NTEK System Parameter Settings Users can select Local or Remote Select Remote in this case and set the IP address and Port no of the remote HMI Click Settings of Location to set these the dialogue is shown below The Port no of remote HMI can be seen in Model in System parameters once the mtp file of remote HMI is opened The port no of remote HMI and local HMI must be the same Location IP Address Settings Ethernet IP address 192 168 1 Port no aor After all settings are completed a new device named Remote HMI is added to the Device list Device list Mame Location Device type Local HMI Local HMI Local eM T3105 300 x Local FLE 1 Device 1 Local Mitsubishi FEUs Re
197. S RTU Device 8 end macro command INPORT INPORT read_data start device _ name read_count return_ value Reads data from a COM port or the ethernet These data is stored to read_data start read_datal start read count 1 device_name is the name of a device defined in the device table and the device must be a Free Protocol type device read_ count is the required amount of reading and can be a constant or a variable If the function is used successfully to get sufficient data return_value is 1 otherwise is 0 Below is an example of executing an action of reading holding registers of a MODBUS device Read Holding Registers macro_command main char command 32 response 32 short address checksum short read_no return_value read_data 2 425 Ly LO WEINTEK ee ooo Macro Reference FILL command 0 0 32 command initialization FILL response 0 0 32 command 0 Ox1 station no command 1 Ox3 function code Read Holding Registers address 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 read no 2 read 2 words 4x_1 and 4x_2 HIBYTE read_no command 4 LOBYTE read_no command 5 CRC command 0 checksum 6 LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7 send out a Read Holding Registers command OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 read responses for a Read Holding Registers command INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 9
198. SBBuilt m port PLC diwet coupled setting Tive out Sec 15 COM port Connection test Tramtanutmion speed 1152Kbp C34 OCIECo Cte HET OC a pi T E a System image fil tal Si l S TEL FXCPV Cu CClECom NET I CC Lmk Ethers NETA0H OK Accessing host station ee Cle After completing all settings when users execute PLC application on PC the HMI will be switched automatically to pass through mode the communication between HMI and PLC will be suspended this moment and it will be resumed if the application closes as follows J Weintek Virtual Serial Port At this moment the application is controlling PLC directly via virtual serial port 648 Pass Through Function 29 2 COM Port Mode Source COM Port Destination COM Port PC Application Source COM Port The port is used to connect HMI with PC Destination COM Port The port is used to connect HMI with PLC When using COM port mode of pass through users should correctly set the properties of source COM port and Destination COM port 29 2 1 Settings of COM Port Mode There are two ways to enable COM port mode of pass through function 1 Use Utility Manager 2 Use system registers LW 9901 and LW 9902 LW 9901 pass through source COM port 1 3 COM1 COM3 LW 9902 pass through destination COM port 1 3 COM1 COM3 Note When finish using Pass Through function users should click Stop Pass through to disable it so that HMI ca
199. Scheduler settings guide Fower OM startend action 1 Check Bit ON in Action mode Action mode Bit ON Bit OFF Word write 2 Set LB100 in Action address Acton address PLC name Local HMI Setting Address E Jw 316 Time Set tab 3 Select Time Set tab check Constant General Time Set Prohibit Constant Addres 4 Unselect Setting on individual day In Start adjust time as 8 00 00 and select Monday to Friday Setting on individual day start Sun Mon Tue Wen Thu Fri Sat 5 In End select Enable termination action and adjust time as 17 00 00 End Enable termination action m G 6 Click OK a new schedule object is created and display on the schedule list scheduler 317 Lh WE NTEK Example 2 Objects Set temperature at 90F at 8 00 and set it back to 30F standby mode at 17 00 Monday to Friday When the designated start time is reached When the designated stop time is reached setting is wirtten 0 0 I l 1 a 6 l 4 I 2 LWw100 90 C i 100 i 50 40 20 The running mode temperature O0 0 0 The standy mode temperature setting is written Click New to add a new schedule object Follow the steps to set up the schedule object The LW100 is used to store set value of temperature 318 Lib WE NTEK Objects ached aler General Time Set Prohibit Description Sche
200. StringCopy source destination start or success StringCopy source start destination start Copy one string to another This function copies a static string which is enclosed in quotes or a string that is stored in an array to the destination buffer The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start destination start must be an one dimensional char array This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of source string exceeds the max size of destination buffer it returns false and the content of destination remains the same The success field is optional macro_command main char src1 5 abcde char dest1 5 bool success1 success1 StringCopy src1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 abcde char dest2 5 bool success2 success2 StringCopy 12345 dest2 0 success2 true dest2 12345 char src3 10 abcdefghij char dest3 5 bool success3 success3 StringCopy src3 0 dest3 0 444 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference success3 false dest3 remains the same char src4 10 abcdefghij char dest4 5 bool success4 success4 StringCopy src4 5 dest4 0 success4 true dest4 fghij end macro command Name StringDecAsc2Bin Description success StringDecAsc2Bin sourc
201. TEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 28 HMI and Project Key LB 9046 project key is different from HMI key when ON ev oR LW 9046 32bit HMI key Note1 1 When change HMI key using LW 9046 please reboot HMI to enable the new settings Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 595 Lie WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 29 Fast Selection Window Control LB 9013 FS window control hide ON show OFF RIY RIY LB 9014 FS button control hide ON show OFF RIY R Y LB 9015 FS window button R W R Y R Y control hide ON show OFF 596 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 30 Input Object Function LW 9002 32bit float input high limit a a k LW 9052 32bit float the previous input value of the pO emacrowene RL Lw 0160 2 words Keysoards mutaa ase R R OR PR RT R LW 9540 16bit reserved for caps lock 597 L WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 31 Local Remote Operation Restrictions LB 9044 disable remote control when ON RIY RIY prohibit password remote read operation when LB 9053 R W R Y R Y ON prohibit password remote write operation when LB 9054 ON R W R Y R Y local HMI supports monitor function only when LB 9196 R W R Y R Y ON support monitor function only for remote HMIs LB 9197 R W R Y R Y when ON disable local HMI to trigger a MACRO when LB 9198 R W R Y R Y ON disable
202. Tag Library Hew Bit Lamp Object General Secuty Share Label Description Read address PLZ name Mitsubishi Feos FXOn FeisiFeinfFx2 Address pump best pump wt 0 Address PLC name Mitsubishi Fads FxOn FALSsFAInIFA2 Device type pump fhesk pumpi ddress Format DDD range 0 255 index register Tag Library Windows a a Object list w 3 Fast Selection A 4 Common Window a 5 PLC Response B 0 HMI Connection T g g Password Festiction etorage Space Insufficient 376 Address lt User defined tag i Cancel i Address Tag Library 1 Define Address Tag Library 2 Create an object select General PLC name 3 Click Setting 4 Tick User defined tag 5 From Device type select the defined tag 6 Upon completion the window tree will show the address tag name used for the object Lh WE NTEK Transferring Recipe Data Chapter 17 Transferring Recipe Data Recipe Data refers to data stored at RW and RW_A addresses The way of reading and writing Recipe Data is nothing different from operating a word register The difference is that Recipe Data is stored in flash memory when restarting HMI the latest data records in RW and RW_A are kept the same The size of Recipe Data in RW is 512K words and RW_
203. The confirmed and recovered events will be hidden When the value in LW100 1 is 1 gt Users can delete the selected events under real time mode Hew Event Display Object _ a e Sle iene I General Event Display Shape Font Include categories o that o Tae Alam Event Log object Acknowledge style Click Max event no 4 200 ne a Acknowledge e j Rehum to normal elect box an Format Sort O Time ascending Time descending Order ae Characters Display ae Display chars Display order 3 Display order i SEQUENCE NO T E ent trigger tinie Event tigeer date Event message Event tiger time Return to normal time 0 0 Acknowledge time Acknowledge tine 0 Event trigger date 0 0 r 4 a a a Retin to nornnal tune Event message Sequence na L a If Dieplay chars i 0 it means that the system will dieplay all of characters Date MM DDYY Time HHMMSs 283 me WE NTEK Objects Include categories select category of events that belongs to the event display object category of an event is set in event log For example if the category of an event log display is set to 2 4 it will display all the active event messages with category equal to 2 3 or 4 Please refer to Category
204. Type the password again in Confirm field for password confirmation USB Security Key Password Confirm PYY b gt If Effective Time gt Restrict the using terms is ticked only during the specified time period can the users log in using USB security Key If not ticking users can log in using USB Security Key at any time Effective Time Restrict the using terms Fan 52012 19 14 4 mw Feb 52012 19 14 Y c Upon completion of the settings click Save to USB select the location of USB and then click Create The Generated successfully massage is shown click OK 5 x Save fo USE Select your USB device Tf your DSB device i Creste Administrator Tools 722 Y WE NTEK Administrator Tools 36 3 3 EasyBuilder Pro USB Security Key Settings Create Function Key Object using EasyBuilder Pro when touching the object on HMI screen the USB Security Key is enabled for login The following describes how to create Function Key a x When creating Function Key Object in EasyBuilder Pro select Import user data Use USB Security Key then click Settings Import v r data U SB Security Key In Function mode select Use USB Security Key to Login Select the position where the data of security key is stored in Data position then click OK to finish setting Function mode O Import user accounts O Import e mail settings and contacts Date position SD ca
205. US protocol MODBUS Server MODBUS Server HMI MODBUS Server MODBUS Server E RS232 R5485 _ pn RS232 R5485 peenes HMI Refer to the illustration above it shows HMI is set as MODBUS Server The HMI PC or other devices can use MODBUS protocol to read or write the data from HMI via Ethernet or RS232 485 interface Please follow the steps below 531 Lb WE NTEK Set HMI as a MODBUS Server 19 1 1 Creating a MODBUS Server First of all add a new device MODBUS Server in the Device tab of System Parameter Settings The PLC I F can be set to RS232 RS485 2W RS485 4W Ethernet System Parameter Settings x PrintenBackup Server _ eMail Recipes System etting Security Font Device Properties MODBUS Server COMfEthernet CO HMI PLE PLE type MODBUS Server COMEthemet W100 MODBUS SERVER so PLO FE LOM Settings CAN Controller Area Network Bus Use broadcast command Interval of block pack words Max read command size words Max write command size words 532 WE NTEK Set HMI as a MODBUS Server If PLC I F is set to RS232 or RS485 please fill in COM Port Settings COM 1 COM 3 and set correct communication parameters as shown below MODBUS Server station no is set to 1 PLE type MODBUS server COM Ethemet Y 100 MODBUS
206. Use the Following type of encrypted connection TLS hal b Upon completion of the settings click Save to USB select the location of USB and then click Create The Generated successfully massage is shown click OK Save to USE Save to ISH Select your USB device Administrator Tools 725 WS WE NTEK Administrator Tools 36 5 e Mail Contacts 36 5 1 Introduction of e Mail Contacts Check the box of e Mail Contacts to complete the relevant settings as shown below E Administrator Tools Saveto USB Contents of the ISB data User Accounts USB Security Eey e Mail SMTP Sever Settings e Mail Contact Conbacks No of groups 1 Sroup information Contact Name Mail Addvess Current group Group HewContact NewContact domain com i NewContactl NewContact domam com New Contact New Contact idomam com TELE NewContact NewContact domain com Contiet _ Mail Address Newlontact NewContact domean com Newlont New Contact doman com Description Soft Team _Remove Import Export ode J Save to USB Help Topics settings Description 726 Lb WE NTEK Administrator Tools lt Note 1 gt A maximum of 256 contacts can be added lt Note 2 gt A maximum of 16 groups can be added Group A Group P lt Note 3 gt Group A P When No of groups is 1 only Group A will exist When added to 2 Group
207. Users don t have to prepare printers for each HMI Additionally EasyPrinter can also be a backup server Users can use backup objects in HMI to copy history files such as Data Sampling and Event Log histories onto a remote PC via Ethernet Please see the following illustration eMT3000 l MT Remote dtl Backup Server evt rep 615 re WE NTEK EasyPrinter 26 1 Using EasyPrinter as a Printer Server Screen lt Hardcopy Ea _ Ethernet eMT3000 _ w eas MT Remote Print Out Printer Server IP 192 168 1 26 Users can make screen hardcopies with a Function Key object The hardcopies will be transferred to the MT Remote Printer Server via Ethernet and then printed out 26 1 1 Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter In Menu gt Options select Settings and the following dialogue appears eH T3xxx Remote Printer Server Settings SEIVEI Fort momber of the server socket a005 User name Max leneth 12 characters 111111 Password Max length 12 characters 111111 Namie Convention for HMI Folder when writing files e Use IP addes Use HMI name assign HMI name by L W9032 L W9039 Prefix Ex IP_192 168 1 25 Properties Cancel 1 In Server assign Port number of the server socket to 8005 User name to 111111 and Password to 111111 Note These are default values 2 In Naming Convention for HMI Folder
208. Vertical Printer size Original size O Fit to printer margins Margin o amp rim D jan o Ean U ci ron Commiimication settings IPaddress 192 168 1 26 Port 8005 User name 1114111 Paseword 111111 7 In Output settings assign appropriate values for left top right bottom margins Note The margins are all assigned to 15mm in the example 8 In Communication settings fill in the IP address of the printer server same as step 1 assign the port number to 8005 User name to 111111 and Password to 111111 In EasyBuilder Pro Menu gt Objects gt Buttons select Function Key and assign Screen hardcopy to MT Remote Printer Backup Server Hard copy screen to USB disk D card or printer Screen hard copy Printer MT Remote PrintenBackup Serve y MT Remote Printer Backup Server 9 Place the Function Key object on the common window window no 4 and users will be able to make screen hardcopies anytime needed 10 Compile and download project to HMI Press the Function Key object set in step 9 to make a screen hardcopy 618 Lb WE NTEK EasyPrinter NOTE 5 Users can also use a PLC Control object to make screen hardcopies 6 Users cannot print alarm information via EasyPrinter 7 EasyPrinter can only communicate with HMI via Ethernet please check if the HMI in use supports Ethernet 619 me WE NTEK EasyPrinter 26 2 Using EasyPrinter as a B
209. Windows 3 9 are for system use only while windows 10 1999 are for users to define 81 WE NTEK Window Operations 6 2 Create Set and Delete a Window Oyim Dey Ebes Liey toe Godoy ein Stondand Toole En Project Toolbar Windows x 2 Libar Toolbex wt a Cibject list T Text Toolbar 5 3 Fast selection A Edit Toolbex 4 Common Window a 5 5 PLC Response pene 6 HMI Connection Fast Selection Draw Toolbax T Password Restricton a004 PLE Toolbar i storage Space Inefficient Object 1 Tolba W 10 WINDOW 010 11 Common Windes Object 2 Toolbars 12 a005 v Window Tree 13 Ta lt Go to EasyBuilder Pro View Window Tree to check the built windows Object List displays window number and defined window names The currently opened and edited window will contain a mark press the beside the window number to see the objects object ID addresses and descriptions this window contains Window Preview displays windows in small pictures 6 2 1 Creating and Setting a Window Windows x m Way 1 Object list v On window tree right click on a window number then 3 Fast Selection select New epee 6 HMI Connection r Password Restriction AS Storage Space Insufficient g gt E E E 10 WINDOW 010 xii Window 011 12 Window 012 ie 1 E 82 Name The name will appear on the title bar and also in window tree Window no 3 1999 Set base window
210. a Select from basic toolbar Objects gt Add Object gt Add Monitor Objects Help ae Lelete Objects Ctdt Delete a Add blacro b Select from quick selection tools Add Monitor b alia a 35 3 2 Monitor Settings Monitor Settings f Ed Object Name Mame 7 Read Only Read Only a Object pen HMI Manager r PLE Siting AC Weintek HMI a Station No bo o LE Setting a ee Address Address Ly lio Set Address Format DODOD range 0 10799 Address Type 16 bit BCD 32 bit BCD 16 bit HEX 32 bit HEX i 16 bit Binary C String No of word ho ind Type 16 bit Signed Update Cycle Update Cycle Ok Cancel Object Name Name the object and the name can t repeat Read Only Checking this the address value can t be set Target HMI The HMI with the address to be watched PLC Settings Set type station number and connect way of the PLC with the address to be watched 5 Address Set address a a 705 Ligh WE NTEK Easy Watch 6 Address Type When the address is set the available address types will be shown 7 Update Cycle Time interval of address updating If many objects are executed simultaneously error or delay can happen 35 3 3 Add New Device 6 Open Monitor Settings the target HMI that does not exist can be added 1 1 Click Open HMI Manager 1 2 Click Add to search all the HMI on the LAN Miumvor Setters Name Mee
211. a hardcopy request is given at 17 35 00 12 Jan 2009 the bitmap file will be named 090112 1735 bmp And if there is another bitmap file generated in the same minute it will be named 090112 1735 01 bmp and so on Backup eM T4200 Eemote Printer Server Settings General Gutput Hardcopy Backup files in cw OOOO Overwrite it The content will be destroyed Append BAK to the file name Convert Batch File When target file has emisted he EE pro convert2esv di def l 628 J et WE NTEK EasyPrinter Output EasyPrinter stores the backup files to the specified path For Event Log historical data files Specified Path gt HMI Folder gt eventlog gt EL_yyyymmdd evt For Data Sampling historical data file Specified Path gt HMI Folder gt datalog gt Folder name of the Data Sampling object gt yyyymmdd dtl For Recipe Specified Path gt HMI Folder gt recipe gt recipe rcp or recipe _a rcp Convert Batch File Select Enable and assign a Convert Batch File for automatically converting uploaded history files to CSV or MS Excel format Please refer to the next section for the details of Convert Batch File 16 Users can assign HMI names from LW9032 to LW9039 17 EasyPrinter names the folder after IP address if HMI name is not set 629 vb WE NTEK EasyPrinter 26 4 Convert Batch File EasyPrinter provides a mechanism for con
212. a ndrasdsanceseaer 294 13 26 Data Transfer TImMe DasEd orreina A ER 305 BFP COn O na E E E TE 308 E SC OC E E E A E TE E E E T TE T 314 IWED oli o ga LIST E N E A E E E E E 333 kene O E EE E A A A A E ys 339 TS Bt NCIC WN I EE E E EAS EE T E O A E A E E toscana 343 DDO SV EE E ESE e A E A E T E E A A 347 Si ROPE V Wean ar E E E E EEA E EEA E E E NA 349 Chapter 14 Shape Library and Picture Library esssssssessseesserssserssreessssesenorsseresserssseessroeseeresserssreess 353 Mi Ce ALIA 22 MOAI a E E aieteeoteteseadetaearaaieies 353 14 2 Creating Picture LIDTATY scvesacanai caaeerntacanraescanaconsnaeseteeanaveraten i aE i eA iRNR Norai 360 Chapter 15 Label Library and Multi Language USage soseusssesseressresssressrrrssrrresrerssreessereseeeses 367 MN agale t on a a cece E E A E A O T E A A A 367 t52 BUONE LAD OU LOI r EE AE E TEN E E 368 o ene EIDET FON eaeoe R E E E A E 369 154 Using Label UNO AY cerien E E O TEEN 370 15 5 Settings of Multi Language System Register LW 9134 essssssssssrrsrssrsrssressrrresrrresrrresns 371 Chapter 16 Address Tag ODIA y eisai ia 374 16 1 Creating Address Tag Library esesseseersesseresreresrerssrrosseresrereserosseresseresseeesreesseresseresreresss 374 16 2 Using Address Tag LIDTATFY coccscapstsassuacseansearcsoasscsadotssasndeesnewcsoasanavacwsasaiacesanin dorsum donsreaenersase 376 Chapter 17 Transterring Recipe Datdriiemenienuri ninien aa renn EEEE Ei 377 17 1 Updating Recipe Data with Ethern
213. a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main int source result SWAPW 0x12345678 result result is Ox56 781234 source 0x12345 SWAPW source result result is 0x23450001 end macro command LOBYTE LOBYTE source result Description Retrieves the low byte of a 16 bit source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro _ command main short source result LOBYTE 0x1234 result result is 0x34 source 0x123 LOBYTE source result result is 0x23 end macro command HIBYTE HIBYTE source result Description Retrieves the high byte of a 16 bit source into result ENE AA innanti macro _ command main e short source result 418 Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference HIBYTE 0x1234 result result is 0x12 source 0x123 HIBYTE source result result is 0x01 end macro_command LOWORD LOWORD source result Description Retrieves the low word of a 32 bit source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main int source result LOWORD 0x12345678 result result is 0x5678 source 0x12345 LOWORD source result result is Ox2345 end macro command HIWORD HIWORD source result Description Retrieves the high word of a 32 bit source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main int source result HIWORD 0x
214. ackgrounds on underlay windows are displayed in this order on base window mg Objects in the background can t be edited on the base window they are shown to edit objects on underlay windows open the window they are built on using EasyBuilder Pro editing software 83 l WE NTEK Window Operations m Way 2 EasyBuilder Pro Window Open Window Click New to select the window style to be built and click OK Open Window Select Window Style Window name Fast Selection 100 450 Common Window 800 600 PLC Response 300 100 HMI Connection 300 100 Password Restriction 410 100 Storage Space Insufficient 320 100 WINDOW O10 S00 600 keypad 1 Integer 209 280 keypad 2 Integer 195 234 keypad 3 Integer 200 168 keypad 4 Integer 304 213 keypad 5 Integer 160 230 Keypad 6 Integer 241 331 keypad 7 HEX 306 225 keypad 8 Floating 209 254 ASCI Large 720 300 ASCII Middle 26 240 ASCII Small 480 200 ASCH Upper L 720 300 ASCI Lower L 720 300 ASCI Upper M 26 240 ASCI Lower M 276 240 ASCI Upper 5 480 200 ASCII Lower 5 480 200 Settings Delete Open There are three ways to call up Window Settings dialog m Way 1 10 WINDOW Olg Right click on the window number in the window tree and 19 select Settings m Way 2 EasyBuilder Pro Window Open Window click on the window to be set and then click Settings a Way 3 On the window right click when no object is selected and cli
215. ackup Server m lt lt al Backup CSV Files gt Ethernet eMT3000 eas MT Remote dtl Backup Server eyt rep Users can upload historical data such as Data Sampling and Event Log history files onto MT remote backup server with Backup objects 26 2 1 Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter In Menu gt Options select Settings and the following dialog appears eM T3xxx Remote Printer Server Settings General Sever Hardcopy Fort number of the server socket S005 Backup User name Max length 12 characters 111111 Password Max length 12 characters 111111 Naming Convention for HMI Folder twhen writing files Use IP addes Use HMI name tasien HMI name by L W9032 L 9039 Frefix Ex IP_192 168 1 25 Froperties v Minimize to system tray Detailed message 1 In Server assign Port number of the server socket to 8005 User name to 111111 and Password to 111111 Note These are default values 2 In Naming Convention for HMI Folder select Use IP address and assign IP_ as the Prefix 3 In Properties select Minimize to system tray Click Backup tab on the left side in the dialog box as follows 620 W WE NTEK EasyPrinter eM 32ocr Remote Printer Server settings General Cutput Hardcopy Backup files in a eee m When target file has existed Overwrite it The content will be destroyed Appen
216. ad Reset recipe Reset event log Reset data log Reset event log Resect data log Erase specified files on HMI before download 22 Utility Manager 2 3 2 Upload Upload files from HMI to PC via Ethernet or USB cable Users have to assign the desired path for file storage before uploading ev C Use CoV Comma Seprated Values formatto save datalevent log files Extend Memory Eh PLEASE INPUT EM FOLDER NAME EM file location SD card USB disk Connection F i Ethernet USB cable HMI Mame eMT3070_com 192 168 1 117 fnicolas 8104xh m a 192 168 1 131 fony_eh73105 192 168 1 149 Default HMI 192 168 1 192 Jin WITE101 2 Ye 0 Search All 192 168 1 201 Default HME 192 168 1 211 katte MT30 7 01H 197 1881219 Cetanlt Hdl About Project Recipe data RW RW_A Data log refer to 2 3 1 Event log Upload evt file on HMI to PC Extended Memory EM Upload emi file saved in SD card or USB disk to PC cm The file will be uploaded to PC in XOB file format For editing this file using EasyBuilder Pro please decompile it into MTP file first iJ WE NTEK Utility Manager 2 4 Simulation 2 4 1 Off line Simulation On line Simulation Off line simulation Simulate project operation on PC Simulate OK without HMI operations amp PLC and save without more time connecting PLC No need to download project to HMI On line simulation Simulate
217. aess 29 3 32 OTF INE and On line Simulations a E E 30 3 4 Download the Project to HMI wscaccesdi ss vivesanceietiernedsdacavestdasnswddesanewavlbewevtviasieeesdasuewddvoveseielecnes 31 Chapter 4 Hardware Settings cesses cere mets ars este gnte orein ore nE NEO E NENA AEE OEE AEE 36 41O Porso HMI eeraa a EEE OOA 36 42 HMIESyYStem SC GUM S cnra aE E O AAE R 37 AA DY E A A INO SC E E E E E E E E E E A E E 37 A NE TOODA earner N AEE TEENE EEE EETA E Ti 38 42 SV SCSI POR NALION seniii E E 39 A2 A System SEINE arenar ern E EENE E A NRO 39 Chapter 5 System Parameter SCLUNES sicicsccteinact teaseesiatscmnuataeebevaids a 43 SDE e A I E E E T T T E alee E A E 44 5L HOW to Controla Local PEC a acanseavadsauwseansoavendedeibanesdnwntesaidetawasauosnadensidameadncadeneoeieeaess 45 S12 HOW to Controla Remote PLG srucsararenisiienir einne N EN TEE 50 5 1 3 How to Control a Remote AM sssscsssssssesstassondenasateseass tacdsaetioewasaussandwossedecasas sourwewbesvesae 52 SAMO E E E escanadanse seunecvanarane vance oheeaneseanteseanseuaasseenvenaesiesacaeenncas 54 ei INO a A esee aurnee sande N OE EE E EA 57 A VSEE I e a E AE O AA A OEO ONA 60 Dg DOC UN ICY EEA E A A A E A A E S E E E E T 63 EO m e N E T AE EN EN T A sate peat T E A A vaeennaese 67 SA ExXe Nde d MEMO aenneren e E E E OE 69 ERP PICKU EN E a A E O 71 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder Pro User Manual ERSA E I E SEE A A AT E EA A A A EA T TT 72 DUO PRECIO CS E A A E T EA O A A EO O ONE 75 Chapter 6 W
218. also counted as one state Suppose the number of the states is 8 the valid states will be 0 1 7 In this case if the word value is 8 or higher the system will display the shape of last state Restrictions In label dialog Language 1 is able to change attribute settings and for Language 2 8 only font size can be changed and other settings follows language 1 149 Bee Bird Lamp Oljpect Weed Leip Obrazi O m SS Generel ecm Thane babel General Secunte Shae babei BLET Labeling Label E tine ed Libory Latai Label_O BLEEE BLESS is bated kbray Cus bitmap foul swe AO Unial Iiis itida j Tepbcae thee alinbites k Ciphee thee binbir i _Bvervaite Bverylanguage _ _Ereryatate Eveni al SCAT Chive kiren Disia Wo movement _ ox _cancet_ 150 Lg WE NTEK Objects 13 3 Set Bit Overview The Set Bit object provides two operation modes the manual operation mode defines a touch area users can activate the touch area to set the state of the bit device to be ON or OFF When users select the automatic operation mode the operation will be automatically activated in pre configured conditions the touch area has no action in any circumstance Configuration H Click the Set Bit icon in the toolbar and the New Set Bit Object dialog box will appear fill in each items and press OK button a new Set Bit ob
219. ame estat Me Hew Monitor BE st 35 6 2 Columns of Object List New Fage Mew Fagel Name ataie HMLPLC Addvess Addres Type Update Cycle Value New Montor Q 0 Stop 192 166 1 15 8000 OMRON CHCSACPIO ClO 0 32 bit Unsagned 2500 me Me New Montori Q Stop 192 168 1 15 S000 OMRON CHCSACPID ClO 0 32 bit Unsigned 2500 me 1 Name Display object names the small icons beside the names are for users to identify the type of the objects 2 Status Display the status of the objects Connecting Connected or Stop If HMI is not connected or Port No is incorrect error message HMI Not Found will be shown For Monitor objects if the address is incorrect Address Error message will be shown 3 HMI PLC Display information of HMI PLC that is currently operated by the objects 4 Address Address Type For Monitor objects the relevant address settings will be displayed 5 Update Cycle Time interval of address updating 6 Value For Monitor object if the status shows Connected current 713 Ly WE NTEK Easy Watch HMI address value will be displayed If this Monitor object is not for read only modifying this column can also set the value of the watched address For Macro object if set to Direct Active there will be an Active button in this column for clicking and directly execute Macro 7 Drag and drop column headers to the desired location 714 L tgs WE NTEK Administrator Tools Chapter 36 Ad
220. ample 0x10 0x04 will become 0x10 0x10 0x04 4 n 1 Ox L Ox H The data of initial address for corresponding address for Ox L 1 2 byte n is byte of data if data includes 0x10 and then insert a 0x10 the sending byte number remains same then n n 1 and so on 4 n gt 4 n 1 0x10 0x03 checksum gt Xor check up and bytes in the front Below is an example for observation process of communication If Master has a Ox0a in MW3 according to this protocol master will communicate with slave immediately and slave will put the Ox0a in corresponding MW3 the procedure is as following 1 2 3 Ox Sending byte The byte has to be even due to operating for word If byte is 0x10 then insert a 0x10 after it the byte will move to next position 4 Master sending STX 0x02h Slave receives STX 0x02h from master and sending ACK Ox06h to master Master receives ACK 0x06h from slave Master sending 0x01 0x03 0x00 0x02 0x0a 0x00 0x10 0x03 0x19 as shown below Address Low byte Bit Address High byte Sending byte The byte has to be even due to MW3 is two byte MW 3 content is OxOa 0x00 Checksum 0x01 0x03 0x00 0x02 0x0a 0x00 0x10 0x03 0x19 664 Ly WE NTEK Memory Map Communication Slave received data from master and then sending ACK 0x06h Master receives ACK 0x06h from slave When finishing communication master sending revised data of MW to slave and slave changes the MW which correspond
221. and lt Click the right mouse button to display edit menu 476 me WE NTEK Macro Reference Step 3 Design your macro If it is necessary to use build in functions like SetData or Getdata press Get Set FN button to open API dialog and select the function and set essential parameters Build in Cl Library Function name GetData GetData data Local HMI LB 0 4 Description Read data from a device Usage GetData desti PLC name device type address data count Example char byData 10 Variable 1 Variable type short 16 bit Variable data v Read address PLC name Local HMI Device type p Address D Address format DDDDD range 0 12095 BIN v Data count 4 Step 4 After the completion of a new macro press Compile button to compile the macro 477 Lb WE NTEK Macro Reference Work Space _ Seut Macro Io 0 Macro mama omacro_test i Use execution condition Peniochcal execution Execute one time when HMI starts ce E A ee FACE Conmari HLE f Short dara 4 CetData datafo hoetal WAI LW oO Aj and MACI 0 command If there is no error press Exit button and find that a new macro macro _test exists in Macro list Password protect Kecomodstion cannot recover MACROS when checks Password protect 478 L WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 7 2 Execu
222. and 20 continuous registers are used for User Account Management 10 2 1 Control Address Usage Example When control address is set to LW n LW n 1 word gt Command controls the commands such as Login Logout Add Setting Delete Accounts etc LW n 1 1 word gt Result Display the result of executing commands LW n 2 1 word gt Index the index of accounts usually used with Option List Object LW n 3 1 word gt Privilege value Level A bit0 Level B bit1 etc LW n 4 8 words gt Name account name alphanumeric plus or _ case sensitive LW n 12 8 words gt Password account password alphanumeric plus or _ case sensitive 10 2 2 Introduction of commands Input different values in Command gt LW n the corresponding functions a Log in using account name gt value 1 with Name and Password b Log in using index gt value 2 with Index and Password c Log out gt value 3 d Change the password of current account gt value 4 with Name and Password Name must be paired with the original password and fill in the new password in Password e Add an account gt value 5 with Name Password and Privilege f Add a temporary account gt value 6 with Name Password Privilege and Index Index is for specifying an effective time period minutes 0 represents permanently effective g Delete current acc
223. and statement type A function block is called by putting its name followed by parameters in parenthesis in the Main Macro Function After the function block is executed it returns the value to the Main Function where it is used as an assignment or condition A return type is not necessary in definition of function which means that a function block is not always necessary to return a value The parameters can also be absent in definition of function while the function has no need to take any parameters from the Main Function The syntax is as follows Definition of function with return type sub type lt name gt parameters Local variable declarations Statements return value end sub Example sub int Add int x int y int result result x y return result end sub macro_command main int a 10 b 20 sum sum Add a b end macro command or sub int Add int result x 10 y 20 result x y return result end sub 403 L WE NTEK macro_command main int sum sum Add end macro command Definition of function without return type sub lt name gt parameters Local variable declarations Statements end sub Macro Reference Example sub Add int x int y int result result x y end sub macro_command main int a 10 b 20 Add a b end macro command or sub Add int result x 10 y 20 result x y end sub 404 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference macro_comma
224. apsed time ET Word type Display current elapsed value of timer Reset bit R Bit type Reset the elapsed time ET to 0 Configuration Click the Timer icon Timer object properties dialog box appears as Ak follows 339 Lv WE INTEK Objects Hew Timer Object Be Description Mode Accumulated OFF delay Time base fin second 2 l Input bit AN PLC name Local HMI v Setting Address LE Measurement bit TT PLE name Local HMI al Setting Address LE Output bit oh PLC name Local HMI vl Setting Address Preset time PT PLO name roca HMI se Setting EAA E E c Address Li ae o 16 bit Unsigned A Sd I Elapsed time ET Enable PLE name al HMI Setting Address ir _ i 16 bit Unsigned Reset bit Fi PLE name HMI 5 a Setting Address LB i mj Li Ok afi Cancel Help Mode Description S On delay Point 1 When the IN turns ON the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases The Q remains OFF Point 2 When the ET equals the PT the Q be turned 340 Lv WE NTEK Off delay Objects ON and the TI be turned OFF Point 3 When the IN turns OFF the Q be turned OFF and the ET reset to 0
225. ar array in the form str1 start This function returns a Boolean indicating the result of comparison If two strings are identical it returns true Otherwise it returns false The ret field is optional Example macro commandmain SS 453 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference char a1 20 abcde char b1 20 ABCDE bool ret ret1 StringCompare at1 0 b1 0 ret1 false char a2 20 abcde char b2 20 abcde bool ret2 ret2 StringCompare a2 0 b2 0 ret2 true char a3 20 abcde char b3 20 abcdefg bool ret3 ret3 StringCompare a3 0 b3 0 ret3 false end macro_command Name StringCompareNoCase ret StringCompareNoCase str1 start str2 start ret StringCompareNoCase string1 str2 start ret StringCompareNoCase str1 start string2 ret StringCompareNoCase string1 string2 Description Do a case insensitive comparison of two strings The two string parameters accept both static string in the form string1 and char array in the form str1 start This function returns a Boolean indicating the result of comparison If two strings are identical it returns true Otherwise it returns false The ret field is optional macro_command main char a1 20 abcde char b1 20 ABCDE bool ret ret1 StringCompareNoCase at1 0 b1 0 ret1 true 454 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference char a2 20 abcde char b2 20 abcde bool ret2
226. ar or constant The format of array is Declaration array_name constant constant is the size of the array Usage array _namel integer character or constant Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C40 execution syntax should not exist before variable declaration or constant definition For example macro_command main _ int a b fora OTo2 b 4 a inth k illegal definitions must occur before any statements or expressions forexample b 4 a next a end macro command 502 E WE NTEK Macro Reference C41 float variables cannot be contained in shift calculation C42 function must return a value C43 function should not return a value C44 float variables cannot be contained in calculation C45 PLC address error C46 array size overflow max 4k C47 macro command entry function is not only one C48 macro command entry function must be only one The only one main entrance of macro is macro_command function_name end macro command C49 an extended addressee s station number must be between 0 and 255 For example SetData bits O PLC 1 LB 300 123 100 illegal 300 123 means the station number is 300 but the maximum is 255 C50 an invalid PLC name PLC name is not defined in the device list of system parameters C51 macro command do not control a remote device A macro can only control a local machine For example setData bits 0 PLC 1 LB 300
227. arget position StringReverseFind source target Return the position of the last occurrence of target string in the source string The two string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns the zero based index of the first character of substring in the source string that matches the target string Notice that the entire sequence of characters to find must be matched If there exists multiple substrings that matches the target string function will return the position of the last matched substring If there is no matched substring it returns 1 macro_command main char src1 20 abcdeabcde char target1 20 cd bool pos pos1 StringReverseFind src1 0 target1 0 Il pos1 7 char target2 20 ce bool pos2 pos2 StringReverseFind abcdeabcde target2 0 pos2 1 char src3 20 abcdeabcde 456 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference bool pos3 pos3 StringReverseFind src3 6 ab pos3 1 end macro command Name StringFindOneOf position StringFindOneOf source start target start position StringFindOneOf source target start position StringFindOneOf source start target position StringFindOneOf source target Description Return the position of the first character in the source string that matches any character contained in the target string The two str
228. asyBuilder Pro to open Macro Manager dialogue box as follows Library Macro under development Help Password protect Decompilation cannot recover MACROs when checks Password protect On Macro Manager all macros compiled successfully are displayed in Macro list and all macros in developing are displayed in Macro under development The following is a description of the various buttons 475 T i W WE NTEK Macro Reference New Opens a blank WorkSpace editor for creating a new macro Delete Deletes the selected macro Edit Opens the WorkSpace editor and loads the selected macro Copy Copies the selected macro into the clipboard Paste Pastes the macro in the clipboard into the list and creates a new name for the macro OK Confrim all the edited Macros and click this button to save the new contents before leaving this dialog Cancel Cancel the editing and leave Macro editing dialog Library Open Macro Funtion Library managing dialog Step 2 Press the New button to open a blank WorkSpace editor Every macro has a unique number defined in Macro ID edit box and macro name must exist otherwise an error will appear while compiling Security Macro ID 0 Macro name macro_0 Cluse execution condition C Periodical execution C JExecute one time when HMI starts A A Ae macro command main io end macro_comm
229. asyBuilder Pro will select a font from the list to substitute for it automatically Users can also test which non ASCII strings of Windows can be used in EasyBuilder Pro and add them to Fonts for non ASCII strings table Line spacing Decide the interval between lines in the text Add All Non ascii Fonts Line spacing BL fi Line spacing 0 t2 t3 Add All Non ascii Fonts Line spacing a Line spacing 6 t2 t3 68 Lv WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 7 Extended Memory Parameters in Extended Memory tab determine the path of the extended memory System Parameter Settings Fx Device _ Model General system retting wecunity Font Extended Memo iE Prien Benkon Server e Mail Recipes EMO File name enemi OSD card USB disk EM _ Filename emlem ss SD cand USB disk File name ems enni OSD card USB disk EM3 File name et emn OSD cand USB disk File name emi emi OSD cand TSB disk EMS5 ______ File name jem em OSD cand USB disk EME ____ File name emi er OSD cand USB disk EM nooo Filename emtemi OSD card USE disk EME File name am em OED cad USB disk EMS no File name jem erx CSD card USB disk E i I
230. at the selected location Add Object Add new Monitor or Macro objects Delete Objects Select the objects to be deleted a dialog will be shown click Yes to delete Modify Object Change the settings of the selected object HMI Manager Add modify or remove HMI settings Run Execute the selected object Stop Stop executing the selected object Help Topics 702 Ly WE NTEK Easy Watch Help Reference of how to operate basic functions F Help Tonics About Easy Watch About Easy Watch Easy Watch version information 703 WE INTEK Easy Watch 35 2 2 Quick Selection Tools Si Ol 2 bm x CON J New Open a new Easy Watch file Open Open the existing Easy Watch file Save Save Easy Watch file settings de Cut Cut to relocate the selected objects to the clipboard Copy Copy the selected objects to the clipboard u Paste Paste the content of the clipboard at the selected location gt Run Execute the selected object Stop Stop executing the selected object e Delete Objects Select the objects to be deleted n Monitor Add a new Monitor object At Macro Add a new Macro object Lal HMI Manager Add modify or remove HMI settings Rf Help Reference of the selected function i Help Topics Reference of how to operate basic functions 704 et WE NTEK Easy Watch 35 3 Monitor Settings 35 3 1 Add Monitor There are two ways to add a Monitor object
231. ata Sampling Object index a Trend type Real time Note if no of channels is changed you must reset HMI s data logs ll Distance between data samples 8 Pixel C Time Distance 100 pixelis Hold control Enable FLE name Local HMI 7 Setting Address 1 Watch line Address i Li PLC name Local HME y Setting Data Sampling Object index To select data sampling object as the source of data Refer to the data sampling section for related information Trend mode To select the mode of data source There are Real time and History for selection a Real time In this mode it can display the sampling data from the beginning of the HMI operation to the present time If previous data are required you must select the History mode to read the data from historical record You can use the Hold control object to pause the update of trend display but it is only pause the update of the trend display and it will not stop the operation of data sampling 234 LJ WE NTEK Objects object The picture below shows the Hold control setting page Set the state of the designated register to ON it will pause the updating of the trend display Hold control Enable PL name ees HMI w Setting b History In this mode the data come from the historical record of the designated
232. ate 0 User defined mapping Users can modify the value of state illegal input and error notification Remain current state if input an illegal value multi state switch will remain current state Jump to error state if input an illegal value multi state switch will jump to error state 178 re WE NTEK 13 8 Slider Overview Objects The slide object can be used to create a slot area that changes the word s value by dragging the pointer Configuration Click the Slide object icon on the toolbar and the dialog box will appear fill dn in each items and click OK button a new slide object will be created Hew Slider Object General Outline Security Shape Description Write address PLC name Address Notification PLC name Address Watch address A Local HMI Li Enable Before writing Local HMI LB Enable PLC name Address Write address LW se Setting O Set ON After writing 16 bit Unsigned Set OFF s Setting Setting 16 bit Unsigned Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the word device that system set value to Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Notification Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the No
233. ate 11 e 4 Lamp Red States i 2 e 30054 bytes BMP 100x100 ee BEG BMP 100x1001 5iLamp Green States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x100 80054 bytes BB Yellow States 2 BMP 100x100 A Lamp Yellow SPE Blue States a B0054 bytes BMP 100x100 States 2 30354 bytes EMP 100x101 Import Picture Modify Picture More picture libraries DPB Red States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x1001 108 States 2 50054 bytes EMP 100x100 Background Select Lib Mew Lib Unattach Lib Rename Export Delete all States Delete Cur State Insert Before Insert After ee WE INTEK Object General Properties The illustration above provides information of one of the Pictures in the Picture Library as follows Picture 0 PB Red The number and name of the Picture name Total states 2 The number of the states of the Picture Image size 30054 The size of the Picture bytes Image The format and resolution of the Picture BMP means format 100x100 bitmap picture and its format can also be JPG PNG DPD or GIF Picture Length 100 pixels and height 100 pixels in this case Note About all the settings in Picture Library please refer to the illustrations in Chapter 14 Shape Library and Picture Library for details Click OK and preview the design of the pict
234. ate this macro in a running macro The current macro will continue executing the following instructions after triggering the designated macro in other words the two macros will be active simultaneously macro _id can be a constant or a variable macro command main char ON 1 OFF 0 SetData ON Local HMI LB O 1 ASYNC_TRIG_MACRO 5 calla macro its ID is 5 SetData OFF Local HMI LB O 1 468 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference E end macro command TRACE format argument Description Use this function to send specified string to the EasyDiagnoser Users can print out the current value of variables during run time of macro for debugging When TRACE encounters the first format specification if any it converts the value of the first argument after format and outputs it accordingly format refers to the format control of output string A format specification which consists of optional in and required fields in bold has the following form o flags width precision type Each field of the format specification is described as below flags optional width optional A nonnegative decimal integer controlling the minimum number of characters printed precision optional A nonnegative decimal integer which specifies the precision and the number of characters to be printed type Corc specifies a single byte character d signed decimal integer signed decimal integer O
235. ated register See the picture below 224 me WE NTEK Objects Hew Har Graph Object General Outlme Shane A thibute Type Normal ZED sl ppan Bar width ratio 9 100 Bar color style Frame Bar Target mdicator Target value Also indicators Low limit Low color p Targetelannuzerolspan dynamic address Enable PLO name i Local HAT Setting Address Lay S 16 bit Unsigned The following table shows the read address of low limit high limit and target The Address means the device address for example if the device address is LW20 and data format is 16 bit The Alarm Low limit is LW 20 The Alarm High limit is LW21 The Target indicator is LW22 The Zero is LW23 The Span is LW24 Data Alarm Target Format High limit indicator 16 bit Address Address Address Address Address format 1 2 F3 4 32 bit Address Address Address Address Address format 2 4 6 8 225 Li WE NTEK Objects 13 16 Meter Display Overview The meter display object can display the value of word device with meter Configuration Click the Meter Display icon on the toolbar and the Meter Display Object s Properties dialog box will appear fill in each items press OK button and a new Meter Display Object
236. ation therefore become 5 consecutive words from LW3 read from LW3 LW7 Note Maximum command combination data size must be less than Max read command size The Max data size to be read out from device at one time Unit word The Max data size to be written to device at one time Unit word 48 Lid WE NTEK System Parameter Settings After all settings are completed a new device named Local PLC 1 is added to the Device list IF Protocol Statio MA Mame Location Device type Interface cal HMI Local HMI Local eMT3105 800 x Disable Mitsubishi FOs COM 1 000 N 7 1 Redo5 4 49 Lib WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 1 2 How to Control a Remote PLC PR Ethernet 4 eal Desktop pi Ethernet HMI HMI d WOJ d WOJ p g PLC Device IPLC Device The so called remote PLC means a PLC connected to a remote HMI To control a remote PLC users need to add this type of device Click New under Device list and the Device Properties dialog appears Users need to set all the required properties correctly Here take a remote PLC SIEMENS S 7 200 as an example Device Properties Siemens 57 200 HMI PLC Location Renjote Settings IP 192 168 1 35 Port S000 PLC type Siemens 87 200 w240 SIEMENS _ S _ 400 50 PLC I F RS 465 ow v CoM COMI Settings PLE default station no L Default station no
237. ave all current address tags as Users can import MT 500 tag to represent the address tgl file Seve Tan Be Load existing tgl file to Address Tag Export Import the Export Import the Modify the Library current saved csv current saved xls file selected Address Tag file of Address Tag of Address Tag address tag Library tothe Address Library to the Library to appointed Tag Library appointed current project space in to current space in csv format project xls format 374 Lig WE NTEK Address Tag Library Click New Name of the Address Taz address tag Selected from Description test pump Device list Tag name pump The type of A address bit PLE name Mitsubishi FXOs FXOn FX1s FxinfFx2 worc types Address type Bit Word Device type IT The device z Oo type the Address 20 L eee available types are related to PLC name amp Address type os Cancel Address of the Tag Address format DDD range O0 255 Click OK A newly added tag will be found in the Customized library Address Tag Library Customized O System No Address tag name PLC name Address trpe Address Read Write Description Mitsubishi Fels Fein Fels Feini F2 Read tite Users can import MT 500 tag to represent the address Save Tag File Load Tag File Export CSW Import CS Export EXCEL Import EXCEL 375 Li WE NTEK 16 2 Using Address
238. aying C If users change value in Control Address 0 the system will keep the new value D If users change value in Control Address 1 system will execute the corresponding command first then erase the new value and set it back to 0 E If not using Control Function system will play the channel set in Input channel automatically lf check Display adjustment The screen brightness and contrast ratio can be adjusted If designate LW100 as control address A Adjust Contrast Ratio Control Address 2 LW102 range 1 100 B Adjust Brightness Control Address 3 LW103 range 1 100 344 General Deaription Input channel M n Capture address 2S Use capture function Encode format N Tht e PLC name Local HMI Setting Address LB 100 l l Storage medium o SD card USB disk Record tune Before 5 seconds After 5 a conds Control address Use control function Use Capture Function Definition Capture the image of the input video Illustration A Capture address the Control Address that triggers system to capture the image of video B Storage medium To choose where to save the video image Available storage SD card or USB disk VIP 1 video image will be saved in file VIP 1 in the chosen storage and VIP 2 video image in file VIP2 C Record time To set a period of t
239. aying a specific recipe data Users can watch all items and values of the recipe by this object Configuration Click the Recipe View icon in the toolbar and the Recipe View Object s Properties dialog box will appear fill in each items and press OK a new recipe view object will be created 349 iJ et WE NTEK Objects General Title Green Part Selection tin fese fna AAA control Profile 22 22 77 77 on BBBB Pink Part Paana 33 33 88 88 3333 cece Background color 44 44 9999 4444 DDDD Grid dividing line Recipe table Reape View Objects POEA Recipe Name General Shape Font Profile _ Choose the desired recipe name ee Recipe Name pect or look for other recipes from the Title pull down list Title Each item has a title The title is Il Tie Transparent Color Parameter Setting l referring to the setting in System gt Recipe Transparent If this option is being ticked the title wouldn t have background color Furthermore it wouldn t appear an option for choosing color If this option is being ticked the background color wouldn t be shown Furthermore it Profile The frame and background color Profile Transparent Frane S Background 7 of the object can be set Transparent wouldn t appear an option for choosing color 350 Wa WE NTEK Objects Grid Th
240. bit remote HMI 4 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9818 16bit remote HMI 4 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9819 16bit remote HMI 4 s port no R Y R Y LW 9820 16bit remote HMI 5 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO 1IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9821 16bit remote HMI 5 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 R Y R Y LW 9822 16bit remote HMI 5 s IP2 IP address ni IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9823 16bit remote HMI 5 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9824 16bit remote HMI 5 s port no RIY R Y 580 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits LW 9825 16bit remote HMI 6 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9826 16bit remote HMI 6 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9827 16bit remote HMI 6 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9828 16bit remote HMI 6 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9829 16bit remote HMI 6 s port no RIY RIY LW 9830 16bit remote HMI 7 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9831 16bit remote HMI 7 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9832 16bit remote HMI 7 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9833 16bit remote HMI 7 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9834 16bit remote HMI 7 s port no LW 9835 16bit remote HMI 8 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1IP2
241. cal HMI in Device List Select Settings under the device list A dialogue Device Properties will be shown as below From this we know that the attribute of Local HMI is a HMI and the location is Local Device Properties Name S HMI CIPLE Location Local w Interval of block pack words 5 OK Cancel 44 WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 1 1 How to Control a Local PLC OM P Et PLC Device HMI The so called Ilocal PLC means a PLC which is connected to the local HMI directly To control a local PLC users need to add this type of device first Click New under the Device list and the Device Properties dialog appears Please correctly fill in all of the properties required Take a local PLC MITSUBISHI FXOs FXOn FX1s FX1n FX2 as an example Device Properties Location PLC type PLC LF COM PLC Mitsubishi FEOs FEOwFE ISFA 1w FAA w120 MITSUBISHI_FAON sc RS 403 FW h COMI 9600 E 7 1 Settings PLE default station no L Default station no use station no variable Use broadcast command Interval of block pack words 5 w Max read command size words Max write command size words Setting Description S Name o The name of the device set by user HMI or PLC To confirm whether this connected device is a HMI or PLC Its PLC ee lame
242. ce index Address Length Time Error D HE p Cc 69 SIEMENS S7300 Et 11 CB10 00003 3 r SIEMENS S7300 Et 12 CB10 00006 SS T SIEMENS S7300 Et 255 DBO 00009 5 1 Ld D fx Cc 7 682 tb WE NTEK Fasyl iagnoser 33 4 Save As The captured information of Easy Diagnoser can be saved as xls which can be read in Excel W Weintek MT Diagnostic Tool EasyDiagnoser File View Options Help Device SIEMENS S7 S00 Ethernet w L Mo Cmd PIL Device ot index Address Lengtt 176 R Ha SIEMENS S7300 Et 1 10 L610 00000 3 175 R 64 SIEMENS S7300 Et 1 11 L610 000037 3 174 R r SIEMENS 57 300 Et 1 12 OB10 00006 s 3 173 R T SIEMENS 57 300 Et 1 255 DB10 0000975 683 ESbiweee E emer 33 5 Window Adjustment Users can drag or use smart docking icons in editing window to place the windows to the desired position W Weintek MT Diagnostic Tool FasyDiarnoser File View Options Help fi lt E Logger Command Read Write Device All tities a eS ee 10 35 14 Looking for the target HM 10 35 14 Connection established with the targ Address Type Range Se Smart Docking No Cmd PID Device o index Ammesse me Errar Da Smart Docking j Index Type Mame hiTso0o0 Series HMI Location Local kl Block Interval 5 words EAE Max Read Length 258 words ckaze Package Device Station Index Address Length 411
243. cesseecceseceesneceeeesceeseneceseecenaeess 12 4 Steps to Design a UNICODE Keyboard sssssseussssessserssersssrrsssressrrrssresssrreseereseeesseeeseereses Chapter 13 ODJECIS aranenntiseriiierare 13 1 Bit Lamp sceaceciosnsvsevecosaysssvaweeoes 13 2 Word LaMP ccccsseceeeseeeeeees ES Wie SelB senene a BASE WONG rarnirenniodn 13 5 Function Key cccecceeceeeeees 13 6 Toggle Switch eseese 13 7 Multi State Switch 0 S SAT e 13 9 Numeric Input and Numeric DisSplay ccccssecccsssccccssecceesececesceceeseeeeeneceseuecesseecessuaees 13 10 ASCII Input and ASCII Display 13 11 Indirect Window 066 13 12 Direct WINdOW ccce eee 13 13 Moving Shape eseese 13 14 Animation ccceccseceeeeees 13 15 Bar Graph wesscncsvacicacacisansieodeeas 13 16 Meter Display ccccceeees 13 17 Trend Display oseese 13 18 History Data Display 13 19 Data Block Display 20 XY Plotai Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder Pro User Manual 13 21 Alarm Bar and Alarm Display sccccsseccsssescccsssccccssccucneseccusseceessectenssensueseseusecseness 275 i ks 7728 E Ven CDPI ee ene O E E eee eee ee eer 278 13 23 Data Transfer TriGPCl DaSCG sos siiseesscraccewieddscawacvectevasdasnendevastewiadaecawessectevaddarsenssvacnewiesant 286 DAB a lt 0 eee eee E ee eee ee eee ee ee oe eee 289 Bo WCC VAY OF tataeaseesircinse cn Gees EEE E E act
244. ch date is saved in separated files with date tags attached The History control is used to select one history record file The picture below shows the History control setting which designates a word device for History control History control Device type LW v ddress 100 System tag Index register 16 bit Unsigned y The system selects history record by an index Index 0 refers to the latest history record normally it is history record today Index 1 refers to the history record one day before the latest and so on The current value in History control register is used as the index to select corresponding history record Here is an example to explain how to use History control The history control register is LW100 supposed that the history records saved in system are EL 20061120 evt EL 20061123 evt EL 20061127 evt EL 20061203 evt Where 2006xxxx is the date of system saved history record The following table shows the corresponding historical record displayed be event display object according to the value of LW100 Value of LW100 Corresponding Historical Record O EL_20061203 evt EL_20061127 evt EL_20061123 evt EL_20061120 evt e Enable reading multiple histories selected Definition Displays a list of events triggered in multiple days 280 WE NTEK Objects Illustration Take LWO to be the History Control Address as an example the range
245. ck Attribute 84 Ly WE NTEK Window Operations 6 2 2 Open Close and Delete a Window Open an existing window m Double click on the window number in window tree m In window tree select the window to be opened gt right click gt click Open Close or delete an existing window Nearly the same procedure as the above please note that to delete a window it has to be closed first 85 Lib WE NTEK Event Log Chapter 7 Event Log EL 20100524 evt 20105 5F 248 Define Event content and sas View the process of trigger condition Trigger Event according to the condition Save the Event Log to specified device Event using the object 7 1 Event Log Management E Using these objects to view the process of the whole event from triggering gt waiting for Alarm Bar Alarm Display Event Display Processing until alarm stops Define event content first Event Alarm Log Category All 2 ae Mo Category Text Mode Condition Read address Notification address Buzzer e Mail Event0 WORD lt 0 00 Local HMI LW 0 Disable Disable Disable 2 0 Event 1 BIT Local HMI LB 0 Disable Disable Disable JEnable back light when alarm occurs History files Save to HMI memory Save to SD card Save to USB disk v Preservation limit Days of preservation davis Print Seguente Mo Event trigger time COHHIMM SS HH MM DD HH MMI Event trigger date Om
246. com_port 3 PURGE com_port PURGE 1 end macro command SetRTS SetRTS com_port source Description Description Set RTS state for RS232 com_port refers to the COM port number 1 It can be either a variable or a constant Source also can be either a variable or a constant This command raise RTS signal while the value of source is greater than 0 and lower RTS signal while the value of source equals to 0 macro_command main char com_port char value 1 SetRTS com_port value raise RTS signal of COM1 while value gt 0 SetRTS 1 0 lower RTS signal of COM1 end macro command GetCTS GetCTS com_port result Get CTS state for RS232 com _ port refers to the COM port number 1 It can be either a variable or a constant Result is used for receiving the CTS signal It must be a variable This command receives CTS signal and stores the received data in the result variable When the CTS signal is pulled high it writes 1 to result otherwise it writes O macro_command main char com_port 437 WE NTEK Macro Reference Be oo char result GetCTS com_port result get CTS signal of COM1 GetCTS 1 result get CTS signal of COM1 end macro_command Name Description Plays _ sound This command plays a beep sound with frequency of 800 hertz and duration of 30 milliseconds macro_command main Beep end macro_command 438 Li WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 6 6 String Opera
247. cro command maint abe abe abe end macro comma 1 2 3 4 5 Undo Select All Ctlta WorkSpace Toggle Bookmark Ctrl F Macro ID Next Bookmark F2 E B nj ga Perion Bookmork Shek Se he Ay Ae he Clear All Bookmarks Toggle Al Ovtlining Update AU Outlining abc abe end macro coming macro command main abe end macro comtiarndgd 383 Lb WE NTEK Macro Reference WorkSpace end mal l Zz macro command maini 3 g abc c Undo Cthz Works pace e lect All Colt Togel Bookmark CtitFe Next Bookmark F2 Previous Bookmark Shitt F2 di Clear Al Bookmarks 2 Toggle All Outlining I Update All Ovtlining 4 abe abd 5i end macro commend macro command main i abe abe abd end macro command 6 Select a word in the editor to enable the cut and copy function After cut or copy is performed the paste function is enabled WorkSpace DOC Be s4444 Works pace macro command main macro command maini eng Undo Cte Redo Colt Y abcabo o ooo end ma Undo Cih sing eee ue ut E z LOY Faste Coh eelect All select All Colt Toggle Bookmark Ctl F2 Next Bookmark F2 Previous Bookmark Shitt F2 Togel Bookmark ChltFe Next Bookmark Fa Previous Bookmark shiftF2 Clear All Bookmarks Clear All Bookmarks Toggle All Outlining T
248. ct Controlled by register option it is necessary to set the read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register for the read address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 216 WE NTEK Objects In the table below it describes the address that control shape s state and position in different data format Data Format Address to control Address to control object s state object s position 16 bit format Address 1 32 bit format Address 2 For example if the designated register is LW100 and the data format is 16 bit Unsigned then LW100 represents object s state LW101 represents position In the picture below LW100 2 LW101 3 so the object s state is 2 and position is 3 pasitioan 5 pasitian Bastia J Bastian oj pasitian 3 State 2 Lwioo 2 wio 3 b Based upon time interval lf Based upon time interval is chosen the object automatically changes status and display location Time interval attributes is to set the time interval for states and positions pasiian 2 Time interval attributes Position speed 01 condis Image se change A Backwa ee Imase update time O1 second s Position speed Position changes speed the unit is 0 1 second Supposed that Speed is set to 10 the object will change its position every 1 second Backwar
249. ct the text size The text sizes supported by EasyBuilder Pro are listed below 111 WE NTEK Object General Properties Align Select how users would like to align the text in multiple lines The text aligned Left 111 222222 333333333 The text aligned Center 111 222222 333333333 The text aligned Right 111 222222 333333333 112 Lib WE NTEK Object General Properties Blink To decide how will the text blink Choose None to disable this feature or set blinking interval as 1 second or 0 5 seconds Italic Use Italic font Italic Label Underline Use Underline font Underline Label Movement setting Direction Set the direction of the marquee effect No movement No movement Continuous Whether this selection is tick or not influences how the marquee effect is displayed If not checking Continuous the next text appears only when the previous text disappears completely See the picture below If checking Continuous the text will be displayed continuously 113 Ly WE NTEK Object General Properties Speed Adjust the speed of the text movement Content Set the content of the text If using Label Library the content will be sourced from Label Library Tracking When Tracking is selected moving the text of one state will also move the text of other states Duplicate this label to other states This function is used to dup
250. ct will be created Note The instruction of this section is an example to play a video file located in the example directory 294 Hew Media Player Object General Preview Description Control address ee athe FLE name Local HMI Setting Address LW J Command i Parameter 1 0 Status 0 e pamer E senie Prd ime hi Update video playing time Ext device OSD USBi C USBa Attribute Auto repeat General tab Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of Control address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object a In Control address select Enable and register a word device to control the operation of media player object example LWO 295 W WEINTEK Objects Control address Enable PLE name aehan a Address w g lo Command 1 Status L Parameter 1 E File imdex ii at eee Parameter 2 0 2 9 Start time End time b In Control address unselect the Update video playing time Update video playing time c In Ext device select USB disk and input example as Folder name Ext device Os U Ouse Foliername e
251. ction When the read address is the same as the write address the minimum value of the word value is Offset state 0 and the maximum value is no of state 1 Offset See the picture below Numeric Display LWO Murti State LWO offset 1 a JOG When the Multi State Switch object is activated the value of the write address will be added by 1 In the Value display mode if the resulting value is equal to or larger than the value of No of States Offset and Enable in Cyclic is selected the value of the write address will return to Offset and show the state 0 otherwise the value of the write address will maintain as No of states 1 Offset and shows the state No of states no 1 NOTE Like the word lamp object the state shown by Multi State Switch object is the value of the word device subtracts Offset A ttaibute 3 stwich style JoG v State no 5 Cyclic Enable Ri lt b JOG When the Multi State Switch object is activated the value of the write address will be subtracted by 1 In the Value display mode if the resulting value is smaller than the 177 L WE NTEK Objects value of Offset and Enable in Cyclic is selected the value of the register will change to No of states 1 Offset and shows the state No of states 1 otherwise the value of the word device will remain in Offset and shows the st
252. d BAK to the file name Convert Batch File Enable mi 4 In Output click the button to browse and select a path for storage of the incoming history files 5 Click OK to apply the settings 6 In Menu gt File select Enable Output to allow EasyPrinter to store any incoming backup request in the location specified in step 4 26 2 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder Pro In EasyBuilder Pro Menu gt Edit gt System Parameters click Printer Server tab and select Use MT Remote Printer Backup Server the following dialog appears 621 Ly gt WE NTEK EasyPrinter oystem Parameter Settings Ed Model i __ Device General System setine Security Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server eMal Recipes Use MT Remote Printer Backup Server Note Use HaayPinter to configure PC for printing screen hardcopy and storme backup data Output sethings Orientation Horizontal Vertical Printer sze Original size Fit to printer margins Margin iO WUT o amp mn o mm i Fl mn Commungaton ttines IF addes 192 168 1 36 Fot a005 User name iriri Password 111111 7 In Communication settings fill in the IP address of printer server same as step 1 assign port number to 8005 User name to 111111 and Password to 111111 In EasyBuilder Pro Menu
253. d Y data it allows you to set different address for X and Y axis respectively Read addres PLC name Local HMI separated address for X and Y data A data PLE name Setting Address Lw af i00 16 bit Unsigned Y data PLG name Local HMI Setting Address LW gt 00 med The usage of each address as follows Dynamic limits is not enabled For example The Read address is LW100 and LW200 X data X low limit reads value from reading address LW100 X high limit reads value from reading address LW101 X data 0 reads value from reading address LW102 X data 1 reads value from reading address LW103 X data 2 reads value from reading address LW104 X data 3 reads value from reading address LW105 and so on Ydata Y low limit reads value from reading address LW200 Y high limit reads value from reading address LW201 265 L WE NTEK Objects Y data 0 reads value from reading address LW202 Y data 1 reads value from reading address LW203 Y data 2 reads value from reading address LW204 Y data 3 reads value from reading address LW205 and so on Limits The above settings are based on dynamic limits you can also have dynamic limits disable and set the fix high and low limits Limits Low 0 High 32767 Y anus Low 0 High 32767 The high and low limits is used as scale to calculate the percentage of X and Y axis i e X or Y Xor Y reading value low limit high limit
254. d and Operable Object Classes cccccssscccesseecceseceeeececeesceesenecesaneceeeuees 119 1O LL Ener ilMOd Eorna yarar e eau recrnatato saci eee E ERRES 119 10 1 2 Enhanced Sec rity MOE siccassccsdeccadsiconsndendasanenivaanddusadatadanaawsadousennied avanabenadeedeennaces 121 10 2 Enhanced Security Mode and Control Address cccccccssececesseeceeseeeeesececeeecesseeeeeaenees 122 E WE NTEK 10 2 1 Control Address Usage EasyBuilder Pro User Manual 10 2 2 Introduction of COMMANASS cccececeececscececcecscucseececsceceececscuceseececucusaececscucaenes 10 2 3 Introduction of Results 10 3 Enhanced Security Mode with 10 3 1 Import User Account 10 3 2 USB Security Key Usage 10 4 Enhanced Security Mode with 10 5 Object Security Settings 10 6 Setting Example ccceee Chapter 11 Index Register 066 11 1 Introduction ceeecceeeeeeee eee 11 2 Examples of Index Register Chapter 12 Keyboard Design and Usage UEC ic xccccamaawonsnnts E E E PUIG VON NS O Y enor A E accierepoetan Ai Option Lst OD OCG sesceviesccossnscescnscuasutadanssseeriesceossnseenennceas 12 1 Steps to Design a Pop up KOVDO Al d a iesicccssivevizasensvarecccavcasessearanevasencnesesvacawaravawansaneraacteaee 12 2 Steps to Design a Keyboard with Direct WindoW esessssssssseessressersssrreseeresrersseersrereses 12 3 Steps to Design a Fixed Keyboard on SCreen cccssccccsssce
255. d cycle If the object has four positions position O position 1 position 2 and position 3 and Backward cycle is not selected In this case when the object moves to the last position position 3 next position will be back to the initial position 0 and repeat the action over again The moving path is shown as follows 217 Wa WE NTEK Objects position 0 position 1 position 2 position 3 position 0 position 1 position 2 If Backward cycle is selected when the object moves to the last position position 3 it will move backwards to the initial position 0 and repeat the moving mode over again The moving path is shown as follows position 0 position 1 position 2 position 3 position 2 position 1 position 0 Image state change State change mode There are Position dependant and Time based options When Position dependant is selected it means that following the change of position the state will change too When Time based is selected it means that the position will change based on Position speed and shape state will change based on Image update time Time interval attributes Postion speed 4 01 second s Image state change oii maa am Backward cycle 218 Lv ge WE NTEK Objects The following dialog shows size setup of animation object Call up the animation object dialog box by double clicking Anmmaton Objec
256. d macro command Name RecipeQueryGetRecordID RecipeQueryGetRecordID destination result_row_no Description Get the record ID numbers of those records gained by RecipeQuery This function must be called after calling RecipeQuery result_row_no specifies the sequence row number in query result and write the obtained record ID to destination macro_command main int recordID 0 int total row 0 int row_number 0 bool result_ query bool result_id result_query RecipeQuery SELECT FROM TypeA total_ row Query Recipe TypeA Store the number of records of query result in total_ row if result_ query then for row_number 0 to total_ row 1 result_id RecipeQueryGetRecord D recordID row_number next row_number end if end macro command 467 E WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 6 8 Miscellaneous Name SYNC_TRIG_MACRO SYNC_TRIG_MACRO macro_id Description Trigger the execution of a macro synchronously use macro _id to designate this macro in a running macro The current macro will pause until the end of execution of this called macro macro_id can be a constant or a variable macro_command main char ON 1 OFF 0 setData ON Local HMI LB O 1 SYNC_TRIG_ MACRO 5 _ call a macro its ID is 5 SetData OFF Local HMI LB O 1 end macro_command Name ASYNC_TRIG_MACRO ASYNC_TRIG_MACRO macro_id Description Trigger the execution of a macro asynchronously use macro _id to design
257. d when selecting All in Device Range Set the range of address types to be displayed This function will be disabled when selecting All in Address Type Capture Click to start stop capturing communication message Please refer to the section coming later 678 Polling Packages Polling Packages t x Package ID Device Station Index Address Length 41 Local Hh LB 00562 I 1 a 0 Local H ll LB 00574 1 AF 32 SIEMENS S577300 Ethernet 1 M 00000 1 Be Cs SIEMENS S577300 Ethernet 1 10 L610 00000 s 3 BG 3 SIEMENS S7 300 Ethernet 1 11 L610 00003 3 T i3 SIEMENS S577300 Ethernet 1 12 C610 OO008 sf 3 Ti 5 SIEMENS S7 300 Ethernet 1 C610 00009 5 Item Description Package ID Use the information of package ID to check the PID in activity area for finding the problem Displays HMI and PLC type Station Displays PLC station number Index Display objects used index register numbers Address Length Displays device type address Length how many words of the Package Polling Packages Object Screen IL Address 4 i1 Local H ill LB 00562 I 1 6 i0 Local Hh LB 00574 1 BF ae SIEMENS S7300 Ethernet 1 Mi 00000 s 1 O fo ooo O Toggle 5 10 30 Mi 0000A Toggle amp 10 29 Mi OOOO Toggle amp 10 29 Mi OOOO Toggle amp 10 20 Mi 00000 Toggle 5 10 20 M 00000 Toggle 5 10 af Mi OOOO Item Description Object Package ID where th
258. data sampling object in Data sampling object index Data sampling object will use the sampling data which was sorted in according to dates The system use History control to select the historical records that are created by the same data sampling object The picture below shows the History control setting page History control PLC name Local HMI ww Setting Address Lay we oY 16 bit Unsigned The system sorts the historical records of sampling data by date the latest file is record O In normal condition it is sampling data today the second latest file is record 1 and SO on If the value of designated register in History control is n the trend display object will display data record n Here is an example to explain usage of History control In the above picture the designated register is LW200 if the sampling data available in the files are pressure _ 20061120 dtl pressure _20061123 dtI pressure 2006112 7 dtl and pressure _ 20061203 dtl and it is 2006 12 3 today Based on the value of LW200 the sampling data files selected by the trend display object is shown as follows Value of LW200 The files of the sampling data from the historical record o pressure _20061203 dti pressure _20061127 dtl pressure_20061123 dtl 235 Lid WE NTEK Objects pressure 20061120 dftl Distance between data samples Pixel Distance between data samples 8 Pixel gt Time Distance piel
259. data stored by data sampling object It displays history data in numeric format Please note that the history data display will not refresh automatically it only retrieve the data from the designated record and display at the time window popup If the content of the designated record is updated the history data display will not change accordingly No Tim 3577 21 52 16 09 07 0 3574 21 52 16 09 07 O 573 21 52 16 09 07 0 3571 21 52 16 09 07 0 Ch 1 Pi 0 a po Lo a Pi h 0 0 Ch 1 C 3969 215 2 nien tal Pa 16 09 07 4RINGInNT lL N Ti s H Configuration Click the History Data Display icon on the toolbar the History Data Display dialog box show up on the screen Fill in each items and click OK button a new object will be created 243 Hew History Data Display Object General Data Format Title Shane Data Sampling Object tudes io v Enable Color S e Column interval Profile color Frame E Time v Time Date Date DDMMAY Pe WANE Na Time ascending 2 Time descending History control PLC name Local HMI Setting ddress LW ae 20 Data Sampling object index Select the corresponding Data sampling object where the history data comes from Grid Set grid enable or disable 3982 22 02 16 09 07 O 0 3981 22 02 16 09 07 O
260. ded OB16 0 0 a w mAAR e EA 699 L teh WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names D Select data then click Edit since the data of the modules can be operated by bit here Binary Access should be selected then click OK to return to Structure Editor Edit data member Hame Description Data Type INT AB111769 D610 AR Embedded IQ16F 0 0 AB Embedded _1O16F 1 0 AB Embedded O616 c 0 AaB Embedded OB16 1 0 AB Embedded OB16 0 0 ALARM ALARM ANALOG ALARM DIGITAL AU VALVE CONTROL Artar Dimensiors Dim 2 Show Data Types by Groups Click OK to finish setting 700 WS WE NTEK Easy Watch Chapter 35 Easy Watch 35 1 Overview 35 1 1What s Easy Watch Easy Watch allows users to monitor or set HMI or PLC address values via HMI and at the same time call out Macro for easier debugging remote monitoring and controlling This manual introduces the basic operations monitor settings macro settings and HMI management in order to quickly familiarize users with the functions of Easy Watch 35 1 2 Why Design Easy Watch When creating a new project using EasyBuilder Pro check the accuracy of the setting value and data via Easy Watch In EasyBuilder Pro add a Numeric Input Object address LW10 and set the same in Easy Watch When start monitoring if Status shows connected and Value is correct the connection works and allo
261. dress index 0 address index 1 t address index 2 iti address index 3 ith address index 4 ith address index 5 iti address index 6 iti address index 7 iti address index 6 Max range 65536 words iti address index 9 ik address index 10 ik address index 11 address index 12 iti address index 13 ikti address index 14 it address index 15 32 bit Index Register it the result of importing email data ik user no l 12 ik password Index 16 LW 9230 32 bit Index 31 LW 9260 32 bit IK classes can be operated For current user bit 0 4 bit 1 6 bit iti address index 16 it address index 17 it address index 18 ib address index 19 Max range 4294967296 words ik address index 20 IK address index 21 iki address index 22 kh address index 23 address index 24 iti address index 25 Index 0 Index 31 Descriptions of Index Registers LW 9200 LW 9260 Index Registers word addresses While using Index register the address of the Device type will be decided by the value of constant in set address value in chosen Index Register 133 Index Register works in all Device lists built in System Parameter Settings no matter addresses in bit or word format E index Register 11 2 Examples of Index Register The following examples show how to use Index Registers Index register not checked Read address is set to LW 10 and wont chang
262. dth 57 5mm Recommended SP printer type for customers outside China Micro printer from France connects via serial port please configure communication parameters to match the printer 600 HMI Supported Printers Serial printers please configure communication parameters to match the printer The Pixels of Width must be correctly set and can t exceed printer default setting 570 Serial printers please configure communication parameters to match the printer The Pixels of Width must be correctly set and can t exceed printer default setting 100 SP DN40SH Dot Matrix Printer SP RMDII40SH Thermal Le WE NTEK HMI Supported Printers Use EasyPrinter to start printing for the printers Serial printers please connected with PC via Ethernet This works under MS Windows so the most printers on market are supported configure communication parameters to match the printer The paper cutting mode can be selected No cut Half cut and Full cut Serial printers please configure communication parameters to match the printer 601 Lib WE NTEK HMI Supported Printers 23 2 How to Add a New Printer and Start Printing 23 2 1 Add Printer Type System Parameter Settings Model select printer type and set relevant parameters System Parameter Settings fx Extended Memor Printer Backup Server e Mail _ Recipes Device General System Setting Securit
263. duler 1 Power OM startend action Acton mode C Bit ON O Bit OFF te Word write Acton address PLC name Local HMI Setting Address Lw s 100 l6 bit Unsigned Word write value sethings Constant Address etart value 30 Cancel General tab 1 Power ON start end action Fower OM startend action 2 Check Word write in Action mode Action mode O Bit ON Bit OFF Word write 3 Set LW100 in Action address 319 W WE INTEK Objects Acton addres PLE name Local HMI s Setting Address Liw s 16 bit Unsigned 4 Check Constant and set Write start value to 90 in Word write value settings Word write value settings Constant O Addres Wie start vale Time Set tab 5 Select Time Set tab check Constant General Time Set Prohibit Constant Addres 6 Unselect Setting on individual day In Start adjust time as 8 00 00 and select Monday to Friday Setting on individual day start Sun Mon Tue Wen Thu Fri Sat 7 In End select Enable termination action and adjust time as 17 00 00 End Enable tecnunation action 17 g 8 Select General tab set Write start value to 90 and Write end value to 30 320 e l ge WE NTEK Objects Wit tt ae Wien vale 9 Click OK the settings appear in the Scheduler list Schedule settings guide
264. e R Y R Y used only LW 9126 16bit HMI ethernet gateway 1 machine R Y R Y used only LW 9127 16bit HMI ethernet gateway 2 machine R Y R Y used only LW 9128 16bit HMI ethernet gateway 3 machine R Y R Y used only LW 9129 16bit HMI ethernet IP O machine used only R Y R Y LW 9130 16bit HMI ethernet IP 1 machine used only R Y R Y LW 9131 16bit HMI ethernet IP 2 machine used only R Y R Y LW 9132 16bit HMI ethernet IP 3 machine used only R Y R Y LW 9133 LW 9135 LW 9136 LW 9137 LW 9138 LW 9139 16bit ethernet port no mm A A om A 16bit media access control MAC address 0 MAC address 1 MAC address 2 MAC address 3 MAC address 4 16bit media access control 16bit media access control 16bit media access control 16bit media access control LW 9140 16bit media access control MAC address 5 LW 1075 16bit HMI ethernet Mask 0 machine used R Y R Y 0 only LW 1075 16bit HMI ethernet Mask 0 machine used R Y R Y 1 only LW 1075 16bit HMI ethernet Mask 0 machine used R Y R Y 2 only LW 1075 16bit HMI ethernet Mask 0 machine used R Y R Y OO only 557 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 8 Recipe and Extended Memory Read R Write W Control Y o _ RN LB LB 9028 reset all recipe data set ON ENARE LB 9029 save all recipe data to machine set ON Powe fey y
265. e 40 End degree 140 228 W WE NTEK Objects 2 Start degree 225 End degree 315 Background Set the object s background color and profile color Full circle When the Full circle is selected the object will display the whole circle otherwise the object will display the defined degree range See the picture below Full cirele non full circle Transparent When the Transparent is selected the object will not display the background and profile color See the picture below Tick marks To set the tick mark s number and color Pointer To set Pointer s style length width and color Pin point To set pin points style radius and color 229 L wb WE NTEK Objects The following pictures show the Limit tab and the sign of low and high limit set in the Limit tab Hew Meter Display Object General Outline Limits Shape Value Zero O Range limits v Enable Low i fmt Mid High er Width 3 ee EJ Use user defined radius Dynamic Lint PLE name Local HMI w Setting 16 bit Unsigned Address fer agale label Font ayia Color i mize 16 Right of decimal point p Cancel Value To set object s display range Meter display object will use the value of Zero and Span and the value of register to calc
266. e 1 State 0 E bd Attribute Font Lat Color es Size 16 inl Alien Left Blink None 4 F Italie Underline Duplicate these attibutes to Every state Every language All Movement SS Direction No movement w Content Tracking When Use label library is selected Content field shows the content of selected Label Tag and the settings of Font are also included in the Label Library Please note that languages 2 24 can only set the Font Size other settings for example Color Align Blink etc will follow the settings of language 1 370 Lyh WE NTEK Label Library and Multi Language Usage 15 5 Settings of Multi Language System Register LW 9134 When users would like to have the object s text to show multi language except for using Label Library the system reserved register LW 9134 language mode can be used The value of LW 9134 can be set from 0 to 7 Different data of LW 9134 corresponds to different languages Up to 24 languages can be set in EasyBuilder Pro and 8 max of them can be displayed on HMI The way of using LW 9134 will differ if the languages are not all chosen when compiling and downloading the project If user defines 5 When compiling if only For LW 9134 the languages languages 1 3 5 are corresponding chosen values are 1 Create a A Text object and tick Use
267. e DD Y OD MM Y O DD MM YY Oo MM Do 86 W WE NTEK Event Log Category EasyBuilder Pro classifies events by dividing them into 0 255 categories Select one category to add or view event log In it shows how many events are in this category History files Specify the storage device of an event log However when simulating the project on PC the files will be saved under the installation directory Preservation limit This setting determines how many days the data to be preserved For example the Days of preservation is set to two days which means HMI memory will keep the data of yesterday and the day before yesterday Data that is not built in this period will be deleted automatically to prevent the storage space from running out Print To enable this setting please finish the settings of printer in System Parameter Settings Model 7 1 1 Excel Editing Use Excel to edit Event Log Click on the Excel icon on Event Log setting dialog to open the Excel template for editing This template is under installation directory EventLogExample xls and includes ready made dropdown lists and validation mechanism bide od lal Ieee This l Lom pi Local 9000 laze as ON Te True oot lieriecn alight use newt Troe Ire zzz Bait ecD BCD B2 bit BCD Noe J 1 System tag and User defined tag can not be set to true simultaneously otherwise the system will view Syst
268. e are any additional tasks to be done For example Create a desktop icon Tick it if needed then click Next to continue W Setup EasyBuilder Pro V1 00 Select Additional Tasks Which additional tasks should be performed Select the additional tasks you would like Setup to perform while installing EasyBuilder Pro 41 00 ther click Mest Additional icons Create a desktop icon lt Back next gt Cancel 7 At this moment all the settings are done Please check if they are all correct If any changes need to be made click Back or click Install to start installing i Setup EasyBuilder Pro 1 00 Ready to Install Setup is now ready to begin installing EasyBuilder Pro V1 000n your computer Click Install to continue with the installation or click Back iF you want to review or change any settings Destination location C EBpro Start Menu folder EasyBuilder Pro Additional tasks Additional icons Create a desktop icon Back Install Cancel 14 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Startup Guide 8 Installation processing i Setup EasyBuilder Pro 1 00 Installing Please wait while Setup installs EasvBuilder Pro 1 00 on your computer Extracting files Cancel 9 Click Finish to complete the installation i Setup EasyBuilder Pro 1 00 Completing the EasyBuilder Pro 1 00 Setup Wizard Setup has Finished installing EasyBuilde
269. e dividing line divides every Grid single data a J Transparent If this option is being ticked no dividing line will be shown Furthermore it wouldn t appear an option for choosing color Selection Control Pees The displayed color when pointing Color z to a specific row Default sort method Setting the way to sort records in imme ute the table of Recipe View Object Sort by Na 5a Ascending and Descending Ascending Descending can be selected e Users need to create the recipe data before using this Recipe View Object please refer to User Manual Chapter 5 System Parameter Settings Besides please create the records of recipe by Recipe Records Object please refer to User Manual Chapter 24 Recipe Editor for more information 351 Lid et WE NTEK Objects How to monitor or modify Recipe Records To watch Add Delete the displayed records a register can be set for inputting a specific value Create 4 Numeric Input Objects first address Selection Count Command and Result Selection The current selection of record numbered from zero If choose the first record the value of Selection will show 0 and so on As shown the record shaded pink will display 1 Selection in Selection Count The number of records in current Recipe As shown there are 5 records therefore displays 5 in count Command Enter certain value will s
270. e first register controls the state of the object and the second register controls the position along the predefined path As the PLC position register changes value the shape or picture jumps to the next position along the path Configuration Click the Animation icon on the toolbar move the mouse to each moving position and click the left button to define all moving positions one by one When settings of all moving positions are completed click the right button of the mouse a new animation object will be created AN pasian D T ji position Q State 0 postion d positiand f pashan s PESHON 2 To change the object s attributes you can double click the left button of the mouse on the object and the Animation Object s Properties dialog box as shown in the picture below will appear 215 WE NTEK Objects Animation Object s Properties General Shape Label Profile Deseription Attribute l no of states 9 Postion Controlled by register O Based upon time interval Read address PLE name lac HMI Setting Address rer i i 16 bit Unsigned Attribute Total no of states To set the number of the states for this object a Controlled by register When select Controlled by register the designated register controls the object s state and position Read address If sele
271. e format N AAAAA N indicates that PLC s station number is N AAAAA represents the address offset This format is used while 439 Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference multiple PLCs or controllers are connected to a single serial port For example StringGet read_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 2 5 1 represents that the PLC s station number is 2 If StringGet uses the default station number defined in the device list as follows it is not necessary to define station number in address _offset PLC type FATEK FB Series V 1 10 FATEK_FB so PLC I F Rs 232 gt PLC default station no 2 COM COM1 9600 E 7 1 Settings Use broadcast command The number of registers actually read from depends on the value of the number of data_count since that the read_data is restricted to char array type of data_count actual number of 16 bit register read_ data read carb a char 8b oo 1 WORD register 16 bit equals to the size of 2 ASCII characters According to the above table reading 2 ASCII characters is actually reading the content of one 16 bit register macro_command main char str1 20 read 10 words from LWO0O LW9 to the variables str1 0 to str1 19 since that 1 word can store 2 ASCII characters reading 20 ASCII characters is actually reading 10 words of register StringGet str1 0 Local HMI LW 0 20 end macro command 440 L WE NTEK Macro Reference Name StringGetEx
272. e function from Function TET int ADD int int Library and save as mlb file ren ne int DIV int int 2 Click Export this is a macro about square New Delete ait 3 Select the function to be exported and click Export short testi short 4 A math mlb file can be found i int ADD int int 8 int SUBS int int under export directory This file 2 4 int Mu Cint int int DIV int int contains 4 functions ADD SUBS length short MUL and DIV 5 The exported mlb file can be imported to another PC Open HMI gt A EsPro ibran Organize v New folder programming software import o gt Favorites Name Date modified then the functions in this file can EE Desktop Ji picture 2011013 F 1 i Downloads di shape 2011 10 12 0 be used 1 Recent Places J sound 2011 10 12 0 0922 mlb 6 02 val Libraries length mib 2007 8 5 01 3 Documents length_0926 mib 2007 8 5 01 3 a Music math mlb H03 t Pictures EF 013 E Videos W Computer amp Local Disk C CD Drive D STEP 7 GF FAE vboxsrv E File name X Tet Documents txt Encoding macro Libranes mlb 490 L WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 9 Some Notes about Using the Macro 1 The maximum storage space of local variables in a macro is 4K bytes So the maximum array size of different variable types are as follows chara 4096 bool b 4096 short c 2048 int d 1024
273. e in the system default 1000 the lower priority events will be deleted and new events will be added in Read address system reads data from this address to check if the event matches the trigger condition Notification When enabled system will set the specified register to ON or OFF when the event is triggered Condition When Bit is selected Event Log will detect the ON or OFF state of a Bit address 89 WW WE NTEK Event Log When Word is selected Event Log will detect the value of a Word address to check if it equals to greater than or less than a specified value _Example T Condition Tage value is e e 2 The setting above indicates When Read address value is greater than or equals to 29 30 1 and less than or equals to 31 30 1 the event will be triggered The trigger condition 29 lt Read address value lt 31 After the event is triggered when Read address value is greater than 32 30 2 or less then 28 30 2 the system will return to normal condition Read address value lt 28 or Read address value gt 32 Example ey Condition Tigger vale intone I S e 2 The setting above indicates When Read address value is less than 29 30 1 or greater than 31 30 1 the event will be triggered The trigger condition Read address value lt 29 or Read address value gt 31 After the event is triggered when Read address value is greater than or equa
274. e object enters input state when a user touches it e Bit control The object enters input state when turning ON the designated bit register and ends input state when turning OFF Notice that if there is another input object already in input state turning ON the designated bit register won t make this input object enters input state until the previous one ends inputting data HMI system will disable the popup keypad when Mode is set to Bit Control Users need to use an external keypad for typing 186 L WE NTEK Objects Allow input bit address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the bit register that controls the object enters and ends input state Users can also set address in Data Entry tab 187 Lb WE NTEK Objects Input order By setting Input Order and Input Order Group users can continuously input data between multiple input objects The system will automatically transfer input state to the next input object after users complete inputting data i e press ENT e Enable Select Enable and set Input Order to enable this feature Furthermore users can also select Group to set Input Order Group a The range of Input Order 1 511 b The range of Input Order Group 1 15 c The Input Order Group of an input object with Group unselected is 0 e Criterion of searching the next input object a The system only searches it among the input
275. e should be removed and click Next to continue ie Setup EasyBuilder Pro 1 00 EBS000 Remove Information Find other version of EBpro that has been installed Would vou want to removeHRPro Select the version that you want to remove EBpro 12 Lyh WE NTEK EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Startup Guide 4 Designate a new folder for EasyBuilder Pro installation or choose the folder recommended and then click Next ie Setup EasyBuilder Pro V1 00 Select Destination Location Where should EasyBuilder Pro 1 00 be installed i d Setup will install EasyBuilder Pro Y 1 00 into the Following Folder To continue click Next IF vou would like to select a different folder click Browse Gt least 267 5 MB of Free disk space is required lt Back next gt Cancel 5 Users will be enquired to select a start menu folder to save the program s shortcuts Click Browse to designate a folder or use the folder recommended then click Next ie Setup EasyBuilder Pro 1 00 Select Start Menu Folder Where should Setup place the program s shortcuts E9 Setup will create the program s shortcuts in the Following Start Menu Folder a To continue click Next IF vou would like to select a different Folder click Browse lt Back next gt Cancel 13 Lyh WE NTEK EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Startup Guide 6 Users will be enquired if ther
276. e start destination or success StringDecAsc2Bin source destination This function converts a decimal string to an integer It converts the decimal string in source parameter into an integer and stores it in the destination variable The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start Destination must be a variable to store the result of conversion This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the source string contains characters other than O to 9 it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main char src1 5 12345 int result1 bool success1 success1 StringDecAsc2Bin src1 0 result success1 true result1 is 12345 char result2 bool success2 success2 StringDecAsc2Bin 32 768 result2 success2 true but the result exceeds the data range of result2 445 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference char src3 2 4b char result3 bool success3 success3 StringDecAsc2Bin src3 0 result3 success3 false because src3 contains characters other than 0 to 9 end macro command Name StringBin2DecAsc success StringBin2DecAsc source destination start Description This function converts an integer to a decimal string It converts the integer in source parameter i
277. e start action is performed If the HMI power is turned ON outside of the scheduled range the termination action is performed Inside the scheduled range Start time Power ON End time Start action Termination action Outside the scheduled range Power ON Start time End time Termination action Start action Termination action Disable If power is turned ON but the time is later than the Start Time the action is not automatically performed However the termination action is automatically performed Also if the termination action is not set the schedule range is unable to recognize and the action is not performed Word write value Settings These settings are active only when Action Mode is set to Word Write When performing start action the system will write this value into action address Write start value For Constant Designates the value to be written at start time For Address Designates the address used to store the start time value 323 L WE NTEK Objects Write end value When performing end action the system will write this value into action address e For Constant Designates the value to be written at end time e For Address Designates the address used to store the end time value You can use this option if the Enable termination action in Time Set tab is selected E Time Set tab when Constant is selected Scheduler General Time Set Prohibit
278. e string to destination string It adds the contents of source string to the last of the contents of destination string The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start Destination must be an one dimensional char array 452 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of result string after concatenation exceeds the max size of destination buffer it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main char src1 20 abcdefghij char dest1 20 1234567890 bool success1 success1 StringCat src1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 123456 790abcdefghij char dest2 10 1234567890 bool success2 success2 StringCat abcde dest2 0 success2 false dest2 remains the same char src3 20 abcdefghij char dest3 20 bool success3 success3 StringCat src3 0 dest3 15 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro command ret StringCompare str1 start str2 start ret StringCompare string1 str2 start ret StringCompare str1 start string2 ret StringCompare string1 string2 Description Do a case sensitive comparison of two strings The two string parameters accept both static string in the form string1 and ch
279. e system will automatically send the result codes to control address LW n 1 The listed result codes below are hexadecimal values Result Codes Result Messages 0x001 Command successfully executed 0x002 Command error 0x004 Account already exists when adding new account 0x008 Account does not exist 0x010 Password error 0x020 Current command can t be executed 0x040 Invalid account name 0x080 Invalid account password 0x100 The imported data is invalid 0x200 Not within the effective time limit when using USB Security Key to log in m Users can predefine the result codes on Event Log Object and then display the result messages on Event Display Object 123 Lib WE NTEK User Password and Object Security 10 3 Enhanced Security Mode with Function Key 10 3 1 Import User Account Apart form System Parameter Settings Security tab users can also set user accounts by launching Administrator Tools in EasyBuilder Pro installation directory and tick User Accounts A maximum of 127 accounts can be added as shown below A Administrator Tools Save to USB Contents of the USB data d User Accounts C USB Security Key C e Mail SMTP Sever Settings C e Mail Contacts User Account Settings No Secret Username Password Penny 001001 John 002002 Tony 003003 Admin 004004 Larry 005005 Jane 006006 Tina 007007 008008 omooosoo ITRTATRT Oosoo0o0o08o poOomoroo
280. e value of the word JOG delay 0 5 second s JOG speed 0 1 second s address automatically according to the setting of JOG speed until it exceeds to the Upper limit After that it will return to Bottom limit and re increase the value E Cyclic JOG Periodically cyclic decrement function Attribute When the time of holding this button is Set Style Cyclic JOG Bottom limit 0 Upper lirit 10 longer than JOG delay it will Dec value decrease the value of the word 106 dely 05 soconl aw oot address automatically according to the setting of JOG speed until it goes less than the Bottom limit After that it will return to Upper limit and re decrease the value 162 Lb WE NTEK Objects Dynamic limits Set the Bottom limit and Upper limit of the input data to be derived from the designated register 16 bit 32 bit LW 100 LW 100 LW 100 LW 100 LW 101 LW 102 163 Ly WE NTEK Objects 13 5 Function Key Overview Function key object is used to change base window pop up window and close window It can also be used to design the keypad buttons Configuration Click the Function Key icon in the toolbar and the Function Key Object s Properties dialog box will appear fill in each items and press the OK button a new function key object will be created 164 Lid a WE NTEK Objects New Function Key Object _ General Security Shape Label De
281. e while Device type PLC name Local HMI running project ee Address C System tag Address format DODD range 0 10799 Index register 16 bit Unsigned wl Tag Library Index register is checked ee and index register INDEX 0 is selected read address is set to RS Aes LW 0 INDEX 0 ae INDEX 0 Index Register 0 Address Format DODDD range 0 10799 or data of address Index INDEXO 16 bit Z Index register LW 9200 16 bit Unsigned If data of address LW 9200 is 5 read address is set to LW 0 5 LW 5 PLC name Local HMI Here s a demo project shown as an example l Demo Project Index Register Index Function of Word Index O LW 9200 LW O Index O LW 9200 Index Function of Bit Index 6 LW 9206 LB O Index 6 LW 9206 134 Cancel Cancel Li WE NTEK Index Register Q Example Index Function of Word Index Function of Word Index O LW 9200 LW 0 Index 0 LW 9200 Index 0 is 0 Read LW 0 Index 0 LW 10 is set data in address Read LW 0 content to 3 LW 20 is LW 9200 0 g set to 6 Index Function of Word Index 0 LW 9200 LW O Index 0 LW 9200 Index 0 LW 9200 Read LW O Index 0 is set to 10 Read LW 10 3 Index Function of Bit In the same way Index Register can be used for Bit address 1 Word 16 Bit adding 1 W
282. ead request is designed as follows char command 32 short address checksum FILL command 0 0 32 initialize command 0 command 31 to 0 493 L WE NTEK Macro Reference command 0 0x1 station number command 1 0x3 read holding registers function code is 0x3 address 0 starting address 4x_1 is 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 read no 2 _ the total words of reading is 2 words HIBYTE read_no command 4 LOBYTE read_no command 5 CRC command 0 checksum 6 calculate 16 bit CRC LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7 Lastly use OUPORT to send out this read request to PLC OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 send read request After sending out the request use INPORT to get the response from PLC Depending on the protocol the content of the response is as follows the total byte is 9 command 0 station number BYTE 0 command 1 function code BYTE 1 command 2 byte count BYTE 2 command 3 high byte of 4x_1 BYTE 3 command 4 low byte of 4x_1 BYTE 4 command 5 high byte of 4x_2 BYTE 5 command 6 high byte of 4x_2 BYTE 6 command 7 low byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 7 command 8 high byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 8 The usage of INPORT is described below INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 9 return_value read response Where the real read count is restored to the variable return_value unit is byte If return_
283. eane mene G Ter Location Local or Remote Showing whether this device is connected to Local HMI or being remote controlled Select Local in this case 45 Ta WE NTEK System Parameter Settings PLC type Type of PLC Select FXOs FXOn FX1s FX1n FX2 in this case PLC I F Some PLC interfaces are available RS 232 RS 485 2W RS 485 4W Ethernet USB If the interface is RS 232 RS 485 2W or RS 485 4W click Settings and then Com Port Settings dialog appears Users need to correctly set the COM port communication parameters COM Fort Settings Timeout sec EE Baud rate Turn around delay ms Data bits i Send ACK delay msi Parity bd Parameter 1 0 Stop bits i Parameter 2 Parameter 3 The number of resending commands o Timeout If the communication between PLC and HMI Is disconnected over the set time limit in Timeout parameter a pop out window No 5 will be shown in HMI as an alert saying PLC No Response Turn around delay While sending the next command to PLC HMI will delay it according to the set time interval in Turn around delay parameter This may influence the efficiency of the communication between HMI and PLC If no specific request to be made 0 is to be set If the PLC used is in SIEMENS S7 200 Series this parameter needs to be set to 5 and Parameter 1 30 If the interface is Ethernet click Settings
284. ect operation on PC Simulate operations without connecting PLC HMI OK without HMI and save more time On line simulation Simulate project operation on PC Connect PC PLC amp set correct parameters PC PLC HMI m When On line simulating on PC if the control target is a local PLC i e the PLC directly connected to PC there is 10 minutes simulation limit LS BasyBinilder Exo MTP2anmm A MADOR NN TEE Off line TETEE ee ee ET A a5 RESZH4AGOS OSH i Ao Str Ww 4 e gt Beep dOmEAk hanas ee Vex cO 0ee Am yw 0 ORJAA mee SO k MARR A EB File Edit View Option Dew Objects Library Tools Window Help 8X Windows X 4 10 WiNDOW_010 x Object list On line 3 Fast Selection a Sees eA 6 HMI Connection 7 Password Restriction gt 8 Storage Space Insufficient e ao WINDOW 010 Click after correctly 13 connecting the device 30 Create an EasyBuilder Pro Project 3 4 Download the Project to HMI m Way 1 Ethernet HMI IP Before Download be sure to check if all the settings are correct Input Password amp Download Specify HMI IP delete startup screen file sswnloading D Janez EE file 06 A testpic brop down nacdigg C EBS0004 34A frmwarecam i N04 S44 firmware river i Pad Settings Administrator MTP 1 xob WE1 0 ttt Petit Firmware Update HMI kernel programs Mus
285. ed 308 ELC Control PLC name Local HMI ki Attribute Type of control Weu Ean m Change window write data to PLECicurrent base window General PLC control Back light control write back Back light contral Sound control Screen hardcop Active only w Turn on back Trigger address PL name Address Liw Ww o 16 bit Unsigned Attribute amp Trigger address Type of control To set the type of control Click the select button and you can drag down a list of all available PLC control functions 4AFCribUce Type of control MaE EAS les Change window Write data to PLOtcurrent base window General PLC contral Back light controlfwrite back Trigger address Back light control Sound control Device type Screen hardcop a Change window This is used to change base window When the value of Trigger address is written in a valid window number the system will close the current window and open the window designated by the Trigger address The new window number will be written to the Trigger address 1 309 W WE NTEK Objects ELC Control Description PLE name Local HMI Attribute Type of contral Change window Active only when designated window opened 10 WINDOW O10 v Turn on back light Clear data after window changed Trigger address PLE name Setting Address Liw s 16 bit Unsigned As an example of the above configuration When writi
286. ed Source address PL name Local HMI Ww Setting Destination address PL name Lacal HMI Ww Setting Attribute Address type Select the bit or word device No of words or No of bits When select Word type the unit of data transfer is word set the number of data to transfer See the picture below Attribute Address type Interval 3 0 second s When select Bit type the unit of data transfer is bit set the number of data to transfer See the picture below Attribute Address type Bit v Interval 3 0 second s v No of bits 15 306 Interval Select the wait interval for each data transfer for example select 3 seconds the system will conduct data transfer operation every 3 seconds 1 Specifying a small interval or a big number of data to transfer may cause an overall performance decrease due to the time consuming in transferring data Therefore users should always try to choose a longer interval and a smaller amount of data to transfer 2 When a short interval is inevitable be aware of the interval must be longer than the data transfer operation For example if the data transfer operation take 2 seconds you must set the interval longer than 2 seconds Source address Set source address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of source address Users can also set address in General tab while addi
287. ed ON The timer measurement starts again and the ET is added to the kept value The Q remains OFF Point 4 When the ET reaches the PT the TI be turned OFF and the Q be turned ON Point 5 When the IN turns OFF the Q be turned OFF Reset the ET to 0 by using Reset bit R Point 1 When the IN turns ON the Q be turned ON and Tl remains OFF Point 2 When the IN turns OFF the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET increases the Q remains ON Point 3 When the IN turns ON the timer measurement pauses Point 4 When the IN turns OFF the paused timer measurement continues Point 5 When the ET equals the PT the Tl and Q are turned OFF Reset the ET to 0 by using Reset bit R 342 Lib WE NTEK Objects 13 31 Video In HMI provides Video Input function Users can install surveillance camera then monitor the factory any time they want The video images can also be stored in devices and play them with Media Player or analyze them on PC This function can be utilized in different aspects Apart from monitoring factory it can also be used in driving device or Building Automation monitoring For hardware HMI provides 2 channels for Video Input Users can freely switch channels to monitor and capture images without being influenced when pause playing The captured images will still be real time external image input The supported formats are NTSC and PAL New Video in Object Encode format NTSC Capture add
288. ed Windows Logo testing to werty its compatibility with Windows sP Tell me why this testing ts important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the corect operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing d Continue Anyway eras 644 rb WE NTEK Pass Through Function After process is completed the virtual COM port is displayed as below Virtual COM Port PC lt gt PLO COMMS cm This mode is not supported in Win 7 64 Bit operation system J 29 1 1 How to Change the Virtual Serial Port Open System Properties gt Device Manager to check if the virtual serial port is installed successfully YF Ports COM amp LPT ay Communications Port COM 1 4 F Communications Port COM ay Printer Port LF F Weintek virtual Serial Port COMS l Processors gE SCSI and RAID controllers Sound video and game controllers 3 System devices I iniverzal Serial Bore conkeollerc If users want to change the number of virtual serial port please click Weintek Virtual Serial Port to open Port Settings Advanced as follows al Devine M wagan Fie Action View Help i General Port Settings Driver Details E B enexe i Se Batteries 9 Computer Set Disk drive
289. ed identifier i When there are compile errors the error description can be referenced by the compiler error message number 2 Error Description C1 syntax error identifier There are many possibilities to cause compiler error For example macro_command main char i 123xyz this is an unsupported variable name end macro command C2 identifier used without having been initialized Macro must define the size of an array during declaration For example macro_command main char int gli i must be a numeric constant end macro command C3 redefinition error identifier The name of variable and function within its scope must be unique For example macro_command main int g 10 g error end macro command 498 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference C4 function name error identifier Reserved keywords and constant can not be the name of a function For example sub int if error C5 parentheses have not come in pairs Statement missing or For example macro command main missing C6 illegal expression without matching if Missing expression in if statement C7 illegal expression no then without matching if Missing then in if statement C8 illegal expression no end if Missing end if C9 illegal end if without matching if Unfinished If statement before End If C10 illega
290. ed on the next day 325 L WE NTEK Objects For example Monday Tuesday Start day Monday Start 22 00 00 End 01 00 00 22 00 00 01 00 00 Start Set the start time and day When Setting on individual day is disabled user can designate more than one day End Set the end time and day When Enable termination action is selected the end time can be specified The day settings can only be set when Setting on individual day is enabled 326 Li WE NTEK Objects E Time Set tab when Address is selected If address mode is selected the system retrieves the start end time and day from word devices Therefore users can set and change scheduled time in operation oc hed oler O Constant Time setting address FLE name Local HMI v setting Address LW we it Control 0 re tats ae L Action mode 0 stent time dayi 0 start time hour Start time minute J Start time fecondi 0 End time dayi 0 End time hour 0 End fine Qumutel D4 End time second 2 0 11 Cancel User designates the Time setting address as the top address used to store time settings data The 11 word devices are automatically allotted Normally the format of the above word devices is 16 unsigned integer If a 32 bit word device is chosen only 0 15 bits are effective and users should zero the 16 31 bits a
291. eed of alarm bar Color Set frame and background color of alarm bar 276 E WE NTEK Objects Format a Sort Set the order to display alarm message Time ascending Put the latest trigger alarm message in the bottom Time descending Put the latest trigger alarm message in the top b Order amp Characters Users can decide the display item and how the item display order c Date Event trigger date Display the date tag with alarm message There are four formats of date tag 1 MM DD YY 2 DD MM YY 3 DD MM YY 4 YY MM DD d Time Event trigger time Display the time tag with alarm message There are three formats of time tag 1 HH MM SS 2 HH MM 3 DD HH MM 4 HH Set font and color of alarm message in the Font tab See the picture below Hew Alarm Bar Object Alam Shape Font Attribute Font Comit Sens ME ON Colora Size 12 v v Italic 277 Lb WE NTEK Objects 13 22 Event Display Overview Event display object displays active and finished events The events are registered in Event log object The active events are the events which are in trigger condition or have been triggered and unacknowledged The event display object displays those active events in the order of trigger time See the picture below Event display object can also display the time of the events been triggered acknowledged and recove
292. eep Sleep Time 500 ms w Down Sh ee Replace Clean Remove Ok JA Object Name Name the object and the name cant repeat Target HMI HMI set with this Macro Macro Active Type Direct Active or Cycle Active MACRO List Editing Each Macro object can execute multiple macros The time interval between two macros can be set a aa 35 4 3 Add New Macros to the List 1 To add anew HMI please refer to 35 3 3 Add New Device 2 Macro Active Type can set to Direct Active or Cycle Active 709 a WE NTEK Easy Watch 2 1 Direct Active Directly execute Macro once by clicking Active button in the object list Lae ee Cycle Active 2 2 Cycle Active Set interval of executing Macros If Active Cycle is set to 5 Secs when all the macros are executed the next time to execute macros will be 5 seconds later Active Type Active Cycle Sethmes OK Cancel 3 Macro settings include Macro ID and Sleep Time Set the ID of the Macro to be executed and the time interval between each Macro Click Add or Replace to add or replace Macros listed here 3 1 Set Macro ID click Add to add it to the list Op Macro D Saeg S00 ma Seo Teme S00 g wv Liven Rephce Clean Petar 3 2 Set Sleep Time select Sleep in the list then click Replace to replace the selected sleep time Marr Up ry ne Macro TD 0 Mao p y 2 Sleep Seep ti
293. elect Bit 03 Wednesday 0 none 1 select Bit 04 Thursday 0 none 1 select Bit 05 Friday 0 none 1 select Bit 06 Saturday 0 none 1 select e Start End Time Start Time Time setting address 4 to 6 End Time Time setting address 8 to 10 Set the time values used for the start termination actions in the following ranges Hour 0 23 Minute 0 59 second 0 59 If you specify a value outside the range an error will occur NOTE The time data format shall be 16 bit unsigned system doesn t accept BCD format 330 Ly ge WE NTEK Objects E Prohibit tab oc hed aller General Time Set Prohibit eeseseseseses lt lt lt itissCS Prohibit FLE name areal HMI w Setting ee Address LE a Cancel Prohibit e Enable HMI reads the bit status before performing start action If the bit is ON the schedule action is not performed Sound e Enable When performing start and termination action the system will simultaneously play the specified sound 331 L WE NTEK Objects Restrictions e User can register the maximum of 32 entries in Scheduler list e The time scheduler features are one time actions When the start time or end time is reached the system writes the value to device just one time not repeated Operator turns OFF Start time
294. em tag to be true and User defined tag to be false If setting User defined tag as Device type please set System Tag to be false 2 Color format is R G B each should be an integer form 0 255 3 When setting User defined tag to be true if the system compares the 87 Ly WE NTEK Event Log Device type with the user defined tag in system and no suitable tag is found the system will set the user defined tag in event log to be false Before importing Library Label Library Sound Library please make sure library names exist in the system otherwise the system will simply use the file name of the imported Excel file 88 We WEINTEK Event Log 7 2 Create a New Event Log 7 2 1 Alarm Event Log General Settings Click New appears the Alarm Event Log dialog which includes three tabs go to General tab Event Alarm Log General Message e Mail Category D i Priority level jeer a Address type Word we Read address PLL name Local HMI w Setting Address iy glo 16 bit Unsigned Notification Enable OSet ON C Set OFF PLC name Local HMI l Setting Address LB T WF fi Condition Trizser if valve i s 20 In tolerance 0 1 Out tolerance 0 2 Category Select event category 0 255 Priority level When the number of Event Log equals to the max number availabl
295. emote HMI 31 s port no RIY RIY LW 9960 16bit remote HMI 32 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9961 16bit remote HMI 32 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9962 16bit remote HMI 32 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9963 16bit remote HMI 32 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9964 16bit remote HMI 32 s port no R Y R Y 584 L WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 21 Communication Status with Remote PLC Address Description LW 10050 16bit IPO of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 1 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10051 16bit IP1 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 1 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10052 16bit IP2 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 1 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10053 16bit IP3 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 1 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10054 16bit port no of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 1 LW 10055 16bit IPO of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 2 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10056 16bit IP1 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 2 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10057 16bit IP2 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 2 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10058 16bit IP3 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 2 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10059 16bit port no of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 2 LW 10060 16b
296. en copy the needed files to the target PC 633 or E WE NTEK 27 2 Modify the Content of xob_pos def EasySimulator Step 1 Open xob_pos def using a text editing tool e g Notepad and set the contents correctly E xob_pos Notepad File Edit Format View Help ee f Operation mode 0 off line 1 on ni MTOQO Txi series 2 off line 3 on line CemTso00 SERIES CryEasyBuilder ProMEasysimulator ff define the directory of com_e30 exe and gui_e30 exe CryEasyBui Ider Provcasysimulator MTPLl23 xoab 7 define the directory of xob Tile 2 Perform Off line Simulation 3 Perform On line Simulation Specify the full path where the files locate e g com_e30 exe gui_e30 exe EasySimulator exe etc Specify the full path of the project file xob Step 2 v Double click on EasySimulator exe to start simulation gt Wee jf Step 3 g On line Off line Simulation is displayed on the screen m f EasySimulator exe can t be activated please check if the relevant directories are correctly defined m If the window below is shown it indicates there s an error in xob file directory please check if it is correctly defined Failed to open project file No such file or directory 634 Lb WE NTEK Multi HMI Intercommunication Master Slave Mode Chapter 28 Multi HMI Intercommunication Master Slave Mode Multi HMI intercommunication means that HMI use
297. end command to the selected record Enter 1 Add a new Recipe Record to the last row Enter 2 Update the selected Recipe Record Enter 3 Delete the selected Recipe Record Result View the result of executing commands Display 1 Command successfully executed Display 2 The selected Record does not exist Display 4 Unknown command Display 8 Records reach limit 10000 records no new records can be added 352 Lig WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Library Chapter 14 Shape Library and Picture Library EasyBuilder Pro provides Shape Library and Picture Library features to add visual effects on objects Each Shape and Picture includes up to 256 states This chapter expatiates on how to create Shape Library and Picture Library For usage of shape and picture library please refer to Chapter 9 Object General Properties 14 1 Creating Shape Library A shape is a graph composed of lines rectangles and circles A complete Shape can possess more than one state and each state can include two parts frame and inner State O State 1 See the illustration below The frame and inner of a shape can be used separately or together by an object Click Call up Shape Library and the Shape Library dialogue appears as below ye eB sme Call up shape Library 353 L WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Librar Shape Library Library Select Lib Lib
298. end suk 484 Lid ge WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 8 3 1 Create a Function Macro Function Libre Function Name 1 Click New to enter Function EEN int MUL int int Editor int DIV int int 2 Edit function in Function Editing Field Function Editing Field 3 Edit function description here specifications usages editor s Statement etc a Click the right mouse button to display edit menu Eat description here Function Description Field 4 After editing a function click Compile and Save to Wening ES save this function to the Library If it is not compiled a warning dialog will be shown Compilation is not done 5 Successfully added into Macro Function Library Rt 00 it nt int SUBS int int int MUL int int this is a macro about square News Delete Edit Export import 485 W WE NTEK Macro Reference 1 The total size of data type can be declared in a function is 4096 bytes 2 Function name must only contain alphanumeric characters and cannot start with a number 486 Lb WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 8 3 2 Delete a Function 1 In function list select the function to be deleted and click Delete 2 Click Yes to confirm No to No rn ag as cancel the deletion Err mi SUES ink iniy PEMA int int ert CPW iink ink short testi hrt Ak o E 3 Click Yes to delete MAX_SHORT func
299. er 1 display size 0 16 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 0 Fit video image to object size 2 1 16 Magnification from 25 400 Set 1 for 25 2 for 50 3 for 75 and so on k Status control address 3 15 09 08 02 01 00 Reserved a0 ojo foo Bit 00 open file bit 0 file closed 1 file opened Bit 01 play file bit 0 not playing video 1 playing video Bit 08 command error bit 0 command accepted 1 incorrect command or parameters Bit 09 file error bit 0 file format accepted 1 unknown file format or reading fi 303 L WE NTEK Objects When playing a video the system will turn ON open file bit and play file bit If the file is unable to be scanned or the command is incorrect the command error bit will be set ON 01 1 If file format is unsupported or disk I O error happens during playing e g user unplugs the USB disk the file error bit will be set ON 071 2 Refer to the following figure the value of status at each state would be Stop status Pause status 1 open file bit Playing status 3 open file bit play file bit Playing play command 1 2 3 aP command switch pause command Finish i Stop Pause stop command 5 Users should only set values to Command Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 and regard the other registers as read only Restrictions m The system can only play one video file each t
300. er restriction Objet as Only when user s permitted LC Disable protection permanently after initial activation class matches the object s Pa eta TA ae aan N can it be operated C Make invisible while protected Object class none means any user can operate this object Only account admin can operate Administrator object class Disable protection permanently after initial activation Once the permitted class of the user matches that of the object the system will stop checking the security class permanently even a different user can operate freely Display warning message if access denied When the classes of user and object do not match a warning dialog Window 7 appears The content of the message can be modified Make invisible while protected When the classes of user and object do not match hide the object 129 Lig b WE NTEK User Password and Object Security 10 6 Setting Example Example B 1 Create a project go to System Parameter Settings Security to enable 3 users User 1 Operable class A User 2 Operable class A B User 3 Operable class A B C 2 Design Window 10 Numeric Input object User name Bii LW 9219 user no 1 12 Length 1word ss 16 bit Unsigned bit 15 bit 0 LW 9220 password Current status 1111111111111111 19222 Length 2 words 32 bit Unsigned Numeric Display object LW 9222 current user operable classes 1
301. ers can easily access to any HMI connected to the internet and operate them on PC just like holding touch screen in hand Unlike most server used in HMI Easy Access don t need to transmit updated graphic image but real time data only This makes transmission really quick and efficient For further information please refer to EasyAccess 62 WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 5 Security Parameters in Security tab determine the classes accessible for each user to adjust the objects and users password The security classes of objects are classified from A F and none for not ticking any class Up to twelve passwords can be set Only numeral setting is acceptable for password and the range is 0 999999999 5 5 1 General mode gt yslem Parameter Sethugs Extended Memory Printen Backup server ll e Mail _ Recipes Device Model General System Setting Secu Font General mode Enhanced security mode select operatable classes for each user laze B Chat Cla E E CI a E a O According to the security setting EasyBuilder Pro will control the classes accessible for each user to adjust the objects once they input their passwords In EasyBuilder Pro while constructing a project the security classes of objects are classified from A F and None and can be set as shown below If None is set every user can access to adjust this object User restriction Object class For
302. es Ethernet and COM port Click Pass through in Utility Manager will open a setting dialog Ei Utility Manager Kak Pass through HMI IP Password Ethernet com port Type eMT 3000 SERIES Settings Reboot HMI Virtual COM Port PC lt gt PLC Connection Ethernet USB cable i series only Please install weintek virtual serial port driver PLO Connection Port HMI lt gt PLO Data Event Log File Information Hbl IF EasyBuilder Pro EasyConverter EasyAddress Viewer Install EasyPrinter EasyDiagnoser Recipe Extended Memory Editor Build Download Data for CF SO USB Disk On line Simulation Off line Simulation Pass through 643 Tene P te WE NTEK Pass Through Function 29 1 Ethernet Mode How to install virtual serial port driver Before using Ethernet mode please check whether Weintek virtual serial port driver is installed as described below If Virtual COM port PC lt gt PLC displays Please install weintek virtual serial port driver please click Install Pass through Ethernet COM port Virtual COM Port PC lt gt PLO Please install weintek virtual serial port driver PLO Connection Port HMI lt gt PLO Install If the dialogue below pops up during installation please click Continue Anyway Hardware Installation The software you are ingtalling for this hardware Welntek Virtual Serial Port has not pass
303. esaddve iiieigned iat adddjensigned char tigned shorn wulgned son Hi EBIT OF Ta TE ii result source mie a a PF mg jaer chee ee Pek ee EN EEREN E BAS Ce TE N Pett ta ain lea ce ee RETETE ae oF Upon completion of the steps above user defined functions can be used freely without defining the same functions repeatedly 483 L WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 8 3 Function Library Management Interface eee Macro list 1 Open Macro management dialog click Library to enter Macro Function Library interface 2 A list of functions will be shown _ w erineanweeruee ee No Function Name when the Project is opened the srry 2 int SUBS int int r r software will load in all the e pane cot Lists Default Functions functions in the Default Function Library ADD a b Displays Function Description 3 The format of each line in function list return_type function_name parameter_typei parameter_typeN return_type indicates the type of the return value If this value does not exist this column will be omitted function name indicates the name of the function N in parameter_typeN stands for the number of parameter types If this function does not accept any parameters this column will be omitted Sub int ADD int a int b int ret ret ath return ret
304. est1 0 success1 true dest1 14 short src2 Ox3c char dest2 20 bool success2 success2 StringBin2HexAsc src2 dest2 0 success2 true dest2 3c int src3 Oxta2b3c4d char dest3 6 bool success3 success3 StringBin2HexAsc src3 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro_command 450 L WE NTEK Macro Reference Syntax Description success StringMid source start count destination start or success StringMid string start count destination start Retrieve a character sequence from the specified offset of the source string and store it in the destination buffer The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start For source start the Start offset of the substring is specified by the index value For static source string source the second parameter start specifies the start offset of the substring The count parameter specifies the length of substring being retrieved Destination must be an one dimensional char array to store the retrieved substring This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of retrieved substring exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main char src1 20 abcdefghijklmnopars
305. estTy pee TestT ype4 TestTypeB Description TestT ype TestTypeD TestT yper eee TestStruct Data Type Description Strings INT Predefined Module Defined l Oo a m m SSS i Imeniber Paste Edit Delete OK e Saving the result of revision After revising Save button on main window must be clicked Restart EasyBuilder Pro the result of revision can be viewed Stute Editor Data Types ro E User Defined Mame TestTypeE TestT ype4 TestTypeB Description TestT ype TestTypeD TestTypeF l TestStruct Data Type Description Strings M INT Predefined Module Detined tal lt i pia A A i Imeriber Add Paste Edit Delete OK Import Export Read save JD cxe Hee 694 Lib WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names e To Re edit For giving up all revision done and to re edit click Reload button in main window Stute Editor Data Types ET E User Defined Mame TestTypeE TestT ype4 TestTypeb Description TestT ype TestTypeD TestT yperF A TestStruct Data Type Description Strings INT Predefined Module Defined Ed i e 4 Imember add Paste Edit Delete OK L _ _ SSS Te ee SS ce oe eee J e Import Import for opening TDF fi
306. et or USB cable ssssssssensseeessersssersseereseeessereseereses 378 17 2 Updating Recipe Data with CF SD Card or USB Disk eeeessssssserrrrrrrrrrrrrrreeeeeessserrrrrrrrrrns 379 17 3 Transfering Recipe Data tases seadadetananadeaseeeesiuanonsondeadades tenn adenseaeucedeamonooanentageieeatadauseevacsesnies 380 17 4 Saving Recipe Data A tomatically sevassescaccsvivavasadeasvanenceavcaseestarcaabesweceayssvacawararananscneraacteeee 380 Chapter 18 Macro FROG iC Soe ats rccyavcrrceaetduauanranatapusneccawaraoar ans easabeeaedwaubasionsdos uaedenctiaeanabsaanteadietes 381 18 1 Instructions to the Macro Editor cccccssecccseccceesccccesccecesececeuececaesceeseeceseuecessueeeeaenees 381 1832 Macro C Om SUL UICEIOMN ssc caeesasesnaecatsonansensearcnas E sunset nenneesrucdencepuathuen Saateeaenerconaeeies 390 OB rece entrees TE A a ea castes cata A T va E cont onsaaaaub eer AE 391 18 3 1 Constants and Wall Cas tse avavazconet tee swat coantacestesnnsaeeearcteavieevae a ai 391 DD OV OS E E T E T ama scings sea wenam ee E E E EIET 393 Loa E E ea E E E E ENE AE E T E A EON 396 184 l Definitions taterneNnt screenie haga cace cae mucdiacedsatanesmneracaqreneey mecdiansdeatene 396 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder Pro User Manual 18 4 2 Assignment SECATECMENT icsisccctacecncanecesuedagedsvatnsarsuencssanseunsesacnseccesatenedsbeateomoauenees 396 1843 Logical Statements sansnacesanennsqaantoncasunahacacaninadesanmnneysandoncarunahacataninadesammacqaantence
307. ete Cur State Delete current state of the selected Picture Rename Rename the selected Picture Rename Insert Before Add a new state before the current state 361 E WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Librar Insert After Add a new state after the current state Import Picture Modify Picture Modify the selected picture Export Export the selected picture to the appointed place As shown below users can get the original picture Save As Save in C9 EBSOO0 s Oj driver win3 ee Sy drivers My Recent CO drivers x86 Documents jemte emmy iimware io font Desktop library I project C recipe E MT8056 Sj MTsi04 ey MTS121 Sj M8150 hy Documents hy Computer File name E My Network Saveastype Bitmap file bmp Note The compatible picture format are bmp jpg gif dpd and png When adding a GIF picture in Picture Library if this picture file is animated the number of times to play this animation can be set by users as below 362 Lib WE NTEK Get Picture Picture fle State O O C Documents and Settings Nicolas 8 gif State 0 Width 74 Height 40 Size 1015 7Bytes Loops O GIF default Infinite Customized s0 C 3 Cancel The example below shows how to create a new Picture Library and add a Picture with two states into It Step 1 Click New Lib and input the name of the new Picture Library
308. everything Ethernet OUSE cable HMI IP 192 168 1 90 returns to the conditions of startup Set the correct IP address when operating HMI via Ethernet Data Event Log File Information After setting connect with HMI to check the number of history files in HMI DatafEvent Log File Information x DatafEvent Log File Information EasyBuilder Pro com i ct EasyConverter EasyAddress viewer EasyPrinter EasyDiagnoser f HPAI 1 20120110 d 2 20120113 dtl E GreenHouse HM save El event log 1 EL_20120113 evt Recipe Extended Memory Editor Build Download Data for SOUSE Disk Download Upload On line Simulation Off line Simulation Pass through stop HI scan font finished vb WE NTEK Utility Manager 2 2 Editing Tools 2 2 1 Build Download Data for Saving in SD Card or USB Disk Utility Manager Select the folder to save download data SOUrces Project PLEASE INPUT XOB FILE NAME Recipe RW PLEASE INPUT RECIPE FILE NAME Recipe A RWA PLEASE INPUT RECIPE_A FILE NAME Data log PLEASE INPUT DATA LOG FILE MAME 1 Insert SD USB to PC 2 Assign data storing path 3 Assign files to download 4 Build data The source files will be saved in the inserted device for users to download to HMI This function is to build the required data 19 Ly WE NTEK Utility Manager 2 2 2 Steps to Download Project to HMI via USB or SD Ca
309. example when the security class of User is set as below only objects with class A B C and none can the user adjust For more information please see Chapter 10 Security No Enable Password Class Class B Class C bl 0 2 0 L 3 0 63 Li WE NTEK System Parameter Settings Project password MTP file Project pasword MTP file v Enable Setting Users can set password to protect the MTP file in System parameter Security tab Users have to input the password set here when they want to edit the MTP file MTP password range 1 4294967295 Tick Enable then click Setting and the window is as shown below HTF file Password 11111 range 1 4294967295 n ns Cancel Before editing project a pop up window will ask for password to access the project EasyHuilder Fro Password lau r Limited to 3 times caa 64 L tes WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 5 2 Enhanced security mode oystem Parameter Settings x Extended Memory PremtenwBackup server ta e Mail IL Recipes _ ef Device Model General SystemSetting Secwiy Font O General mode Enhanced security mode select operatable classes for each user Use existing v r account on HMI No Pah mecret UEY User name Pa
310. f no specific request is no to be made just use the default number Port no Set the Port no used by current HMI It is used as port no of MODBUS server If no specific request is to be made just use the default number Timer Clock source To set up the signal for timer object The time information of timer is used by Data Sampling Event Log etc which are objects that need the time records a HMI RTC means the time signal comes from internal clock of the HMI b External device means the time signal comes from external device To correctly set source address of time signal is necessary Take the illustration below as an example It indicates the source of time signal is from TV of the Local PLC The source address TV starts from address 0 contains 6 consecutive words and each of them contains the following information TV TV TV TV TV TV Second the limited range 0 59 Minute the limited range 0 59 Hour the limited range 0 23 Day the limited range 1 31 Month the limited range 1 12 Year the limit range 1970 2037 TEREE Timer Clock source Etema device i PLO name Deitel 0 M a Ww Setting 55 Lib WE NTEK System Parameter Settings Address PLC mare AAEM in Mena ee Device type Ty Address j Casna Address Format DDD range 0 255 Index register 16 bit Unsigned Cancel Type Display printers s
311. f non ascii function key must use the same Font For example in Simplified Chinese keypad the fonts all use AR MingtiM GB Function Key Object s Properties General Security Shape Label Profile sstssssestesesosseste Perret State 0 aap kn Clr Size 16 v Align Center w Blink 1 ione K Italic Underline Duplicate these attributes to every state After complete the keypad configuration add window11 into System Parameters General keyboard as illustration below 170 Lb WE NTEK Objects System Parameter aor BE Printer Backup Server General Fast selection button A ttoibrute Enable Settings Position Left C Bide button when HMI starts CIEE Sayer Back lieht saver None nutes PCLERN SAVED Mone minutts Options Startup window no 10 WINDOW 010 x Common window Above base window Object layout Nature gt Keyboard caretcolor _ TEW A enabled Event Use L W194 50 0455 as time tage of event logs Extra no of events p Eeyboard he a aaas oo Keypad 6 Integer F Sd Keypad 7 HEX 57 Keypad o Floating 60 ASCI Middle Delete 61 ASCII Small Li les bicka J a 171 L WE NTEK Objects 13 6 Toggle Switch Overview Toggle Switch object is a combination of bit lamp object and set bit object The object can be used not only
312. file Therefore users should place the criteria with more specification upward in the Convert Batch File and place the less specific criteria downward Take the 5 criteria mentioned in the previous sections for example the correct order is Correct order for the previous criteria dtl EasyConverter s Voltage lgs PathName Voltage dtl EasyConverter c PathName EasyView dtl EasyConverter c PathName 192 168 1 26 dtl EasyConverter c PathName evt EasyConverter c PathName 632 vb WE NTEK EasySimulator Chapter 27 EasySimulator EasySimulator enables users to perform On line Off line Simulation without installing EasyBuilder Pro software To achieve that users have to prepare the following files in one folder 27 1 Prepare Needed Files 1 driver gt win32 2 com_e30 exe Easysimulator File Edit View Favorites Tools Help sack f Bi ps Search gt Folders 3 EasySimulator exe 4 gui_e30 exe 5 sqlite3 dll Address CiHiEasyBuilder ProjEasysimulator FR ae OES eae 6 xob_pos det File and Folder Tasks driver F Pl com e30 e Make a new Folder E See uer d Publish this Folder to the Foui _e30 Web z MTP123 x06 Share this Folder El ba sqlite3 dll E xob_pos Ne m Users can find all the above files in EasyBuilder Pro installation directory which means users have to install EasyBuilder Pro software package on a PC first th
313. g end StringFindOneOf StringIncluding Find the first matching character from a set Extracts a substring that contains only the characters in a set StringExcluding Extracts a substring that contains only the characters not in a set String ToUpper Convert the characters of a string to uppercase String ToLower Convert the characters of a string to lowercase String ToReverse String TrimLeft Reverse the characters of a string Trim the leading specified characters in a set from the source string String TrimRight Trim the trailing specified characters in a set from the source string StringInsert Insert a string in a specific location within another string 519 Ly pt WE NTEK Macro Reference For more detailed information of the above string operation functions please check out the Build In Function Block section In order to demonstrate the powerful usage of string operation functions the following examples will show you step by step how to create executable project files using the new functions starts from creating a macro ends in executing simulation 1 How to read or write a string from a device Create a new macro Macro list Pee Edit the content Macro ff U Maro name macra_o Penocical execution e D AAAs l Mero COMBANA Haini Char ser 20 Stringtect ser O Local ANI LW O 20 SEQ IngsIec ace O Local ANI LW 30 0 end macro fi comard The fir
314. g Recipe Data with CF SD Card or USB Disk 1 Open Utility Manager and click Build Download Data for CF SD Card or USB Disk 2 Insert SD card or USB disk into PC 3 Click Browse to designate the file path 4 Click Build EasyBuilder Pro will then build the sources into SD card or USB disk Utility Manager Eg Select the folder to save download data Sources Project Recipe RW CEBoro test rca Recipe 4 RWA CEBpro testrecipe rcp Browse Data log Select the source file directory m When download data is successfully built two folders can be found history and emt3000 emt3000 is for storing project files history is for storing Recipe Data and Data Sampling Event Log records 379 WE NTEK Transferring Recipe Data 17 3 Transferring Recipe Data Use l Data Transfer Trigger based object to transfer Recipe Data to the appointed address or save the data of the designated address to RW and RW_A New Data Transfer Trigger based Object General Security Shape Label Description The starting address of the i 5 dd data is to be transferred from ce Pe Se PLE name MODBUS RTU I Address Ee Em i The starting address of the data is to be transferred to Destination address a PLO name Lacal HMI Setting Address rrr l The number of words of attribute the data from Source to No of word 120 Destinati
315. g box will appear fill in the content of and press OK a new bit lamp object will be created 143 i WE NTEK Objects Hew Bit Lamp Object General Security Shape Label Description Read address Address LB Invert sonal Blinking time 0 5 second Mode Alternating 3 image on state 0 Description A reference name that s assigned by user for the object The system does not make use of this reference name since it is for user s document only Read address Click Setting to select the PLC name Address Device type System tag Index register of the bit device that controls the bit lamp object Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 144 WE NTEK Objects Address PLC mame Local HMI Device type LE A Pe Address a System tag Sddress format DODDO range A 11999 Index register Invert signal Display shape with inverse state for example the present state is OFF but it displays the shape of ON state Blinking Set blinking attribute of bit lamp Blinking mode a None No blinking b Alternating image on state 0 Alternatively display the shape of state 0 and state 1 when the bit value is OFF state 0 c Alternating image on state 1 Alternatively displa
316. gger based mode uses the status of specific address to trigger Data Sampling Sampling mode Time based Trigger based Mode OFF gt Oh w a PLO name Local HMI w Setting Address LE 160 Mode Conditions to trigger Data Sampling OFF gt ON Trigger when the status of assigned address changes from OFF to ON ON gt OFF Trigger when the status of assigned address changes from ON to OFF OFF lt gt ON Trigger when the status of assigned address is changed 96 WE NTEK Data Sampling Read address oe ene Select a device typeto atcnane cae St be the source of Data Ades Sampling Data Record Data Record Data Format Data length O words Max number of data Data Format is records can be saved by one Data Sampling in one day is 86400 1 record per second for 24hours If sampling time interval is set to 0 1 second then the max number of data records is 86400 only Auto stop Condition Max data records 10 Max data records 10 amp don t tick Auto stop amp tick Auto stop Delete earlier sampled data Stops after reaching 10 data Tend Dipan Realtime and display the latest 10 sears records on Trend Display Keep on sampling data and 7 Stops after reaching 10 data seats display all history data on j Trend Display Historical records Trend Display Keep on sampling data and Stops after reaching
317. ggered 1 gt Event acknowledged 2 gt Event returns to normal CADocuments and Settings nicolas wun Siz Ed File Edt View Help gt te 2 ES P Event Category Date Time Message OF 20127 017137 713 22 04 Event 0 OF 20127 017137 113 22 06 Event 0 OF 20127 017137 715 222 07 Event 0 OT 2012 FOP 1S 5 813222 08 Event 0 OT 2012 FOP 13 13 22 08 Event 0 OF 2012701713 1713 22 09 Event 0 OT 2 012701713 113 22 11 Event 0 OT 2 012701713 113 22 11 Event 0 0 720 12701713 113 22 12 Event 0 0 720 12701713 113 22 13 Event 0 611 E 25 2 Scaling Function Scaling is utilized to offset data new value value A x B C users can set values of A B and C A lower limit of the value B engineering high engineering low upper limit lower limit C engineering low sampling Data Information Select number of digits after decimal point EE 16 bit Unasned 16 bit Unaisned range 0 4096 For example here is a voltage data with a format of 16 bit unsigned If users want to convert those data to volt range form 5V to 5V new value value 0 x 0 0024 5 sampling Data Information Select number of digits after decimal point 2 a a CIE im 10 bit Un Hened 16 bit Unagned E 0 0024 a new value i value 4x Bit value x 0 0024 5 e Include millisecond information Load Sett
318. h and day respectively in 472 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference the format of YYYY MM and DD The event log files stored in the designated position such as HMI memory storage or external memory device are sorted according to the file name and are indexed starting from 0 The most recently saved file has the smallest file index number For example if there are four event log files as follows EL 20101210 evt EL 20101230 evt EL 20110110 evt EL 20110111 evt The file index are EL 20101210 evt gt index is 3 EL 20101230 evt gt index is 2 EL 20110110 evt gt index is 1 EL 20110111 evt gt index is 0 return_value equals to 1 if referred data sampling file is successfully found otherwise it equals to 0 Index can be constant or variable year month day and return_ value must be variable The return_value field is optional macro_command main short index 1 year month day short success if there exists an event log file named EL_20101230 evt gt with index 1 the result after execution success 1 year 2010 month 12 day 30 success FindEventLogDate index year month day end macro command FindEventLoglndex return_value FindEventLoglndex year month day index or FindEventLoglndex year month day index Description A query function for finding the file index of specified event log file according to date The file index is stored i
319. h 9999 Limits Direct O Dynamic limits Inputlow g Input hish gggg F Use alarm color Low limit o e E Bink High linit i 7 C Blnnk 190 WE NTEK Objects Display Data format To select the data format of the word device designated by the Read address The selection list is shown as follows Format 16 bit BCD 32 bit BCD 16 bit Hex 32 bit Hex 16 bit Binary 32 bit Binary 32 bit Unsigned 32 bit Signed Mask When the data is displayed will be used to replace all digitals and the color warning function will be cancelled Number of digits Left of decimal Pt The number of digits before the decimal point Right of decimal Pt The number of digits after the decimal point Scaling option Do conversion The data displayed on the screen is the result of processing the raw data from the word address designated by the Read address When the function is selected it is required to set Engineering low Engineering high and Input low and Input high in the Limitation Supposed that A represents the raw data and B represents the result data the converting formula is as follows B Engineering low A Input low x ratio 191 L WE NTEK Objects where the ratio Engineering high Engineering low Input high Input low see the example in the picture below the raw data is 15 after being converted by the above formula as
320. har data 100 array size is 100 where minimum of array index is 0 and maximum of array index is 99 100 1 392 E WE NTEK Macro Reference Variable and Array Initialization There are two ways variables can be initialized 1 By statement using the assignment operator Example int a float b 3 a 10 b 0 1 2 During declaration chara 5 b 9 The declaration of arrays is a special case The entire array can be initialized during declaration by enclosing comma separated values inside curly brackets Example float data 4 11 22 33 44 now data 0 is 11 data 1 is 22 18 3 2 Operators Operations are used to designate how data is to be manipulated In each statement the operator on the left is set to the conditions on the right Operator Description Exame mia Modulo division return A B 5 remainder 393 mparison Description erators Less than or equal to if A lt 10 then B 5 Greater than ifA gt 10thenB 5 Greater than or equal if A gt 10 then B 5 to E WE NTEK Macro Reference Co Op lt Equal to if A 10 then B 5 Not equal to if A lt gt 10 then B 5 Logical AND if A lt 10 and B gt 5 then C 10 Or Logical OR if A gt 10 or B gt 5 then C 10 Logical Exclusive OR if A xor 256 then B 5 Not Logical NOT if not A then B 5 Shift and bitwise operators are used to manipulate bits within char short and int variable type
321. has corresponding font stored in the system The font of UNICODE is only available for those Unicode character that registered function key Reverse high low byte In normal condition the ASCII code is displayed in low byte high byte order The reverse selection makes the system display ASCII characters in high byte low byte order 196 E WE NTEK Objects Read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the word device that system display its value and write new data to it Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object No of words To set the length of ASCII data in the unit of words Each ASCII character take one byte each word contains two ASCII characters In the example shown below the object will display 3 2 6 characters abbdef Notification When this function is selected the state of the designated bit device will be set to ON or OFF after before the value of the register is changed successfully Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the Notification bit that system set value to Users can also set the address in the Notification area Before writing After writing Set the state of the designated bit device before or after update the word device About the Data Entry tab please refer to Numeric Input and Numeric Disp
322. he data input from the keypad and change the value of the word devices Configuration Click the ASCII Input or ASCII Display icon on the toolbar and the New ASCII Input Object or New ASCII Display Object dialog box will appear fill in each item press OK button a new ASCII Input Object or ASCII Display Object will be created The difference between the New ASCII Display Object and New ASCII Input Object dialog boxes is that the latter has the settings for Notification and keypad input while the former doesn t have The picture below shows the General tab of the New ASCII Input Object 195 WE NTEK Objects Hew ASCII Input Object eee ae i i E E General Data Entry Security Shane Font Description Mask Use UNICODE Revers highlow byte Read address PLC name Local HMI al Setting Address Li ii Notification O Set ON Set OFF Before waiting After writing PLOnamet tocalHM Setting Lo Address lig l iO Mask When the data is displayed will be used to replace all texts Use UNICODE Click Use UNICODE to display data in UNICODE format Otherwise the system displays the character in ASCII format This feature can be used with function key UNICODE Not every Unicode
323. he objects can then control the content of RW_A The size of RW_A is 64K Extra no of events The default number of the event in the system is 1000 If users would like to add more records the setting value can be modified up to 10000 Users can select to use different types of keyboards for Numeric Input and Word Input Up to 32 keyboards can be added If users want to design their own keyboard a window should be designated for creating it Press add after creating and add the window to the list For more information please see Chapter 12 Key Pad Design and Usage where also shows how to fix this keyboard in screen instead of adding it to the list User s project can be restrained and executed on specific HMI Please refer to Chapter 30 Project protection for more information 59 Y GNER System Parameter Settings 5 4 System Setting Parameters in System Setting tab are for setting up miscellaneous functions of EasyBuilder Pro System Parameter Sethings Ea Extended Memory Printer Backup server e Mail Recipes Device Model General bysten setting Security Font ptartup language after redownloading the project Language 1 Ww Execute init MACRO when power on Auto logout Enable When a user does not operate the HMI for longer than the setting time the system will automatically logout Hide system setting bar Hide mouse cursor Use LB 9062 to open hardware
324. he using terms is ticked only during the specified time period can the users import account data to HMI via USB If not ticking users can import data to HMI at any time Effective Time Restrict the using terms Jan 05 2012 19 14 YS ne Feb 5 2012 19 14 d Upon completion of the settings click Save to USB select the location of USB and then click Create The Generated successfully massage is shown click OK Save to USE Save to ISH Select your USE device Administrator Tools x 719 WS WE NTEK Administrator Tools 36 2 3 Import accounts via EasyBuilder Pro Create Function Key Object using EasyBuilder Pro when touching the object on HMI screen the import can be executed The following describes how to create Function Key a When creating Function Key Object in EasyBuilder Pro select Import user data Use USB Security Key then click Settings Import v r data U SB Security Key b gt In Function mode select Import user accounts Select the position where the data to be imported is stored in Data position Select Overwrite in Account import mode HMI will only store the account data imported this time Select Append HMI will store the accounts imported this time and those already exist Tick Delete file after importing user accounts to delete the source files after importing Click OK to finish setting Function mode Import e mail settings and c
325. he word device Attribute Set Style Set when window closes v Set value 5 E Set when backlight on When the backlight is turned from off to on the value of Set value will be automatically written into the word device Attribute set Style Set when backlight on Set value 5 E Set when backlight off When the backlight is turned from on to off the value of Set value will be automatically written into the word device Attribute Set Style Set when backlight off re set value 5 161 Lyi WE NTEK Objects E Cyclic JOG Increase value function When the agate operation is activated the Inc value Set Style Cyclic JOG will be added to the value of the word Bottom limit 0 Upper limit 10 device until it exceeds the Upper eee limit After that it will return to Bottom limit and re increase the value E Cyclic JOG Decrease value function When the l ttibute operation is activated the value of the Set Style Cyclic JOG word device will be decreased by Bottom limit 0 Upper limit 10 Dec value 1 Dec value until it goes less than the Bottom limit After that it will return to Upper limit and re decrease the value E Cyclic JOG Periodically cyclic increment function Atbut When the time of holding this button is longer than JOG delay it will Set Style Cyclic JOG Bottom limit 0 Upper limit 10 Inc value 1 increase th
326. hngs yf COM eai v Read byte limit Baud rate I ia Data bits i i Parity Cluse a start code Stop bits 1st ital amp code I j Terminator OLF OstxjeTx Oothe Eo O None 540 SW WEINTEK How to Connect a Barcode Device Barcode Device Sethors Baud rate ez L 10 pi Data bits e Use a start code Startcode 255 Parity top bits Terminator CRLF OSTHETE Other None Cancel _ COM Baud rate Data bits Parity Stop bits Barcode device can be connected to any of COM 1 COM 3 or USB When use COM interface please set the communication parameters of barcode device accordingly When USB interface is used the parameters needn t to be set Read byte limit This function will restrict the number of byte to read in order to prevent barcode device from reading too much data The range is 10 512 For example When Read byte limit is set to 10 if the data the barcode device should read 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 0x30 0x38 0x33 0x38 12 bytes Only the first 10 bytes will be read in this case 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 0x30 0x38 Use a start code With this function HMI will only view the first data read by barcode device that identifies with start code to be legal input Otherwise the data read will be ignored All the data other than start code will be saved in de
327. i Select Pixel the Distance can be used to set the distance between two sampling points See the picture below X axis time range Time X axis time range C Pixel Time Distance cond is Select Time the Distance is used to set the X axis in unit of time elapsed See the picture below 20 seconds 236 Ly WE NTEK Objects Otherwise select Time for X axis time range and go to Trend Grid for enable Time scale function Please refer Time scale on the following Watch line Watch line v Enable FLE name Local HMI ar Setting Address ra se 300 Using the Watch line function when user touches the trend display object it will display a watch line and export the sampling data at the position of watch line to the designated word device You may register a numeric display object to display the result Please refer to the following picture Watch fine vem a A a me ae Ooa lt gt e M 4 L W300 Watch line function also can export sampling data of multiple channels The address registered in watch line is the start address and those sampling data will be exported to the word devices starting from start address The data format of each channel may be different the corresponding address of each channel is arranged from the first to the last in Sequence For example LW300 Ch 0 16 bit Unsigned 1 word LW301 Ch 1 32 bit Uns
328. iable used The following illustrates how to use TRACE function in MACRO First of all add macro_1 in the project and in macro_1 add TRACE LW d a q indicates to display current value of LW in decimal The content of macro_1 is as the following macro_command main short a GetData a Local HMI LW O 1 a a 1 SetData a Local HMI LW 0 1 TRACE LWO d a end macro_command For the detailed usage of TRACE function please refer to the illustration in the following paragraph 509 Lb WE NTEK Macro Reference Macro list IO 000 Macro und macro O Work Space Macro ID qo Macro name macro_O Periodical execution 5 3 AAA k H H ee ee ce ee J 1 2 3 4 5 3 5 macro cormand main i short a Getbatata Local HMI LW 1 aA atl eparata Local HMI LW oO 1 TRACE LUO d a end macro cCormand Secondly add Numeric Display and Function Key objects in window 10 of the project The settings of these objects are shown below Function Key object is used to execute macro_1 510 Le WE NTEK Macro Reference d 2 Ape a WINDOW 010 el a tage ve aul Execute macro Lastly compile the completed project and execute Off line or On line simulation Objects Library Tools Window Help E CE 2 Fe 7 O Off line Simulation Ctrl T 2 amp col opt we oft e ll a i h oda Pt I
329. ialized as ON LB 9002 initialized as ON Address Address Format p gang initialized as ON ee en ee a MRI Index register Deciding to use Index register or not please refer to Chapter 11 Index Register for more information Selecting Data Type EasyBuilder Pro supports data types that are listed below Selecting correct data type is necessary especially while using address tag 16 bit B 32 bit BCD 16 bit Hex 32 bit Hex 32 bit Float 103 Li WE NTEK Object General Properties 9 2 Using Shape Library and Picture Library Shape Library and Picture Library are used for enhancing the visual effect of an object For setting these please go to Shape tab in the dialog for adding new object to set up Shape Library and Picture Library Mew Hit Lamp Object Use shape Inner Frame Interior pattern i l Pattern Style Duplicate these attributes to every state Picture Picture Library Use picture Set to original dimensions Previeiy Picture PB Red BMP 1O0 100 Background TETEN 104 Lib WE NTEK Object General Properties 9 2 1 Settings of Shape Library Shape Library Users can tick Use shape to enable this setting and select the shape from the library Inner Tick Inner to enable this setting and select a color for inner part of the shape Click drop down button to open the Color dialogue to cho
330. ies the exact command to execute in console mode Please note PathName is a key word to tell EasyPrinter to replace it with the real name of the backup file in conversion For example if a Data Sampling 630 Lb WE NTEK EasyPrinter history file named 20090112 dtl is uploaded and stored EasyPrinter will send out the following command to a console window And then the CSV file named 20090112 csv is created Therefore the criteria of the default Convert Batch File are 1 Convert all Data Sampling history files dtl into CSV files 2 Convert all Event Log history files evt into CSV files 20 Actually the PathName in the second argument stands for the full path name of the file In the previous case EasyPrinter replaces it with EasyPrinter interprets the Convert Batch File on a line basis i e each line forms a criterion Any two arguments should be separated by a comma Every argument should be put in double quotes Do not put any comma inside an argument For further information about how to use EasyConverter please refer to the chapter25 Easy Converter 26 4 2 Specialized Criteria Sometimes users may need a special handling for the files uploaded from a specific HMI Here is an example 3 dtl EasyConverter c PathName 192 168 1 26 Or users can also specify the HMI with its name 4 dtl EasyConverter c PathName Weintek_01 Or in the case of
331. igned 2 words 237 ib WE NTEK ILW303 LW305 Ch 2 32 bit Unsigned 2 words Ch 3 16 bit Signed 1 word The picture below shows the attribute of trend display Frame Background O General Trend Channel Shape Profile Trend Display Objects Properties Frame a Backaround show acroll controls v Enable Clr i Horiz 4 division s Verti interval 4 second s Time stale F Enable Format HH MM I Colt a Time Date HH MM 3s HH MM Color a v Date MMDDYY ODDMMYY CODD MM YY COYYMMDD The color of frame The color of background Show scroll controls To enable disable scroll control on the bottom of trend display object Grid ajaj njej 238 Objects W WE NTEK Objects Set the distance and the color of grid Horiz Set the number of horizontal line Verti interval a Pixel Point distances Pixel Time When select pixel to set the display interval see note on the above graph and General tab the Verti interval is used to select how many sampling point will be included between two vertical grid line See the picture below Verti interval point s b Time When select Time to set the time range of display data the Verti interval is used to select the time range between two vertical grid lines See
332. ill only take action when the content of bit device is changed OFF ON ON OFF The difference between the Direct window and the Indirect window is that the direct window object sets the popup window in configuration When system is in operation users can use the state of the designated register to control popup or close the window Configuration Click the Direct Window icon on the toolbar and the New Direct Hort Window Object dialog box will appear fill in each items press OK button and a new Direct Window Object will be created 205 WE NTEK Objects Hew Direct Window Object General I Description Trigger ON Read address PLE name Local HMI Setting Address LE Attribute Style No title bar v Window No 3 Fast Selection Read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the bit device that control the window popup Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Attribute Style Refer to the Indirect Window Object for related information Window no Set the popup window number Example to use direct window Here is an example to explain how to use the direct window object The picture below shows the settings of the direct window object In
333. ime m If Auto repeat is unselected the system will stop playing video and close the file after complete a video play operation m If control address is unselected the system will find the first file in the designated directory and start playing it 304 Li WE NTEK Objects 13 26 Data Transfer Time based Overview Data transfer Time based object is the same as Data transfer Trigger based object it also transfers the data from source to destination register The difference is the way to activate data transfer operation The Data transfer time based object conducts data transfer operation based on time schedule it can also transfer data in the unit of bits Configuration Click Data Transfer Time based Object icon on the toolbar the summary of data transfer objects is shown as follows Data Transfer Time based Object 1 Local HMI LB200 gt Local HAMI LE210 Mode Bit Time interval 2 0 second s transfer length 10 bitis 2 Local HMLE O50 gt Local HMI L 260 Mode Word Time interval 2 0 second s transfer length 1 word s Press the New button in the above dialog box the Data Transfer Time based Object dialog box appear as shown in the picture below set item and press OK button the object will be created 305 Lyh WE NTEK Objects Data Transfer Time based Object Attribute Address type Interval 3 0 seconds w Active only when designated window open
334. ime for image capturing The longest period can be set starts from 10 seconds before triggering Capture address to 10 seconds after triggering In this case there will be 21 images captured including the one captured at the triggering moment The time interval for capturing is once in each second The captured jpg file will be named in the following format Before or after Capture address is triggered YYYYMMDDhhmmss jpg 345 Wa WE NTEK Objects The moment that Capture address is triggered YYYYMMDDhhmmss jpg Captive address Use capture function PLC name local o r E Setting Address cl 100 Storage ae aD card UB disk Record time Before 5 seconds After 5 seconds Take the illustration above as sample set Record time Before and After to 5 seconds when Capture address changes from OFF to ON system will be triggered to capture one image each second from 5 seconds before the triggering time to 5 seconds after the triggering time Note 1 Video In Object can only be used in HMI which supports VIP function 2 Only video image in one channel can be input at any moment while running system 3 Capture function won t be influenced by pause playing The video image that should be played while not paused will still be captured 4 Recommended Format and Resolution O pa 50 PAL 20x576 360 x 288 346 Lib WE NTEK Objects 13 32 System Message Use this uti
335. indow Operations gee ee ee ee nen a a a a aE 77 CLN OWN TEV DCS aeee REE EEE E 77 CLL BaS OW MG OW sacra cirenio astercsse cers sess E EAE E E E EA 77 O12 FASE Selection VV ING OW sraa ennot ne irina a E a A A A EE ERN 78 OLS COMMON VVC OW ere ivi coeetnaccoannnecaoteeessaaedanin TE N 79 6 1 4 System Message WINdOW ccssscccsssceccesecccesececeescecceseceseaecesauececseneeeseaecessaecesseeeeees 80 6 2 Create Set and Delete a WING OW vecsincscceccccvoccucsccssuseteaviseccenssesenewsmeseacdeeuie coveneusacaecearsescucwens 82 6 2 1 Creating and Setting a WINCOW ccccssccccssecccessceccesececenececeusceceeneeesenecessuecesseeeees 82 6 2 2 Open Close and Delete a WINdKOW ccccsssccccssececesececeeseecceaeceseeeceseeneeeseaeesenseeees 85 CTIA ECE 7 Even EOG onnee ror E EA E E EAE EEE E 86 7 1 Event Log Management seseanci A 86 PALEC EGINE ir E E E A 87 7 2 Create a New Event Log sensessnsesensrssosssresrsresroressoreoseressesroresrosesroreseoreseoresroreseeresrereseee 89 7 2 1 Alarm Event Log General Settings ccccccccsssscceceeseececeeecceeeeeecceeeeeeecesseneceeseges 89 7 2 2 Alarm Event Log Message Settings cccccccssssecceccssscceseeseceeseeeeceeeeeeeeeessenecessenes 91 7 2 3 Event Alarm Log e Mail Settings eosseeeesseesesreresrrrressrrressrrressreressreressreresereresses 93 7 3 Event Log Relevant Register Sariei eviveransei na E OA AA E E 94 Chan r S Dor 09 9
336. ined E Strings E Predefined E Module Defined C Binary Access Array Dimensiars Dim 2 Dina 0 0 Show Data Types by Groups Step 4 After adding all data members click OK The built data type will be listed on the left side hacme Editor amp Data Types 4 User Defined Mame TestStruct Strings 4 Predefined Description H Module Defined Data Type Description INT ul me ada Paste Edit Delete import Eoo Read save et te _ Note After changing Name or Description of a data type OK must be clicked to activate revision 689 L teh WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names 34 3 Paste Step 1 When adding new data members this function allows users to add multiple data at one time The way is to click Paste on the main window Step 2 The way to edit is to input data name in each line first then use space or tab key to leave a space in each line And then input data type or click Sample to see some reference It is recommended to directly copy and paste from RSLogix5000 to avoid errors 690 Descriptors Members Data Type Size 60 byte s Mame Data Type Style Description External 4ccess a YarBool BOOL Decimal Read rite Bool rray BOOL 32 Decimal Aead tite ea VarFeal FEAL Float Read rite Aealrray REALS Float Reads tite J Ya
337. ing f 16 bit Unsigned PL name Local HMI o Address yy MIE Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 128 10 5 Object Security Settings Safety control To prevent miss operation New Funchom bey Object Min press time sec General Security Shape Label Continuously press the object Sal alec Min pres time sec l longer than the time set here Display confirmation request Max waiting time sec 10 to activate the object Display confirmation request After pressing the object a dialog appears for operation confirmation If response to this dialog comes later than the set Max waiting time sec this dialog disappears automatically and the operation will be canceled Interlock Interlock AN Please confion the operation Use interlock function When ticked whether this object can be operated iN ade gua C Graved label when disabled depends on the state of the J t r Enable when Bit is ON 2 Enable when Bit is OFF specified Bit address As shown if LB 0 is ON the object can be operated Hide when disabled When the specified Bit is OFF hide the object Grayed label when disabled When the specified Bit is OFF the label of the object turns gray PLC name Lacal HMI Address LB kal o pmi Setting User restriction Us
338. ing Save Setting Date Time 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 Millisecond 09 33 05 90 09 33 05 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 09 33 08 09 33 09 09 33 10 09 33 1157 TREES EBUS 09 33 13 09 33 14 oe Se eel 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 File Edit View Help elas a Date Time 09 33 05 09 33 05 09 33 06 09 33 07 09 33 08 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 09 33 14 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 2012 01 13 Millisecond 09 33 09 09 33 10 gg ee IA ber 09 33 12 09 33 13 pra EE E Dell Es ee 09 33 16 09 33 17 09 33 185 EasyConverter W WE NTEK EasyConverter Ne m Settings of data above can be saved as a sample and loaded next time i The file name of the sample LGS m After setting the values for Scaling click Save Setting and in a new sample click Load Setting to use the sample saved before 613 Wa WE NTEK EasyConverter 25 3 How to Use Multi File Conversion Example E gt 1 Click File Multi File Add File to combine multiple added files into one Excel file 2 Click Combine to a file files
339. ing bar is able to control Users have to restart HMI to enable disable this function Note LB 9020 is available for all HMI series DIP Switch 2 is available for eMT Series Text Keyboard Number Keyboard 38 Lib WE NTEK 4 2 3 System Information Network Display network information amp HMI IP system information nicolas 3120 Network Version IP Address 192 168 1 114 Net Mask 255 255 255 0 Route Address 192 168 1 254 Mac Address 000C 2603 1902 4 2 4 System Setting Set or modify system parameters Confirm password for security System settings x Enter your password Password fi m Network Download project to HMI via Ethernet Confirm IP address of target HMI Assign IP by local DHCP or Manually input IP information System settings OUO Network Time Date Security History me setting hg Obtain an IP Address Automatically IP address get from below IP address 192 168 E 2132 Subnet Mask GateWay 39 Hardware Settings Version Display HMI system version System information nicolas 31270 Network Version MTSxxx mx51 firmware build 20111222 Type eMT3120 m Security Password protection default 111111 Systervsettings Oi Network Time Date Security History me setting hg Password for entering system Password for uploading project Password for downloading project Password for uploading history data Pa
340. ing management Address v 56 LW 9064 32bit size of data sampling files on HMI memory LW 10489 16bit no of data sampling files on SD card LW 10490 32bit size of data sampling files on SD card LW 10492 16bit no of data sampling files on USB LW 10493 32bit size of data sampling files on USB Description 100 Object General Properties Chapter 9 Object General Properties The contents of general properties settings of an object include Selecting the connected PLC Setting reading and writing address Using shape library and picture library Setting text content SS YS Adjusting profile size 9 1 Selecting PLC It is required to designate which PLC to operate while using some objects as shown below PLC name represents the controlled PLC In this example there are 2 PLC Local HMI and Mitsubishi FXOs FXOn FX1s FX1n FX2 These listed available PLC devices are sourced from Device List in System Parameters Settings PLC name Mitsubishi FXOs FXOn FX1s Fxin FXzZ v E EE Local HMI Mitsubishi FOs Fsm FALSI FIn F sz 9 1 1 Setting the Reading and Writing Address Read addres EEE PLO name Local HMI we Setting Address Law 7 s 0 PLE name Local HMI Device type LW Address U _ Sysbem tag Address Format DOODO range 7 0 10799 Indes INDEX O 16 bit se index register Tag library ee F to
341. ing parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns the zero based index of the first character in the source string that is also in the target string If there is no match it returns 1 macro_command main char src1 20 abcdeabcde char target1 20 sdf bool pos pos1 StringFindOneOf src1 0 target1 0 pos1 3 char src2 20 abcdeabcde bool pos2 pos2 StringFindOneOf src2 1 agi pos2 4 char target3 20 bus bool pos3 pos3 StringFindOneOf abcdeabcde target3 1 pos3 1 end macro command 457 L WE NTEK Macro Reference Name Stringlncluding Syntax Description success Stringlncluding source start set start destination start success Stringlncluding source set start destination start success Stringlncluding source start set destination start success Stringlncluding source set destination start Retrieve a substring of the source string that contains characters in the set string beginning with the first character in the source string and ending when a character is found in the source string that is not in the target string The source string and set string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or
342. is object is placed Screen Window in the project where this object is placed D ID of the object Address of the object 679 Note a Click Package ID the device station number will be displayed in 3 column Polling Packages Package ID Device Station Index Address Length 4 i1 Local Hhil LB 00562 Sf 1 o Oh Local Htl LB 00574 1 SIEMENS 87 300 Ethernet D Bo 3 SIEMENS S7300 Ethernet 10 C610 00000 3 b Double click Package ID then select object the 1 column directs the object s position For example select Numeric Input and the screen no displays 10 This shows that this object is in window no 10 in the project and will be marked with pink frame in HMI as shown below Folling Packages q x Object Screen IC Address 4 i1 Local Hhil LB 00562 7 1 6 0 Local Hhil LB 00574 1 BY 32 SIEMENS S7300 Ethernet 1 Ml OOOOO s 1 68 i3 SIEMENS 87 300 Ethernet 0610 00000 3 ay Numeric 1 n D810 Numeric l 0610 00001 Murmeric l 10 4 0610 00002 Siemens S7 300 ET200S Ethernet Shows the Shows the ic 680 L mag WE NTEK Fasyl iagnoser Devices Devices window displays information of HMI and PLC Index i Type Mame MTS000 Series Hhll Location Local Block Interval Swords Wax Read Length 256 words hax Write Length 256 words Index Type Name SIEMENS 57300 Ethernet Location Local PL MFE Ethernet 192 169 1 9F 1 Block
343. isable set OFF watch dog R Y R Y Note1 LB 9059 disable MACRO TRACE function when ON R Y R Y Note2 LB 9064 enable USB barcode device disable keyboard when ON Note3 R Y LW 9006 LW 9024 16bit connected client no R Y R Y 16bit memory link system register LW 9032 8 words folder name of backup history files to SD USB memory R Y R Y LW 9050 LW 9134 LW 9141 LW 9216 LW 9300 LW 9301 LW 9302 LW 9303 16bit current base window ID R Y R Y R Y R Y 16bit language mode Note4 16bit HMI station no 16bit the result of importing email data 16bit driver ID of local PLC 1 16bit driver ID of local PLC 2 16bit driver ID of local PLC 3 16bit driver ID of local PLC 4 om A AA LW 9530 R Y R Y 8 words VNC server password 589 System Reserved Words Bits 1 When LB 9049 watch dog function is enabled if there s a failure in communication for HMI system will reboot 10 seconds later 2 LB 9059 Demonstration Project 3 LB 9064 Demonstration Project 4 When users would like to have the object s text to show multi language except for using Label Library it needs to use the system reserved register LW 9134 language mode The value of LW 9134 can be set from 0 to 23 Different data of LW 9134 corresponds to different Languages numbered from 1 to 24 The way of using LW 9134 will differ if the languages are not all chosen when compi
344. isplayed See the picture below 5 State 2 LU 200 LW 200 Offset 3 b LSB Transfer the read address value to binary the lowest 8 bits other than value 0 decides the state Please refer to the following table Read address Binary value Displayed state value o 0000 Allbits are 0 display the shape of state 0 1 0001 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit 0 display a a ee 0010 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit 1 display en pewmectsas 3 0011 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit 0 display D a Pe 4 0100 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit 2 display A T 0111 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit 0 display P a ee 1000 The lowest bit other than 0 is bit 3 display D a bon 148 WE NTEK Objects c Change state by time The states of the object have nothing to do with the word value The system displays different shape of states according to time frequency Read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the word device that controls the word lamp object Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Address PLC name s Local HMI Device type i Li Address o System tag Sddress format DODDO range 0 10500 Index register 16 bit Unsigned OK Cancel Attribute No of states The number states one object possesses State 0 is
345. it IPO of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10061 16bit IP1 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10062 16bit IP2 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10063 16bit IP3 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10064 16bit port no of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 3 LW 10065 16bit IPO of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 4 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10066 16bit IP1 of the HMI connecting to remote 585 Read R Write W Control Y Local Remote TP RIY HMI R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y Ly WE INTEK System Reserved Words Bits LW 10067 16bit IP2 of the HMI connecting to remote R W R Y R Y PLC 4 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10068 16bit IP3 of the HMI connecting to remote R W R Y R Y PLC 4 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10069 16bit port no of the HMI connecting to R W R Y R Y remote PLC 4 LW 10300 16bit remote PLC 1 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10301 16bit remote PLC 1 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10302 16bit remote PLC 1 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10303 16bit remote PLC 1 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IP
346. it PLC 7 parameter 2 SIEMENS R W R Y S7 400 CPU slot 16bit PLC 8 timeout unit 100ms RIY 16bit PLC 8 turn around delay unit ms RIY 16bit PLC 8 send ACK delay unit ms R W R Y SIEMENS S7 400 Link type 16bit PLC 8 parameter 1 SIEMENS S7 400 R W R Y rack 16bit PLC 8 parameter 2 SIEMENS S7 400 R W R Y CPU slot 570 System Reserved Words Bits R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 16 Communication Status with PLC COM Read R Write W Control Y Address Description Local MACRO a R Y LB 9150 auto connection for PLC 1 when ON LB 9151 auto connection for PLC 2 C when ON LB 9152 auto connection for PLC 3 COM3 when ON PLC 1 status SNO COM71 set on to retry connection PLC 1 status SN1 COM1 set on to retry connection LB 9202 PLC 1 status SN2 COM1 set on to retry ual connection PLC 1 status SN3 COM1 set on to retry connection PLC 1 status SN4 COM1 set on to retry connection LB 9205 PLC 1 status SN5 COM1 set on to retry a connection mm LB 9206 PLC 1 status SN6 COM1 set on to retry fuel connection Rw Ry LB 9207 PLC 1 status SN7 COM1 set on to retry nie connection paw Rw LB 9500 PLC 2 status SNO COM2 set on to retry aad connection Rw Ry LB 9501 PLC 2 status SN1 COM2 set on to retry ae connection paw RW LB 9502 PLC 2 statu
347. itialization of a string Create a new macro and edit the content Maro fi O Macro name megap C Penodics execution te ee macro COs nd maini Char tri 20 abcde S char stce 2ojet sa b e da l STE ingest Stel o Local AAI LY Gr 0 Stringset istc2 0 Local Hat Le 4S 20 Litt end Sacro Contam 522 eos vb WE NTEK Macro Reference The data enclosed in double quotation mark is viewed as a string str1 is initialized as a string while str2 is initialized as a char array The following snapshot of simulation shows the difference between str1 and str2 using two ASCII input objects eT G abedel TTTTINIITTIT t Macro compiler will add a terminating null character 0 at the end of a string The function StringSet will send each character of str1 to registers until a null character is reached The extra characters following the null character will be ignored even if the data count is set to a larger value than the length of string On the contrary macro compiler will not add a terminating null character 0 at the end of a char array The actual number of characters of str2 being sent to registers depends on the value of data count that is passed to the StringSet function 3 A simple login page Create a new macro and edit the content WorkSpace 1 macro command main 2 Char name 20 admin 3 Char password 20 1253456 4 char
348. its tab while adding a new object Please refer to the following dialog v Dynamit limits PLC name Local HMI Ww Setting There following table shows the read address of low limit and high limit The Address means the register s address If the register is LVW100 the Address is 100 Data format Low limit s read High limit s read address address 16 bit format Address 1 32 bit format Address 2 Scale label To select the attribute of scale label on meter display scale label Use scale label Font Arial Color a Size 79 we No of decimal 0 232 W WE INTEK e 13 17 Trend Display Overview Trend display object can use the curve to represent the data recorded by data sampling object The sampling operation is conducted by data sampling objects The trend display object display the result of sampling The following picture shows an example of trend display object 17 32 41 12 03 06 MARANA DARN py Configuration Click the Trend Display icon on the toolbar and the Trend Display Objects Properties dialog box will appear fill in each items press the OK button and a new Trend Display Object will be created The following picture shows the General tab in the Trend Display Object s Properties dialog box 233 Lyh WE NTEK Objects Hew Trend Display Object General Tend Channel Shane Description D
349. iwant seimocststaseauedosshdebaiaiuacs teecentbetee 591 DD SAG NC CSS E oe gata rcs sata esas ose a ts E eeme tage E T E E 592 22 26 Pas SOUS IN Setn SS aerieni EOE dame narteentnanieearadacaearacsietes 593 22 27 Disable PLC No Response Dialog BOX ccsssccccssecccessceceesceecesececeeecesauseeeeeaecessuecesauaess 594 22 2E TAIN aI PEORC CU ICY ae ssccayasacteaee viecenassnadenovsiuccaeasanceaws EEE 595 22 29 Fast Selection Window Control cccccssscccssecceesececesececeeseceeeeceeeueceseuseeeseaecesauecessuaess 596 22 30 Input OD CCE FUNCTION scazcccscnin sch crcardecnasanesousebaaesawarach sina N EERE 597 22 31 Local Remote Operation Restrictions ccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeececcecesseeeeeeeeeeaaaegs 598 Chapter 23 HMI Supported FP INUOK So fererc rete Se scoec ener eneieteeneca oriit aan ie AE aN 599 23 4 The Supported Printer TVD OS wi dcavaniecacedcossanasavavacevanadeevandwananedesernassvanasavendienmasnwananedensanceases 599 23 2 How to Add a New Printer and Start Printing ccccccsssecccsseccceseceeesceeseseceeeeeceseeeeens 602 2 Moo Mca iat T TYE ene ene eee eee eet 602 Lg WE NTEK EasyBuilder Pro User Manual Pe OAE CIM CINE T E A S ES E EET E ET 603 Cia Cer 2A RCCDE Oi CON arinei enri E E E E AE 604 2A LATOU ON crs E EA E A TEA EE OEE EN E 604 24 2 Recipe Extended Memory Editor Setting eeeesseesseessssrrrrrrrrrrrrrreeesssssssrrrrrrrrrrrrrreeeseens 604 24 SCC CROC OOS wissen nse E E
350. ject will be created 151 x Lid ge WE NTEK Objects Hew Set Bit Object General Security Shape Label _ Description K i Write addres PLE name Local HMI i Setting Address Le m Br Write after button is released Attribute Set style Toggle Macro v Execute macro Macro IDI aD 1 i Trigger mode OFF ON Write address Click Setting to select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the bit device that system set value to Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 152 Objects Address PLC mame Local HMI Device type LB i System tag Address format DODDO range O 11999 Address Index register Ca TT Write after button is released If this function is selected the operation is activated after button is touched and released otherwise if not selected operation will be activated once the button is touched If the Momentary switch is selected as the operation mode the Write after button is released function will be ignored Attribute Set Style Please refer to the following description for different types of operation mode Set ON When the operation is activated the bit device will be set to ON Set OFF When the operation is acti
351. l else The format of if statement is if logic expression then else if logic expression then end if Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C17 illegal expression no for without matching next for statement error missing for before next C18 illegal variable type not integer or char Should be integer or char variable 499 E WE NTEK Macro Reference C19 variable type error Missing assign statement C20 must be keyword to or down Missing keyword to or down C21 illegal expression no next The format of for statement is for variable initial value to end value step next variable Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C22 wend statement contains no while While statement error missing while before Wend C23 illegal expression without matching wend The format of While statement is while logic expression wend Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C24 syntax error break break statement can only be used in for while statement C25 syntax error continue continue statement can only be used in for statement or while statement C26 syntax error Error in expression 500 E WE NTEK Macro Reference C27 syntax error The mismatch of an
352. l Outlining ical HMI LW 1002 1 385 me WE NTEK Macro Reference b If there s already a bookmark where the cursor is placed select Toggle Bookmark to close it otherwise to open it c Right click and select Next Bookmark the cursor will move to where the next bookmark locates Selecting Previous Bookmark will move the cursor to the previous bookmark WorkSpace Works pace WorkSpace WorkSpace Macro ID Macro ID Macro ID macro command main 20 Short value 1 adress 0 1 0 21 int gnmacroID 0 gnCount 0 gntestVal 0 gn 22 bool HError 0 233 int tempCount 0 tempVal 0 24 int gqnCurrentMID 0 qneurrentMCount 0 2 6 PEDD b EDO E gt Set gnCurrentMID gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 27 gnu urrentMID 1 25 setDatal qnCurrentHID Local HMI LW 1000 29 TEDD gt gt gt set gnCurrentMID gt gt gt gt 23 gt gt gt 2 gt gt 31 GetDataladress Local HMI LW 1 1 for i U to 9 step 1 Sectbatat value Local HMI LW adress 1 tempal value valuesfunc value adre cM adress fune adress 38 foe asi 3s535 gt gt 3 gt gt gt set gnCurrentMCount gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 39 gng mamet qncurrentMCount E 40 Setha Secyd Gi N Perata ancurventucoune Local HMI LU 1 a1 gt gt gt ai ff gt gt ff gt gt one ext Booekmank gncurrentucount gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt qa 42 f gt gt gt 4z fios
353. lay section 197 Ly ge WE NTEK Objects Hew ASCII Input Object General Security Shape Font 002 Attribute Font lt Ca Align Lett Content Attribute The picture shows the Font tab of the ASCII Input object and the ASCII display object Users can set the font font size font color and aligning mode Attribute Font Comic Sans MS m Color es Size 12 v Align Left m Align There are two aligning modes Left and Right The picture below shows how each mode performs 198 E WE NTEK Objects Left alignment ab bde Right alignment ab bde Size Set font size 199 LJ WE NTEK Objects 13 11 Indirect Window Overview Indirect Window object is to define a popup window location position size and a word device When the content of the word device is written a valid window number the window will be popup in the predefined location The popup window will be closed when the value of the word device is reset 0 The system will only take action when the content of word device is changed 0 valid window number nonzero 0 A gt B valid window number Configuration Click the Indirect Window icon on the toolbar and the New Indirect Window Object dialog box will appear fill in each items click OK button a 123 new I
354. ld be identical 77 Window Operations Li WE NTEK 6 1 2 Fast Selection Window Window no 3 is defined as the Fast Selection Window This window can coexist with base window Generally speaking it is used to place the frequently used operation buttons on the lower left side or the lower right side on the screen Ll we nteK eMT3000 Series Touch It Communication Recomes Easv Fast Selection Button setting dialog System Parameter Settings General Or use system registers to control System Parameter Settings Extended Memory _ Printer Btackup Server eMail Recipes Device Model General System Setting Security Font Position Left r Hide button when HMI starts Fast selection bukton RT Attribute Enable wh Settings LB 9013 FS window control hide ON show OFF LB 9014 FS button control hide ON show OFF LB 9015 FS window button control hide ON show OFF 78 pu WE NTEK Window Operations 6 1 3 Common Window Window no 4 is the default Common Window Objects on this window will be displayed on other base windows but it does not include popup windows Therefore objects on different windows whether shared or same will be placed on common window for example the product logo or a common button When operating HMI select Function New Function Key Object General Security Shape Label Ik
355. le Disable The ee of saved data Storage location filename yyyymmdd dtl n d i i The data sampling files under the same directory are sorted according to the file name and are indexed starting from 0 The most recently saved file has the smallest file index number For example if there are four data sampling files as follows 20101210 dtl 20101230 dtl 20110110 dtl 470 20110111 dtl The file index are 20101210 dtl gt index is 3 20101230 dtl gt index is 2 20110110 dtl gt index is 1 20110111 dtl gt index is 0O return_value equals to 1 if referred data sampling file is successfully found otherwise it equals to 0 data_log number and index can be constant or variable year month day and return_value must be variable The return_value field is optional macro_command main short data_log_ number 1 index 2 year month day short success if there exists a data sampling file named 20101230 dtl with data sampling number 1 and file index 2 the result after execution success 1 year 2010 month 12 and day 30 success FindDataSamplingDate data_log number index year month Description A query function for finding the file index of specified data sampling file according to the data sampling no and the date The file index is stored into index year month and day are in the format of YYYY MM
356. les Stocture Editor H User Defined Mame Strings H Predefined Description t Module Defined Data Type Description member pe eC Import J Export T 695 Lib WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names e Export Export the edited data to XXX TDF file the exported TDF file can be used on other PC or as backup Stoicture Editor lata Types User Defined Name l Strings Predefined Module Defined Description Data Type Description Omerber import eset Jp Rete 696 L we WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names 34 5 Module Defined Here is an example showing how to define a default structure for a module In I O Configuration of RSLogix5000 contains setting of I O module a rO Confienration H Backplane CompactLogix System Aa 1769 L32E L32E S a 1769 L32E Ethemet Port LocalENB ae Ethemet 5 0 ompacthus Local 1 1769 101 644 Al 2 1769 10324 A 3 1769 08168 4 1769 OB 32a i 5 1769 0 W164 6 1769 IF16Y r The Tags of these modules won t list the structure when exported to CSV file Therefore users should build it first A B C D E F E H Y TYPE SCOPE NAME DESCRIFT DATATYFE SPECIFIERE ATTRIBUTES amp TAG Local 1 AB 69 _Dilo 1 0 3 JTAG Locali AB 769 DIS2 1 0 10 TAG Local 3 C B 1769_D0Ol6 C 0 ll TAG Local 4 ABIL Y69 DG Lb 1 0 12 TAG Leeqi AB 769 DOL6 0 0 13 TAG Local4 0 AB 769 DGS2 0 0 l4 TAG Local 4 AB Yoo DGS2 1
357. licate the current text content to the other states 114 Lyh WE NTEK Object General Properties 9 4 Adjusting Profile Size When an object is created double click it and go to the Profile tab to adjust the position and size of the object Bit Lamp Object s Properties General Security Shape Label Profile Position Pinned x 14 E Fa 40 F Size a Position Set if the position and size of the object is Pinned When it is checked the position and size of the object cannot be changed X and Y mean the X and Y coordinate of the left top corner of the object b Size Adjust the width and height of the object 115 L WE NTEK Object General Properties 9 5 Variables of Station Number EasyBuilder Pro allows users to set variables of station number in PLC address As shown below var2 is one of 16 station number variables Address PLO name Mitsubishi FxOs FAOn Fx1s FeinjFa2 Device type i x Address zar2 123 i Bee a Sddress format O00 range 0 377 Index register Tag Library OK Cancel The syntax of variable of station number varN address The range of N is integer from 0 15 address means PLC address 16 variables are availble varO var15 These variables of station number read values from address LW 10000 LW 10015 The li
358. ling the downloaded file For example If 5 languages are defined by user in Label Library as Language 1 Traditional Chinese Language 2 Simplified Chinese Language 3 English Language 4 French and Language 5 Japanese If only Language 1 3 5 are downloaded by user the corresponding language of the value in LW 9134 will be 0 gt Language 1 Traditional Chinese 1 gt Language 3 English 2 gt Language 5 Japanese Want to know how to swith languages using Option List object toghther with LW 9134 Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 590 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 24 Remote Print Backup Server R LB 10069 forced to reconnect remote printer backup R W R Y R Y server when IP changed on line set ON LW 9770 16bit remote printer backup server IPO IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 RA LW 9771 16bit remote printer backup server IP1 RAN IP0 IP1 IP2 2 a De e IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9773 16bit remote printer backup server IP3 IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 rw r p LW 9774 6 words remote printer backup server user ee name Note1 we mena Le a 1 When change settings using LW 9774 and LW9780 please reboot HMI to enable the new settings Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 591 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 25 EasyAccess LB 9051 disconnect set OFF connect set ON R W R Y R Y Easy
359. lity to edit messages that displays in popup message boxes system Message Confirmation required Message Please confirm the operation Use fabel library Use label library Cancel Cancel Use label library Font Arial Deny write command Message The system is being prohibited from writing device registers Font Arial Use label library Allow write command Message The system is now allowed to write device registers Font Arial LUse abel library Swe Confirmation required Display whenever security requires the user to confirm operation The Message shown on confirmation dialog and the text label of the 2 buttons OK and Cancel can all be set Please use the same font for the labels of Message OK and Cancel Additionally only when selecting Label Library for Message the use of Label Library for OK and Cancel buttons can be enabled 347 Lid et WE NTEK Objects System Message a IOS Confirmation required Message Please confirm the operation Use label library Jan ive Wid Cancel Cancel Js abel library Font Times New Roman 7 Deny write command Display when system tag LB 9196 local HMI supports monitor function only is turned ON Allow write command Display when system tag LB 9196 local HMI supports monitor function only is turned OFF 348 LJ WE NTEK Objects 13 33 Recipe View Overview A Recipe View Object can be used for displ
360. ls to 28 30 2 and less than or equals to 32 30 2 the system will return to normal condition 28 lt Read address value lt 32 90 Lyh WE NTEK Event Log 7 2 2 Alarm Event Log Message Settings Alarm Event Log Message tab Event Alarm Log General Message e Mail Text SS Content Tank level low level FoU A TCH 1 id 0 a a ihel Libera Label Library Font Aral yt Color m Write value for Event Alarm Display object Write value 11 sound Enable sod Library Heep Time delay of continuous beep 10 condis kai Flay Addresses of WATCHI WATCH WATCHS WATCH4 Maulti watch 1 I Smtan PLC name Local HMI Eog v Setting Address wy Sli 16 bit Unsigned Content The text content of Event Log shown in Alarm Bar Alarm Display and Event Display Please see the examples next page Font Color The font and color can be set differently for each event The font and color shown in Alarm Bar Alarm Display or Event Display come from this setting Write value for Event Alarm Display object When an event in Event Display or Alarm Display is acknowledged the value is written to the assigned address 91 WS WE NTEK Event Log Sound When enabled a designated
361. lse If the length of trimmed string exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char src1 20 a bc char set1 20 char dest1 20 bool success success1 String TrimLeft src1 0 set1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 a bc char set2 20 char dest2 4 success2 String TrimLeft a bc set2 0 dest2 0 success2 false dest2 remains the same char src3 20 abc char dest3 20 bool success3 success3 String TrimLeft src3 O dest3 0 success3 true dest3 abc end macro_command Name String TrimRight success StringTrimRight source start set start destination start success StringTrimRight source set start destination start 462 L WE NTEK Macro Reference Description success StringTrimRight source start set destination start success StringTrimRight source set destination start Trim the trailing specified characters in the set buffer from the source string The source string and set string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of trimmed string exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char src1
362. me li ms Down Add Replace Chen Remove 710 Lb WE NTEK Easy Watch 35 5 HMI Manager 35 5 1 HMI Settings There are two ways to open HMI Settings a Select from basic toolbar Objects gt HMI Manager Objects Help Add Object b Select from quick selection tools HMI Manager PEX GG N 2 35 5 2 HMI Manager HMI Manager IL or al Host i ooo D 192 168 1 121 8000 Default HMI EasyWatch allows monitoring addresses of multiple HMI for easier management 35 5 3 Add New Device 1 HMI Manager can Add Modify or Remove HMI 1 1 Add To add a new HMI please refer to 35 3 3 Add New Device 1 2 Modify Select the HMI to be modified 711 iy 06 TRIE o laiar uperis 132 168 1 0 Defaut HMI 192 168 1 121 Dafu HT 192 168 Le Tafu HT son 192 158 1 2 Def auk HAD 192 168 29 Defa HOM lar ie a AT 712 Easy Watch A WE NTEK Easy Watch 35 6 Object List 35 6 1 Page Settings 1 1 Add a new page Click on icon New Page New Pagel Name restate p e ha New Monitor L i stop WA New Montori Bi stop w New Montord Bi stop w New Momtors BE stop 1 2 Delete a page Click on X icon and confirm the deletion Address EasyVWatch Are you sure you want to permanently delete this page 1 3 Rename the page Double click on the page name and type in the new name New Pagel N
363. ment sesssssessssssessesssssesssossossossesseacsasssesseseossesseaseacsaessesseseesee 560 22 1O TOUCH PO SIO Misses stesrcatetess nn O E nest eacaonsseeesosinat 561 22 11 Station NuUMmDeEr Varale Seririt e kirren E a TEA AEE 562 ZIAD NAR T E E E T E E EE EA 563 22 1 MTP Fien Onna UO N eenen a EOE EEE 565 22 14 MODBUS Server Communication sssssessessessesrrssrssrsessessessessessrsrrserseesessessessessrseeseesee 566 22 15 Communication Parameters Settings ccecceeccscccseccsccesccescceccseccseccseceeceeeceeeeeseesseenaes 568 22 16 Communication Status with PLC COM eseeessssssssssesssreserrrssrrrssrrsssrensrrresrrresrresereseeeseeee 571 22 17 Communication Status with PLC Ethernet essessssssessresssresesrrnsrrrnsrrresrrresrreseresrereseee 573 22 18 Communication Status with PLC USB cccccceccccssececeeseeceeeceseecsceeseseeeueceseueseeeuness 577 22 19 Communication Status with PLC CAN BUS cccc csecccesseccccsececeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeneceteneeens 578 22 20 Communication Status with Remote HM cccccssecccesseceeesececesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaecetaneeees 579 22 21 Communication Status with Remote PLC ec ceescccessecceesececeeeceeeeceeseeceeenecesseeees 585 22 22 Communication Error Messages amp No Of Pending CMd ccccssecccesseecceseceeeeeceeeeeees 588 22 23 Miscellaneous FUNCTIONS arinegia mei R EE TEETE 589 22 24 Remote Print Backup Server sus cits cancenwisteswins iaauacwscde
364. ministrator Tools 36 1 Overview Administrator Tools allows storing the data of User Accounts USB Security Key E mail SMTP Server Setting and E mail Contacts to USB Plus EasyBuilder Pro user accounts and e Mail function the data built can be imported to HMI by using Function Key Object Import user data Use USB Security Key The portability and convenience can be greatly improved Usage hint Launch Administrator Tools check the boxes of Save to USB to enable setting of the selected functions introduced in the following units E Adminiztratot Tool Contents of the USB dats sep Arnal 5 UGE cecanty Key Mel SMIP Sever Sothis Beal unae 715 Da WE NTEK Administrator Tools 36 2 User Accounts 36 2 1 Introduction of User Accounts Check the box of User Accounts to complete the relevant settings as shown below Administrator Tools Save to USB Contents of the USB data User Accounts USB Security Key e Mail SMTP Sever Settings e Mail Contacts gt User Account Settings oO Oamsoooossoms No gt sooooomoosoOg oO soOmooooRmaS O Dosoooososs 2 tes oOmosoososo0n oO pDoopaoornnann N Dgaoaooanonn ee OD TMin amp wow lt gt Effective Time l m lt Save to USB Jon A10 20121642 Feb 10 2012 16 42 V Help Topics settings Description Secret Tick to create secret user accounts Username Set Usernamen Import data to
365. mote HMI 1 s IP3 IP address 579 MACRO a AEE lt lt lt R Y R Y x DiD lt x lt R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y Z lt R Y R Y R Y a lt Read R Write W Control Y Remote HMI R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y x R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y Ly WE INTEK System Reserved Words Bits o IPOAPAAP2APS o S S ooo 16bit remote HMI 1 s port no R Y R Y LW 9805 16bit remote HMI 2 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9806 16bit remote HMI 2 s IP1 IP address ni IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 R Y R Y LW 9807 16bit remote HMI 2 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9808 16bit remote HMI 2 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO 1IP1 IP2 IP3 Lw 9809 16bit remote HMI 2 s port no R Y R Y LW 9810 16bit remote HMI 3 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9811 16bit remote HMI 3 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9812 16bit remote HMI 3 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1IP2 IP3 LW 9813 16bit remote HMI 3 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1IP2 IP3 Lw 9814 16bit remote HMI 3 s port no RIY RIY LW 9815 16bit remote HMI 4 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1IP2 IP3 LW 9816 16bit remote HMI 4 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9817 16
366. mote PLE 1 Siemens S 7 200 Remote 1P 192 166 1 10 Port s000 COM 1 Siemens 87 200 Remote 1P 0 0 0 0 Poxt s000 53 pu WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 2 Model Parameters in Model tab determine the HMI model Timer and Printer settings gt yslem Parameter Sethnes x i i Extended Memory Printen Backup BEVEL e Mail ii Recipes Device Model General System Setting Security Font HMI model eMT3105 B00 x 600 o ae HMI station no 0 a Port no 8000 i d used as MODBUS server s port no Timer Clock some Eerma device W Address Liw w T 16 bit Unsigned Printer Type SPM D EF J COM COM3 m Band rate 19200 Data bits Bits E7 Parity None l Stop bits 1 Bit E Piel of width 100 pamel s ecreen hard copy sale 100 yh Select current HMI model as shown below eMT3105 800 x 600 eMT3105 800 x 6004 eMT 3120 1024 x 768 eMT 3070 800 x 480 When changing HMI model and press OK users will be inquired if they would like to Resize pop up windows or objects Resize pop up windows objects General windows v Resize pop up windows Resize objects Keyboard window s v Resize keyboard windows 54 Ly WE NTEK System Parameter Settings HMI station Set the HMI station no used by current HMI I
367. n There are two types of reiterative statements 18 4 5 1 for next Statements The for next construction is for stepping through a fixed number of iterations A variable is used as a counter to track progress and test for ending conditions Use this for fixed execution counts The syntax is as follows for Counter lt StartValue gt to lt EndValue gt step lt StepValue gt Statements next Counter for Counter lt StartValue gt down lt EndValue gt step lt StepValue gt Statements next Counter 400 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference Example for a 0 to 10 step 2 b a next a Syntax description for Must be used to begin the statement Counter Required This is the controlling statement The result of evaluating the variable is used as a test of comparison lt StartValue gt Required The initial value of Counter to down Required This determines if the lt step gt increments or decrements the lt Counter gt to increments lt Counter gt by lt StepValue gt down decrements lt Counter gt by lt StepValue gt lt EndValue gt Required The test point If the lt Counter gt is greater than this value the macro exits the loop Optional Specifies that a lt StepValue gt other than one is to be used StepValue Optional The increment decrement step of lt Counter gt It can be omitted when the value is 1 If step lt StepValue gt are omitted the step value default
368. n functions can t be decrypted by factory since they are encrypted by users therefore please remember your password 655 Lb WE NTEK Project Protection 30 1 XOB Password After project MTP is completed users can compile the file to XOB format that can be downloaded to HMI Password can be set to protect the XOB file in Compiling window A password will be required when attempting to decompile the XOB file to MTP XOB password range 0 4294967295 Compiling Project name C Documents and Settings nicolas wua testdemo mtp OB file name C Documents and Settingsnicolas wuse m testdema xob ZOB password Setting fused in decompiler Decompilation is prohibited Select the languages used on the HMI Startup PaA redownloading the project Language 1 v Password 14 bytes 10 bytes If the password is input incorrectly for three times when decompiling please reset the decompilier 656 Lib WE NTEK Project Protection 30 2 Decompilation is Prohibited If this box is ticked the system will automatically deny XOB password Furthermore the XOB file can t be decompiled to MTP file Compiling Project name C Documents and Settings nicolas wumi testdemo mtp OB file name C Documents and Settings nicolas wu Alp testdemo xob Decormpilation is prohibited Select the languages used on the HMI Startup language after redownloading the projecf Language 1 Ww D error s O warnings
369. n general read_data is an array but if data_count is 1 read_data can be an array or an ordinary variable Below are two methods to read one word data from PLC macro_command main short read_data_1 2 read data 2 GetData read_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 GetData read data 2 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 end macro_command 427 vb WE NTEK Macro Reference Device_name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks and this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters as follows see FATEK KB Series system Parameter Sethngs Ed Font Extended Memory Frinten Backup server Device Model General System Setting pecurity Device list Mame Location Device type Local HMI Local HMI Local MT60561 220 x Disable NA N A Local ser MODBUS RTU Local Free Protocol COMI Ke 0 Remote F 1FATEE FE beres Remote IP210 66 117 2 FATEE FB ernes COMI Rss Device _type is the device type and encoding method binary or BCD of the PLC data For example if device _type is LW_BIN it means the register is LW and the encoding method is binary If use BIN encoding method _ BIN can be ignored If device_type is LW_BCD it means the register is LW and the encoding method is BCD Address_ offset is the address offset in the PLC For example GetData read data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 represents that the address offset is 5
370. n start to communicate with PLC Start pass through in Utility Manager Click Pass through button in Utility Manager to set the communication parameters 649 Pass Through Function Pass throuzh Ethernet com port HMI IP 192 168 1 37 v Get HM Communication Parameters Hdl work mode Unknown source COM Port PC HM COM 1 v R5232 v Baud rate Eo Data bits Parity Even v Stop bits Destination COM Port HM PLE Baud rate 3600 Data bits Parity Stop bits Start Pass through Stop Pass through HMI IP Assign HMI IP address Get HMI Communication Parameters For getting the settings of source and destination COM port The parameters come from reserved addresses detailed as follows Source COM port and Destination COM port LW 9901 Source COM port 1 COM1 3 COM3 LW 9902 Destination COM 1 COM1 3 COM3 port COM 1 mode settings LW 9550 PLC I F O RS232 1 RS485 2W 2 RS485 4W LW 9551 baud rate O 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 5 115200 LW 9552 data bits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits LW 9553 parity 0 none 1 even 2 odd LW 9554 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits 650 L WE NTEK Pass Through Function COM 3 mode setting 0 RS232 1 RS485 2W LW 9561 baud rate 0 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 5 115200 LW 9562 data bits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits LW 9563 parity 0 none 1 even 2 odd LW 9564 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bit
371. n the source string and store it in the destination buffer The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of reversed string exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char src1 20 abcde char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 String ToUpper src1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 edcba char dest2 4 bool success2 success2 String oUpper abcde dest2 0 I success2 false dest2 remains the same end macro_command 461 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference Name String TrimLeft Syntax success StringTrimLeft Source start set start destination start success StringTrimLeft source set start destination start success StringTrimLeft Source start set destination start success StringTrimLeft source set destination start Description Trim the leading specified characters in the set buffer from the source string The source string and set string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns fa
372. n to the designated registers Please refer 19 3 On line operation for further information Channel Select each channel and set the attributes 251 Li WE NTEK Objects Control address PLC name Select the PLC where the target data block located Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of Control address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Device type Select the device type where the target data block located Control word address Control word is used to control and clear trend curve display 0 No action default 1 Plot trend curve 2 Clear trend curve 3 Redraw trend curve After executing the operation above the system will reset the control word to zero No of data address No of data address is default as Control word address 1 No of data is to store the number of word device in each data block i e the number of data to plot in trend curve The maximum value is 1024 Data storage start address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of Data storage start address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Offset value storage address If offset to start address is enabled the Offset value storage address is default as Control word address 2 Format If yo
373. na a a 709 is WE NTEK EasyBuilder Pro User Manual BOs IVa WME Gl r E A E E E 711 Be LIPIV IN SEGUE S ncaatacacseanatanauaina ceases veceeanwha E EAA EE ON 711 3232 AN IVAN GR ON nceconacacnesteees ioemnucersatauieusacgsewscet deus nuseanaaeaceneesieenseesnustduestaeewndesssueaaneans 711 35 53 Add New DEVICE eminsenniern nee ene ere Ea ee eee 711 Be CO CY ee AE E caer pa EE EEE T TEEN 713 DOP ACS S eN a S R E A E O beans 713 35 62 Columns OF ODJect LIS Esener ET 713 Chapter 36 Administrator TOONS srcsavassccseusanawnsinosdunssecarananagaeaneeancsuantbaesnantacesseanagaesvesanctwasitorsuaneniaies 715 BO OVEN CW E E EE A E OEA AEREE A ET EA E E AA ES 715 Se SEI ACCOUN a r a E A E E EN E E ONONE E E OE 716 36 2 1 Introd ction of User ACCOUNTS ecse treseemiuteaviwetebsdeelatecanesteoveadieteas 716 36 2 2 Setting WS OPA CC OUI Sis speccsmacesacevacorucsaeneastesanacsmoadsaste EE ET EN SEE AA EO EREEREER 718 36 2 3 Import accounts Via EasyBuilder Pro ssssssssseessseessssreseersseesssersseereseersseesssereseees 720 BGS USB SECUN KOY perena E E satiate E E A 721 36 3 1 Introduction of USB Security Key seseesssensseensseressresssrrssrrreserrsseeessreeserreseereseeree 721 36 3 2 Setting USB Security Key ssinsstcsccnicesecswsnsesacetonacctonntasesedalcancasan tes ndesnedcaianeeneeneticeonessinn 722 36 3 3 EasyBuilder Pro USB Security Key Settings cccccsccccssececesseeceeseeeeeecessesceeeenees 723 30 4 6 Mal SMTP Server SE
374. name input 20 5 char password input 20 6 Char message Success 40 success Access Accepted 7 char message fail 40 Fail Access Denied 5 char message c lear 40 g bool name match false 10 bool password match false il 12 StringGet name input 0 Local ANI LW UO 40 i3 stringset password input 0 Local HMI LW sO 20 14 name match stringcompare name input U name 0 15 password match stringtompare password input 0 password 16 ire FILL message clear 0O 0x20 40 FILL with white space 15 stringset message clear O Local HMI LW 100 40 15 if name mateh true and password match true then 20 stringset message Ssuccess U Local HMI LW 100 40 ai else 22 stringset message fail 0 Local AMI LW 100 40 23 L end if 24 end macro conmand 523 Lub WE NTEK Macro Reference The first two StringGet functions will read the strings input by users and store them into arrayS named name_input and password_input separately Use the function StringCompare to check if the input account name and password are matched If the account name is matched name_match is set true if the password is matched password match is set true If both name_match and password_match are true output the string Success Access Accepted Otherwise output the string Fail Access Denied Add ASCII npu LA and Function Keyl objects in window 10 of the project The settings
375. nd main Add end macro command Syntax description sub Must be used to begin the function block type Optional This is the data type of value that the function returns A function block is not always necessary to return a value parameters Optional The parameters hold values that are passed to the function by the Main Macro The passed parameters must have their type declared in the parameter field and assigned a variable name For example sub int MyFunction int x int y x and y would be integers passed to the function by the Main Macro This function is called by a statement that looks similar to this ret MyFunction 456 pressure where pressure must be integer according to the definition of function Notice that the calling statement can pass hard coded values or variables to the function After this function is executed an integer values is return to ret Local variable Variables that are used in the function block must be declared first declaration This is in addition to passed parameters In the above example x and y are variables that the function can used Global variables are also available for use in function block IStatements Statements toexecute lt lt return value Optional Used to return a value to the calling statement The value can be a constant or a variable Return also ends function block execution A function block is not always necessary to return a value but
376. nded Memory l Printer Backup Server I e Mail Hl ae Recipes hoe Device Ei a Model General Sytem Setting Beeuritry Font HMI model eM T3105 200 x600 v HMI station no g 3 When opening EasyDiagnoser the Port No should be set the same as that in project Only in this way can the communication succeed Select HMI HMI Name Default HMI 192 168 1 103 Tina MTB1 00 le 168 1 117 tricolas mite 04h Search f 192168 1 208 nicolas 8100 192 168 1 208 kevin_MIT80r 0H Search All 192 168 1 226 sugan hmil 192 166 1 239 Dermooloev FOS 20091002 oF later supports 143 1A 1 297 Memn S 130m Project Port 513 L WE NTEK Macro Reference The three successive ports of the project port no are preserved for HMI communication Take the setting above as example Port No is set as 8005 therefore port 8005 8006 and 8007 will be preserved In this case when executing simulation on PC please make sure that these ports are not occupied by other programs 2 TRACE Syntax List TRACE format argument Description Use this function to send specified string to the EasyDiagnoser Users can print out the current value of variables during run time of macro for debugging When TRACE encounters the first format specification if any it converts the value of the first argument after format and outputs it accordingly format refers to the format control of output string A format specification which consists
377. ndirect Window Object will be created 200 i WE NTEK Objects Hew Indirect Window Object General Description Read address PLO name Local HMI Setting Address Lw lo t bit Unsigned Attribute Style No title bar Read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the word device that control the window popup Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Attribute Style To set the display style of the popup window There are two styles No title bar and With title bar a No title bar The popup window does not have title bar and its position is fix as predefined in configuration 201 Lb WE NTEK Objects WINDOW 35 b With title bar The popup window contains title bar and its position can be dragged at online operation WINDOW 35 Example to use indirect window Here is a simple example to illustrate indirect window object The pictures show how to configure an indirect window and use the word device LW100 to change the popup window Read address PLL name Local HMI setting Address Lw IE 16 bit Unsigned i Set constant 35 ta LMIGO Set constant 36 to LW I00 Set constant O to LM100 n ad
378. ndows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 10 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Startup Guide 1 2 Steps to Install EasyBuilder Pro 1 Installing EasyBuilder Pro Put the EasyBuilder Pro Installation CD into the CD drive The computer will run the program automatically and bring up a screen showing an area to click to begin the EasyBuilder Pro installation If the auto run sequence does not start browse the CD and find the root directory of Autorun exe manually The installation screen is shown below P Easy Builder Pro Install e Document na E Library Drivers Project www weintek com 2 Click Install users will see the window below select the language and click Next following the installation instructions Select Setup Language Select the language to use during the installation English English gt Spanish gt French gt Italian gt Simplified Chinese gt Traditional Chinese Korean gt Russian 11 Li WE NTEK EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Startup Guide f Setup EasyBuilder Pro V100 Welcome to the EasyBuilder Pro 1 00 Setup Wizard This will install EBpro 1 00 on your computer It is recommended that you close all other applications before continuing Click Next to continue or Cancel bo exit Setup 3 Users will be asked if they would like to remove the old versions of EasyBuilder Please tick thos
379. needing special handling for different Data Sampling history files 5 dtl EasyConverter s Voltage lgs PathName Voltage 631 Wa WE NTEK EasyPrinter The 5 criterion can only be performed on the history files uploaded from the Data Sampling objects with the folder name Voltage The 3 argument indicates this criterion accepts the qualified Data Sampling files from any HMI Users can also change the 3 argument to 192 168 1 26 192 168 1 HMI name etc for narrowing the target HMI 26 4 3 The Format of a Convert Batch File The following table explains all arguments in a criterion 1 File Type This argument specifies the extension name of the uploaded files this criterion targets e g dtl for Data Sampling history files evt for Event Log history files 2 Command Line The exact command EasyPrinter sends to a console window if the uploaded file is qualified 3 a HMIIP address This argument specifies the HMI this criterion b HMI name targets 4 Condition 1 e If the file type is dtl This argument specifies the folder name of the Data Sampling objects this criterion targets e Others No use Condition 2 No use reserved for further use 26 4 4 The Order of Examining Criteria EasyPrinter examines criteria in ascending order every time a file is uploaded Once the file is qualified for a criterion it stops the examination and starts over for next
380. ng a new object Destination address Set destination address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of destination address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object After completing all settings and pressing the OK button a new Data Transfer Time based Object is created The summary displays all the registered data transfer objects with brief information as shown below Data Transfer Tame based Object ii Local HMI LB200 gt Local HMI LB210 Mode Bit Time interval 2 0 second s transfer length 10 bit lt wl ar a VL yn oe wee Re ee Moge Vv ore ime interval 2 0 second anster jonorn 3 iLocal HMELE30 gt Local HMELBEO Mo de Bit Time interval 3 0 second s transfer length 15 bit s 307 Lv WE INTEK Objects 13 27 PLC Control Overview The PLC control object activates a specific operation when the corresponding control device is triggered Configuration Click the PLC Control icon and the PLC Control Object summary appears Ef as shown below _ _ _ __ _ ELE Control Object Change window Write data to PLC current base window General PLC control Eam Back light controliwrite back Press the New button and the PLC Control dialog box appears Set all the attributes of PLC control and press OK button a new PLC control object will be creat
381. ng a valid window number 11 into LWO the system will close the current window and open window 11 then write 11 into LW1 LW0 1 If you use 32 bit device as trigger address and the device type of the trigger address is in word basis then the system will write the window number into Trigger address 2 Below is the list of write address for each different type of data format 16 bit Signed Address 1 32 bit Unsigned Address 2 32 bit Signed Address 2 Note If LB 9017 ON the write back operation will not be executed If Clear data after window changed is selected the Trigger address will be reset to 0 after new window is open b Write data to PLC current base window When the system changes the base window the new window number will be written into the Trigger address 310 E WE NTEK Objects c General PLC Control This function performs data transfer between PLC and HMI when users set appropriate value in Trigger address Control code Operation for data transfer ee PLC PLC register gt HMIRW gt HMI RW a PLC register gt HMI LW HMI RW gt PLC register HMI LW gt PLC register With this function the system uses four continuous word devices please refer to the following explanation Trigger Control code The valid control code is listed address in the above table When a new control code is written into the register the system will conduct the data tran
382. noooooms Oofoo0o0sc0o ooofooos 1 2 3 4 5 6 S Yv lt gt Effective Time Restrict the using terms Save to USB Jan13 20121611 S Now 13 2012 16 11 4S Help Topics About Administrator Tools please refer to the relevant chapters in this manual The added accounts can be stored in USB and SD card and create a Function Key for importing user accounts as shown below 124 Do wewe ser Password and Object Securiy New Function Key Object x General Security Shape Label Description Activate after button is released O Change full screen window Change common window Function mode Vlmport e mail settings and contacts Use USB Security Key to Login Data position USB 1 disk USB 2 disk CISD card ACCOUNT import made O overwrite Append _ Delete file after importing user accounts Import user data Use USB Security Key Settings Upon completion of the settings insert the external device to HMI and use Function Key to import accounts If Overwrite is selected the existing accounts in the system will be deleted before importing and log out after importing If tick Delete file after importing user accounts the system will delete the account data saved in the external device after importing The effective time limit for importing data can only be specified in Administrator Tools
383. not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of retrieved substring exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char src1 20 cabbageabc char set1 20 abc char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 Stringlncluding src1 0 set1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 cabba char src2 20 gecabba char dest2 20 bool success2 success2 StringIncluding src2 0 abc dest2 0 success2 true dest2 char set3 20 abc char dest3 4 bool success3 success3 StringIncluding cabbage set3 0 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro_command 458 L WE NTEK Macro Reference Name StringExcluding Syntax Description success StringExcluding source start set start destination start success StringExcluding source set start destination start success StringExcluding source start set destination start success StringExcluding source set destination start Retrieve a substring of the source string that contains characters that are not in the set string beginning with the first character in the source string and ending when a character is found in the source string that is also in the target string The source string and set string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Bo
384. ns false If the length of decimal string after conversion exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main float src1 1 2345 char dest1 20 bool success success1 StringFloat2DecAsc src1 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 1 2345 float src2 1 23456789 char dest2 20 bool success2 success2 StringFloat2DecAsc src2 dest2 0 success2 true but it might lose precision float src3 1 2345 char dest3 5 bool success3 success3 StringFloat2DecAsc src3 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro command 448 Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference Name StringHexAsc2Bin Syntax Description success StringHexAsc2Bin source start destination or success StringHexAsc2Bin source destination This function converts a hexadecimal string to binary data It converts the hexadecimal string in source parameter into binary data and stores it in the destination variable The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start Destination must be a variable to store the result of conversion This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the source string contains characters other than 0 to 9 a to P or A to F
385. nsigned recipe no String ASCII product Delete 32 bit Unsigned price String ASCII barcode Clear All Modity Description Add Oe a gt Cancel 605 Lib WE NTEK Recipe Editor 4 Recipe Extended Memory Editor C Documents and Settingsin_ Ma E gt X Fie Edit View Window Help ADDRESS recipe no product price barcode Oo bead 132 1547965231 23 coke 20 1437286591 46 coffee 245 3265479210 chair 599 6454789321 desk 750 1464545441 ta 15 1234534444 egg 8 4568974164 coke 28 1246634344 coke 29 4644245645 lemon 35 4645244575 tabag 68 5676454567 book 245 4564676454 Oo wont min amp Ww we CO 4 5 6 7 8 g 10 f Fear is Fasi a Ne 3 In this example the total length of data format is 23 words and will be seen as one set of recipe data The first set recipe no address 0 product address 1 10 price address 11 12 barcode address 13 22 The second set recipe no address 23 product address 24 33 price address 34 35 barcode address 36 45 and so on Noe J m After editing recipe data it can be saved as rcp emi or csv rcp can be downloaded to HMI using Utility Manager or external devices USB disk or SD card emi can be saved directly to external device and insert to HMI for reading EM register 606 WE NTEK Recipe Editor 24 3 Recipe Records Before using
386. nt import mode HMI internal memory would only Overwrite Append O SD card USB disk store account information imported by external device if Overwrite is Delete file after importing user accounts chosen However if choose Append HMI will append more account Cancel information while the original accounts still exist Delete file after importing user accounts Delete account information in external device after importing successfully It can make sure account information would not be leaked out Notification When the function is selected HMI will set the state of the designated bit device to ON or OFF after the action is completed Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the Notification bit that system set value to Users can also set the address in the Notification area 168 Lb WE NTEK Objects Design Non ASCIl character keyboard Below we illustrate the method to input non ascii character such as Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese Japanese Greece and so on Step1 Setting non ascii fonts Go to System parameter Font and add non ascii fonts in the Fonts for non ascii strings list For example use AR MinchoL JIS for Japanese AR MingtiM GB for Simplified Chinese AR MingtiM KSC for Korean Arial for Greek please refer illustration below System Parameter Settings Extended
387. nto index year month and 473 Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference day are in the format of YYYY MM and DD respectively The event log files stored in the designated position such as HMI memory storage or external memory device are sorted according to the file name and are indexed starting from 0 The most recently saved file has the smallest file index number For example if there are four event log files as follows EL 20101210 evt EL 20101230 evt EL 20110110 evt EL 20110111 evt The file index are EL 20101210 evt gt index is 3 EL 20101230 evt gt index is 2 EL 20110110 evt gt index is 1 EL 20110111 evt gt index is 0 return_value equals to 1 if referred data sampling file is successfully found otherwise it equals to 0 year month and day can be constant or variable index and return_ value must be variable The return_value field is optional macro_command main short year 2010 month 12 day 10 index short success if there exists an event log file named EL_20101210 evt with index 2 the result after execution success 1 index success FindEventLogIndex year month day index end macro command 474 me WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 7 How to Create and Execute a Macro 18 7 1 How to Create a Macro Macro programming can be divided into some steps as follows Step 1 Click on Macro Manager icon on the tool bar of E
388. nto a decimal string and stores it in the destination buffer source can be either a constant or a variable Destination must be an one dimensional char array to store the result of conversion This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of decimal string after conversion exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main int src1 2147483647 char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 StringBin2DecAsc src1 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 2147483647 short src2 Ox3c char dest2 20 bool success2 success2 StringBin2DecAsc src2 dest2 0 I success2 true dest2 60 int src3 2147483647 char dest3 5 bool success3 446 Lg WE NTEK Description Macro Reference success3 StringBin2DecAsc src3 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro_command StringDecAsc2Float success StringDecAsc2Float source start destination or success StringDecAsc2Float source destination This function converts a decimal string to floats It converts the decimal string in source parameter into float and stores it in the destination variable The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start Destination must be a variable to sto
389. ntrol address 0 Parameter 1 Parameter 1 for control operation gt Parameter 1 control address 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 2 for control operation gt Parameter 2 control address 2 The system will turn bits ON when state changes or malfunctions gt Status control address 3 The system will write file index when starting to play a video gt File index control address 4 Start time The system will write video start time when starting to play a video unit sec Always 0 gt Start time control address 5 The system will write video end time when starting to play a video unit sec gt End time control address 6 Update Enable video The system will write video elapsed time into playing playing time register in every update period time seconds playing Update Update period of playing time range between 1 to time period 60 sec Playing Update the video elapsed time periodically unit Video time sec gt Playing time control address 7 sD Play video files in SD card USB Play video files in USB disk Folder name The name of the folder storing video files Users Video must put video files in a folder e g example instead of root directory file store location Note 1 Folder name couldn t be empty 2 Folder name couldn t include A lt gt 3 A folder name must be composed entirely of 300 WE NTEK Objects
390. ntrol word address 2 c Write 1 to Control word address the previous trend curve remains and the new content in data block will be plot on the screen d The system will write 0 to Control word address after the trend curve displayed Word Address Last displayed graph a Display Control No of Data 40 20 w Data 3 Data 1 NOTE During the period between c and d do not change the content of Control No of Data and Data it might cause error for trend curve plot How to clear a trend curve a Write 2 to Control word address all the trend curves will be cleared b The system will write 0 to Control word address after the trend curve is cleared 256 W WE NTEK Objects Word Address Last displayed graph a2 Clear 2 Control No of Data ia 40 30 0 w Data 3 o l Data 6 Clears the previous Data 7 graph display Even if there is data the graph does not display How to clear the previous trend curve and display new one 10 Write the number of data to No of data address i e control word address 1 Have the content of data block ready for display Note data block start from control word address 2 Write 3 to Control word address the previous trend curves will be cleared and the new content in data block will be plot on the screen The system will write 0 to Control word address after the trend curve dis
391. o HMI when downloading only in this way the UNICODE can be displayed correctly The length of each item As for item length it s now restricted to less than 1024 when number of items times The length of each item Note The system will automatically disable Mapping table when Item address mode is selected 336 Mapping tab Hew Option List Object Option list Mapping Security Shape Label me a oem Teed 0 T testl l l test M 2 2 test 3 3 test4 4 4 testi 5 error T met default Error notdication 7 Enable Set ON Set OFF Pic rame loa a C Address LB ne l o Mapping table This table displays all available states items their item data and values To change the number of available items please refer to Option list tab Attribute gt Item no Item The system lists all available items Each item represents a state that will be displayed in the list This field is read only Value Here user can assign value for each item basing on the following two criteria 337 L WE NTEK Objects a For reading If any change of the content from Monitor address is detected the object compares the content with these values and selects the first matched item If no item is matched the status goes to error state and signals the notification bit register if requested
392. o Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of Read address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object PLC address Read address PLC name Local HMI w _ Separated address for X and Y data PLC name Setting Address L b m i00 16 bit Unsigned Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address Index register for read address The usage of each address as follows Dynamic limits is not enabled For example The Read address is LW100 X data 0 reads value from reading address LW100 X data 1 reads value from reading address LW101 X data 2 reads value from reading address LW102 X data 3 reads value from reading address LW103 264 L WE NTEK Objects X data 4 reads value from reading address LW104 X data 5 reads value from reading address LW105 and so on The usage of each address as follows Dynamic limits is enabled For example The Read address is LW100 X low limit reads value from reading address LW100 X high limit reads value from reading address LW101 Y low limit reads value from reading address LW102 Y high limit reads value from reading address LW103 X data 0 reads value from reading address LW104 Y data 0 reads value from reading address LW105 X data 1 reads value from reading address LW106 Y data 1 reads value from reading address LW10 7 If you check Separated address for X an
393. o logout If HMI is left unused for longer than the time set here HMI will logout automatically Hide System Setting Bar Hide the system setting bar on the lower right corner of the HMI screen Hide Mouse Cursor Hide the mouse cursor on HMI screen Disable Buzzer Mute HMI Prohibit remote HMI connecting to this machine Prohibit the function of connecting remote HMI Disable upload function effective after rebooting HMI or set LB9033 ON Disable HMI to upload project after downloading HMI must be rebooted to disable uploading project Prohibit password remote read operation or set LB9053 ON Prohibit remote HMI to read local HMI password Prohibit password remote write operation or set LB9054 ON Prohibit remote HMI to write local HMI password Use a disconnection icon on relative objects when PLC communication fails Decide whether or not to display a disconnection icon on relevant objects when failing to a When using this function and fail to communicate with PLC this icon will be shown in the communicate with PLC lower right corner of the object as shown 61 L WE NTEK System Parameter Settings VNC Server Set the login password for VNC server LW protection RW protection If users check Disable LW RW remote write and set the protect range in LW RW range values of this protected range can t be adjusted via remote HMI Easy Access server Through this technology us
394. of optional in and required fields in bold has the following form flags width precision type Each field of the format specification is described as below flags optional width optional A nonnegative decimal integer controlling the minimum number of characters printed precision optional A nonnegative decimal integer which specifies the precision and the number of characters to be printed type Corc specifies a single byte character signed decimal integer signed decimal integer unsigned octal integer unsigned decimal integer unsigned hexadecimal integer Signed value having the form 514 L WE NTEK Macro Reference d dddd e sign ddd where d is a single decimal digit dddd is one or more decimal digits ddd is exactly three decimal digits and sign is or Signed value having the form dddd dddd where dddd is one or more decimal digits The length of output string is limited to 256 characters The argument part is optional macro_command main char c1 a short s1 32767 float f1 1 234567 TRACE The results are output The results are TRACE c1 c s1 d f1 f c1 s1 f1 output c1 a s1 32767 f1 1 234567 end macro command 3 Newly Added LB9059 disable MACRO TRACE function when ON When set ON the output message of TRACE won t be sent to EasyDiagnoser 4 Users can directly execute EasyDiagno
395. of the Low limit and then repeat the action to keep the value in an active state In the example shown below the value of the word device will change periodically in order of 0 1 2 9 10 0 1 2 Attribute Set Style Periodic step up ow to high Na Low limit 0 aA High limit 10 Inc value 1 Time interval 0 5 second s E Periodical step down Stepping down function A Set word object will subtract the value set in Dec value from the value of the word device with the regulated interval set in Time interval until the result value reaches the value of the Low limit and the value of the word device will return to the value of the High limit and then repeat the action to keep the value in an active state In the example shown below the value of the word device will change periodically in order of 10 9 8 1 0 10 9 8 160 Lih WE NTEK Objects Attribute Set Style Periodic step down high to low v Low limit 0 i High limit 10 Dec value 1 Time interval 0 5 second s E Set when window opens When the window containing the object is opened the value of Set value will be automatically written into the word device Attribute Set Style Set when window opens Set value 5 g E Set when window closes When the window containing the object is closed the value of Set value will be automatically written into t
396. off The setting unit is minute Back light will be on again once the screen is touched If none is set the back light will always be on while using b Screen saver If the screen is left untouched and reaches the time limit set here The current screen will automatically switch to a window assigned in Saver window no The setting unit is minute If none is set this function is disabled c Saver window no To assign a window for screen saver a Startup window no Designate the window shown when start up HMI b Common window Above base window Ww Below base window Above base window The objects in the common window window 4 will be shown in each base window This selection determines the layers these objects are placed above or below the objects in the base window 58 Ly WE NTEK Event Keyboard Project protection i series only System Parameter Settings c Keyboard caret color Set the color of caret that appears when inputting in Numeric Input and Word Input objects d Object layout Nature ontol Nature lf Control mode is selected when operating HMI Animation and Moving Shape objects will be displayed above other kinds of objects neglecting the sequence that the objects are created If Nature mode is selected the display will follow the sequence that the objects are created first created be displayed first e RW_A enabled Enable or disable recipe data RW_A Enable this t
397. ogele All Outlining Update AM Outlining Update AM Outlining 384 Lib WE NTEK Macro Reference 7 Use Select All to include all the content in the edit area WorkSpace Qo 2 AMS macro command main end macro conma elect AT Togele Bookmark Ctrl F 8 Ifthe macro code goes very long for easier reading bookmarks are provided The illustration below shows how it works a Move your cursor to the position in the edit area where to insert a bookmark Right click select Toggle Bookmark There will be a blue little square that represents a bookmark on the left side of edit area WorkSpace Macro ID Macro name sub 15 macro command main i 20 Short walue i1 adress 0 i 0 21 int qnmacroID 0 gncounts0O gnteastVal 0 gqnceorrectVYal 0 22 bool bError 0 ag int tempCount 0 tempVal 0 24 int gnCurrentMID 0 gnCurrentNCount o0 Colts 6 ff e Undo HID gt p ph p h 27 gaug edo Coty 2a Setde oan HMI LW 1000 1 250 ff pps i Do MIDD gt gt gt gt gt 2 gt gt gt gt gt gt 2 gt J si Geri LW i 1 32 Select All Ctla 33 Tor 4 34 Toggle Bookmark LU adress 1j 35 temp Next Bookmerk F2 36 value Previous Bookmark ShttF2 37 adres Clear All Bookmarks 3 Pa aie e SEA MCount gt gt gt gt 3 gt gt gt gt gt 533 gt 3 gt gt ge satu Togele All Outlining 40 Serpq Update Al
398. ointing devices Ports COM amp LPT ii Communications Pork COM1 a Communications Pork COMz Y Printer Pork LF oF Weintek Virtual Serial Port COM ae Processors gi SCSI and RAID controllers Sound video and aame controllers It can be found that the virtual COM port is changed to COM 9 in Utility Manager Virtual COM Port PC lt gt PLO COM 646 Lg WE NTEK Pass Through Function 29 1 2 How to Use Ethernet Mode After installing virtual serial port driver users should follow four steps to use Ethernet mode of pass through Step 1 Set IP of the HMI connected with PLC For example HMI IP is 192 168 1 206 Step 2 Assign serial port properties of the port connects HMI with PLC For example COM2 use RS232 is used to connect PLC Step 3 Click Apply and these settings will be updated PC Application 7 Weintek Virtual Serial Port COM7 Stop Pass through sw Step 4 In the PC application the number of the serial port must be the same as the virtual one For example using a Mitsubishi application if the virtual serial port is COM 7 please open PC side I F Serial setting COM port to select COM 7 as follows 647 Lib WE NTEK Pass Through Function Transter Setup CCIEConi MNETCI CC Link Etter WETAOG mod module modu PC side I F Serial setting RED nchade FX USB AW FX3U USB BD Cancel USB GOT transparent mode Connection channel het oe C U
399. ol as Mode have the same Input Order Group that is different from any input object with Touch as Mode Keyboard e Select Use a popup keypad Specify the pop up position for the keyboard window The system displays the keyboard window on inputting data and closes it on end e Unselect Use a popup keypad The system does not automatically display keyboard window Users have to complete the input process via following methods a Design a custom keypad and place it in the same window with the input object b Use an external keyboard e Hide title bar Keypads without title bar can be selected for Numeric Input ASCII Input object e Restart the keypad if input value is out of range For Input Value object re input can be automatically requested when input error occurs 189 Lb WE NTEK Objects NOTE f e When selecting Bit control as Mode the system will automatically unselect Use a popup keypad in Keyboard The picture below shows the Numeric Format tab included in both of the numeric input object and the numeric display object which is to set the data display format New Numeric Inout Object I Numeric Format Security Shape Font Display Data format 16 bit Unsigned 7 Mask Number of digits Leftof decimal Pt 4 al Right of decimal Pt 0 a pcaline option T Do conversion Demamic scales Engineering low 0 Engineering hig
400. olean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of retrieved substring exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char src1 20 cabbageabc char set1 20 ge char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 StringExcluding src1 0 set1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 cabba char src2 20 cabbage char dest2 20 bool success2 success2 StringExcluding src2 0 abc dest2 0 success2 true dest2 char set3 20 ge char dest3 4 bool success3 success3 StringExcluding cabbage set3 0 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro_command 459 Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference Name String ToUpper Description success String ToUpper source start destination start success String ToUpper source destination start Convert all the characters in the source string to uppercase characters and store the result in the destination buffer The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of result string after conversion exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char src1 20
401. ommand main int bool a true bool b 30 short c false short d 50 inte 5 int f 10 fori 0 to 29 b i true next for i 0 to 49 dli i 2 next i fori 0to9 f i i 3 next i set the state of LB2 SetDataEx a Local HMI LB 2 1 set the states of LBO LB29 setDataEx b 0 Local HMI LB 0 30 setthe value of LW2 SetDataEx c Local HMI LW 2 1 435 WP WENT E ee ooo Macro Reference set the values of LWO LW49 setDataEx d 0 Local HMI LW 0 50 set the values of LW6 LW7 note that the type of e is int setDataEx e Local HMI LW 6 1 set the values of LWO LW19 10 integers equal to 20 words since each integer value occupies 2 words setDataEx f 0 Local HMI LW O 10 end macro_command GetError err Description Get an error code macro_command main short err char byData 10 GetDataEx byData 0 MODBUS RTU 4x 1 10 read 10 bytes if err is equal to O it is successful to execute GetDataEx GetErr err save an error code to err end macro_command PURGE PURGE com_port Description com_port refers to the COM port number which ranges from 1 to 3 It can be either a variable or a constant This function is used to clear the input and output buffers associated with the COM port Ea macro_command main 436 WE NTEK y L O WEINTEK Oooo Macro Reference int
402. on Mode Touch trigger 17 4 Saving Recipe Data Automatically In order to prolong HMI flash memory life span EasyBuilder Pro will save Recipe Data automatically every minute to HMI To avoid losing data when switching HMI off during the interval between saving operations system register LB 9029 Save all recipe data to machine set ON is provided Sending ON signal to LB 9029 will make EasyBuilder Pro save Recipe Data once Sending ON signal to LB 9028 Reset all recipe data set ON EasyBuilder Pro will clear all Recipe Data and return to 0 380 L WE NTEK Macro Reference Chapter 18 Macro Reference Macros provide the additional functionality your application may need Macros are automated sequences of commands that are executed at run time Macros allow you to perform tasks such as complex scaling operations string handling and user interactions with your projects This chapter describes syntax usage and programming methods of macro commands 18 1 Instructions to the Macro Editor 1 Macro editor provides the following new functions d b h 1 displaying line number Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Select All Toggle Bookmark Previous Bookmark Next Bookmark Clear All Bookmarks Toggle All Outlining Security gt Use execution condition Periodical execution Execute one time when HMI starts The instructions below show you how to use these new functions
403. only Search 4 PY Nam Search all HMI name test v 192 168 1 22effest 05 20091002 or later supports search Click to search the HMIs share OS 20091002 or later supports the same network Firmware Font files m l h HMI name 192 168 1 11 Default HMI Necessary if update firmware or execute download first time ve b ean alee 2 ais 192 168 1 226 test v z M use user defined startup screen 192 168 1 237 Demo Joey Weintek File location D Janezzr EB file 0B A testpic bmp 5 20091002 or later supports Reset recipe Reset event log Reset clate camni Meee aeania eEEEEEEEE Reboot HMI after download Automatically using current settings to download after compiling 33 W WE INTEK Create an EasyBuilder Pro Project m Way 3 USB Cable Download select USB cable to download project to HMI The way of setting is Ethernet G USB cable i series only Password Set same as Way 1 mentioned above USB cable only works for Series HMI Firmware Font files Necessary if update firmware or execute download first time Use user defined startup screen Reset recipe Reset event log v Reset data sampling V Reboot HMI after download Download N m Before downloading via USB cable please make sure the USB driver is correctly installed Go to Computer Management Device Manager to check if USB driver is installed
404. ont Device list Mame Location Device type Interface VF Protocol St Local HMI Local HMI Local eMT3105 00 x Disable Nia Ni Local PLL 1 MODBUS RIU Local MODBUS RTU LOM 1 9600 E 5 1 Rs4os 536 Lv WE NTEK Set HMI as a MODBUS Server In the setting page of each object there is a MODBUS RTU in the PLC name selection list you can then select appropriate device type and address Read address PLE name MODBUS RTU w Setting Address ox lbo z Since the server is HMI the corresponding read and write address are as follows reading writing Ox 1x 1 9999 to reading writing LB 0 9998 reading writing 3x 4x 5x 1 9999 to reading writing LW 0 9998 reading writing 3x 4x 5x 10000 75533 to reading writing RW 0 65533 537 E WE NTEK Set HMI as a MODBUS Server 19 2 Changing the Station Number of a MODBUS Server in Runtime Change the related reserved registers to modify the station number of a MODBUS Server HMI LW 9541 The station number of a MODBUS server COM 1 LW 9542 The station number of a MODBUS server COM 2 LW 9543 The station number of a MODBUSI server COM 3 LW 9544 The station number of a MODBUS server Ethernet 538 E WE NTEK Set HMI as a MODBUS Server 19 3 About MODBUS Address Type Address types under MODBUS protocol in EasyBuilder Pro are Ox 1x 3x 4x 5x 6x 3x_bit and 4x_ bit Modbus RTU function code Note
405. ontacts Ouse USB Security Key to Login Data position CSD card USB disk Account import mode Overwrite Append Delete file after importing user accounts Wish to know how to import user accounts via Function Key Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 720 WS WE NTEK Administrator Tools 36 3 USB Security Key 36 3 1 Introduction of USB Security Key Check the box of USB Security Key to complete the relevant settings With the predefined user login information the USB Security Key can be used to log in directly The setting example is shown below i Administrator Tools Save to USB Contents of the USB data O User Accounts gt USB Security Key CO e Mail SMTP Sever Settings O e Mail Contacts USB Security Key User name Katte Password eee Confirm eee Effective Time Restrict the using terms By ey P Save to USB Jan 1172012 15 00 Y Feb 11 2012 15 00 Y Help Topics settings Description UserName Set User Name Nowe Log in using USB Security Key during the specified time period If not specifying Effective Time log in at any time Save to USB Save data to USB al Effective Time Note 1 gt Can be composed of alphabets numbers Case sensitive 721 Da WE NTEK Administrator Tools 36 3 2 Setting USB Security Key a Type in user name and password in User name and Password field
406. or On line d TPT Ts 1517181910 OMERE O 1 O P TUT ATS PD cH a ZISTC V BIN M L gaa 526 Le WE NTEK Macro Reference g SaLi 7 11213 4 151617 8190 JQUWIETRIT IY UL IJO PUI AS DIFIGIH IIRL ZIXICTVIBINIMD Th T T Lub WE NTEK Macro Reference 528 Lb WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 15 Macro Password Protection Macro under development Password max 10 characters gt W Password protect Set password Decompilation cannot recover MACROs when checks Password protect On MACRO editing window there s the Password protect selection tick it and click Set password to set a password less than or equals to 10 characters Support ASCII character only ex a hFds After setting MACRO password users will have to input correct password when opening MACRO editing window Password EasyBuilder Pro should be rebooted for typing the password again after 3 incorrect attempts 529 Lb WE NTEK Macro Reference EasyBuilder 000 A Password error three times Please restart this application Caution When MACRO is password protected decompilation of XOB file will not be able to restore MACRO contents 530 Lid WE NTEK Set HMI as a MODBUS Server Chapter 19 Set HMI as a MODBUS Server 19 1 Setting HMI as MODBUS Device Once HMI is set as MODBUS Server the data of HMI can be read or written via MODB
407. ord in value of index register adding 16 Bits _ Example Index Function of Bit Index 6 LW 9206 LB O Index 6 LW 9206 Index 6 LW 9206 The switch LB O Index 6 reads LB 16 address ON A is set to 1 Index Function of Bit Index 6 LW 9206 LB O Index 6 LW 9206 Index 6 is set to 2 The switch LB 0 Index 6 reads LB 32 address OFF 135 Ld WE NTEK Index Register Conclusion Index Register is used to change addresses Through _ changing the data in Index Register we can make an object to read and write different addresses without changing its own address of the device Therefore we can transmit or exchange data among different addresses Please confirm your internet connection before downloading the demo project 136 Ly WE NTEK Keyboard Design and Usage Chapter 12 Keyboard Design and Usage Numeric Input and ASCII Input objects need to use keyboard as input tool Both numeric keyboard and ASCII keyboard are created with Function Key object The types of keyboards are Fixed keyboard on the window Popup keyboard UNICODE _ FK_0 ma FK_1 B FK y Popup keyboard without title bar FK_3 6 Enter UNICODE keyboard 137 Lib WE NTEK Keyboard Design and Usage 12 1 Steps to Design a Pop up Keyboard Widows x Object list w Step 1 Create and open a window for a keyboard to be added
408. ory set ON delete all data sampling files on HM memory set ON refresh data sampling information on HMI memory set ON reset all recipe data set ON gave all recipe data to machine set ON Update COM 1 communication parameters set OM update COM 2 communication parameters set OM Update COM 3 communication parameters set ON disable when on enable when off HMI upload function save eventdata sampling ta HMI USB disk SD Aard set ON HMI free space insufficiency alarm when ON SD card free space insufficiency alarm when JIN USB 7 free space insufficiency alarn wher ZIM USB 2 free space insufficiency alarm whey OM status of file backup activity backup in pfocess if ON backlight up set OM gt backlight down set ON acknowledge all alarm events set YW unacknowledged events exist when OM Users can import MT500 tag to represent the addfess When attempting to upload a XOB file set to this function the XOB file gained after uploading will be O bytes and can t be decompiled Export EXCEL 658 FLT name Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Lig b WE NTEK Project Protection 30 4 Project Key User s project can be restrained to be executed only on specific HMI for i series HM
409. ory Map Communication Note means being decided by PLC or controller The flowchart of communication as following Flowchart 1 Ye S No Receiving STX 02H Sending ACK 06H waiting time is Sending STX 02H waiting time is 3 sec Flowchart 2 Checking NAK 15H Delay 100ms Checking ACK 06H Receiving ACK 06H Stop sending 662 Ly WE NTEK Memory Map Communication Flowchart 2 Checking STX 02H Yes Sending ACK O6H The waiting time is 3 sec default Y Receiving lt a gt Sending ACK O6H Go to flowchart b Going to flowchart a Note Flowchart 2 is available for slave but not master STX is asking signal for communication ACK is feedback signal and NAK is busy signal There are two data formats one is for MB and another is for MW For MB command Offset byte 0x02 The operating sign to MB Ox Address Low byte Ox Bit Address High byte For example MB12 gt 1 16 2 18 is 0x12 and 0x00 Ox00 or 0x01 The data of MB address This is Bit so has to be 0 or 1 6 0x10 gt 0x03 Stop sign 6e oE checksum xor from O0 byte to fifth byte 663 Ly WE NTEK Memory Map Communication For MW command offset byte 0x01 The operating sign to MW oO Ox Address Low byte Ox Bit Address High byte If there is a 0x10 included in address and insert a 0x10 after it the byte will move to next position For ex
410. ose a color from the list or customize their own color and click Add to Custom Colors for system to remember this color Hu 160 Red 0 Sat 240 Green s Coton Palate 3 ColorlS olid Lum 120 Blue 255 D efr te Frame Tick Frame to enable this setting and select a color for the frame of the shape The way of setting is same as above Interior Pattern Click to select the style of the interior pattern of the shape The color of this pattern can also be set Pattern Style Click Pattern Style button to open the dialog 105 Lib WE NTEK Object General Properties Fatterm Style ae pe feet M Duplicate these attributes to every state Duplicate all attributes of the current state to other states How to set Shape Library Click Shape Library button the following dialog appears The currently selected shape is marked by a red frame Shape Library Library state BBB Binieigia a Select Lib J New Lib z System Fipe Wnattach Lib D Untitled i Untitled Delete All States States 3 States 3 Frame Frame F Delete Cur State Rename Place State O State 11 4 Untitled 5 Untitled 6 Untitled 7 Untitled States 3 States 3 States 3 States 3 Eal A A Frame Frame Frame Frame w Display Inner Frame
411. ossover cable and without hub but this is limited to the condition of point to point connection HMI to HMI or PC to HMI Ethemet IL Crossover cable Ethemet T E o Se ee Crossover cable Through Ethernet network EasyBuilder Pro provides the following methods for data WH transmission 1 HMI to HMI communication 2 PC to HMI communication 3 Operating the PLC connected to other HMI 544 Le WE NTEK Ethernet Communication and Multi HMI Connection 21 1 HMI to HMI Communication Ethemet ib Crossover cable In the communication between HMI A and HMI B when using set bit object on HMI A to control LB 0 of HMI B x 1 Set the IP address of the two HMI example HMI A 192 168 1 1 HMI B 192 168 1 2 2 HMI A project System Parameter Settings HMI B Device list eat soi Location Remote y Settings IP 1 192 166 12 Port 8000 Add a remote HMI B i een IF Address Settings IP 192 168 1 2 IPacdress 192 168 1 2 Port no S000 Hew Set Bit Object 2 Set Bit PLC name General Security Shape Label select HMI B to control the Description i a address of remote HMI a ee nc name ise Address LB Be i Write after button is released Attribute Set style Set ON kal cl m One HMI can handle requests from a maximum of other 64 HMI l simultaneously 545 Lb WE NTE
412. ount gt value 7 with Name h Delete current account gt value 8 with Index i Setting the privilege of current account gt value 9 with Name and Privilege j Setting the privilege of current account gt value 10 with Index and Privilege k Setting the password of current account gt value 11 with Name and Password 122 Ly WE NTEK User Password and Object Security Setting the password of current account gt value 12 with Index and Password m Read the privilege of current account gt value 13 with Name If succeeded write to Privilege n Read the privilege of current account gt value 14 with Index if succeeded write to Privilege power cut This account will be deleted by system when passing the effective time period m Add a temporary account The difference from general account is that the temporary account wont be stored in Flash therefore it will be invalid after m Delete current account The currently logged in account cant be deleted m Offline Online Simulation Simulate using the set account in program The modifications during simulation won t be reserved for next simulation m admin Default administrator account can t be deleted opens to all classes of privilege and its privilege level can t be modified m System Register LW 10754 Display current user name 10 2 3 Introduction of Results Output When commands are executed th
413. ource start result data_count Description Uses an exclusion method to calculate the checksum from source start to source start data_count 1 Puts the checksum into result Result must be a variable Data_count is the amount of the calculated elements of the array and can be a constant or a variable macro_command main char data 5 0x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 short checksum XORSUM data 0 checksum 5 checksum is 0x1 end macro command CRC source start result data_ count Description Calculates 16 bit CRC of the variables from source start to source start count 1 Puts in the 16 bit CRC into result Result must be a variable Data_count is the amount of the calculated elements of the array and can be a constant or a variable macro_command main char data 5 0x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 short 16bit _ CRC CRC data 0 16bit _ CRC 5 16bit CRC is Oxbb2a end macro command OUTPORT OUTPORT sourcef start device_name data_count Description Sends out the specified data from source start to source start count 1 to PLC via a COM port or the ethernet Device_name is the name of a device defined in the device table and the 423 zx WE NTEK Macro Reference device must be a Free Protocol type device Data_count is the amount of sent data and can be a constant or a variable To use an OUTPORT function a Free Protocol device must be created first as follows
414. ownload to HMI Off line Project Compile Simulation In this Chapter we will take Mitsubishi PLC as an example 3 1 Create a New Project EasyBuilder Pro Copynghtc 2006 Weintek Lab Inc Welcome to EasyBuilder Pro Please select your model Lip Model eMTS105 800 x 600 we 1 Click on icon a New 2 Select Model 3 Tick Use template 4 Click OK System Parameter Sethogs Extended Memory _ _ Printex Backun Server l e Mail Recipes i i i Font jeM T3105 800 Diiss able rat itt Display mode Landscape w Ea 4 Use template templates121 mtp 5 Click New 6 Set correct parameters 7 Click OK Device Properties Name Mitsubishi FXOs FXOn FX1s FX1nf FxX2 OHMI PLC Location Local v Settings PLC type Mitsubishi FZOSFXOWFX1sFX1wFX2 gt X V 1 20 MITSUBISHI_FXON so 8 Device MISUBISHI a T FX0s FX0n FX1s FX2 is added to the Device List COM cOM1 9600 E 7 1 Settings PLC default station no o Default station no use station no variable C Use broadcast command System Parameter Settings Interval of block pack words IS v Extended Memory Printer Backup Server e Mail Recipes l Device Model General System Setting Security Font Max read command size words 32 Device list Max write command size words 32
415. p files from different HMI There are two ways to name the folders a Use IP address EasyPrinter names the folder after the IP address of the HMI sending the request i e Prefix IP address Please see the following illustration Du 192 168 1 26 Ethemet ad 192 168 1 27 192 168 1 28 b Use HMI name EasyPrinter names the folder after the name of the HMI sending the request i e Prefix HMI name e Properties gt Minimize to system tray Select this option to minimize EasyPrinter to system tray instead of task bar Users can double click the icon in system tray to restore the EasyPrinter window e Properties gt Detailed message Select this option to display more detailed messages about events on the message window 627 Lig WE NTEK EasyPrinter Hardcopy eM Tt2o0 Eemote Printer Server settings General Backup Laserlet Professional P1606dn Is Save to files in CAEBpro m rea Output EasyPrinter provides two modes to output hardcopy results Print Out and Save to File a Print Out Select this option to inform EasyPrinter to print out the hardcopy result with specified printers b Save to File Select this option to inform EasyPrinter to convert the hardcopy result into a bitmap file and save it in the specified directory Users can find the bitmap files at Specified Path gt HMI Folder gt yymmdd_hhmm bmp For example when
416. pdate recipe data on HMI overwrite recipe rcp with new data and restart HMI in one minute ftp 192 168 1 11 7 datalop 123 File Edit wiew Favorites Tools Help Q pack hi F J Search Folders Bak Address LQ Ftp 192 168 1 117 datalog 123 2 E 20110411 dH 20110412 dtl 20110413 dtl SL datala b uploadhis Other Places Internet ftp 192 168 1 11 Ffeventlog Fie Edit View CS sack X Ed Favorites Tools Help iF J Search ae Folders Bak Address L ftp 192 168 1 117 eventlog Other Places EL_20110411 EL 201104 eve EL 201104 E 192 168 1 117 User uploadhis a Internet E ftp W192 168 1 117 recipel File Edit wiew Favorites Tools Help CD sack WA it ps Search Ke Folders Bak Address i Ftp f 192 168 1 117Irecipe a 3 Other Places recipe rcp recipe _a rcp ri 197 1668 1 117 User uploadhis Ap Internet 671 vb WE NTEK FTP Server Application m Since recipe data is automatically saved once every minute after updating recipe rcp or recipe _a rcp HMI must be restarted in one minute otherwise the new updated recipe data will be overwritten by the former data LB 9047 and LB 9048 can also be used to restart HMI Set LB 9048 to ON and then set LB 9047 to ON to successfully restart HMI System Registers LB 9047 reboot HMI set ON when LB9048 is ON LB 9048 reboot HMI protection 672 Chapter 33 EasyDiagnoser 33
417. ph At this time EasyBuilder Pro will automatically display RGB value of the transparent color Take above as an example the actual shape shown as below Step 4 Likewise select the source of a picture for state 1 and select the correct transparent color for it After the settings are completed click the Finish button 365 Lb WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Library Get Piche Picture file State 1 Documents and Settings 11 bmp state 1 Width 100 Height 100 Size S0054Bvtes Transparent Below shows the complete picture created A new picture F Yellow can be found in the Picture Library dialogue From the information we know the picture is in the format of bitmap and with two states 366 Lg western Label Library and Multi Language Usage Chapter 15 Label Library and Multi Language Usage Bonjour SALBI o ctsatae n C 3 By gt eT AN a i i ba r A x pS i U Tipnset Select suitable label when text Design the content of is needed Label Library 15 1 Introduction The system in operation will display the corresponding text to the language in use according to the settings EasyBuilder Pro supports 8 different languages simultaneously Click Label Library Manager Label Tag Library State no Tebel Font Indicates the ies current state l CEE E aaa Each Label has Nc Labeling name No of tas
418. play object Configuration Click the Alarm bar icon on the toolbar the Alarm bar dialog box Ga Cog appears similarly click the Alarm display icon on the toolbar the Alarm display dialog box appears fill in the setting in the General tab and press the OK button a new object will be created 275 L ws WE NTEK Objects Hew Alarm Bar Object Aen Shape Font Include categories o lao iae Alarm Event Log object scroll speed Speed 6 Acknowledge ste Click o a Transparent Fane S Format Sort O Time ascending Time descending Cider Az Characters I Event trigger date Display items Display order I Event tigeer date Event trigger time Event trigger time Event message Event message E L If Displasr chars is 0 it means that the system will display all of characters Date MMDDYY w Time HHMMSS Include categories Select category of events that belongs to the alarm display or alarm bar object category of an event is set in event log For example if the category of an alarm bar is set to 2 4 it will display all the alarm messages with category equal to 2 3 or 4 Please refer to Category statement in Event Log chapter Scroll Speed Set the scroll sp
419. played Word Address Last displayed graph Redraw screen 3 Cont rol No of Data Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 1 Data 4 Data 5 40 Data 6 Clears the previous o w Data 7 graph display then uses the current data to display the graph again 257 L WE NTEK Objects How to use offset mode If offset to start address is selected the Data storage start address will be calculated from control word address Offset value storage address Offset value storage address is control word address 2 In the following example the content of Offset value storage address is m therefore the data block is started from the address control word address m No offset settings Has offset settings Designated Designated Cantral address a address aii 1 No of Data n 1 No of Data n Offset m Data n to be displayed on the graph m n 1 Data n Data n to be gt displayed on the graph m n 1 Data n NOTE If the control register is 32 bits device only bit 0 15 will be used as control purpose bit 16 31 will be ignored as illustration below 32 bit device lf you do not use offset to start address the system will continuously read Control and No of Data At the time Control is changed to non zero the system will then read the data block If you use offset to start address the system will continuously read Con
420. project operation on PC Connect PC PLC amp set correct parameters to operate a PLC When On line simulating on PC if the control target is a local PLC i e the PLC directly connected to PC there is 10 minutes simulation limit Lb WE NTEK Utility Manager Before executing On line Off line Simulation features please select the source XOB file My Recent Documents OHMI memory Desktop library media driver My Documents gf Elmi zob My Computer ee bly Network Files of type J a a eee eee When executing on line off line simulation right click to use these functions Sia Exit simulation Stop simulating Run EasyDiagnoser Exit simulation Soo communication status To monitor current Screenshot Capture and save current screen image as picture file in the screenshot folder under installation directory 25 iJ WE NTEK Utility Manager 2 5 Pass Through This function allows the PC application to connect PLC via HMI In this case the HMI acts as a converter Pass through provides two modes Ethernet and COM port When using Ethernet please install the virtual serial port driver first For detail please refer to Chapter 29 Pass Through Function 26 J WE NTEK Create an EasyBuilder Pro Project Chapter 3 Create an EasyBuilder Pro Project Click on the icons to see illustration Di a B82 Create a Save amp On line D
421. pter Suppose an ASCII input object is set to read 3 words as shown in the above example it can actually read at most 6 ASCII characters since that one ASCII character occupies 1 byte The functionality of each string operation function is described in the following table 518 E WE NTEK Macro Reference Function name StringGet StringGetEx Description Read string data from a device Read string data from a device and continue executing next command even if no response from that device StringSet StringSetEx Write string data to a device Write string data to a device and continue executing next command even if no response from that device StringCopy StringMid StringDecAsc2Bin StringBin2DecAsc StringDecAsc2Float StringFloat2DecAsc stringHexAsc2Bin StringBin2HexAsc StringLength StringCat StringCompare Copy one string to another Retrieve a substring Convert a decimal string to an integer Convert an integer to a decimal string Convert a decimal string to floats Convert a float to a decimal string Convert a hexadecimal string to binary data Convert binary data into a hexadecimal string Obtain the length of a string Append source string to destination string Do a case sensitive comparison of two strings StringCompareNoCase Do a case insensitive comparison of two strings StringFind StringReverseFind Find a substring inside a larger string starts from the Find a substring inside a larger strin
422. put High Limit 16 bit format LW100 LW101 Address 1 32 bit format LW 100 LW 102 Address 2 Low limit When the value of the PLC s register is smaller than Low limit the value is displayed with pre defined color High limit When the value of the PLC s register is larger than High limit the value is displayed with pre defined color Blink When the value of the PLC s register is smaller than Low limit or larger than High limit the object will display data with Blinking The picture below shows the Font tab available in both of the numeric input object and the numeric display object to set font font size color and aligning mode 193 Ly ge WE NTEK Objects Humeric Input Objects Properties General Numeric Format Security Shape Font Profile a 9 E l E we Color M Size 19 Attribute Color When the data is within high and low limit it will be displayed with this color Align There are three aligning modes Left Leading zero and Right The picture below shows the style of each mode Left 12 Leading zero 0012 Right 12 Size Set font size 194 Wa WE NTEK Objects 13 10 ASCII Input and ASCII Display Overview Both of the ASCII Input object and the ASCII Display object can display the value of the designated word devices in ASCII format The ASCII input object can also accept t
423. r ASCII Input objects WINDOW 200 will pop up on HMI screen Users can press keys on keyboard to input data Eeyboard Use a popup keypad Hide title bar Restart the keypad if input value is out of range Window no Ri e Popup position 00 relative to HMI screen 086 0 Oo 90 Hint If the keyboard isan USB keyboard on indirectdirect window or on the same window pea don t check Use a popup keypad 139 Ly WE NTEK Keyboard Design and Usage 12 2 Steps to Design a Keyboard with Direct Window Step 1 Create a ne Direct Window and set a read address to activate it In General Attribute select No title bar and correct Window No Hew Direct Window Object Direct Window Objects Properties x General General Eroii gt Position Description Pinned x 40 a 60 O H Trigger ON w Size Read address Width 160 j Height 230 4 PLE name EE HMI 4 m a ne Step 2 ress LB st P I E Set the Profile of Direct Window to the same size as the created keyboard window Athibute Style No title bar Window No 200 Keyboard E Y Step 3 Create a Numeric Input object and don t tick Use a popup keypad New Numeric Input Object Hew Set Bit Object A General Data Entry Numeric Format Security
424. r Pro 1 00 on your computer The application may be launched by selecting the installed icons Click Finish to exit Setup 15 Lb WE NTEK EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Startup Guide 10 Start EasyBuilder Pro project from menu Start All Programs EasyBuilder Pro Mm Accessories Administrator Tool 3 Shortcut to Psp a rl 5 an Games i ESA EasyBuilder Pro 4 MSN im startup EJ EasyConverter pe amp Internet Explorer TF EasyDiagnoser gt Windows Media Play Yi MSN EasyPrinter Ma Outlook Express Ag Easy Simulator Remote Assistance do EasyWatch 38 Windows Messenger AS Tour Windows lt P Windows Media Player t RecipeEditor S Releasetote gt Windows Messenger i Structure Editor i5 Uninstall EasyBuilder Pro agp Files and Settings Tra ah Windows Movie Maker D Wizard i ir Oracle YM VirtualBox Guest Additions All Programs l EasyBuilder Pro k E Utility Manager Log Off Torn OFF Computer start B Salem Pant Shop Pro 1 7 The description of each item in EasyBuilder Pro menu Installed file Administrator Save data of User Accounts USB Security Key e Mail SMTP Tool Server Setting e Mail Contacts to USB disk and import to HMI EasyBuilder Pro EasyBuilder Pro editing software EasyConverter Conversion tool for Data Sampling and Event Log EasyDiagnoser Tool for analyzing and detecting connection between
425. rd Take downloading data in the folder named 123 K 123 in USB stick for example Insert USB project included to HMI On Download Upload dialog box select Download Input Download Password On Download Settings dialog box check Download project files and Download history files 5 Press OK 6 On Pick a Directory dialog box select directory usbdisk device 0 123 7 Press OK Project will be automatically updated i ai E Even if users only download historical files it is still necessary to reboot HMI manually to update files 20 a re me WE NTEK Utility Manager 2 3 Transfer 2 3 1 Download Download source files to HMI through Ethernet or USB cable Download Firmware arv Startup SCreern Gliseries Brrip Connection Ethernet USB cable Reboot HMI after dawnload Reset recipe Reset recipe database Reset event log Reset data log Firmware Check to update HMI kernel programs The firmware must be downloaded at the first time downloading data to HMI Project Select the project file in XOB format Recipe Data RW RW_A Select rcp file in recipe folder Data Log Select dtl file in datalog folder 21 Ly WE NTEK Utility Manager Startup Screen Download assigned BMP to HMI On HMI it will be shown after rebooting then load in project Users may use company logos Reboot HMI after downloading Automatically reboot after downlo
426. rd GUSB disk ea Wish to know how to enable login using USB Security Key via Function Key Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 723 Wa WE NTEK Administrator Tools 36 4 e Mail SMTP Server Settings 36 4 1 Introduction of e Mail SMTP Server Settings Check the box of e Mail SMTP Server Settings to complete the relevant settings as shown below E Administrator Tools save to USB Contents of the USB data F User Accounts O USB Security Key gt e Mail SMTP Sever Settings O e Mail Contacts Mail Settings SMTP Server smtp u mail com tw Port 25 Sender information Name eMT Username eMT3000 weintek com sl ast Password PER Mail address eMT3000 weintek com Confirm laden Log on using Secure Password Authentication SPA Use the Following type of encrypted connection TLS v J Save to USB Help Topics Mail address The sender address displayed when mail received Save to USB Save data to USB 724 Ligh WE NTEK Administrator Tools 36 4 2 e Mail SMTP Server Settings a The following shows the e mail SMTP setting example Mail Settings SMTP Server smtp u miail com tw Sender information Name eMT3000 Mail address eMTS000d weintek com Port 25 User name eM T3000m uyeintek com Password Po Confirm Log on using Secure Password Authentication SPA
427. re the result of conversion This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the source string contains characters other than O to 9 or it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main char src1 10 J 12 345 float result1 bool success success1 StringDecAsc2Float src1 0 result success1 true result1 is 12 345 float result2 bool success2 success2 StringDecAsc2Float 1 23456 7890 result2 success2 true but the result exceeds the data range of result2 which might result in loss of precision char src3 2 4b float result3 bool success3 success3 StringDecAsc2Float src3 0 result3 success3 false because src3 contains characters other than 0 to 9 or 447 Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference I end macro command Name StringFloat2DecAsc success StringFloat2DecAsc source destination start Description This function converts a float to a decimal string It converts the float in source parameter into a decimal string and stores it in the destination buffer Source can be either a constant or a variable Destination must be an one dimensional char array to store the result of conversion This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it retur
428. read from write to another HMI the server via MODBUS protocol Add a new device in the project of client If client s PLC I F is set to Ethernet please select MODBUS TCP IP as PLC type and fill in the correct IP the IP of server HMI and Port no Device Properties Mame MODBUS TCP IP OHMI PLC PLE type MODBUS TCPIP W150 MODBUS_TCPIP so PLC I F Ethernet w IF Address Settings Device IP address 192 168 Device port no S502 Timeout sec Turn around delay rast lio Fs Send ACK delay ims lo Cs Parameter 1 Doo Parameter 2 oo o Parameter 3 boo 535 Lb WE NTEK Set HMI as a MODBUS Server If the client use RS232 485 interface the PLC type must be set to MODBUS RTU Please make sure the communication parameter setting is correct Device Properties Name MODBUS RTL HMI PLC PLC type MODBUS RTU PLC TF RS 465 21W COM COMI 9600 E 5 1 Settings COM Timeout fseci 1 0 w Baud rate Turn around delay roast co Fs Data bits Send ACK delay fms io ooo Parity Even Parameter 1 lo Fs Stop bits 1 Bit Parameter 2 io Fs Parameter 3 0 The Ful Inner mf Eanair cornice aade m uk Set and click OK a new device MODBUS RTU will be listed in the Device tab System Parameter Sethngs Extended Memory Frimnten Backup server e Mail Recipes Device Model General pvystem petting F
429. red 01 20 09 15 35 22 01 20 09 19 39 22 01 20 09 15 35 20 01 20 09 15 35 19 Event 0 LBO ON 01 20 09 15 35 18 Event 1 LB10 ON 4 ONMA 48 28 46 45 22 48 Cirant 2 n gt Configuration Click the Event Display icon on the toolbar the Event Display dialog box pe appears set each items in the General tab press OK button and a new Event Display Object will be created 278 i WE NTEK Objects New Event Display Object General Event Display Shape Font Description Mode Feal time Write addres PLO name Local HMI Setting a Address Lw m f 16 bit Unsigned Control addres Enable event management Mode Select the event source format there are Real time and History for selection a Real time Write address This displays the events in the log triggered from HMI starts up till present When the events are acknowledged the value in Alarm Event Log Message Write value for Event Display object will be exported to the write address of event display object Write value for event display Write value 279 L WE NTEK Objects b History Control e Enable reading multiple histories not selected In this mode it displays event log from history record The system save the event history in daily basis The event history of ea
430. ress V Use captive fonction PLC name Local HMI seting Address LB 100 Storage medium o SD cand t TSB disk Record time Before 5 seconds After 5 seconds Control address V Use control function Display adjustment PLC name Local HMI Seting Address yy 100 o t6 bit Unsigned start stop mput LA 100 Pause LW 10041 Contrast adjustment LW 100 2 Bright adjustment LW 100 3 343 Wa WE NTEK Obiects Use Control Function Check Use control function Control address IZ Use control function Display adjustment PLC name Local HMI Setting Address ew 100 16 bit Unsigned start stop mput LW 100 Pause LW 10041 Contrast adjustment LW 100 2 Bright adjustment LW 100 3 Suppose Control Address is designated as LW100 A Users can set Control Address 0 to enable stop Video Input function LW100 0 gt Stop Playing LW 100 1 gt Input video image in VIP 1 and display it in screen LW 100 2 gt Input video image in VIP 2 and display it in screen LW 100 3 gt Input video image in VIP 1 but don t display it in screen In this way users can still execute Capture image LW 100 4 gt Input video image in VIP 2 but don t display it in screen In this way users can still execute Capture image B Users can set Control Address 1 to control the displaying of video image LW101 1 gt Pause Continue pl
431. ress changes from 0 to 1 trigger backup LW 1 The data in this address is for specifying the start date of backup LW 2 The data in this address is for specifying the number of days for backup The Syntax is shown below LY 0 Set 1 to trigger backup activity LWiO 1 Define backup start day today yesterday the day before yesterday and so on LW O0 2 Define backup range Unit day max value 90 293 L WE NTEK Objects 13 25 Media Player Note This object is not available for EasyBuilder Pro V1 00 and hardware firmware 20120130 or before For the first time using Media Player object it s necessary to download the project to the HMI wa Ethernet EasyBuilder Pro will install Media Player drivers during the download Overview The Media Player function is not only used to play video files but also to provide uses of additional controls such as seeking Zooming volume adjusting and so on With the Media Player users can provide operation and maintenance instructions or standard procedures on video which can help to create an environment that enables any on site operators to perform tasks efficiently from clear comprehensible instructions Note The Media Player function is only available on the HMI Configuration Click Media Player object icon on the toolbar Media Player object dialog box show up set each item in the General tab press OK button a new Media Player obje
432. result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result SEC 45 result result is 1 414 source 60 SEC source result if source is 60 result is 2 end macro command CSC source result Description Calculate the cosecant of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro _ command main float source result CSC 45 result result is 1 414 source 30 CSC source result result is 2 end macro command ASIN ASIN source result Description Calculate the hyperbolic sine of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result 409 LO WEINTEK e e esesSMarcrco Reference ASIN 0 8660 result result is 60 source 0 5 ASIN source result result is 30 end macro_command ACOS ACOS source result Description Calculate the hyperbolic cosine of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source result ACOS 0 8660 result result is 30 source 0 5 ACOS source result result is 60 end macro command ATAN ATAN source result Description Calculate the hyperbolic tangent of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main float source
433. rity b Rem Run 0E Run Mode Documentation L 2 1 130 Backplane 0 T a Fares P Controller OF oF Battery OF Mo Edits ak Wook ou ee OOS Import Controller Organizer Export Tagsand Logic Comments and Losi Comments SS Controller 4B A Controller Tags Motion J Controller Fault Handler Monitor Equipment Phases HE a6 Power Op Handler ae re lS Tasks Custom Tools T o MainTask T C8 Mainfrogram Ef 9 ContolFL ASH a 0 Unecheduled Programs l Phases d Online Books E S Motion Grouns o 686 Lis wesnrex Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names Step 3 In EasyBuilder Pro create Rockwell EtherNet IP Tag CompactLogix ControlLogix driver Input PLC IP address In System Parameter Settings dialog click Import Tag button System Parameter Sethngs d Memory ___ PrinterBackup Server e Mail Recipes Font Device Device list Look in EBS000 a Of em r driver firmware My Recent font Documents HMI _memory lt library ec media driver Desktop project 5D_card Syusb1 jusb2 usbdriver E virtual_com AB Tags Interface Local HMI Local HMI s EE Local PLC 4 Fo chyell Ethem Rockwell Etherl Ethernet P 192 168 1 150 Fort 44 J My Documents My Computer File name AB Tags Den _ MyNetwork Files of ype RSLogix 5000 Import Export Fie CSV Cancel _ EasyHuilder Fro Project description x Step 4 In
434. rlrt IMT Decimal Read rite J lnibArray IMT 3 Decimal Readwrite m YarDint DINT Decimal Read rite A Dint rray DIN T 33 Decimal Readwrite EH Step 3 The table above shows the defined data types in RSLogix Select Name and Data Type with mouse This can be done by pressing and holding on the first option then slide down to the bottom until the scroll rolls to the end then stop holding All the items will then be selected Press ctrl v to copy then paste to the editing window VarBool BOOL Booldrray BOOL 32 VarReal REAL Realdrray REALS VarInk INT Intarray INTC VarDink CINT Dint4array DINT 3 ls 691 Ok Cancel Y WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names Lig WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names Step 4 At this moment press OK to finish operating then return to the main window to view the successfully added multiple data o hucture Editor i Data Types A Sn User Defined Mame TestT ype TestType4 TestTypeB Description TestT ype TestTypeD TestTypeE TestTypeF TestStruct Beitr gt Description Strings i Predefined varBool Module Defined Bool4rrayBook VarReal Realdrray REALS arInt INT Intarray INTL arDint DINT As DinkarrayDINT 3 7 j Ai F T J add Edit Delete g amember OK import Export Reload J save J Ew J Hep 692
435. rmat Select Case variable Case value Statements break end Select Example Select Case A Case 1 b 1 break end Select 398 Ly WE NTEK Default case Format Select Case variable Case value Statements break Case else Statements break end Select Example Select Case A Case 1 b 1 break Case else b 0 break end Select Multiple cases in the same block Select Case variable Case value1 Statements Case value2 Statements break end Select Example Select Case A Case 1 Case 2 b 2 Case 3 b 3 399 Macro Reference Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference break end Select Syntax description Select Case Must be used to begin the statement variable Required The value of this variable will be compared to the value of each case Case else Optional It represents the default case If none of the cases above are matched the statements under default case will be executed When a default case is absent it will skip directly to the end of the select case statements if there is no matched case Optional The statements under the matched case will be executed until the break command is reached If a break command is absent it simply keeps on executing next statement until the end command is reached end Select Indicates the end of the select case statements 18 4 5 Reiterative Statements Reiterative statements control loops and repetitive tasks depending on conditio
436. rol PLC via HMI and HMI is acting as a converter at this moment Note The communication between HMI and PLC will be paused when pass through is active If users want to resume communication between HMI and PLC please press Stop Pass through to disable this function 653 L WE NTEK Pass Through Function 29 3 Using System Reserved Addresses to Enable Pass Through Function Other way to enable pass through is to use LW 9901 LW 9902 to set source COM port and destination COM port directly When the values of LW 9901 and LW 9902 match conditions as below HMI will start pass through automatically a The values of LW 9901 and LW 9902 have to be 1 or 3 1 COM 1 3 COM 3 b The values of LW 9901 and LW 9902 should not be the same lf users need to change the communication parameters just change the value in related reserved addresses and set ON to LB 9030 LB 9031 and LB 9032 HMI will be forced to accept new settings LB 9030 Update COM1 communication parameters set ON LB 9032 Update COM3 communication parameters set ON Note If users want to stop pass through just change the values of LW 9901 and LW 9902 to values that are not 1 2 3 EX 0 654 Lid WE NTEK Project Protection Chapter 30 Project Protection The copyright of program design must be protected EasyBuilder Pro supports protection functions for project files to ensure users design achievement Doe ALANNA AAR as m The following protectio
437. rview and Configuration icctecasconsacscasavadssesscadenniedocnsdssindesearadehanns adanenedodsddasendeastancdaiaeas 673 332 Eas VyDidg nose Settings erein A ERRETES 676 ee Eror ONG a E E E 682 A N A aa E I E A E AE E E EAEE AE 683 335 WINDOW AG JUSUMICIIU spionnen niea E 684 Chapter 34 Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names cssssssssssseeecceccccscsseseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeess 685 34 1 Import User Defined Tag CSV File to EasyBuilder Pro sssssssssseseseesesersssrrsserrssrersseesssees 686 34 2 Adding New Data TYDE isenicsmersinioreroin orainne eo ENA EEAS rE aN NENE 688 AP T E E E T E E E E E E E E E 690 AAM CEE O eee E E 693 345 IOC O INC enie E EE 697 Chant roS EI y N EEE EOR NE e ETEEN EE E EESE 701 ELOV NEO N e E EE A E OEA AEREE A EET E A E E AES 701 See VV S Easy VV AUC Ne sea E OEE 701 35 122 Why Design Easy Watch is eawsricasavecteaniwoisesecaiatenenvs tresses tsawawetassdeltcanastoseediateas 701 IRL DSC CE ONS ececcs cam E EA T EE E A E A ines oniencemesenarse stat E R E 702 ILAB EC O a a E A E E E E E E E E ATE 702 22 L QUICK Selecon TOOL eenen E EE 704 33 Monit r SOCIO S corren EEA EE E 705 BD LACA MON ON erroe e NE EE E E EEE ANEN E 705 332 MOMO SEINE arrra E ET hs ouaegenneerasenienns 705 OO NOW DEVICE irra EAE EA renee eendonareneee ion 706 33 4 Naro SENES aoc cence recsaes r aE EA 709 SALAMI e ceca E E E E anna E EE TRA 709 334 2 Macro SE LIMES ecne EE E 709 354 3 Add New Macros to the LiStussirsncacoari
438. ry in Library from current project Warning _ Shape 0 Untitled This shape is used iri Window 55 j Window 55 FE Window 55 FE Window 55 Window 55 FE 4 a Window 55 5 Window 55 i Window 55 FK_7 Window 55 FES Do yog really wank bo unattach this library ves Delete All Delete all states of the selected Shape States 0O 00 oo on eo ho Delete Cur Delete current state of the selected Shape State Rename the selected Shape 355 Lid WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Librar Sum m ESES CHES EA berna m Saia LD prn an ag Mwid New 5 ee Umha 1 Shase 2 Shane 3 Shaped ROL Dekt AD Shee ek Aton Sues 2 Stes 2 Has 2 pae 2 inser The following shows how to create a new Shape Library and add a Shape with two states to it Step 1 Click New Lib and input the name of the new Shape Library Hew Library Library name TEST Cancel A new Shape Library TEST will be added to the Shape Library dialogue At this moment no Shape is in the library ree state o E JEE buttoni i buttonz System Frame System Button System Lamp 0 i States 0O i T Es 0 TA 0 None None None None 356 L WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Librar Step 2 Add a state to the selected Shape First use the drawing tools to draw a graph in the window and select the graph to be added to the Shape Library EasyBuilder Pro MIP1 1
439. s J Display adapters Enk Weintek Virtual Serial Port COM3 Properties e Bits per second Floppy disk controllers pee bl 12 Floppy disk drives ae a IDE ATA ATAPI controllers Panty Nons OS gt keyboards Mice and other pointing devices stop bite d Ports COM amp LPT ag Communications Port COM1 Flow control Mone Z 4 Communications Pork COME Prioker Gs E a e lt 9 Weintek Virtual Serial Port coma Lo C Advanced Restore Defaults e a Te Processors re met ee do ete 2 ee k lle 645 Lib WE NTEK Pass Through Function For example user changes virtual serial port from COM 3 to COM 9 YF Ports COM amp LPT F Communications Pork CoM F Communications Pork COM a Printer Pork LF F Weintek virtual Serial Port COM Processors Weintek Virtual Serial Port COM3 Properties General Port Settings Driver Details Bits per second 9600 we Advanced Settings for COM3 Use FIFO buffers requires 16550 compatible UART Select lower settings to corect connection problems Select higher settings for taster pertormance Receive Butter Low 1 Transmit Butter Low 7 COM Port Number Wn ei Select COM 9 and click OK the virtual serial port will be changed to COM 9 Mice and other p
440. s Click Get HMI Communication Parameters to update HMI current states and communication parameters 29 2 2 HMI Work Mode There are three work modes in the pass through function Mode Description Before getting the settings of HMI the work mode is displayed Unknown After getting the settings of HMI if work mode displays Normal Dni PC can t control PLC via HMI Pass through HMI is working on pass through state at this time the PC N plein ncaa esoucecan pat Source COM Port Destination COM Port The communication parameters of source and destination COM port are displayed in these two areas The settings will be used when Start pass through is clicked The Baud rate Data bits Parity and Stop bits of Source COM Port and Destination COM Port have to be the same Source COM Port connects PC so select RS232 mode Destination COM Port connects PLC so settings depend on the PLC requirements The illustration below shows the setting when HMI connects SIEMENS 7 200 The HMI COM 1 RS232 connects PC COM 3 RS485 2W connects PLC The communication parameter of PLC is 9600 E 8 1 Before starting pass through users must set the parameters in MTP project and download the project to HMI 651 Lig WE NTEK Pass Through Function Device Properties Siemens 57 200 HMI PLC type Siemens 7 200 w240 SIEMENS _S _ 200 50 PLC IF RS 485 2
441. s SN2 COM2 set on to retry lana connection paw Rw LB 9503 PLC 2 status SN3 COM2 set on to retry a connection SRW Rw LB 9504 PLC 2 status SN4 COM2 set on to retry a T LB 9505 PLC 2 status SN5 COM2 set on to retry connection LB 9506 PLC 2 status SN6 COM2 set on to retry Bay connection 571 Ly WE INTEK System Reserved Words Bits LB 9507 PLC 2 status SN7 COM2 set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LB 9800 PLC 3 status SNO COM3 set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LB 9801 PLC 3 status SN1 COM3 set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LB 9802 PLC 3 status SN2 COM3 set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LB 9803 PLC 3 status SN3 COM3 set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LB 9804 PLC 3 status SN4 COM3 set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LB 9805 PLC 3 status SN5 COM3 set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LB 9806 PLC 3 status SN6 COM3 set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection LB 9807 PLC 3 status SN7 COM3 set on to retry R W R Y R Y connection 572 Li WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 17 Communication Status with PLC Ethernet f L 2ad R Write LB 9153 auto connection for PLC 4 ethernet when R W R Y R Y ON LB 9154 auto connection for PLC 5 ethernet when R W R Y R Y ON LB 9155 auto connection for PLC 6 ethernet when R W R Y R Y ON LB 9156 auto connection for PLC 7 ethernet when R W R Y R Y ON LB 91
442. s COM port to connect with a remote HMI and read write data from to PLC connected to remote HMI as below PLC COM1 The above shows the PLC is connected with HMI 1 and HMI 1 is connected with HMI 2 via COM port so that HMI 2 can control the PLC through HMI 1 The following are examples of how to use EasyBuilder Pro to create projects used on HMI 1 Master and HMI 2 Slave 635 gt WE NTEK Multi HMI Intercommunication Master Slave Mode 28 1 How to Create a Project of Master HMI The following is the project content of HMI 1 in System Parameter Settings Device Device list Mame Location Device type Interface WF Protocol Local HMI Local HMI Local HM Tix Disable Hira Local PLC 1 FATEE FE Series Local FA TEE FE tenes COM 1 9600 E 7 1 Ratz COM 3 115200 E 8 1 R amp 232 Master slave se Local Master slave se 1 Due to COM 1 of HMI 1 connects PLC the device list must include Local PLC 1 in this case is FATEK FB Series The communication parameters must be set correctly 2 Due to COM 3 of HMI 1 is used to receive commands from HMI 2 a new device must be added Master Slave Server for setting communication properties of COM 3 The picture above shows the parameters of COM 3 115200 E 8 1 and uses RS232 These parameters are not required to be the same as PLC but the Data bits must be set to 8 In general a higher baud rate for COM 2 is recommended for
443. s follows 396 E WE NTEK Macro Reference Single Line Format if lt Condition gt then Statements else Statements end if Example if a 2 then b 1 else b 2 end if Block Format If lt Condition gt then Statements else if lt Condition n gt then Statements else Statements end if Example if a 2 then b 1 else if a 3 then b 2 else b 3 end if 397 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference Syntax description if Must be used to begin the statement lt Condition gt Required This is the controlling statement It is FALSE when the lt Condition gt evaluates to 0 and TRUE when it evaluates to non zero Must precede the statements to execute if the lt Condition gt evaluates to It is optional in block format but necessary in single line format without else The statement will be executed when the lt Condition gt is TRUE Optional The else if statement will be executed when the relative lt Condition n gt is TRUE Optional see lt Condition gt Optional The else statement will be executed when lt Condition gt and lt Condition n gt are both FALSE Must be used to end an if then statement 18 4 4 Selective Statements The select case construction can be used to perform selective group of actions depending on the value of the given variable The actions under the matched case are performed until a break command is read The syntax is as follows Default case free Fo
444. s on the screen touch the center of the sign after all 5 signs are touched disappears and the touch screen parameter will be stored in HMI system 2 After calibration confirm to restore the system password to the default select YES Restore to default password No 04 3 Confirm to restore to default password again by typing yes and clicking OK The project files and history records stored in HMI will all be removed The default password is 111111 However other passwords including download upload passwords have to be reset Project will be removed Confirm by typing yes yes 37 Lid b WE NTEK Hardware Settings Dip Switch Touch screen calibration mode ON Hide system toolbar H H H H Boot loader mode 1234 4 2 2 System Toolbar After rebooting HMI users can set the system with System Toolbar at the bottom of the screen Normally this bar is hidden automatically Only by touching the target at the bottom right corner of the screen will the System Toolbar pops up Nol How to hide HMI System Setting Toolbar EasyBuilder Pro supports the function of using system tag LB 9020 to enable disable system setting bar or set the DIP Switch 2 to ON OFF for activating this function When LB 9020 is set ON the bar is displayed and set OFF to hide the system setting bar When DIP Switch 2 is set ON the system setting bar is disabled and when set OFF the system sett
445. s to 1 Optional Statements to execute when the evaluation is TRUE for next loops may be nested Counter Optional This is used when nesting for next loops 18 4 5 2 while wend Statements The while wend construction is for stepping through an unknown number of iterations A variable is used to test for ending conditions When the condition is TRUE the statements are executed repetitively until the condition becomes FALSE The syntax is as follows while lt Condition gt Statements wend 401 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference Example while a lt 10 a a 10 wend Syntax description while Must be used to begin the statement n Required This is the controlling statement When it is TRUE the loop begins execution When it is FALSE the loop terminates return value Statements to execute when the evaluation is TRUE wend Indicates the end of the while end statements 18 4 5 3 Other Control Commands Used in for next and while wend It skips immediately to the end of the reiterative statement The return command inside the main block can force the macro to stop anywhere It skips immediately to the end of the main block Used in for next and while wend It ends the current iteration of a loop and starts the next one 402 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 5 Function Blocks Function blocks are useful for reducing repetitive codes It must be defined before use and supports any variable
446. s to that of master At this time master and slave keep the same data in the same address Another example below the address and data include 0x10 please notice the change in data format Now if we have 0x10 in MW16 in slave according to this protocol slave will communicate with master immediately and master will put 0x10 in data of corresponding MW 16 the procedure is as following Slave sending ST X 0x02h Master receives STX 0x02h from slave and sending ACK Ox06h to Slave Slave receives ACK Ox06h from master Slave sending data 0x01 0x10 0x10 0x00 0x02 0x10 0x10 0x00 0x10 0x03 0x10 as shown below as Address Low byte Insert 0x10 Bit Address High byte 4 joxo2 Sending byte MW 710 is two bytes 0x10 is low byte in MW10 Insert 0x10 0x00 in high byte 0x10 gt End sign 0x03 0x10 checksum 0x01 0x10 0x10 0x00 0x02 0x10 0x10 0x00 0x 10 0x03 0x10 Master receives data from slave and sending ACK Ox06h to slave Slave receives ACK 0x06h from master 665 Lib WE NTEK Memory Map Communication When finishing communication slave sending the address and content of MW to master at this time master changes data of MW corresponding to that of Slave then master and slave keep the same data in the same address Below is an example for communication between two HMI via MemoryMap First of all create a new project in EasyBuilder Pro Edit System Parameter Setting PLC Device Properties
447. s with both signed and unsigned The priority of these operators is from left to right within the statement lt lt Shifts the bits in a bitset to the A B lt lt 8 left a specified number of positions gt gt Shifts the bits in a bitset to the right a specified number of positions Bitwise Operators Description Exampe a O o Biweano ABO 1 o i ewer fase nooo fewer fame oO O One s complement azs o 394 L WE NTEK Macro Reference Priority of All Operators The overall priority of all operations from highest to lowest is as follows Operations within parenthesis are carried out first Arithmetic operations Shift and Bitwise operations Comparison operations Logic operations Assignment Reserved Keywords The following keywords are reserved for Macro use They cannot be used for variable array or function names gt gt lt lt lt gt and or xor not lt lt gt gt amp 4 exit macro command for to down step next return bool short int char float void if then else break continue set sub end while wend true false SQRT CUBERT LOG LOG10 SIN COS TAN COT SEC CSC ASIN ACOS ATAN BIN2BCD BCD2BIN DEC2ASCII FLOAT2ASCII HEX2ASCII ASCII2DEC ASCII2FLOAT ASCII2HEX FILL RAND DELAY SWAPB SWAPW LOBYTE HIBYTE LOWORD HIWORD GETBIT SETBITON SETBITOFF INVBIT ADDSUM XORSUM CRC INPORT OUTPORT POW GetError GetData Get
448. same as or different from the read address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 173 L WE NTEK Objects Write when button is released If this function is selected the operation is activated at touch up If the function is not selected the operation is activated at touch down Attribute This is used to select the operation mode The available operation modes for selection include Set ON Set OFF Toggle and Momentary Refer to the illustrations in the Set Bit Object section of this chapter for related information Macro Users can execute macro command by trigging toggle switch This function is the same as that of set bit object Please refer to the manual of Chapter 18 Macro Reference of how to create a macro 174 LJ WE NTEK Objects 13 7 Multi State Switch Overview Multi State Switch object is a combination of word lamp object and set word object The object can be used not only to display the state of a word device but also to define a touch area when activated the value of the word device can be set Configuration Switch Object dialog box will appear fill in each items and click OK button a new Multi State Switch object will be created re Click the Multi State Switch icon on the toolbar and the New Multi State 175 Objects General Security Shape Label Description
449. scription Activate after button is released Change full screen window Change common window Display popup window Window no Return to previous window Close window ASCII UNICODE mode Enter O Backspace O Clear fEsc ASCII UNICODE O Window title bar Hard copy screen to USB disk 5D card or printer C Screen hard copy Import user data Use USB Security Key Notfication Enable Function Key object provides the following operation modes Active after button is released If this function is selected the operation is activated when touched and released If the function is not selected the operation is activated once being touched Change full screen window Change base window 165 L WE NTEK Objects NOTE Do not use this function to pop up the window which has been opened by direct indirect window object Change common window Change common window refer to the windows chapter for related information Display popup window Pop up window The pop up window must be on the top of the base window There is a Close this popup window when parent window is closed option with this function see the picture below when the function is selected the pop up window will be closed when executing change base window Otherwise users have to set a Close button on the pop up window to close the window Display popup window Close this
450. ser exe from Utility Manager In Utility Manager current HMI on line will be listed users can simply select the HMI to be watched Please note that Project Port should be the same as Port No used in project file 515 L et WE NTEK Macro Reference Tuty Maanges HMI IP Pevar Typa eMT 3000 SERIES RAMETI Setting al a Hars Pi Wogp Mieg pe s _ iS gt HMI Name Deiauk Hha se 1821687 117 nicola iiih A i Ethernet eSB cable N 192 168 1118 colas 8100 Search 132 168 1131 HT 3105 t rp 1S 189 1 132 e MT2105_tory 192 169 1 1735 Deau HM 1941681 149 Detau HM DatafEvent Log Fie DOF 19 1 18d fad aye lal bl Litiitry EanyGuilder A BasyConertier EacyAcdessviewsr EayPrinbar EanyCegnower Recine Extended Memory Editor B Download Data for SO LEE Deke 5 Download project to HMI to start operating When EasyDiagnoser is unable to get connection with the HMI to be watched it is possible that HMI power is not ON or Port No is incorrect This may cause EasyDiagnoser to connect then disconnect with HMI continuously Please check if the Port No in EasyDiagnoser settings is same as that of the project The way to change it is described before 6 When EasyDiagnoser succeeds in connecting with HMI simply execute macro _1 Output window will then display the output of the TRACE function 516 Lb WE NTEK
451. set correct IP and port number as follows PLE type Free Protocol ka w 1 00 FREE PROTOCOL so PLC I F Ethernet w Use UDF User Datagram Protocol IP 192 168 1 105 Port s02 492 Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference Suppose that HMI will read the data of 4x 1 and 4x 2 on the device First utilize OUTPORT to send out a read request to the device The prototype of OUTPORT is OUTPORT command start device_name cmd_count Since MODBUS RTU device is a MODBUS RTU device the read request must follow MODBUS RTU protocol The request uses Reading Holding Registers 0x03 command to read data The following picture displays the content of the command The items of the station number byte 0 and the last two bytes CRC are ignored Request 0x03 te Starting Address 2 Bytes Ox0000 to OxFFFF Quantity of Registers 1 to 125 Ox7D Response N ED x 2 Bytes N Quantity of Registers Error 0x83 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 Depending on the protocol the content of a read command as follows The total is 8 bytes command 0 station number BYTE 0 command 1 function code BYTE 1 command 2 high byte of starting address BYTE 2 command 3 low byte of starting address BYTE 3 command 4 high byte of quantity of registers BYTE 4 command 5 low byte of quantity of registers BYTE 5 command 6 low byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 6 command 7 high byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 7 So a r
452. setting dialog Disable buzzer Prohibit remote HMI connecting to this machine Disable upload function effective after rebooting HMD ior t LE9033 on Prohibit password remote read operation for t LB9053 on Prohibit password remote write operation for set LBOOS4 on Use a disconnection icon on relative objects when PLC communication fails VN server E Password from project Password 111111 L protection Disable LM remote write via COM port or ethemet LW range 0 99 RV protection Disable RW remote write via COM port or ethernet RW range 0 999 Bas ccest server Login BasyAccess server www dhona net some functions are duplicated from system tag such as Hide system setting bar LB 9020 Hide mouse cursor LB 9018 Disable buzzer LB 9019 Prohibit remote HMI connecting this machine LB 9044 and It means that user can also operate these 60 Ly WE NTEK System Parameter Settings functions via system tag To select a system tag users can tick system tag of the address while adding new object To check all the system tags users can visit Library in EasyBuilder Pro select Tag then System Startup language after redownloading the project Set the language to use when start up HMI after redownloading the project Execute init Macro when power on Designate the macro to be executed when HMI power on Aut
453. setting up MT remote printer System Parameter Settings x Device Model Creneral evstem Setting necurity Font Extended Memory Printen Backup server e Mail Fecipes Use MT Remote Printes Backup Server Note Use KagyPinter to configure PL for printing screen hardcopy and stormg backup data Output sethinges Orientation Horizontal O Vertical Printer size Original size Fit to printer margins Margin o mn 0 gmh 0 m 0 gt mm Commaucation sethinges IPaddress 192 168 1 10 Port 8005 User name 1111111 Password 111111 Setting Description Output settings Orientation Set how will words or pictures be printed out horizontal or vertical Printer size Set to print out in original size or to fit the set printer margins Margin Set the top bottom right and left margin width Communication IP address settings Assign the IP address of a remote printer via network Port User name Password Assign the access information Port can be set from 1 to 65535 Maximum length of user name or password is 12 characters Please refer Chapter 26 Easy Printer for more information 71 Le We NTEK 5 9 e Mail System Parameter Settings Parameters in e Mail tab are for setting up e Mail function Enable e Mail function
454. sfer function Trigger Number of words to address 1 transfer Trigger Offset to the start If the value is n the start address 2 address of PLC address of PLC register is register Trigger address 4 n Trigger The start address of address 3 LW or RW As an example to transfer PLC registers DM100 101 105 to HMI RW10 11 15 follow the steps below 1 Set Trigger address to DM10 2 Set DM11 6 no of words to transfer 3 Set DM12 86 DM10 4 86 DM100 4 Set DM13 10 RW10 5 Set DM10 1 The system will execute the data transfer operation 311 L WE NTEK Objects d Back light control write back Set Trigger address to ON the system will turn on off the backlight and reset the Trigger address Any touch on the screen will turn the backlight on e Back light control This operation is the same as Back light control write back except the system would not reset the Trigger address f Sound control Sound Sound Library Beep Activate the Trigger address the system will play the sound select a sound from sound library for the PLC Control You may configure three different ways to activate the Trigger address 1 State change from OFF to ON OFF gt ON 2 State change from ON to OFF ON gt OFF 3 State change either from ON gt OFF or OFF gt ON g Execute macro program Trigger address
455. sforms a BCD type value source into a binary type value result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main short source result BCD2BIN 0x1234 result result is 1234 source 0x5678 BCD2BIN source result result is 5678 end macro_command DEC2ASCIll source result start len 412 L WE NTEK Macro Reference Description Transforms a decimal value source into ASCII string saved to an array result len represents the length of the string and the unit of length depends on result s type i e if results type is char the size is byte the length of the string is byte len If result s type is short the size is word the length of the string is word len and so on The first character is put into result start the second character is put into result start 1 and the last character is put into result start len 1 Source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Start must be a constant macro_command main short source char result1 4 short result2 4 source 5678 DEC2ASCIll source result1 O 4 result1 0 is 5 result1 1 is 6 result1 2 is 7 result1 3 is 8 the length of the string result1 is 4 bytes 1 4 DEC2ASCIll source result2 0 4 result2 O is 5 result2 1 is 6 result2 2 is 7 result2 3 is 8 the length of the string result2 is 8 b
456. signated address Enter the decimal ASCII value of the character For example if the start code is 255 Oxff and original data read Oxff 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 541 L WE NTEK How to Connect a Barcode Device The data saved in designated barcode device address will be 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 Terminator Terminator means the end of data when terminator is detected it stands for the end of data stream CR LF Ox0a or 0x0d stands for the end of data STX ETX 0x02 or 0x03 stands for the end of data Other User can set the terminator manually None HMI will save all read data to designated address of barcode device After completing all settings described above a new Barcode device will be listed in the Device list Now the barcode device can be selected in PLC type on the object parameters setting dialogue box There are 2 types of address Description type name FLAG 0 indicates the status of data reading When reading Bit FLAG data is complete the status of FLAG 0 will be changed from OFF to ON It will not return to OFF automatically users are free to set base on actual usage BARCODE 0 Number of bytes currently read Word BARCODE BARCODE 1 n Store the data read by barcode device The following is a barcode device setting example the barcode read is 9421007480830 BARCODE 0 is the address of Numeric Display object bytes and er ee BARCOD
457. source 56 8 FLOAT2ASCII Source result O 4 result O is 5 result 1 is 6 result 2 is result 3 is 8 end macro command ASCII2DEC ASCII2DEC source start result len Description Transforms a string Source into a decimal value saved to a variable result The length of the string is len The first character of the string is source start Source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a 414 Lg L O WEINTEK OOOO ooo Macro Reference variable Start must be a constant macro _ command main char source 4 short result source 0 source 1 source 2 source 3 ASCII2DEC source 0 result 4 result is 5678 end macro command ASCII2HEX ASCII2HEX source start result len Description Transforms a string source into a hexadecimal value saved to a variable result The length of the string is len The first character of the string is source start Source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Start must be a constant macro_command main char source 4 short result source 0 source 1 source 2 source 3 ASCII2ZHEX source 0 result 4 result is Ox5678 end macro command 415 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference Name ASCII2FLOAT ASCII2FLOAT source start result len Description Transforms a string Source into a float value saved to a variable result The length of the s
458. ssword Cheat i 1 F uzrl 1 z F user 2 3 i C urs 3 4 E F user 4 5 E C v rs 5 6 F O v r 6 7 C C user 7 o LI L v r 9 m g E ial v r g in E A nell in fal S 3 hi j ml Mizz ieee Class 4 lass B lass T Clase D ee Adyamistrator Secret user User name adi Password 111111 Control address Address lo Li signed Project password MTF tile Enable Setting Select operatable classes for each user When ticking Use existing user accounts on HMI the operable objects for each user will be decided according to HMI setting O General mode Enhanced security mode select operatable classes for each user If not ticking set user account and password as shown below 65 W WE NTEK System Parameter Settings select operatable classes for each user _ Use existing user accounts on HMI No Enable Secret user User name Password Chas A A 1 ri uerl 1 7 E wer 3 3 C C ners 3 4 C C v rt 4 5 C C vars 5 6 C E ur 6 T C E wer T E C E n r E g C C n r g in A q nerf in m ie l s gt Class Description _ A Cls A lass E Class C Chesed Chass E vil Adminstrator Secret v r User name admu Password 111111 Control address PLE name Setting Address n Administrator Select secret users Control address Designate the control address of setting user password
459. ssword confirmation window Please enter you new password password confirm Password match Lib WE NTEK Hardware Settings Time Date m History Setting HMI local time date Clear history data on HMI Recipe Eventlog Datalog Systervsettings OOOO Network Time Date S a Miscellaneous s Firmware setting Rolling button for adjusting LCD brightness Upgrade firmware enable portrait mode WeVerarrcattinas ee Ex TO 40 Lig WE NTEK Hardware Settings e HMI name 1 Enable HMI VNC server set password e HMI name to download upload project 2 Install Java IE or VNC Viewer on PC Sie 3 1 Input remote HMI IP in IE example stad By e http 192 168 1 28 3 2 In VNC Viewer input remote HMI IP and password ne tony_emMt3105 J VEC viewer fox Jaya Microsoft Internat Explorer WEF she Gai DBE A TAIT RHA G Nae Pea km O 2 3 itO E hitp 192 168 1 287 REAL n VHC Vaewer Connection Details sener Encryption Not aup aned SATR DR TET mae VNC Viewer Free Edition 4 1 Copyright C 2002 2004 RealVNC Ltd See httpwwew realvnc com for information on VNC VNC server Remote HMI monitoring and controlling Systemsettngs EL VHC Viewer Connection Details E M X oo oH TimeMate S Gl FHC Authentication No Encryption E m x 41 Lib WE NTEK Hardware Settings aim th See ar Tepdnee G 4 O
460. st below shows variables and its corresponding system reserved address LW varO LW 10000 var1 LW 10001 var2 LW 10002 var3 LW 10003 var4 LW 10004 var5 LW 10005 var6 LW 10006 var LW 10007 var8 LW 10008 var9 LW 10009 var10 LW 10010 vari 1 LW 10011 var12 LW 10012 116 Ly WE NTEK Object General Properties var13 LW 10013 var14 LW 10014 var15 LW 10015 For example varO reads value from LW 10000 when value in LW 10000 is 32 var0 234 32 234 the station number is 32 similarly var13 reads value from LW 10013 when value in LW10013 is 5 var13 234 5 234 117 Lib WE NTEK Object General Properties 9 6 Broadcast Station Number HMI provides two ways for users to enable using broadcast command First is to set it directly in system parameter settings Device tab PLC type Mitmbehi FROSFLOWER I SFX I wFE2 b v1 20 MITSUBISHI_FXON so PLC IF R5485 4W COM COMI 9600 E 7 1 Settings PLC default station mo LWw 20000 16bit va v Default station no use station no variable Use broadcast command gt second way is to use system tag to enable or disable broadcast station number or to change it Corresponding system tags are listed as below LB 9065 disable enable COM 1 broadcast station no LB 9066 disable enable COM 2 broadcast station no LB 9067 disable enable COM 3 broadcast station no LW 9565 COM 1 broadcast station no LW 9566 COM 2 broadcast s
461. st function StringGet is used to read a string from LWO LW19 and store it into the str array The second function StringSet is used to output the content of str array Add ASCII Input and Function Key r objects in window 10 of the project The settings of these objects are shown as below Function Key object is used to execute macro 1 520 L ge WE NTEK Macro Reference FK_0 GO Eee Macro D001 macro 1 z Fead addres PLC name Local HI w Setting Address Wy ta lo Address PLO name Local HMI Device type LW Address f System tag User defined tag ddress Format DDDDD range 0 10799 Index register Ho of word 10 Tag Library Cancel Read address PLC name Local HMI Address Li 50 Addres PLE name Device type Address System tag User defined tag Address Format DDODDD range O 10799 Index register Ho of word 10 Tag Library Cancel 521 iJ gt WE NTEK Macro Reference Lastly compile the completed project and execute Off line or On line simulation Follow the steps below to operate the executing project Step 1 input string GO Test 1 Step 2 press GO button asco co GO Test 1 Step 3 output string 2 In
462. station no variable usage var2 address LW 10003 16bit var3 station no variable usage var3 address LW 10004 16bit var4 station no variable usage var4 address LW 10005 16bit var5 station no variable usage vardS address LW 10006 16bit var6 station no variable usage var6 address LW 10007 16bit var7 station no variable usage var address LW 10008 16bit var8 station no variable usage var8 address LW 10009 16bit var9 station no variable usage var9 address LW 10010 16bit var10 station no variable usage var1 O address LW 10011 16bit var11 station no variable usage var1 1 address LW 10012 16bit var12 station no variable usage var 2 address LW 10013 16bit var13 station no variable usage var1 3 address LW 10014 16bit var14 station no variable usage var1 4 address LW 10015 16bit var15 station no variable usage var1 5 address wnload Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 562 Ly WE NTEK 22 12 Index Register Address Description LW 9200 LW 9201 LW 9202 LW 9203 LW 9204 LW 9205 LW 9206 LW 9207 LW 9208 LW 9209 LW 9210 LW 9211 LW 9212 LW 9213 LW 9214 LW 9215 LW 9230 LW 9232 LW 9234 LW 9236 LW 9238 LW 9240 LW 9242 LW 9244 LW 9246 LW 9248 LW 9250 LW 9252 LW 9254 LW 9256 LW 9258 LW 9260 16bit 16bit 1
463. storical data log use Data Sampling object index to select the right one as shown below Hew Backup Object General Security Shape Label Description Hoce OEW CORW A O Historical event log Historical data log Data Sampling object index 1 Backup position Backup Position Select the destination where the source files will be copied to a SD card or USB Disk The external device connected to HMI b Remote printer backup server To select this users have to enable MT remote printer backup server from Menu gt Edit gt System Parameters gt Printer Backup Server Save format User can select the desired format to back up the file a HMI Event Log File evt HMI Data Log File dtl b Comma Separated Values csv gt Event Log saved as csv file Save format Format MTS000 Event Log File evt v gt Data Log saved as csv file Save format Format MTS000 Data Log File dtl val When back up event log in csv format users can find data fields in EXCEL as below 290 me WE NTEK Objects 0 gt event Is triggered SF Microsoft Excel FL 20101029 2ds 1 gt event is acknowledged 2 gt event returns to normal gel aes eee pai HAD EAO 2 1 Creation time Etn Oct 29 10 59 28 2010 category time message 0 11 19 42 Emergency 5 59 11 19 43 011 19 46 LOW Start from
464. string or char array Example RecipeQuery SELECT FROM TypeA destination or RecipeQuery sql 0 destination SQL statement must start with SELECT FROM followed by recipe name and query condition homme macro_command main 465 Ly LO WEINTEK O O OOOO ooo Macro Reference int total _row 0 char sql 100 SELECT FROM TypeB bool result result RecipeQuery SELECT FROM TypeA total_row Query Recipe TypeA Store the number of records of query result in total_row result RecipeQuery sql 0 total_row Query Recipe TypeB Store the number of records of query result in total_ row end macro_command RecipeQueryGetData RecipeQueryGetData destination recipe address result_row_no Description Get the data in the query result obtained by RecipeQuery This function must be called after calling RecipeQuery and specify the same recipe name in recipe_address as RecipeQuery result_row_no specifies the sequence row number in query result macro_command main int data 0 int total row 0 int row_number 0 bool result_ query bool result_ data result_query RecipeQuery SELECT FROM TypeA total row Query Recipe TypeA Store the number of records of query result in total_ row if result_ query then for row_number 0 to total_ row 1 result_data RecipeQueryGetData data TypeA item_weight row_number next row_number end if 466 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference E en
465. sumniocs 396 18 44 Selective Statement urgencia A E E 398 18 4 5 Reiterative Statements n nsensessessessrssessessssessessessrssessessesseseesessessesressesseseeseess 400 15 9 FUNCION BIOCKS dagaadeespcnse son cesscapaics aeean Seanseesecenecesnacastenepeaancem O E 403 18 6 Buildin Function IO CK eucaro eni E A 406 18 6 1 Mathematical FUNCOMS cicsvsccessadsnavixcnceonttoadcsebsiascaesnadanavarteesanedauawsibedasceusanenenenieres 406 18 6 2 Data Transforma iON eierniie apen nen nE Enei ENNAN TOETAN E Nai I RNT TENTENE ANEN 412 18 6 3 Data Manipala tioN eerusicenirareinn eE N N 417 15267 BIC aM STOMA O en EEA EEE 420 1860 gt COMMING CION aeea E AEE A EET 422 18 6 6 String Operation FUNCIONS sic csssencescmseenasacasahsounsedensaerentcewaqnuaacenaesamenseosineesteeseeuees 439 18 6 7 Recipe Query Functio Mossas E EEE 465 TS 2 VISCO NSO OS a E N meaeencaone 468 18 7 How to Create and Execute a Macro ccesccccssscccessccceeseceeesececssceeaesceeseeceseuecessueceeaeaess 475 18 7 1 How to Create a IVI ACK Oaciccsnnrcesawdvinsscasenins ednaancadevantaarieteyiaaisewvaedebendaedeneteageedvnssdaaend 475 Sia Pecut MAITO oaa A E A E 479 18 8 User Defined Macro FUNCTION cerisier a EEA ETA 480 18 8 1 Import Function Library File seansvazcowixce cones oavtneettacansdsascneandeeourecaastevessasaeoimecnenaens 481 18 8 2 How to Use Macro Function Library esesesseeseseessserssrersserrsseressrreseereseersseersseesseee 482 18 8 3 Function Library
466. sword first Type eMT 3000 SERIES the startup condition Settings Reboot HMI a Connect via USB cable or Ethernet to check the HMI history files information Launch project Ethernet USB cable editor Data Event Log File Information Review the register s range of device types Conversion tool for NEE of supported PLC Data Sampling a Remote printer EasyPrintar Lin ea Memory format Build Download Data for SD USB Disk N conversion and data editing 7 a 3 downloading to HMI Allow PC applications to connect PLC via HMI Tool for analyzing connection between HMI and PLC 17 WE NTEK Utility Manager 2 1 HMI IP Password Utility Manager x Settings When operating HMI via Reset Download o o Ethernet or USB cable users need to designate Upload the password for HMI to PASARA unauthorized access Password Reset Download functions share a set of password while Upload function uses another set Be sure to record any password change otherwise while resetting password to default the project and data on HMI will be completely erased Utility Manager MaA Reboot HMI HMI IP Password There are certain situations that the HMI Type eMT 3000 SERIES _ should reboot for example when updating Reboot HM the files in it Users don t need to cut power Connection while rebooting After rebooting
467. t char dest1 20 bool success success1 StringMid src1 5 6 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 fghijk char src2 20 abcdefghijklmnoparst char dest2 5 bool success2 success2 StringMid src2 5 6 dest2 0 success2 false dest2 remains the same char dest3 20 12345678901234567890 bool success3 success3 StringMid abcdefghijklmnoparst 5 5 dest3 15 success3 true dest3 123456789012345fghij end macro command 451 Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference Name StringLength Description length StringLength source start or length StringLength source Obtain the length of a string It returns the length of source string and stores it in the length field on the left hand side of operator The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start The return value of this function indicates the length of the source string macro_command main char src1 20 abcde int length1 length1 StringLength src1 0 length1 5 char src2 20 a b c d e int length2 length2 StringLength src2 0 length2 20 char src3 20 abcdefghij int length3 length3 StringLength src3 2 length3 8 end macro_command Description success StringCat source start destination start or success StringCat source destination start This function appends sourc
468. t s Properties General Shane Label Profile Position C Pinned E 19l E mize Width 414 hape rectangle size Width 84 S Trajectory Position O na Cancel Shape rectangle size To set the size of the shape Trajectory To set the position of each point on the moving path 219 Li WE NTEK Objects 13 15 Bar Graph Overview Bar graph object displays PLC register data as a bar graph in proportion to its value Configuration Click the Bar Graph icon on the toolbar the Bar Graph dialog box will be shown up fill in each items of settings click OK button a new Bar Graph Object will be created The following picture shows the General tab of the bar graph object Hew Har Graph Object General Outline Shane Deseription i Read address PLE name Lo THN i Setting Address Lw alg BIE Unsigned 220 L WE NTEK Objects Read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the word devices that controls the bar graph display Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 221 Ebene sects The following picture shows the Outline tab of the bar graph object Hew Bar Graph Object _ l PE EEY General Outline Shape Attribute Type Direction Zera Span
469. t The listbox lists all items and highlights the selected one However the drop down list normally displays only the selected item Once the user touches it the system will display a listbox which is similar to the one with Listbox style beneath the object Listbox Drop down list 14 Apr 2009 14 Apr 2009 il 13 Apr 2009 i 12 Apr 2009 11 Apr 2009 10 Apr 2009 13 Apr 2009 12 Apr 2009 11 Apr 2009 10 Apr 2009 09 Apr 2009 w Configuration Click the Option List icon Option List object properties dialog box appears as follows Option list tab 333 Lb WE NTEK Hew Option List Object Option list Mapping Security Shape Label Description Attribute Mode Drop down List Background selection a Direction Down m Source of item data Ttem alles Monitor address PLC name Local HMI v setting Sid ie gt lw o e isht Unsigned Control addres PLC name t Local HM Address Iw F I i Addres set to apie lem data Address 1 item count Item address O ASCII UNICODE The length of each item 5 WORD s PLC name Local HMI a z wl Address iw z a wlio g T a Attribute Mode Select
470. t be enclosed in single a data name quotes Example of some statements using constants macro_command main short A B A and B are variables A 1234 B 0x12 1234 and 0x12 are constants end macro command 18 3 1 2 Variables Variables are names that represent information The information can be changed as the variable is modified by statements Naming Rules for Variables 1 A variable name must start with an alphabet 2 Variable names longer than 32 characters are not allowed 3 Reserved words cannot be used as Variable names There are 8 different Variable types 5 for signed data types and 3 for unsigned data types 391 E WE NTEK Macro Reference boo tit dscrete O Jon ooo fo Taits double word 16 bits word Declaring Variables Variables must be declared before being used To declare a variable specify the type before the variable name Example int a short b switch float pressure unsigned short c Declaring Arrays Macros support one dimensional arrays zero based index To declare an array of variables specify the type and the variable name followed by the number of variables in the array enclosed in brackets Arrays are 1 to 4096 variables in length Macros only support up to 4096 variables per macro Example int a 10 short b 20 switch 30 float pressure 15 Minimum of array index is 0 and maximum of array index is array size 1 Example c
471. t do this _ when first time Ethernet O USB cable i series only Password Set download files to HMI w i Font files Download the font used in project oe v Firmware Font files Wecessary if update firmware or execute download first time Use user defined startup screen The selected files will Fie location D Janeze Ee fie Eeste dre be erased before E V Reset recipe Reset event log Reset data sampling download ng Reboot HMI after download Automatically using current settings to download after compiling v Reboot HMI after download HMI will reboot after downloading v Automatically using current settings to download after compiling If this is checked system will download project to HMI according to last settings Please see illustration below 31 L pt WE NTEK Create an EasyBuilder Pro Project v Automatically using current settings to download after compiling Function Properties The way to enable this function L Display Common Window objects on Base Windows Daw Objects L C Using function key to make shape library object Automatic save and compile when download and simulate 1 Click Function Properties 2 Tick Automatic save and compile when download and simulate Download delete startup screen file EasyHuildersU00 MTF1 10 downloading D Janeaz EB file 06 testpic bmp z z downloading C EB8000434 firrmware com i EB File 3
472. t means the register is LW and the encoding method is BCD address_ offset is the address offset in the PLC For example StringSet read data _1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 represents that the address offset is 5 If address offset uses the format N AAAAA N indicates that PLC s station number is N AAAAA represents the address offset This format is used while multiple PLCs or controllers are connected to a single serial port For example StringSet read data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 2 5 1 represents that the PLC s station number is 2 If SetData uses the default station number defined in the device list it is not necessary to define station number in address _offset The number of registers actually sends to depends on the value of the number of data_count since that send_ data is restricted to char array type of data_count actual number of 16 bit register read data send char 8 bit char 8 bit 1 WORD register 16 bit equals to the size of 2 ASCII characters According to the above table sending 2 ASCII characters is actually writing to one 16 bit register The ASCII characters are stored into the WORD register from low byte to high byte While using the ASCII display object to display the string data stored in the registers data_count must be a multiple of 2 in order to display full string content For example macro_command main char src1 10 abcde StringSet src1 0 Local HMI
473. t will automatically play the next file after finish d Pause Play Switch e Command 4 Parameter 1 ignore set 0 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 Stop playing and close file Command 5 Parameter 1 ignore set 0 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 Start playing at designated target location Command 6 Parameter 1 target location sec Parameter 2 ignore set 0 Parameter 1 target location should less than end time If it is over end time the system play video from last second g Forward Command 7 Parameter 1 target location sec Parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 Increase playing time by Parameter 1 seconds If the system is previously playing video it continues to play after the operation If previously paused it keeps paused 2 If the playing time is over end time the system play video from last second h Backward Command 8 Parameter 1 target location sec 302 L WE NTEK Objects Parameter 2 ignore set 0 1 Decrease playing time by Parameter 1 seconds If the system is previously playing video it continues to play after the operation If previously paused it keeps paused 2 If the playing time is less than start time the system play video from the beginning i Adjust volume Command 9 Parameter 1 volume 0 128 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 Default volume is 128 j Set video display size Command 10 Paramet
474. ta Transfer object will be created 286 L v4 WE NTEK Objects Hew Data Transfer Trigger based Object General Security Shape Label Description spure address PLC name Local HMI s Setting Address piw Destination address PLC name Local HMI w Setting Address A ttabute No of word Mode E te j Trigeer mode ON OFF Trigger address PLC name se Setting Address Source address Set source address of data transfer Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of Source address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Destination address Set the destination address of data transfer Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of Destination address Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 287 WA WE NTEK Objects Attribute No of words The number of words to be transferred from source to destination Set the trigger mode of data transfer Mode a Touch trigger Press the object to activate data transfer operation b External trigger Register a bit device to trigger the data transfer operation ON OFF Bit device change from ON to OFF to activate data transfer operation OFF ON Bit
475. tates 1 Frame Step 3 Likewise create another Shape state by the same process as in Step 2 but this new graph has to be defined as state 1 Saye to Shape Library Shape library TEST Description Untitled Shape no 0 C Inner Width 77 Height 73 Frame undefined Inner undefined 358 iz WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Librar A complete Shape with two states is created See the following picture ae sue TET 359 E WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Librar 14 2 Creating Picture Library Click the Call up Picture Library button in toolbar and the Picture Library dialogue appears JEB J Call up Picture Library j Al Picture Library Library 1 button 64 2 button2_64 3 button3_64 4 button4_64 ORe iGreen BYelow States 2 States 2 States 2 12342 bytes 12342 bytes 12342 bytes 12342 bytes BMP 64x64 BMP 64x64 BMP 64x64 BMP 64x64 State 0 State 11 5 Lamp Green 6 Lamp Yellow 7 Lamp Blue States 2 States 2 States 2 States 2 12342 bytes 12342 bytes 12342 bytes 12342 bytes BMP 64x64 BMP 64x64 BMP 64x64 BMP 64x64 Background Select Lib New Lib Unattach Lib Rename Export OK Import Picture Modify Picture Delete allStates Delete cur state More picture libraries Insert Before Insert After Setting Description Library Picture
476. tation no LW 9567 COM 3 broadcast station no 118 Lid WE NTEK User Password and Object Security Chapter 10 User Password and Object Security Two modes of setting user passwords in EasyBuilder Pro 1 General Mode 2 Enhanced Security Mode Object security includes 1 User password and corresponding operable object classes 2 Security settings of each object 10 1 User Password and Operable Object Classes System Parameter Settings Security The Security Mechanism in EasyBuilder Pro includes two modes General Mode and Enhanced Security Mode 10 1 1 General Mode Password should be digits from 0 to 9 and up to 12 sets of user password are available There are seven security levels classified from A to F and includes none Once password is entered the objects that the user can operate are classified For example below User 1 can only operate objects with classes A C and none 119 Ly WE NTEK User Password and Object Security System Parameter Settings Extended Memory Printer Backup Server eMal Recipes Device Model General System Setting Security Font General mode Enhanced security mode Select operatable classes For each user Mao Enable Password Class ClassB Class Clase 0 Class E F E OHOOOOOOOC EIRIEIEIEIE EE ARANAGA M ACACA ARAMAMA AIA SIS SIS SEES Ei O oo w a oT E ad Fat a 120
477. te a Macro There are several ways to execute a macro a With a PLC Control object 1 Open the PLC Control object and set the attribute to Execute macro program 2 Select the macro by name Choose a bit and select a trigger condition to trigger the macro The macro will continue to be re triggered as long as the condition is met In order to guarantee that the macro will run only once consider latching the trigger bit and then resetting the trigger condition within the macro 3 Use a Set Bit or Toggle Switch object to activate the bit b With a Set Bit or Toggle Switch object 1 On the General tab of the Set Bit or Toggle Switch dialog select the Execute Macro option 2 Select the macro to execute The macro will execute one time when the button is activated c With a Function Key object 1 On the General tab of the Function Key dialog select the Execute Macro option 2 Select the macro to execute The macro will execute one time when the button is activated Macro Execution Conditions 1 Periodical Execution Macro will be triggered periodically 2 Execute one time when HMI starts Macro will be executed once when HMI starts up 479 me WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 8 User Defined Macro Function When editing Macro to save time of defining functions user may search for the needed from built in Macro Function Library However certain functions though frequently used may not be found there In this case
478. the picture below Vert interval second is According to these settings the system will calculate the number of vertical grid line automatically Time Scale To enable the time scale on the bottom of trend display Format To select time scale as HH MM or HH MM SS Font To select font style Size To select font size Recommend use font size 8 N ih eS a ar ee ee ae j 4 j f f th J HH MM HH MM HH MM HH MM HH MM HH MM HH MM 239 Re WE NTEK Objects Time Date The time of latest sampling data will be marked on the top left corner of the object It is used to set the time display format and color The picture below shows the attribute of channel tab Trend Display Objects Properties j a General Trend Channel Shape Profile Data sampling object Chamel Display Description Data type 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit BLD 16 bit BLD 32 bit Unsigned 32 bit Unesiened 32 bit Float 32 bit Float Channel Fen property Color PLL name Local HMI t Setting Address Lu Channel Set each sampling line s format and color and the display data s low limit and high limit The max channel can up to 64 channels Limit uncheck Dynamic limits Zero Span Zero and Span are used to set the low limit and high limit of sampling data So if the low limit is
479. the status of the assigned address is set ON sampling will be paused until the status of assigned address returns to OFF Hold address Enable PLE name Setting History files History Files Save to HMI Save to HMI memory Save to SD card ve D mplin save Data Sa PING to Save to USB disk HMI only when its size eae Folder name reaches 4kb or use LB 9034 to force v Preservation limit Days of preservation day s storing data Save to SD card USB disk Save Data Sampling to the specified external device Folder name Specify Data Sampling file name which must be in ASCII characters The folder name will be written as Storage Location Folder Name yyyymmdd dtl 98 Lig WE NTEK Data Sampling Preservation limit Days of preservation davis This determines how many days the data to be preserved 2 days means the data of yesterday and the day before yesterday will be kept Data not built in this period will be deleted to prevent the storage space from running out EX if today were July 1st data of June 30th and June 29th will be preserved and data of June 28th be deleted Note Jj When running simulation on PC all data sampling will be saved to the datalog folder which is under the directory of Storage location 99 Ly WE NTEK Data Sampling 8 3 System Registers Relevant to Data Sampling EasyBuilder Pro provides the following system registers for data sampl
480. tically Window No 7 Password Restriction lf user attempts to control an object without authorization this window may pop up as a warning or not depending on how this object is set originally Window No 8 Storage Space Insufficient When HMI built in memory USB disk or SD card run out of storage space this message window will pop up automatically When system detects that memory space left is under 4MB 80 Ly WE NTEK Window Operations Users can use system address tags to view the free memory space in HMI USB disk or SD card device LW 9072 HMI current free space K bytes LW 9074 SD current free space K bytes LW 9076 USB current free space K bytes For checking which device is insufficient in space while the insufficiency occurs the following system address tags can be used LB 9035 HMI free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 9036 SD card free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 9037 USB free space insufficiency alarm when ON The text shown on windows no 5 8 can be adjusted by users to fit what is needed making the message easier to be understood by the operators wA screen can display 16 pop up windows simultaneously in maximum N el cm including System Message Window Direct Window and Indirect Window mA window can only be displayed once simultaneously That is users cannot use 2 Direct Indirect windows to open the same window on one base window at the same time m
481. tification bit that system set value to Users can also set the address in the Notification area 179 L WE NTEK Objects When this function is selected the state of the designated bit device can be set before after the operation is completed There are ON and OFF selection to set the state Before writing After writing Set the state of the designated register before or after write to the word device Watch address When sliding the current value can be displayed in real time fashion 180 Lb WE NTEK Objects Hew Slider Object General Outline Security Shape Attubute Direction ight _ Resolution 1 LowHish limit Constant Address Address Li ae o I 16 bit Unsigned Increment 10 slider button type Width 20 Attribute Direction The bar on the slide direction i e left right up and down UP down Resolution To specify the scale value of the slider if N is the specified minimum scale value when N 10 the numerical display shows only multiples of 10 N 5 the numerical display shows only multiples of 5 N 1 the numerical display shows only multiples of 1 181 Low limit amp High limit a Constant The low limit and high limit of the word device is set as constant value i e Input low and Input high b Address The low high limit of the word device is controlled by a designated
482. tion Pig amano Sa equere Eee eee 487 Lb WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 8 3 3 Modify a Function 1 Users can modify the functions Macro Function Libre i A Function Name exist in the Library nt ADD int nt int SUBS int int int MUL int int 2 Select a function to modify by Se eed clicking Edit to enter Function Editor this is a macro about square New Delete ff Edit L Export import 3 Double click on the function to be mes modified can also enter Function AA aa Editor i E Modify Function Name and 4 After modifying Compile then i Definition Here Save before leaving 4 lin i M Click the right mouse button to display edit menu Edit description here This is the function of A B Modify Function Description 0 error s 1 Compile _SeriseTFN 488 Lb WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 8 3 4 Import a Function aaa int ADD int int int SUBS int int int MUL int int int DIV int int 1 Functions can be imported using short test short an external mlb file this is a macro about square News Delete Edit 2 EX To import a function library math mlb which contains a function test1 G J CAAEBPro library Organize New Folder 3 Click Open oe Fovostes Name Date modified BE Decktop rcs 2011 1013
483. tion Functions Description StringGet read_data start device_name device_type address_ offset data_count Receives data from the PLC The String data is stored into read_data start read_data start data_count 1 read_data must be a one dimensional char array Data_count is the number of received characters it can be either a constant or a variable Device_name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks and this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters as follows see FATEK KB Series oy stem Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Printen Backup Server Device Model General evstem seething SECUI Device list Mame Location Device tne Local HMI Local HMI Local MT60561 220 x Disable Ma N A Local er MODBUS RTU Local Free Frotocol COMI ES 0 Remote Po FATEE FE beres EemotdP 210 68 117 2 FATEE FE Seres COMI ES Device_type is the device type and encoding method binary or BCD of the PLC data For example if device _type is LW_BIN it means the register is LW and the encoding method is binary If use BIN encoding method _BIN can be ignored If device_type is LW_BCD it means the register is LW and the encoding method is BCD Address _offset is the address offset in the PLC For example StringGet read_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 represents that the address offset is 5 If address offset uses th
484. tion state with PLC station no 0 and LB9201 indicates the connection state with PLC station no 1 and LB 9200 SO on LB 9455 When ON indicates connection state is normal When OFF indicates disconnection with PLC Set ON again the system will then try to connect with PLC These local registers indicate the connection states with PLC through COM2 LB9500 indicates the connection state with PLC station no 0 and LB 9500 LB9501 indicates the connection state with PLC station no 1 and LB 9755 so on When ON indicates connection state is normal When OFF indicates disconnection with PLC Set ON again the system will then try to connect with PLC These local registers indicate the connection states with PLC through COMS3 LB9800 indicates the connection state with PLC station no 0 and LB 9800 LB9801 indicates the connection state with PLC station no 1 and LB 10055 SO On When ON indicates connection state is normal When OFF indicates disconnection with PLC Set ON again the system will then try to connect with PLC 639 Ly WE NTEK Multi HMI Intercommunication Master Slave Mode 28 3 How to Connect with MT500 Project of Slave HMI EasyBuilder Pro Master Slave Protocol enables MT500 to exchange data with eMT3000 local data via the connected PLC m EBPro Settings 1 Select Master Slave System Parameter Settin Server driver and click Settings If a Interface P
485. to display the state of a bit device but also to define a touch area when activated the state of the bit device will be set to ON or OFF Configuration Click the Toggle Switch icon on the toolbar and the New Toggle Switch Object dialog box will appear fill in each item and press OK button a new toggle switch object will be created 172 L WE NTEK Objects Hew Tozgzrle Switch Object General Security Shape Label Deseription Read address PL name Local HMI Address LB ji 4 10 F3 Invert sisal Write address PLO name toca HMI i y _ Setting Address LB ae lo r Write when button is released Attribute pan Switch style Toggle Macra Execute macro OK Read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the bit device that control the display of toggle switch state Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Invert signal Display shape with inverse state for example the present state is OFF but it displays the shape of ON state Write address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the bit device that system set value to The write address can be the
486. tory control is used to select the designated history data files for display In case the value of history control is 0 the latest file is selected If it is 1 the second latest file is selected and so on Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of History control Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Hew History Data Display Object General Data Format Title Shane _ Channel Channel Channel 7 Channel 0 16 bit Unsigned Left of decimal Ft IE E l Right of decimal Ft 0 w Display Center C Leading zero Chamel 1 16 bit BCD J _ Display Channel 2 22 bit Unsigned Display Channel 32 bit Float _____ 3 character no 4 eA Right of decimal Pt 0 e Center a Leading zero E __ox__ Cancel 246 Ly WE NTEK Objects Each history data display object can display up to 64 channels You can select the channels which you want to watch on the screen In the example below there are four channels in the data sampling object Ch 0 and Ch 3 are selected for display only The data format of each channel is decided by the related data sampling objects E 32 2 2243 09 16 09 07 22 1 22 43 08 16 09 07 I2 When display String format in history data display object users may choose a Display in UNICODE mode b Reverse
487. tring is len The first character of the string is source start Source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Start must be a constant macro_command main char source 4 float result source O 5 source 1 6 source 2 source 3 8 ASCII2ZFLOAT source 0 result 4 result is 56 8 end macro command 416 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 6 3 Data Manipulation FILL source start preset count Description Sets the first count elements of an array Source to a specified value preset source and start must be a variable and preset can be a constant or variable macro_command main char result 4 char preset FILL result O 0x30 4 result O is 0x30 result 1 is 0x30 result 2 is 0x30 result 3 is 0x30 preset 0x31 FILL result O preset 2 result O is 0x31 result 1 is 0x31 end macro_command SWAPB SWAPB source result Description Exchanges the high byte and low byte data of a 16 bit source into result Source can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable macro_command main short source result SWAPB 0x5678 result result is Ox7856 source 0x123 SWAPB source result result is Ox2301 end macro_command 417 E WE NTEK Macro Reference Name SWAPW SWAPW source result Description Exchanges the high word and low word data of a 32 bit source into result Source can be a constant or
488. trol No of Data and Offset It is recommended to use offset to start address for data block display with multiple channels and the same device type You can register Control No of Data and Offset in continuous address for 258 L WE NTEK Objects each channel The system will read the control words of all the channels in one read command and it shall soeed up the response time Please refer to the following picture The control words of channel 1 is located from address 0 the control words of channel 2 is located from address 3 there are continuous address and the system will read all the control words in one read command Address Channel 1 Channel 2 __Offset mm Channel 1 s data n Channel 2 s data n How to use watch Cursor Line feature Cursor line Enable Color es PLC name Local HMI as Device type LW v Address 1 You may use the Watch function to check the value of any point in trend curve When operator touches the data block object it will display a Cursor line the system will write the index and value of that data in cursor line to the designated address The user shall register NI objects with the designated address The operator shall be able to observe the numeric value in across with the cursor line 259 Wa WE NTEK Objects In the following example the data block display contains two data blocks The data format of channel 1 is 16 bit BC
489. type Size Setting the size of the item Display width Setting the width to display the item Decimal Pt Setting the decimal place Alignment setting the alignment 75 WE NTEK System Parameter Settings All the item information can be user defined and modified Recipes Item Information Mame Display Type Item size WORD Display width Chars Right of decimal Pt Alignment Delete Delete the selected items For further information please refer to Chapter 24 Recipe Database Editor 76 Lib WE NTEK Window Operations Chapter 6 Window Operations A window is a basic element in a project With a window all kinds of information like objects pictures and text can be shown on HMI screen 1997 windows numbered from 3 1999 in EasyBuilder Pro can be built and edited 6 1 Window Types There are 4 types of windows each with different functions and usages 1 Base Window 2 Fast Selection Window 3 Common Window 4 System Message Window 6 1 1 Base Window The most frequently used window used as m main screen m background for other windows m keyboard window m pop up window for function key object m pop up window for direct window and indirect window objects m screen saver The screen simulation shown on the right is a Base Window Base window should be in the same size as the HMI screen Therefore the Nore J resolution of base window and HMI shou
490. u select 16 bit data format the address of each data will be start address start address 1 start address 2 and so on If you select 32 bit data format the address of each data will be start address start address 2 start address 4 and so on 252 W WE NTEK Objects Limit Set the minimum and maximum limit of trend curve the trend curve is limited by the minimum and maximum limit Data Block Display Objects Properties General Display Area Shape Profile Data samples 50 ra samples to scroll Enable scroll swatch Profile color Transparent Frame Horiz 5 divisionis Channel Channel 0 Pen properhy Color a Data samples Set the data samples samples to scroll frame and color of background Datasamples SO Samples to scroll 10 Enable roll ewacth Profile color Transparent Fone es Beckzround gt 253 Lib WE NTEK Objects Enable background Grid Disable Grid L WE NTEK Objects Channel Set the color and width of each trend curve Channel Channel 0 Ea Fen property Color Width 1 I eT 255 Ly WE NTEK Objects On line operation How to show a trend curve a Write the number of data to No of data address i e control word address 1 b Have the content of data block ready for display NOTE data block start from co
491. uest s quantity of registers at MODBUS server ethernet pe Rl 566 Ly WE INTEK System Reserved Words Bits a a a LW 9542 LW 9543 LW 9544 16bit MODBUS ASCII server station no R W R Y R Y ethernet LW 9572 32bit received data count bytes COM 2 MODBUS server LW 9574 32bit received data count bytes COM 3 MODBUS server LW 9576 32bit received data count bytes Ethernet MODBUS server LW 9570 32bit received data count bytes COM 1 MODBUS server 567 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 15 Communication Parameters Settings Read R Write W Control Y Description Local MACRO RADO ae LB 9030 update COM 1 communication parameters set ON LB 9031 update COM 2 communication parameters set o EJE LB 9032 a COM 3 communication parameters set Rw Re LB 9065 disable enable COM1 broadcast station no LB 9066 disable enable COM2 broadcast station no se ee LB 9067 disable enable COMS3 broadcast station no RW RY RY LW 9550 16bit COM 1 mode 0 RS232 1 RS485 ee 2W 2 RS485 4W LW 9551 16bit COM 1 baud rate 7 1200 8 2400 0 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 R W R Y R Y 38400 4 57600 LW 9552 16bit COM 1 databits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits R Y R Y Address 5 P3 Z P3 S JBE LW 9553 16bit COM 1 parity O none 1 even 2 odd RIY RIY 3 mark 4 space LW 9554 16bit COM 1 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits RIY R Y LW 9555 16bit
492. ulate the pointer s indication position For example supposed that Zero 0 Span 100 when the value of register is 30 and Start degree 0 End degree 360 then the degree indicated by pointer is 30 Zero Span Zero End degree Start degree 30 0 100 0 360 0 108 230 W WE NTEK Objects Pointer will indicate the position of 108 degrees See the picture below Range limit To set the value of low and high limit the display color width of the sign of low high limit Below illustration use above setting to display the range mark 30 o N user defined radius P onm Enable f Low BE Mid ls High Go s wat Uss userdefined radios 80S Range limits 0 10 H Enable Low E Mi F Hish S H m 75 00 25 00 Width 10 Use user defined radius 30 40 00 231 Lg WE NTEK Objects Dynamic Limits uncheck When Dynamic limits is not selected the low limit and high limit are fixed value which directly comes from the settings See the example below the low limit is 30 and high limit is 60 C Dynamic limits Low limit High limit Dynamic Limits checked When Dynamic limits is selected the low limit and high limit are decided by the register Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register for Dynamic limits Users can also set address in Lim
493. und users should put neither direct window nor indirect window in it 313 Li WE NTEK Objects 13 28 Schedule Overview Schedule object is used to turn on off a bit or write a value to a word device at designated time The time schedule setting is very flexible it can be on daily basis or weekly basis For more advance application you can use a table a block of word devices to set start and terminate time then update the table at any scheduled time Configuration Click the Schedule icon on the toolbar and the Scheduler list dialog box Toe will appear press the New the schedule object dialog box will appear as shown below Scheduler 314 ached aler General Time Set Prohibit Description Scheduler 1 7 Power OM startend action Acton mode E Bit ON O Bit OFF Cy Word write Acton address PLO name Local HMI iy Setting Address LG y 100 Cancel Example 1 The motor is scheduled to be power ON at 8 00 and power off at 17 00 Monday to Friday Here we use LB100 to control the motor Follow the steps to set up the schedule object 315 Lid WE NTEK Objects When the designated Start running start time is reached When the designated Stop running stop time is reached Click New to add a new object General tab Power ON start end action Detail message please refer to below
494. upported For HP PCL Series it has to be connected through USB interface while other printers through COM port For more information please refer to Chapter 23 HMI Supported Printers HF PCL Series OSB yw None SE M D E F EPSON EsCyPo Series HF FCL series UB xiohm A630 SPRT sP DITI DIY D5 D6 4 DN Ti EPSON TM L90 BRIGHTEE WH E19 BRIGHTEE WH CLC2 Using COM port to connect printer users should set accurate parameters When the type of printer is SP M D E F the pixels of width has to be set accurately i e the set pixel s can not exceed printer s default setting Otherwise this printing won t succeed Printer Type lati COM Baud rate Data bits Parity Stop bits Pixels oF width pixels Screen hard copy scale 100 we 100 pixels For 1610 type or 220 pixels For 2407 4004 type 56 Ly WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 3 General Parameters in General tab determine all properties related to screen display gt yslem Parameter setings i Extended Memory i Printen Backup Server e Mail Recipes Device Model General System Setting Security Font Fast selection button Attribute Enable w Settings Position Left C Hide button when HMI starts PCIERT Saver Back leht saver None E7 minute 3 Screen saver None ge minte
495. ure after the setting is completed Prewiew EE E Background me et 109 Ly WE NTEK Object General Properties 9 3 Setting Text Content Go to Label tab while adding new object to set the text content as shown below New Bit Lamp Object SS i j m General Security Shape Label Use label Use label library Use bitmap Font State bi E Font Ad Attribute Color al Size 16 khe Align Blink Mone Ikalic Underline Duplicate these attributes to Every state Movement Direction Continuous Speed Content test l Duplicate this label to every state Use label Check Use label and click Label Library button to add and edit the text EasyBuilder Pro supports Windows true font 110 Lib WE NTEK Object General Properties Use label library Check Use label library to choose a label tag that exists in Label Library as shown below Use label brary Label tag NONAME v Label Library Label Library Note About all the settings in Label Library please refer to the illustrations in Chapter 15 Label Library and Multi Language Usage for details Font Select font style from font list EasyBuilder Pro supports Windows true font as shown below Color Select the text color Size Sele
496. ut the system will return to initial state current user can only operate class none objects User name 3 LW9219 Password 333 wz bit 15 bit 0 Current status 0000000000000000 LW9222 Logout LB9050 Class B Button Class C Button Lii 131 User Password and Object Security L WE NTEK m Password input If the password is incorrect LB 9060 will be set to ON if N ml i the password is correct LB 9060 will return OFF User 1 12 password can be read from system registers LW 9500 LW 9522 24 words in total m Change password when HMI is in operation When LB 9061 turns from OFF to ON data in LW 9500 LW 9522 can be used to update user password and use the new password in the future The user operable object classes will not change due to the change of password 132 WE NTEK Index Register Chapter 11 Index Register 11 1 Introduction EasyBuilder Pro provides 32 Index Registers for users to change addresses flexibly With Index Register users can update object s read write address without changing its content while HMI is running the project Address Address LW15 f LWO E a a gt Wn a w25 Laasassras I There are 32 Index Registers PLC name listed below 16 bit Index Register Index 0 LW 9200 16 bit Index 15 LW 9215 16 bit Device type Address fEyy a201 16bit Address format 2202 16bit ad
497. value in Upper limit Attribute Set Style Press and hold increment JOG v Inc value 1 Upper limit 10 JOG delay 1 0 second s y JOG speed 0 5 second s Ka E Press and hold increment JOG Press and hold decrement function When the touch and hold gets longer than the time set in JOG delay the value of the word device will be subtracted by the value set in Dec value at the speed set in JOG speed and the result won t go less than the value in Bottom limit 158 W WE NTEK Objects Attribute pet Style Press and hold decrement JOG v Dec value 1 j A Bottom limit 0 JOG delay 1 0 second s JOG speed 0 5 second s s E Periodical JOG Periodically increment function A set word object can use the interval set in Time interval and the value set in Inc value to automatically increase the value of the word device and the result won t exceed the value in Upper limit Attribute set Style Periodic JOG up gt 0 gt up gt v Inc value 1 Upper limit 0 Time interval D second s il Automatic JOG Periodically increment function A set word object can use the interval set in Time interval and the value set in Inc value to automatically increase the value of the word device and the result won t exceed the value in Upper limit A thribiute eetetvle Automatic JOG tup to high limit Wt ee a eT Time
498. value in LWO as a start point and value in LW1 as an end Example if value in LWO is 1 and LW1 3 the displayed data will start from No 1 and include 3 history data No 1 No 2 No 3 EIEL 20100604 No 4 IEE EV 3 EAEL 20100605 No 3 HEB EV ize EIEL 20100608 No 2 17KB EVITA EIEL 20100609 No 1 AEE EVT EIEL 20100610 No 0 1I2EBR EVT 43 The maximum size of data that can be displayed by system is 4MB the exceeding part will be ignored The following shows how data will be stored while the data size is too big Example a 5 history data each with a size of 0 5MB gt The size of data to be displayed will be 5 x 0 5MB b 5 history data each with a size of 1MB gt The size of data to be displayed will be 4 x 1MB c 5 history data each with a size of 1 5MB gt The size of data tobe displayed will be 2 x 1 5MB 1 x 1MB partial Definition 1 To select confirmed or recovered events to be displayed or hidden 2 In Real time mode select events to be deleted Illustration Control address Address yy a 16 bit Unsigned Enable event management 282 i WE NTEK Objects If the address of History control is set LW100 1 When the value in LW100 0 is 0 gt All events will be displayed 2 When the value in LW100 0 is 1 gt The confirmed events will be hidden 3 When the value in LW100 0 is 2 gt The recovered events will be hidden 4 When the value in LW100 0 is 3 gt
499. value is 0 it means reading fails in executing INPORT 494 iw WE NTEK Macro Reference Depending on the protocol response 1 must be equal to 0x3 if the response is correct After getting correct response calculate the data of 4x_1 and 4x_2 and put in the data into LW100 and LW101 of HMI if return_ value gt 0 and response 1 0x3 then read_data 0O response 4 response 3 lt lt 8 4x_1 read_data 1 response 6 response 5 lt lt 8 4x 2 setData read_data 0 Local HMI LW 100 2 end if The complete macro is as follows Read Holding Registers macro_command main char command 32 response 32 short address checksum short read_no return_value read_data 2 i FILL command 0 0 32 initialize command 0 command 31 to 0 FILL response 0 0 32 command 0 0x1 station number command 1 Ox3 read holding registers function code is 0x3 address 0 address O starting address 4x_1 is 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 read no 2 the total words of reading is 2 words HIBYTE read_no command 4 LOBYTE read_no command 5 CRC command 0 checksum 6 calculate 16 bit CRC LOBYTE checksum command 6 495 L WE NTEK Macro Reference HIBYTE checksum command 7 OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 send request INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 9 return_value read response if return_ value gt 0 and response 1
500. vated the bit device will be set to OFF Toggle When the operation is activated the bit device will be set from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON Momentary When touch and hold the area the bit device will be set to ON and the bit device will be set to OFF once the finger removes from area Periodical toggle The state of the bit device will be switched between ON and OFF periodically Operation s time interval can be selected in the combo box showed in the picture below See PRAH ERE ST ART 153 L WE NTEK Objects set ON when window When the window containing the Set Bit object is opened the Set OFF when When the window containing the Set Bit object is opened the set ON when window When the window containing the Set Bit object is closed the set OFF when When the window containing the Set Bit object is closed the set ON when When the backlight is turned on the bit device is automatically backlight on set ON set OFF when When the backlight is turned on the bit device is automatically backlight on set OFF set ON when When the backlight is turned off the bit device is automatically backlight off set ON set OFF when When the backlight is turned off the bit device is automatically backlight off set OFF Macro Users can use set bit object to activate macro commands Macro commands have to be built before configure this function Please refer to Chapter 18 Macro Reference for more information Set
501. verting the uploaded Data Sampling and Event Log history files stored in binary mode to CSV files automatically Users requesting this function have to prepare a Convert Batch File to provide EasyPrinter with the information of how to convert the history files eMT 3000 Backup atl Ethernet evt l d EasyPrinter Convert Batch File EasyConverter As shown in the illustration above the conversion is actually carried out by EasyConverter EasyPrinter simply follows the criteria in Convert Batch File and activates EasyConverter with proper arguments to achieve the conversion NOTE f 18 EasyConverter is another Win32 application converting history data into CSV or MS Excel xls files Users can find it in the EasyBuilder Pro installation directory 19 Users requesting this function must ensure EasyPrinter and EasyConverter are placed in the same directory 26 4 1 The Default Convert Batch File The following is the default Convert Batch File included in the EasyBuilder Pro software package The default Convert Batch File convert2csv def 1 dtl EasyConverter c PathName There are two lines of text in the file Each line has two arguments separated by a comma and forms a criterion of how to deal with a specific type of files e g Data Sampling and Event Log history files The first argument specifies the extension name for the type of the files to be processed and the second one specif
502. vice type and encoding method binary or BCD of the PLC data For example if device _type is LW_ BIN it means the register is LW and the encoding method is binary If use BIN encoding method BIN can be ignored If device_type is LW_BCD it means the register is LW and the encoding method is BCD address_ offset is the address offset in the PLC For example SetData read_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 represents that the address offset is 5 If address offset uses the format N AAAAA N indicates that PLC s station number is N AAAAA represents the address offset This format is used while multiple PLCs or controllers are connected to a single serial port For example SetData read_data_1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 2 5 1 represents that the PLC s station number is 2 If SetData uses the default station number defined in the device list it is not necessary to define station number in address _offset 432 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference The number of registers actually sends to depends on both the type of the send_data variable and the value of the number of data_count type of actual number of data_count read_data 16 bit register send char 8 bit a char 8 bit Poe bool 8 bit Sg bool 8 bit a short 16 bit a short 16 bit Poe int 32 bit pg int 32 bit z float 32 bit a float 32 bit 2 When a SetData is executed using a 32 bit data type int or float the function
503. w hrut 0 High imit 100 Reference linel 20 Reference line 2 40 Reference line 2 al Eu Reference lined 80 You may also use PLC address to define high and low limit 273 Lg WE NTEK Objects Reference line Limit from FLE PLE name Local HMI Ww Setting Address Liw we bo o 16 bit Unsigned Reference line 1 Reference line 2 Reference line 3 Reference line 4 Note XY Plot can be drawn repeatedly up to 32 times 1 channel 32 times 2 channels 16 times The way to calculate 32 divided by the number of channels 274 Lv WE NTEK Objects 13 21 Alarm Bar and Alarm Display Overview Alarm bar and Alarm display objects are used to display alarm messages Alarm messages are those events registered in the Event log and meet trigger conditions Alarm bar and Alarm display objects display these alarms in order of priority and triggering time Alarm bar object scroll all alarm messages in one line alarm display object displays alarm messages in multi line and each line represents one alarm message The following pictures show that the alarm message are displayed in alarm display and alarm bar objects Refer to the Event Log chapter for related information Alarm bar object FSiFZi0G 13 21 38 Event 2 when LB10 ON FSiFZi0G 13 21 38 Event 3 when LBTI ON 13112106 13 21 38 Event 0 when LWO 100 13 12106 13 21 38 Event 1 When LW f gt 10 Alarm dis
504. will automatically send int format or float format data to the device For example macro_command main float f 2 6 SetData f MODBUS 6x 2 1 will send a floating point value to the device end macro_command macro_command main int i bool a true bool b 30 short c false short d 50 inte 5 int f 10 433 Lg WE NTEK Macro Reference for i 0 to 29 b i true next i for i 0 to 49 dli i 2 next i fori 0to9 f i i 3 next i set the state of LB2 SetData a Local HMI LB 2 1 set the states of LBO LB29 SetData b 0 Local HMI LB 0 30 set the value of LW2 SetData c Local HMI LW 2 1 set the values of LWO LW49 SetData d 0 Local HMI LW 0 50 set the values of LW6 LW7 note that the type of e is int SetData e Local HMI LW 6 1 set the values of LWO LW19 10 integers equal to 20 words since each integer value occupies 2 words setData f 0 Local HMI LW O 10 end macro_command SetDataEx send_data start device name device_type address_offset 434 E WE NTEK Macro Reference data_count or setDataEx send data device_name device_type address _ offset 1 Description Send data to the PLC and continue executing next command even if no response from this device Descriptions of send_data device_name device_type address _ offset and data_count are the same as SetData macro_c
505. will be created The picture below shows the General tab in the Meter Display Object s Properties dialog box Hew Meter Display Object pm 7 General Quiline Limits Shape Description Read address v _ Setting fi6 bit Unsigned Address Le 7 Cancel 226 Li WE NTEK Objects Read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the word devices that controls the display of meter Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Hew Meter Display Object General Outline Limits Shape Degree Start degree 0 Backeround Backeround 2 Fin port Fadivs i Inner Circle O Rectangle Cancel In the above dialog box users can set the meter display object s outline Refer to the picture below for the names of each part of the meter 227 Pange mark Tick mark Corrdinate Pin point Degree Set the object s start degree and end degree the angle range is 0 360 degrees The following pictures show several results of different settings Start degree 290 End degree 70 2 Start degree 120 End degree 240 Q Start degre
506. will be separated into sheets of one EXCEL XLS file labeled with the dated it is created If users don t check this box the files will be exported to Excel individually Multi File Ed Convert file list OA B Z D Fenrir dd 1 Date_ Time Millisecontbit Unsignbi i 14 10 35 a10 0 14 10 39 a10 0 14 10 40 a10 0 14 10 41 a10 0 14 10 42 agit 0 14 10 43 430 1 14 10 44 ogi 14 10 45 a10 Add Fie o 10 RARE 14 10 46 o10 11 HHHH Hdg Ei Enable Setting file T Fs combine to a fle 3 C Documents and Settingsinicolas wu 20111021 xls q Cancel The saved setting files can be loaded for combining Check both Enable Setting file and Combine to a file boxes and select the files to be combined then click OK 614 Lb WE NTEK EasyPrinter Chapter 26 EasyPrinter EasyPrinter is a Win32 application and can only run on MS Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 It enables HMI to output screen hardcopies to a remote PC via Ethernet Please see the following illustration screen Hardcopy Ii MT Remote Printer Server Save to File Here are some advantages of using EasyPrinter EasyPrinter provides two modes of hardcopy output Print Out and Save to File Users can use either way or both ways Since EasyPrinter is running on MS Windows system it supports most of the printers available in the market Multiple HMI can share one printer via EasyPrinter
507. will not display the background color Disable Transparent It will display the background color Curve Set the attribute of XY curve color and width for each channel 270 tb WE NTEK Objects Channel Channel 0 la Pen property Color Maker There are four different type of XY plot i e Line Point X axis projection and Y axis projection check one of them For Line and Point selection set appropriate point width unit in pixels Maker Point width 5 Bi Line Point O E axi projection Y axis projection Line amp Point X axis projection is shown as the following 271 Remarks Please refer to the figure below there is a curve containing 7 points from PO to P6 The system carries out X axis projection with following steps a Automatically calculate two projected points in X axis Xo 0 and Xe 0 b Link all these points in the order of Xo 0 PO P1 P6 Xs 0 and returns to Xo 0 at last c Fill out all enclosed areas formed X axis projection Enclosed region Xo 0 Xs 0 Similarly for Y axis projection 272 Wa WE INTEK Objects Enclosed region Enclosed region Reference line In order to make the XY plot more readable you can configure up to 4 horizontal reference lines on the graph Fill in high low limit and Y axis coordinate for each reference line Reterence line Limit from PLO Limit Lo
508. ws monitoring Easy Watch will display the same values as those in HMI when the setting is correct PA pa ka r A _ an JH Bilt la al j Hameric Input Objects Properties J General Data Entry Numeric Format Security Shane Font Profile iy iain Na Help Description 10 WINDOW DIO x Read Write use different addresses Read address Unsign __ Setting l 456 EW T Rasy Wath File Edit Objects Help in A kE E JF SE E tats amp New Page EY ins nn her HMIPLC op New Monitor BE Stop 192 168 1121 8000 Weintek HMI Unsign HMI Singed Address Type Update Cycle 16 bit Unsigned 2000 ms BCD 16 bit Unsigned 2500 m 16 bit HEX 2200 ms 16 bit HEX 2200 mms HEX 701 Ly WE NTEK Easy Watch 35 2 Basic Functions 35 2 1 Basic Functions tem Description File File Edt Gbects Hel Hew Chl N CIpeT Chto Cilts Edit Edit OQhyjects Help m Cu CaA Copy Cte E Objects Chyects Help Add Object 2 Delte Ohects Modify Object Cal AMG Manager Fun Stop New Open a new Easy Watch file Open Open the existing Easy Watch file Save Save Easy Watch file settings Save As Save Easy Watch file settings in EWT format Exit Exit Easy Watch Cut Cut to relocate the selected objects to the clipboard Copy Copy the selected objects to the clipboard Paste Paste the content of the clipboard
509. xample d In Attribute unselect Auto repeat and choose black as the background color Attribute _ Auto repeat Eackerownd es Preview tab Users can examine whether the HMI supports the video format via preview function 296 Li WE NTEK Objects General Preview Profile ees a Ee ee Load a Click Load and select the file to be examined Users should put the file in the example directory of an USB disk b If the media player starts playing the video it means the HMI supports this video format Use lt lt and gt gt to navigate video by 1 minute each time c To play another video click Stop to close the video file and repeat from step a Prepare the video file a Remove all external devices SD USB disk connected to the HMI b Plug the USB disk which has the video file in it into the HMI The first step is there for ensuring the USB disk in step b will be recognized Start Stop playing video 1 Start playing video a Set Parameter 1 to 0 b Set Command to 1 the system will open the video file and start playing c After the system start operation it will reset the Command to 0 297 L WE NTEK Objects During the period between step b and c don t change the content of Command Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 it may cause unpredictable result 2 Stop playing video a Set Command to 5 the system will stop playing and close the video file b
510. y Font HMI model eMiT3105 800 x 600 HMI station rio Port na fused as MODBUS server s port no Timer Clock source HMI RTC w Printer Type SP M D E F To connect Remote Printer COM EE Baud rate EPSON SCJP Sees hits Server go System Parameter laxichm A630 Settings Printer Backu ALR SPRT a DIV D5 D6 A DN T Pts g p Pixels of width ts cale Server and set parameters J pizel ror 2407 4004 type CO rrectly System Parameter Settings Device Model General System Setting Security Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server e Mail Recipes Use MT Remote Printer Backup Server Note Use EasyPinter to configure PC For printing screen hardcopy and storing backup data Output settings Orientation Horizontal vertical Printer size Original size Fit to printer margins Margin mm 0 _ m communication settings IP address D Port 5005 User mame 111111 Password 111111 602 Lid WE NTEK HMI Supported Printers 23 2 2 Start Printing Start printing with Fa Function Key New Function Key Object Ed General Security Shape Label Activate after button is released change full screen window Change common window Display popup window Close window 6 Return to previous window ASCIVUNTICODE mode Enter
511. y the shape of state 0 and state 1 when the bit value is ON state 1 d Blinking on state 0 Display the shape of state 0 in blinking when the bit value is OFF state 0 e Blinking on state 1 Display the shape of state 1 in blinking when the bit value is ON state 1 145 Li WE NTEK Objects 13 2 Word Lamp Overview A Word Lamp object displays the corresponding shape according to the value in the designated word address up to maximum of 256 states Numeric Display LW0 Word Lamp LWO lt Numeric Display LWO Word Lamp LWO Numeric Display LWO Word Lamp LWO a Configuration Click the Word Lamp icon in the toolbar and the Word Lamp Object s Properties dialog box will appear fill in each items and press OK button a new word lamp object will be created 146 Lb WE NTEK Objects Hew Word Lamp Object General Security STE l Read address PLC name Local HMI Setting adiess w a Bred Mode Offset Word lamp object offers the following three modes for selection a Value Calculate result of word value to subtract Offset and display its corresponding shape 147 WS WE NTEK Objects Hew Word Lamp Object eneral security Shape Label ai ot Read addes PL name Lacal HMI Ww Setting Address 16 bit Unsigned Attribute In the above setting if the value of LW200 is 5 the shape of state 2 is d
512. ytes 2 4 end macro_command HEX2ASCIl HEX2ASCII source result start len Description Transforms a hexadecimal value source into ASCII string saved to an array result len represents the length of the string and the unit of length depends on results type i e if results type is char the size is byte the length of the string is byte len If result s type is short the size is word the length of the string is word len and so on source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable start must be a constant Example _ macro commandmain 413 LO WEINTEK e eseeSMarcrco Reference short source char result 4 source 0x56 8 HEX2ASCII oni result O 4 l result 0 is 5 result 1 is 6 result 2 is 7 result 3 is end macro command FLOAT2ASCII FLOAT2ASCII source result start len Description Transforms a floating value source into ASCII string saved to an array result len represents the length of the string and the unit of length depends on result s type i e if results type is char the size is byte the length of the string is byte len If result s type is short the size is word the length of the string is word len and so on Source and len can be a constant or a variable but result must be a variable Start must be a constant macro_command main float source char result 4

Chapter 1 EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Startup Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents